* Stbrarg ImtJprHttg of Ptttaburgi? Darlington Memorial Library Cdlaae M\....Q V.« ^. »™k 1.3'5G,t^, TRANSACTIONS AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, AT PHILADELPHIA, PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE. VOL. III.— NEW SERIES. 9 PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY. HhOalreliihta: PRINTED BY JAMES KAY, JUN. & CO. PBINTERS TO THE SOCIETT. J 1830. 0 9^3 < ^0 /t-^ '^ If RULES THE GOVERNMENT OF COMMITTEES OF PUBLICATION. First. — " That the grounds of the Committee's choice of papers for the press, should always be the importance or singularity of the subjects, or the advantageous manner of treating them, without pretending to answer, or to make the Society answerable, for the certainty of the facts, or propriety of the reasonings, con- tained in the several papers so published, which must still rest on the credit or judgment of their respective authors." Second. — " That neither the Society nor the Committee of the press do ever give their opinion as a body upon any paper they may publish, or upon any subject of art or nature that comes before them." I COMMITTEE OF PUBLICATION. Frankhn Bache, M.D. R. Eglesfeld Griffith, M.D. LIST OF THE OFFICERS OP THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, FOR THE YEAR 1830. Patron. His Excellency, the Governok of Pennsylvania. President. Vice-presidents. Secretaries. CouNSEiLOKS elected for three years. In 1828. In 1829. In 1830. Curators. Treasures and Librarian. Peter S. Du Ponceau. C Zaccheus Collins, < Nathaniel Chapman, ( Joseph Hopkinson. /■ George Ord, } Franklin Bache, \ Clement C. Biddle, ' John K. Kane. f John Quincy Adams, 1 John Sergeant, \ William Short, \ Samuel Moore. ^Robert Hare, 1 William Rawle, \ William Hembell, Jun. (Joseph Hopkinson. ^Nicholas Collin, 1 William Meredith, i Robert Walsh, Jun. ( Nicholas Biddle. C James Mease. { J. P. Wetherill, i R. E. Griffith. John Vaughan. LIST OF MEMBERS AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY, Elected since the publicatioti of the Second Volume, New Series, of their Transactions. (Those marked with an asterisk (*) are since dead.) AMERICAN MEMBERS Thomas Cadwalader, Philadelphia. John K. Kane, Philadelphia. *John D. Godman, M.D., Prof. Nat. Hist. Franklin Instil., and Prof. Anat. and Phys. Rutgers Med. Coll. Charles N. Bancker, Philadelphia. Edward Livingston, New Orleans. Joseph R. Ingersoll, Philadelphia. Philip Tidyman, M.D., South Carolina. Samuel Humphreys, Philadelphia, Naval Constructor U. S. Charles D. Meigs, M.D., Philadelphia. Lewis Cass, Governor of Michigan Territory. ■** William M'llvaine, Philadelphia. William Shaler, Lancaster, Massachusetts. Joel R. Poinsett, South Carolina, Min. Plen-. U. S. to Mexico. Rene La Roche, M.D., Philadelphia. John Price Wetherill, Philadelphia. George Emlen, Philadelphia. Marcus Bull, Philadelphia. John K. Mitchell, M.D., Philadelphia. James Brown, Louisiana. Noah Webster, L.L.D , New Haven. Thomas Harris, M.D., Philadelphia. Robert Eglesfeld Griffith, M.D., Philadelphia. Charles Pickering, M.D., Philadelphia. Samuel G. Morton, M.D., Philadelphia. Henry J. Anderson, M.D., Prof. Math. Columbia Coll. New York. Isaac Lea, Philadelphia. Samuel Betton, M.D., Germantown, Pennsylvania. VOL. III. — b VI LIST OF MEMBERS. George Ticknor, Prof. Languages, Harvard University. James Renwick, Prof. Nat. Phil. Columbia Coll. New York. Thomas Biddle, Philadelphia. William H. Delancey, D.D., Provost Univ. Pennsylvania. Henry Wheaton, New York, Charge d' Affaires U. S. to Denmark. Alexander Dallas Bache, Prof. Nat. Phil. Univ. Pennsylvania Philip H. Nicklin, Philadelphia. James Kent, L.L.D., Prof of Law, Columbia Coll. New York. Josiah Quincy, L.L.D., Pres. Harvard University. Washington Irving, New York. Joseph Roberts, Philadelphia. George B. Wood, M.D., Philadelphia. Henry S. Tanner, Philadelphia. Daniel B. Smith, Philadelphia. Thomas Horsfield, Pennsylvania. John Marshall, Chief Justice of the Supreme Court of the United States Thomas M'Euen, M.D., Philadelphia. William B. Hodgson, Virginia. Isaac Hays, M.D., Philadelphia. FOREIGN MEMBERS. M. Flourens, M.D., Paris. Count Real, Paris. Count Miot de Melito, Paris. Don Jose da Silva Lisboa, Rio Janeiro. Dr Pablo de la Llave, Minister of Justice, Mexico. John Lewis Tiarks, M.D., London. James Graberg de Hemso, Sweden. Henry de Struve, Councillor of State, Russia. *Honore Torombert, Lyons. John Wilhelm Dalman, M.D., Stockholm. Dr Geo. Maria Zecchinelli, Padua. J. P. C. Cassado de Giraldes, Lisbon. *Don Jose Maria Bustamente, Mexico. *Don Jose Maria Salazar, Colombia. Don Jose Maria Dantes Pereira, Lisbon. Hans Christian Oersted, Copenhagen. Baron Hyde de Neufville, Paris. Charles Christian Rafn, Copenhagen. Erasmus K. Rask, Copenhagen. Joseph Nicolai B. V. Abrahamson, Copenhagen. Chevalier Jomard, Paris. Chevalier Charles Pougens, Paris. Don Francisco de Paula Quadrado, Madrid. *The Right Rev. Bishop Munter, Copenhagen. J. P. Abel Remusat, Paris. William Yarrel, London. Jules de Wallenstein, Russia. Bernard, Duke of Saxe-Weimar. William Vaughaii, London. Jonathan Sewell, Chief Justice, Quebec. PREFATORY NOTICE. Various circumstances have retarded the publication of this volume, which was intended to have appeared in the preced- ing year. Measures have been taken to prevent a similar delay in future. The Society have materials on hand with which they hope soon to begin the publication of the fourth volume of this series. Since the publication of our catalogue in 1824, the library of the society has been considerably increased : so much so, that an additional catalogue has been ordered to be made, which is now in preparation. Our cabinet also has been en- larged by numerous contributions, some of which are very valuable. Among them may be particularized the collections of Mexican minerals and antiquities, for which we are in- debted to the munificence of our fellow member, Mr Poin- sett, late minister from this country to the United Mexican States, — the additions which have been made to those col- lections by another of our members, Mr William H. Keat- ing,— and the complete series of the various earths and fossils developed in the great excavation of the Chesapeake and Delaware Canal, which we have received from Andrew Al- fred Dexter, Esq., one of the engineers of that work. In the course of the last five years, death has deprived the society of many of its most valuable members. At home we have to lament the loss of Thomas Jefferson, John Adams, and De Witt Clinton, three of the greatest men that this country has produced : next to them we must place our late PREFATORY NOTICE. venerated president William Tilghman, Dr Adam Seybert, Mr Fran9ois Adrian Vanderkemp, Mr Charles Wilson Peale, Dr Samuel Brown, Dr Stephen Elliott, the founder of the Philosophical Society of Charleston, South Carolina, and Professor John D. Godman ; whose deaths have left a void in this society which will with difficulty be filled. Among those of our foreign members, of whom death has deprived the learned world as well as ourselves, we particu- larly notice that illustrious friend and patron of science, Count Nicholas Romanzoff, Nicholas Fuss, Sir Humphry Davy, Count Lanjuinais, Duke de Liancourt, Bishop Munter of Copenhagen, Thunberg, Vater; whose names are celebrated throughout America as well as Europe. We have also lost Salazar of Colombia, Stockier of Lisbon, and Torombert of Lyons, — all more or less distinguished in the literary and scientific world. At the same time, other names have been added to our list, of men whom the society are proud to reckon among their associates. The contents of this volume partly belong to the physical and partly to the moral sciences. In this the society has followed the example of several learned societies in Europe, and particularly of the Royal Academy of Berlin, CONTENTS. Rules for the Government of Committees of Publication. List of Officers of the Society for the year 1830. List of the Members of the Society elected since the publication of the Second Volume, New Series, of their Transactions. Prefatory Notice. ....... No. L Experiments to determine the Comparative Quantities of Heat evolved in the Combustion of the Principal Varieties of Wood and Coal used in the United States for Fuel ; and also, to determine the Comparative Quantities of Heat lost by the Ordinary Apparatus made use of for their Combustion . By Marcus Bull. .... No. n. A Grammar of the Language of the Lenni Lenape, or Delaware Indians. Translated from the German MS. of the late Rev. D. Zeis- berger, for the American Philosophical Society, by P. S. Du Ponceau. No. UI. Description of Eleven New Species of North American Insects. By N. M. Hentz, Professor of Modern Languages in the University of North Carolina. ....... 253 VOL. Ill C CONTENTS. No. IV. Description of Six New Species of the Genus Unio ; embracing the Anatomy of the Oveduct of one of them, together with some Anato- tomical Observations on the Genus. By Isaac Lea. - - 259 No. V. On the Geographical Distribution of Plants. By C. Pickering, M.D. 274 No. VI. An Account of some Human Bones found on the Coast of Brazil, near Santas. By C. D. Meigs, M.D. - - - - 285 No. VII. Some Observations on the Moulting of Birds. By George Ord. - 292 No. VIII. Experiments made on the Poison of the Rattlesnake ; in which the Powers of the Hieraceum Venosum, as a Specific, were tested ; together with some Anatomical Observations on this Animal. By R. Harlan, M.D. 300 No. IX. On the motion of Solids on Surfaces, in the Two Hypotheses of Perfect Sliding and Perfect Rolling, with a Particular Examination of their small Oscillatory Motions. By Henry James Anderson, Professor of Mathematics and Astronomy in Columbia College, New York. - 315 No. X. General Observations on the Birds of the Genus Tetrao ; with a Synop- sis of the Species hitherto known. By Charles Lucien Bonaparte, Prince of Musignano, fee. ... - - 38.:> CONTENTS, No. XI. Conchological Observations on Lamarck's Family of Naiades. By P. H. Nicklin. ..----- 395 No. XII. Some further Experiments on the Poison of the Rattlesnake. By R. Harlan, M.D. 400 No. XIII. Description of a New Genus of the Family of Naiades, including Eight Species, Four of which are New ; also the Description of Eleven New Species of the Genus Unio from the Rivers of the United States : with Observations on some of the Characters of the Naiades. By Isaac Lea. - - - - " " " '*"'-"' No. XIV. Remarks on the use of the Maxillae in Coleopterous Insects, with an Ac- count of Two Species of the Family Telephoridas, and of Three of the Family Mordellids, which ought to be the Type of Two Distinct Gen- era. By N. M. Hentz. ... - - 468 No. XV. Description of a New Species of the Genus Astacus. By R. Harlan, M.D. 464 No. XVI. Notice of an Anatomical Peculiarity observed in the Structure of the iCondor of the Andes (Vulturgryphus, Linn.). By R. Harlan, M.D. 46f' No. XVII. On the Construction of Eclipses of the Sun. By John Gummere. - 4B7 Xii CONTENTS. No. xvni. Description of a Fragment of the Head of a New Fossil Animal, discov- ered in a Marl Pit, near Moorestown, New Jersey. By Isaac Hays, M.D. - - - - - - - - 471 No. XIX. Description of a New Genus and New Species of Extinct Mammiferous Quadruped. By John D. Godman, M.D. - - - 478 Donations, &c. - - - - ■ * " +87 m AlFFAMATXTS UTSEX)' ]B~r M. BITILJL. HIT IBtlv*? lES^PlBKIEyiDSOTP^ CUT ^PTCifilL. DfM\m fiv O.'^irie/JiuiJ.Eiiipiival hye.a:&^. TRANSACTIONS AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. N£W SUSIES. No. I. Experiments to determine the comparative quantities of Heat evolved in the combustion of the principal varieties of Wood and Coal used in the United States, for Fuel; and, ako, to determine the comparative quantities of Heat lost by the ordinary apparatus made use of for their combustion. By Makcus Bull,. — Read ^pril 7, 1826. The experiments on fuel detailed in the following paper, were commenced in November, 1823, and were prosecuted with very little cessation, until June, 1824; when, in conse- quence of absence, together with subsequent ill health, they were suspended until May, 1825, when they were again resumed with undiminished interest, and have been continued, as circumstances would permit, from that period to the pre- sent. During the latter of these periods, I was under the necessity of repeating those experiments which had been previously made, in consequence of a defect discovered in a part of the apparatus, the removal of which, was found to change the results ; still, it was very satisfactory to find that the variation vi ON THE HEAT EVOLVED was, ill every instance, directly proportional to the results which had been formerly obtained* The experiments to determine the comparative loss of heat sustained by using apparatus of different constructions for the combustion of fuel, appeared to be equally necessary with those to determine its comparative efficiency. To Professors Hare and Patterson of the University of Pennsylvania, I am under obligations for their kind assistance in my experiments, and it gives me great pleasure to have an opportunity thus publicly to tender them my acknowledg- ments. The importance of those experiments, which have for their object the promotion of the useful arts and sciences, or an improvement in the domestic economy of society, by which our comforts may be increased, is generally admitted. In a climate like that of the United States, where, during two-thirds of the year, fires are indispensable to human com- fort, and where, consequently, the savings of a large portion of the poor, during the summer, are often inadequate to pur- chase a sufficient supply of fuel for the winter; it must, obvi- ously, be highly important to ascertain, the comparative effi- ciency of diflferent kinds of fuel ; as, without this knowledge, those who are desirous of economising, may be prodigal through ignorance. The knowledge of the comparative heat disengaged in the combustion of the different varieties of wood and coal, is also important in various processes in the arts, and it is believed that the results of my experiments will be found worthy of attention, in a philosophical point of view. Previous to describing my apparatus or experiments, it will be proper to notice those of some of my predecessors, as, in the investigation of this subject, no small degree of inaccuracy appears to have prevailed, even among experimenters of high character. My remarks cannot be better prefaced, than by making use of the following extract from Dr. Ure, on the subject of com- bustion. FROM WOOD AND COAL. if "Lavoisier, Crawford, Dalton, and Rumford, iu succession, made experiments to determine the quantity of heat evolved in the combustion of various bodies. The apparatus used by the last was perfectly simple, and perhaps the most precise of the whole. The heat was conducted by flattened pipes of metal, into the heart of a body of water, and was measured by the temperature imparted." From the general table of results, it is only necessary for me to extract two, to show the force of the succeeding remark. Substances burned, one pound. Ice melted in pounds. Lavoisier. Crawford. Dalton. Rumford. Olive oil. Charcoal. 149 96.5 89 104 69 ^0 94.0r " The discrepancies in the preceding table, are sufficient to show the necessity of new experiments on the subject." As the experiments of M. Lavoisier, Dr. Crawford, and Mr. Dalton, did not comprise any article of fuel except charcoal, a more particular notice of them would be irrelevant to my purpose. The experiments of Count Rumford, to determine the quantity of heat evolved in the combustion of different woods, will alone be examined. In his very just remarks, he says, "Many persons have already endeavoured to determine the relative quantities of heat furnished by wood and charcoal in their combustion ; but the results of their inquiries have not been satisfactory. Their apparatus has been too imperfect, not to leave vast incertitude in the conclusions drawn from their investigations. Indeed, the subject is so intricate in itself, that with the best instruments, the utmost care is requisite, lest, after much labour, the inquirer should be forced to content himself with approximations instead of accurate results, and valuations, •strictly determined. 4 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED All woods contain much moisture, even when apparently very dry ; and, as the persons alluded to have neglected to determine the quantities of absolutely dry wood, burned by them, much uncertainty prevails in the results of all their experiments. Another source of uncertainty, lies in the great quantity of heat suffered to escape with the smoke and other products of the combustion."* Again,t " attempts have been long ago made, to measure the heat that is developed in the combustion of inflammable substances.; but the results of the experiments have been so contradictory, and the methods employed so little calculated to inspire confidence, that the undertaking is justly considered as very little advanced. I had attempted it at three different times within these twenty years, but without success. After having made a great num- ber of experiments with the most scrupulous care, with appa- ratus on which I had long reflected, and afterwards caused to be executed by skilful workmen, I had found nothing, how- ever, that appeared to me sufficiently decisive to deserve to be made public. A large apparatus in copper, more than twelve feet long, which I had made at Munich fifteen years ago, and another scarcely less expensive, made at Paris four years ago, which I have still in my laboratory, attest the desire I have long entertained, of finding the means of elucidating a ques- tion that has always appeared to me of great importance, both vnth regard to the sciences and to the arts. At length, how- ever, I have the satisfaction of announcing to the class, that, after all my fruitless attempts, I have discovered a very simple method of measuring the heat manifested in combustion, and, this even with such precision, as leaves nothing to be desired." It will not be necessary to describe the Calorimeter used by Count Rumford, more particularly, than to say, that it consists of a small copper receiver containing water. In the inside is a flat worm, also made of copper, bent so as to pass horizon- tally three times from one end of the receiver to the other. This worm passes down through an aperture in the bottom, * Nicholson's Journal, XXXV. 105. tibid. XXXII. 105. FROM WOOD AND COAL. O near one end of the receiver, to which it is soldered ; and the other extremity of the worm passes through the opposite end of the receiver. A thermometer is introduced into the water contained in the receiver ; the woods, in thick shavings, and other combustible bodies, are consumed in the mouth or bottom of the worm, and the heat evolved in the combustion, is im- parted to the water during its passage through the worm. The experiments consisted in elevating the temperature of the water in the receiver 10", commencing at 5° below, and finishing at 5° above the temperature of the room; and the comparison was made between the weights of diflferent articles required to be consumed to produce this effect, unthotit regard to time. The quantity of wood consumed, varied from 59 to 111 grains in each experiment. Upon these experiments it is necessary to remark, that the passage of the mercury from 1 to 10° on the scale of the thermometer, can scarcely be supposed to have been performed in all the experiments in equal periods of time; and, since the water would require unequal increments of heat in equal times, to counterbalance its unequal decrements, and, possessing, as it does, different capacities for heat at different temperatures, con- sequently, a very slight inequality in point of time, in elevating the mercury between the several degrees, would materially affect the results of experiments in which only a few grains of the combustible were consumed. To these causes, and the absence of proper means to take advantage of the heat produced in the combustion of the carbon contained in the woods, may be attributed the inaccuracy of Count Rumford's results ; as he states some of the woods to evolve, by the combustion of equal weights, 64 per cent, more heat than others ; whereas, the results of my experiments on forty-six varieties of wood, in equal weights, give the extremes of difference as only 1 1 per cent. The result from charcoal is not given in the table, but the says, that "The dry vegetable flesh of wood, produces more VOL. III. — B 6 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED heat in its combustion, than an equal weight of dry char- coal."* By the expression " dry vegetable flesh," the count means to indicate that portion of dry wood which is inflammable, or that part which is independent of the charcoal. Now I find, by the most favourable comparison for this portion of the wood, that an equal weight of dry charcoal, produces $^86 per cent, more heat than the former, and by the least favour- able comparison, 314 per cent, more, giving a mean diffierence of 300 per cent, in favour of the charcoal. It will be proper to state what has been considered as essential requisites to the perfection of the apparatus, that, as the description proceeds, the degree of accuracy which it is likely to possess, may, with greater facility be determined: and this will be done under three heads, with explanatory remarks. 1st. That the apparatus in which the combustion is produced, be so constructed, that all, or an equal proportion of all the heat generated, may be measured by some unchanging standard. This is effected in a manner to be hereafter more particu- larly described, but it may now be sufficiently understood, by referring to the plate, in which the apparatus and the interior of the room, constructed for performing the experiments, are shown in perspective. At E is a thermometer, the bulb of which is in the centre of the stove-pipe, and another, Fig. 6, is suspended from the side wall of the room. When articles are submitted to combustion in the stove, the heat is so completely given out by the pipe, that these two thermometers, indicate exactly the same degree of tempera- ture. Strictly speaking, we cannot say even in this case, that all the heat generated is imparted to the air of the room. That small portion which is included in the air of the pipe, and passes off into the chimney, does not impart its heat to the air of the room, both being of the same temperature, consequently, no * Nicholson's Journal, XXXV. 112. FROM WOOD AND COAL. / interchange of heat can take place between them. We may consider this escape of heat, however, in the same point of light as we do that which is conducted off by the surface of every other part of the room, with this difference — that this particular surface of two inches diameter, conveys more heat in a given time, than any other equal surface ; but as this differ- ence is uniform in all the experiments, we may say, compara- tively, that there is /lo loss of heat, as it is the ratio, and not the positive quantity of heat disengaged, which we wish to discover. 2d. That the recipient body be always affected equally by the communication of the same heat. Air has been selected as the recipient body, because we are enai'ied by a thermometer to measure with accuracy the heat communicated to it; and because it varies very little in its specific heat, under the ordinary changes of barometric pres- sure, and its hygrometric changes may be readily counter- acted. 3. That the surrounding refrigerating medium bepermaiient at any required temperature. In consequence of the variations in the temperature of the atmosphere, not only daily, but in diflferent parts of the same day, to devise a plan which should strictly comply with this requisition, was a subject which caused me much reflection and perplexity. The room selected for my experiments, was well calculated, in every respect, (except the window,) to pre- vent an immediate influence being produced in its temperature, by the ordinary external changes. The window being large, I determined to close it entirely, and to perform my experi- ments by lamp light, and it was, accordingly, perfectly closed on the inside of the room, with boards, which were well seasoned, and grooved together, leaving a space of four inches between this barricade and the sashes of the window. This space being occupied with confined air, was a bad conductor of heat. Finding it inconvenient, and objectionable in other respects, to experiment with artificial light, a sash with four panes of glass was subsequently inserted in this barricade, for S ON THE HEAT EVOLVED the admission of light. Every part of the room was then made as tight as possible, and to furnish the room with the necessary supply of air, of equal temperature, a pipe with a valve was inserted through a partition into an adjoining room, as its temperature was necessarily maintained very uniform, for the purposes to which it was applied. Having spent nearly four months of application in perfecting my apparatus, and removing difficulties which presented themselves at the threshold of every stage of the investigation, and feeling de- sirous to avail myself of any improvements which might be suggested to me, either in the apparatus, or the intended plan of conducting the experiments, I invited several gentlemen to- examine it for that purpose, and among them. Dr. Hare, pro- fessor of chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania. The method which had been adopted, as described, to com- ply with the last requisition, did not appear to Dr. Hare to possess that degree of accuracy which was necessary, nor did it equal that which every other part of the apparatus, together with the intended plan of conducting the experiments, as de- scribed to him, appeared to possess. Dr. Hare stated to me^ that, "he had long been under the impression, that no accu- rate comparison could be made by means of the same single room heated at different times, with different fuel, on account of the varying temperature of the weather; nor by different rooms at the same time, from the difficulty of finding two rooms sufficiently alike, in form, aspect, size, and materials. It seemed to him indispensable, to have one room within another, so that, in the interval, a uniformity of temperature might be artificially sustained." As the method suggested by Dr. Hare, removed this difficulty with which I had unsuccess- fully contended, no time was lost in making a practical appli- cation of his suggestion, and a room of smaller dimensions was in consequence constructed within the room originally intend- ed for my experiments, in the best manner which my archi- tect could devise ; by which a free circulation of air is produced on all the exterior surfaces of the interior room, and this air may be sustained of a uniform temperature. FROM WOOD AND COAt. A description of the apparatus, plan of the experiments, and the manner of experimenting, will now be detailed. In a room with a floor of about eleven feet by fourteen, and nine and a half feet in height, another room is constructed, eight feet square in the clear, its contents being 512 cubic feet! The plate represents the interior of this room in perspective, and as these rooms may now be considered as distinct, I shall, for convenience, designate them by the names of interior and exterior. The fi-ame of the interior room is composed of scantling, three inches by four. The ends of the posts, and top and bottom rails, have .mortises, with tenons passing through them, of suffi- cient length to project about four inches, and, in the projecting part of the tenons, are transverse mortises for wedges, by which the frame is drawn firmly together. The floor is supported by two cross pieces of scantling, and the posts and rails are grooved through the centre, to receive boards one inch in the clear, with which the room is enclosed. The boards are also grooved together in the most perfect manner, so that the wedges (there being no nails used except about the door and window) will draw every part of the room tight, and correct, with great facility, any shrinking of the boards during the process of seasoning, which it was necessary to perfect, pre- vious to any experiments being made. The interior is supported by its four posts, six inches from the floor of the exterior room, there being the same distance between the ceilings, and a much greater between the side walls, the air therefore circulates freely between the two rooms. The internal surfaces of the interior room are made as white as possible with lime-wash, to produce equality in their power of conducting heat. The body of the stove. Fig. 1,, is a cylin- der, twelve inches in height, and four inches diameter ; the ash pit is four inches deep, and four inches in diameter ; both are made of common sheet iron, and separate, for the purpose of introducing between them, a chamber, or concave piece of sheet iron, of larger dimensions, perforated with holes half an inch in diameter; and on this chamber the body of the stove VOL. III. — c 10 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED rests, as will be seen, by referring to the enlarged sectional view on the plate. Fig. 2. Three inches above this chamber is another, closely fitted within the body of the stove, and per- forated with holes one quarter of an inch in diameter. The interior of the body of the stove above, is made to assume the conical shape which it presents, with the apex downwards, by coating it with fire clay, so as to expose only one and a half inches diameter of the surface of the chamber, and on which the fuel rests. The space between the chambers is necessary in experimenting on anthracite coals in small quantities, for the purpose of heating the air as much as possible before it comes in contact with the burning body, and the clay coating is also necessary in the same experiments, to act as a non-con- ductor. The stove. Fig. 1 ., is supplied with air through aper- tures just above the ash pit, or lower door, and to lessen, or close these apertures, a sliding sheet iron hoop, (not shown in the engraving,) is fitted Avith great accuracy. The middle door is necessary, to obtain access to the upper chamber when its apertures require clearing, during an experiment. For heating water, a tin vessel in the shape of a crescent, rests on cleats, between the upper and middle doors. This vessel is accurately fitted to the body of the stove, but may be removed to any required distance, at pleasure ; and we may thereby lessen the evaporation of the water, its object being to regu- late the hygrometric state of the air. All the doors of the stove are represented as open. The upper door is to admit the fuel. The cone, leading from the body of the stove to the pipe, is ten inches long, and very accurately fitted to the former, but removable for the purpose of separat- ing them, to take from the stove and ash pit, the unconsumed parts of any body, that may have been experimented upon. This is done with facility, as the pipe is supported from the ceiling, by wires w^hich sustain it in its place, after the body of the stove is removed. In the cone, three quarters of an inch above its junction with the body of the stove, (which in this place is made flat,) is an aperture one inch broad, and one and a quarter inches FROM WOOD AND COAI^. 11 long, which is covered with a thin plate of mica, resting on a flange, or ledge, and kept in its place by a ^dre passing round the cone. Through this plate of mica, the fire may be seen, thereby avoiding the necessity of opening the upper door for the purpose of mere examination. The pipe is two inches diameter, and made of extra thin black tin, to impart the heat to the air of the room with the least possible obstruction. The elbow joints are each nine inches long. The whole length of the pipe is forty-two feet; and this was found insufficient to impart to the air of the room all the heat generated, there being a loss of 3°, until the tin box. A, was attached to the pipe near its extremity. This box is fourteen inches long, ten inches broad, and |ths of an inch deep, and its interior and exterior surfaces are made black. In passing through this box, the warm air is exposed to a much larger surface than that presented by the pipe, and the few degrees of heat which it before contained, are by this means imparted to the air of the room. The joints of the pipe are perfectly closed by clay lute, and its whole exterior surface is covered with a thin coat of dead black varnish, made to resist heat. The valves B, C, D, to regulate the admission of air into the stove, are all of the same construction, being circular pieces of flat thick sheet iron, very accurately adjusted, to close the in- terior of the pipe. Fig. 3, represents a side view of the valve B, standing entirely open. The wire to which it is firmly riveted, crosses the centre of the valve, and passes through the pipe. This end of the wire serves as one of the pivots for the valve •to turn upon, and the other end, being bent into a half circle, is used both as the handle to turn the valve, and as an index to regu- late it. The point of this enters the graduated holes in the dial ; Fig. 4, which is a front view, and is riveted to the exterior of the pipe, being the half of a circle of flat sheet iron, whose whole diameter is equal to that of the pipe. The handle is bent to correspond exactly with the flat surface of the valve, by which the situation of the handle indicates the position of the valve inside of the pipe, so that na- mistake can occur in its use. 12 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED Being well aware that the experiments could not be accu- rately performed, unless the operator should at all times pos- sess a perfect control over the burning body; it became necessary after attaching the box A, to insert the cross pipe with the valve D, by which the current of air through the stove may, in an instant, be placed at its maximum in quantity and velocity, if permitted to pass through this cross pipe, in place of passing through the shallow box A. This passage is useful when igniting anthracite coal, in which process, the coal, as well as all other combustible bodies, require to be heated to a certain temperature before they will ignite, during which process, heat being absorbed, and not disengaged, if care be taken to close this valve in proper time, none is lost. As this required temperature differs not only in different bodies, and in the different component parts of some bodies, but is specific, for each, it may for convenience, be termed their heat of ignition or accension. This passage is also useful in some experiments, to give a momentary impulse to the inflammation, of certain bodies, and cannot be dispensed with without great loss of time, in heat- ing the room to its proper temperature, before commencing an experiment. Considerable difficulty was experienced in getting the valves and their appendages made with sufficient accuracy, but when done, as half of the arc of each dial is divided into twenty equal parts, it will be perceived that the current of air to supply the body in combustion, can be regulated with great precision. The valve B, is particularly useful to stop at a proper time the combustion of those bodies, which it is known cannot be wholly consumed in the stove, and this is done almost instanta- neously by closing this valve, and sliding down the hoop which covers the apertures for the admission of air. The pipe passes through the side wall into the chimney of the exterior room. Near the end of the pipe, within the in- terior room, is an aperture of sufficient size to admit the bulb of the thermometer E, and this aperture is closed by a tin plate ,.^ closely fitted to the stem of the thermometer. This plate is i'k03I WOOD AND COAL. • 13 curved to fit the pipe, and is of sufficient size to cover the aperture, and rest upon the pipe. The bulb of the thermo- meter is suspended in the centre of the pipe, by the brass scale being made shorter than usual, and resting on the tin plate, which is secured in its place by a small quantity of clay lute. This thermometer is used to measure the temperature of the air within the pipe, previous to its passing into the chimney; and as I have never found the bulb discoloured by the car- bonaceous particles in the smoke, and thereby rendered more sensible, as it was feared would be the case, I am induced to think very little ever reaches it, being previously deposited in the pipe. Fig. 6, is another mercurial thermometer, suspended from the side wall of the room. Both these were made expressly for my experiments, and to correspond in their scales (which are Fahrenheit's) with the greatest possible accuracy. The thermometer, Fig. 6, is used to measure the temperature of the air in the room, and is placed on a line with that in the pipe, at twelve inches distance. The bulb is screened by a piece of bright planished tin, to pi'cvent the influence of heat radiated from any part of the stove or pipe, wiiile it does not prevent a free access of the air in the room, to the bulb of the thermo- meter. Fig. 7, is Mr. Leslie's differential thermometer, one half of which is passed tlu'ough an aperture in the board partition into the exterior room, and is secured in its place by a divided cork, which encircles a part of the syphon at the bottom of the in- strument, and closes the aperture. Both bulbs are perfectly screened by large pieces of bright planished tin, not shown in the engraving. This instrument, as its name denotes, mea- sures only the difference of temperature in the two rooms, and as it does this with peculiar delicacy, it is admirably adapted to my purpose, the accuracy of my experiments depending in a great measure on the uniform difference of temperature in the two rooms ; and I am under obligations to its inventor, and also, to Dr. Hare, as it was in consequence of the suggestion of the latter gentleman, that this instrument w^as added tp my VOL. III. D 14 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED apparatus; its peculiar applicability to my experiments not having previously occurred to me. The differential thermometer used in my experiments, indi- cated 20°, to 1 ° of the mercurial thermometers, and, as one of the bulbs is situated in the interior room, it can only be ope- rated upon by the temperature of that room ; the other bulb being in the exterior room, can only be operated upon by the temperature of the latter room ; consequently, any change of temperature in either will be shown on the scale, the instru- ment having been adjusted with great care, so that the top of the tinged liquor will stand at 50°, when there is a difference of 10° between the mercurial thermometera placed in the two rooms ; and from its superior sensibility in detecting incipient changes, the differential thermometer may almost be said to possess the power of divination, whereby the operator receives timely notice to avoid any essential error. Fig. 5, is a tin supply pipe, two inches in diameter. This passes through the floor in a perpendicular direction, and has an elbow joint opening towards the stove. It has a valve to regulate the quantity of air found necessary to be admitted into the room for the purposes of respiration, and to support the combustion in the stove. This valve, when once adjusted, re- mained the same through all the experiments. Whether the precise quantity of air necessary for the respiration of the operator, and to support the combustion, is admitted by this pipe, or an excess, its temperature being the same, and the stove being supposed always to be supplied with air at the temperature of the interior room, and to require about the same quantity during any given period of two or more experiments, the air admitted being also of equal volume, its velocity will be the same under all changes of barometric pressure ; conse- quently, the reduction of the temperature of the air in the room may be supposed to be the same during the time required to perform each experiment, with the exception of an immaterial variation in its specific heat, to be hereafter noticed; and, the results of the experiments cannot be affected by the admis- sion of an excess of air, they being, as before stated, founded on the comparative, and not the positive quantity of heat evolved. FROM WOOD AXD COAL. 15 At Fig. 8, is a hygrometer made of the beard of tlie wild oat, enclosed in a small brass ease, and covered with glass. This is used to measure the humidity of the air, which, like all other bodies, possesses diflFerent conducting powers as its hygrometric state varies, by which its specific heat or capacity for absorb- ing caloric is increased or diminished ; those bodies which con- tain moisture being better conductors than the same bodies when dry. The comparative capacities of water and dry air, are, as 1.000 to .266, by the experiments of MM. Delaroche and Berard. From Sausseur's experiments, it appears, how- ever, that the quantity of aqueous vapour attracted by the air of the atmosphere, when at 65" of Fahrenheit, is very small ; a cubic foot of air requiring not more than eleven or twelve grains to bring it from the state of perfect dryness, to that of extreme moisture. Now, as the various sides of the room are the conducting media by which the heat generated in the room is dissipated, and as these sides are in contact with the air of the room, and must in some degree be influenced by its hygrometric state, they will, consequently, become more or less powerful con- ductors, as this varies. To produce a uniformity in this re- spect, I have, by the aid of this instrument, and of the water contained in the tin vessel before described, taken care to keep the air of the interior room in the same hygrometric state, during the various experiments. The barometer at Fig. 9, requires no description, and is not considered an essential appendage to my apparatus, although convenient as a check upon the valves ; not, however, on the common supposition that the velocity of the current of air through the stove is greater under one pressure than another, cxteris paribus, but that its quantity varies with its density, more being contained in the same volume at one pressure than at another. The results of M3I. Clement and Desormes' experiments on gases, to determine their specific heats, at diflferent densities, show that the specific heat of atmospheric air does not vary more than .02, between 29.5 and 30.5 inches of barometric 16 ON THE IlEAT EVOLVED pressure. These being the extremes during my experiments, the difference of heat required to maintain the temperature of the air between any two experiments, cannot materially affect their results, and for this variation no correction has been thought necessary. Having described the construction of the interior room, and its apparatus, it remains to describe the exterior room, which has a capacity of 860 cubic feet, after deducting 542 feet for the space occupied by the interior room, and the materials of which it is composed. This room has a southern aspect, and is defended from the west winds by a building projecting be- yond it ten feet south. It has one window, with blinds on the outside, to exclude, when necessary, the rays of the sun ; the east and south walls are of brick, and are ten inches in thick- ness ; the remaining two are partitions of lath and plastfer, four and a half inches thick, and separate between a passage on the west, and a room on the north. The chimney is in the east wall. A small stove is placed in this room, the pipe of which passes through the fire-board. A mercurial thermometer, to measure the temperature of the air, is placed in a convenient situation, on a line with those in the interior room, and on a table an accurate balance is suspended, to weigh the articles which are to be subjected to experiment. The plan of the experiments will next be described. Equal quantities are taken of each article by weight, pre- viously made absolutely dry ; by which is to be understood, that state of deprivation of moisture manifested when no di- minution in weight can be effected by the heat of a stove ait '250° of Fahrenheit. It is required to determine the period of time which tbe combustion of each article will maintain the temperature of the interior room 10° higher than the exterior; and the time that the interior room is thus maintained by any article, gives its true relative heat, when compared with the time which any other article has maintained the room at the same difference of temperature. As the temperature of the air in both rooms is supposed to remain stationary, the increments and decrements FBOM WOOD AND COAL.. 17 of heat wall therefore be equal, in equal periods of time, in all the experiments, by which the objections made against the plan of Count Rumford's experiments are considered as obviated. The manner of experimenting is as follows : The first step to be taken by the operator, is to produce the required difference of 10° between the interior and exterior rooms, and to arrange the necessary coincident circumstances for its perpetuation. As no artificial refrigerating means can, with convenience, be made use of to depress the temperature of the exterior room below that of the atmosphere, it becomes necessary that the temperature of this room shall, in the first instance, be higher than any elevation which will occur in the temperature of the atmosphere during an experiment, otherwise the experiment must fail. During the many trials of the apparatus in order to become familiar with its use, and to lessen the great difficulty expe- rienced in maintaining the uniform difference of temperature required between the interior and exterior rooms, the following incident occurred, by which this difficulty was entirely ob- tiiated. In the month of June, an unusual depression in the tempe- rature of the atmosphere had taken place during the night season, in consequence of which the temperature of the exterior room was found on the following morning to be 20° above that of the atmosphere. Having been previously obliged to experi- ment at very high and uncomfortable temperatures, in conse- quence of the heat of the weather, and presuming that this depression would be transient, and as my assistant, who attended to the exterior room, was absent, no increase was made in its temperature, as had formerly been done under similar circum- stances. The temperature of the interior room was elevated, without previous calculation, 1 5° above that of the exterior room, at the period of commencement ; during this operation, the thermometer in the exterior room had not been observed, but on examination, the difference was found to be precisely 10° between the two rooms ; considering it, however, as a fortuitous VOL. in. — E 48 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED occurrence, no investigation of the cause was at that time entered into. The trial experiment was commenced unde^^ a firm belief that the diiFerential thermometer would give immediate notice that the temperature of the exterior room required correction, but, to my astonishment, the differential thermometer was found to vary less than, usual, and after a lapse of three hours, although the temperature of the atmosphere was found to have been elevated 1 2°, the temperature of the exterior room remained stationary, and continued so until the completion of the experiment. No time was then lost in attempting to discover the cause by which an effect so desirable had been produced, and when examined, it became a matter of surprise that it had not pre- viously been discovered by calculation and experiment, rather than accident. It may be explained in the following manner : The interior room contains 512, and the exterior 860 cubic feet of air. As the heat necessary to elevate 512 cubic feet (rf air 15°, is gradually transferred to 860 cubic feet, conse- quently, it must increase its temperature so long as its incre- ments are greater than its decrements, and should, by calcula- tion, caeteris paribus, augment it nearly 9°, instead of 5°, as was found to be the case ; but as the exterior room presents very nearly double the conducting surface, this will account for the difference. When the temperature of the interior rbom is thus elevated 15°, the exterior is consequently elevated 5°, by which the re- quired difference of 10° is produced, and the temperature of tlie exterior room then becomes stationary, that being the pre- cise point at which the increments and decrements of heat are equal in the air of both rooms. The manner of producing this important result under known circumstances, being established, the operator has only to seek for the same result in a different place, under an unknown, or known difference of circumstances. As the surface of the window (the barricade having been removed) is the only part^ of the exterior room which can be speedily operated upon by the ordinary changes of the atmosphere, the temperature- of FROM WOOD AND COAL,. 19 ; the room, must therefore, from its situation, and the nature of its walls, change very little : if, however, during an experiment any indication of an increase in its temperature is observed, the upper sash in the window, which is suspended with weights, is lowered the required distance to correct it ; but if decreasing, a fire of wood can be immediately kindled in the stove, a lamp being kept burning in this room for the purpose, although never required but in two instances during my ex- periments. The required difference of temperature between the two rooms being adjusted as described, it is maintained for about half an hour by burning diy charcoal. The article to be sub- jected to experiment is then accurately weighed, and if it is wood, the unconsumed charcoal is wholly removed from the stove by a small pair of tongs, and deposited in another room, and the wood which is used in pieces two inches long, and half to one quarter of an inch thick, is ignited by applying it to the flame of a lamp ; but if it is any of the species of coat which cannot be ignited per se, the burning charcoal is taken from the stove and weighed, and its quantity either increased or diminished so as to make half an ounce, which is quickly returned to the stove, and on my notes, the name of the arti- cle, its quantity, and the time, by an accurate watch, are then set down, together with the state of the thermometers, the barometer, and hygrometer. The heights of the thermometers are noted every ten minutes during the experiment, that in the exterior room being always known by comparing the mercu- rial and differential thermometers of the interior room. The last ten minutes of time which is entered to finish an experiment, is that to which it approaches the nearest ; the dif- ference therefore from the proper time, cannot be more, but will generally be less than five minutes, which is, in many cases, as near perhaps as it can be determined, and the greatest difference stated will not affect the mean of the results one per cent. The anthracite coal cannot be wholly consumed, even iu the improved state of the stove, the upper chamber having been- ;20 ON THE HEAT EVOLtED introduced after its first construction, to provide a space for the purpose of heating the air as much as possible before coming in contact with the burning body, by which the quantity remaining unconsumed is reduced from two ounces to less than half an ounce. That portion which remains unconsumed after an experiment, including the small particles which drop through the apertures of the chambers into the ash pit, are washed upon a sieve to remove the ashes and any other foreign matter, and when thoroughly dried in a crucible, are weighed and deducted from the original weight. In making up the results of experiments in which charcoal is used to ignite the body, from the resulting time is deducted so much as is known by previous experiment to have arisen from a portion of charcoal equal in weight to that used. Those bituminous coals which fuse and cake in the process of coaking. are the most troublesome to manage in small quantities, from the inconstant manner in which the bituminous part burns, and its tendency to become extinguished the moment that portion is consumed ; the combustion of the bitumen not producing the heat of ignition required by the carbonaceous part to con- tinue the process of combustion, and the surface being partially covered with the deposite from the pyrites, becomes more dif- ficult to ignite, and requires to be broken asunder to present a fresh surface. To overcome this difficulty, it was found neces- sary to use the coal in very small pieces, and occasionally to take from the stove such parts as had coaked, break them in pieces, and return them to the stove as required, which, when ignited, will bum permanently, and the heat required to coak the remaining part of the coal is thereby produced. During tedious experiments, the operator is sometimes under the ne- cessity of passing from the interior to the exterior room, but if done with proper caution, the diflferential thermometer is never affected thereby. The animal heat imparted to the air of the room by the operator, must be noticed. This, under ordinary exertion of the muscles, being equal both in temperature and quantity, as determined by Dr. Crawford, and being the same during the FROM WOOD AND COAL. 21 period of each experiment, the results will not be affected thereby. The accuracy with which the experiments have been per- formed, is a delicate subject for me to expatiate upon, but I shall be permitted to say, that all means within my power have been used to render the results as accurate as the ditficull nature of the subject will admit. These results will be found in the general table. From the diversity in these results, it is apparent, that equal weights of different combustible bodies vary materially in the quantity of heat disengaged in their combustion. The woods differ less perhaps in equal iveights than has been generally sup- posed, and that difference will be found to correspond very nearly with the different quantities of carbon they contain ; they are however of very different value in equal quantities by measure, in consequence of the great disparity in their weight. This remark is also applicable to those coals which are sold by measure and not by weight, from which circumstance, it becomes necessary to caution those who w^ould attempt to ascertain the value of different articles of fuel by merely comparing their different results of heat in the table, without regard to their different weights. The results being comparisons between articles in equal weights, cannot be compared with quantities by measure alone; hence the necessity of determining the weights of a given bulk of those articles sold in this manner, which will be found in the table in their respective columns, the manner of obtaining which will be hereafter detailed. The object of my experiments being practical utility, rather than scientific re- search, to facilitate the accomplishment of that desirable object, I have estimated the comparative values of the different articles. These will be found in the last column of the table, and are equally applicable not only to every market, but for every change in the prices that can take place. The standard taken is shell-bark hickory, that being of greater weight than a cord of any other wood in the table, and disengaging in its combustion an equal quantity of heat from any given weight. yOL. III. — F 3^ ON THE HEAT EVOLVED The comparative numbers express the value of one cord of each of the woods, one ton of the anthracite' coals, and one hundred bushels of the bituminous coals, charcoal and coak, and although no one market is supposed to furnish for fuel every kind of wood contained in the table, yet the principal part will probably be found, and in markets where the woods are much mixed, averages may easily be made adapted to those markets. The column of comparative values was found in the following manner. The value of a given quantity of fuel is directly proportional to the time that a given weight of it maintained the air of the room at a given temperature, and also to its weight. Hence assuming shell-bark hickory for a standard, since one pound of this wood maintained the air of the room at the given tempe- rature 400 minutes, this being multiplied by 4469, the weight of a cord of this wood, we obtain 1787600 minutes as the time which the air of the room would have been maintained at the given temperature, by consimning one cord of this wood. We then have the following proportion. As the product in time corresponding to one cord of shell-bark hickory, (1787600) is to its assumed value (100) so is the product of the weight of a given quantity of any other article into the time that one pound of it would maintain the air of the room at the given temperature, to the value of the given quantity of this article. Thus for a cord of white ash wood : As 1 787600 : 100 : : 3450 X 400 = 1 38000000 : 77 For a ton of Lehigh coal, of 2240 pounds : As 1787600: 100 : : 2240x790=:176960000 : 99 For 100 bushels of cannel coal weighing 6525 pounds: As 1787600:100:: 6525x63O=411O;r5OO0: 230 A few examples will be sufficient to show the facility with which the comparisons may be made. For this purpose, we will assume the price of shell-bark hickory wood as at six dol« lars for a cord of 128 cubic feet, this being the average price VROM WOOD AND COAL. 23 ia this market, and compare it with a cord of red-heart hickory. The comparative value of the former is 100, and of the latter 81. We then have the following statement. As 100 : 600 : : 81 : 486. Four dollars and eighty-six cents being the comparative value of a cord of red-heart hickory, and the difference between the price of this wood and its comparative value thus ascer- tained, shows how much dearer or cheaper it is than the wood with which it has been compared. We will suppose the price of red-heart hickory to be 5.75 and that of chesnut white oak to be 5 dollars. Then 8 1 : 5 7 5 :: 8 6 : 6 1 0, is the value of the latter, which being sold at 5 dollars, is cheaper by one dollar and ten cents, than the red-heart hickory. If we take the mean of the comparative numbers for the eleven different species of oaks, which is 69, and compare them at 5 dollars, with shell-bark hickory at 6 dollars, 100 : 600 :: 69 : 414, is the average value of those oaks, and at the prices specified, the hickory is the cheapest by nearly one dollar. A mere examination of the comparative numbers, will show that a cord of white birch is 52 pr. ct. less in value than a cord of shell-bark hickory, and the difference per cent, may be calcu- lated from the comparative numbers between any two articles sold at the same price. We will now extend the comparison to some of the coals : and take for this purpose one cord of shell-bark hickory, at 6 dol- lars, and determine the comparative value of one ton of Lehigh Coal. As 100 : 600 :: 99 : 594, which shows them to be of nearly the same value, supposing each article to be con- sumed under the same circumstances ; but as this is not the case, and as this objection has been frequently stated to me by those who have confounded two distinct subjects, a momentary digression will be excused, to show the futility and irrelevancy of this objection. It is admitted that there may be greater disparity between the manner of consuming different kinds of fuel, than actually exists in their compaiative value as usually sold ; but this difference does not enhance or depress the value of the different articles, provided it is practicable to consume them in the same manner, which, with stiy few exception^. 24 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED may be done. The intrinsic value of the different kinds of fuel, and the loss or gain experienced by the different construc- tions of the apparatus used for their combustion, are distinct subjects of inquiry, and although both are necessary to be known, to effect any valuable improvement in the selection of the one and the construction of the other, yet it does not follow as a consequence, because the construction of a grate used for the combustion of Lehigh coal, is more economical than an open fire-place, that, therefore, one ton of the coal possesses greater intrinsic value than one cord of shell-bark hickory wood, as it would be equally relevant, to say, that the coal is intrinsically of less value, because the wood may be consumed in a sheet iron stove, which is a much more economical appa- ratus than the grate. We will resume the subject by comparing one ton of Lehigh coal, at seven dollars, with one hundred bushels of Newcastle coal, at thirty-five dollars, which are the present prices in this market. As 99 : 700 :: 198 : 1400, from which, it appears that fifty bushels of this coal are precisely equal in value to one ton of Lehigh coal, but as the Newcastle coal will cost seventeen dollars and fifty cents, and the Lehigh coal costs only seven dollars, the latter is the cheaper article of fuel by 150 per cent. If the value of a chaldron or bushel of the bituminous coal is required, the manner of obtaining a solution of either ques- tion, is obvious. It will be apparent, that although shell-bark hickory has been taken, for convenience, as the standard, to construct the column of comparative values, the economist should take the cheapest article of fuel in the market, as his standard of com- parison. The experiments on the Lehigh, Schuylkill, Susquehanna, and Lackawaxen coals were repeated a number of times in dif- ferent quantities, but the results were found to be uniformly the same. Considerable difference was found in the results of pine charcoal, when taken promiscuouslyfrom different parcels as brought to market, in consequence of the imperfect manner FBOM WOOB AND COAL. 25 in which the charring process had been conducted, hut as these coals are sold by measure, and not by weight, and as the bulk is not materially diminished in perfecting the process, the loss sustained from this circumstance being in pai't compensated by the heat disengaged in expelling the remaining inflammable matter, we may consider this defect, in ordinary cases, as un- important ; the result, however, is given for perfect charcoal. The coak used to experiment upon was produced in the large way, and that which was most free from earthy, or other fo- reign matter, as well as most perfect in other respects, was selected. The result is less than was anticipated, and shows that the commonly received opinion that it contains as much carbonaceous matter as charcoal, in equal weights, is erroneous, and what is still more erroneous is, the opinion that any given quantity of coak, by measure, will in its combustion disengage as much heat as an equal quantity of the coal from which it is produced. One bushel of bituminous coal produces in retorts about one and a half bushels of coak, in consequence of swell- ing during the process, and yet its specific gravity is stated, in some tables, as nearly equal to the coal. The composition balls of Lehigh coal, charcoal, and fire clay, were made for the purpose of ascertaining whether a very eco- nomical fuel might not be formed of the culm or fine portions of the two former, by combining them with the latter article, as they possess very little value, and the same practice having been adopted with considerable advantage in various parts of Europe. The fire produced by these balls was found to be very clean and beautiful in its appearance ; its superior cleanliness is in consequence of the ashes being retained by the clay, and the balls were found to retain their original shape, after they were deprived of the combustible materials. The beauty of the fire is enhanced by the shape and equality in the size of the balls, which, during the combustion, present uniform luminous faces. No difficulty was found in igniting or perfectly consuming the combustible materials of the balls, and the loss in heat, when compared with the combustion of the same quantity of each 36 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED article, in their usual states of aggregation, was round to be only three per cent. It is proper to state that the experiments were made with the best quality of every article that could be procured, and as some slight difference may exist between wood of different ages, the medium sizes were selected. Those woods and coals which are peculiar to the New England States, were obtained from thence. The Rhode-Island and Worcester coals were procured for me by an obliging friend in Boston, who stated that the coals were selected with care, but, that the Worcester coal being a recent discovery, and the parcel sent having been taken from the surface of the bed, could not be considered as a fair sample of the coal which may be supposed to exist in lower strata. Many and insuperable difficulties presented themselves, in attempting to ascertain by common methods the weight of dry wood in a cord of each kind. The plan adopted, and which appeared most likely to produce satisfactory results, was as follows. From a pile of swamp white oak of medium size, which had been cut the preceding winter, and weather seasoned during the interval, (this being the state in which the largest portion of wood is sold,) a half cord, or sixty-four cubic feet, was accurately measured, and its weight was found to be 1928 avoirdupois pounds. From this half cord was taken in various sizes, a sufficient number of sticks to allow one piece to be sawn from each, twelve inches long, to produce ^\ part of the whole weight, which being done, the pieces of wood were placed in afoot '■^corder" or space twelve inches square, made by nail- ing four pieces of board together at the ends ; but the wood not being found to fill it equally in the first instance, other pieces were substituted, of equal weight, until the interstices between the sticks presented a similar appearance to that of wood, as ordinarily piled up for sale. This parcel of wood was then perfectly dried in an oven, and its solid content ascertained by the quantity of water which it displaced. To perform this operation, a tin box w^s used, fifteen inches deep, and six inches wide ai the open tog. FROM MOOD AND COAL.. iiY which was set into a large tin funnel, and the \a ater displaced by the wood was conveyed by the latter into an earthen vessel placed underneath for its reception. The pieces of wood were taken separately, and into one end of each, a small awl was inserted a sufficient distance to sustain the weight of the stick, and by which it could be accurately and expeditiously im- mersed in the water. As tlie surface of the wood could not be made impervious to water without a change in its bulk, it became necessary to perform the operation with as much dex- terity as possible ; the wood, however, being perfectly dry, its surface w'as covered with dust, which caused it to repel the water in the first instance, and I found it could be immersed steadily, and yet with such facility, as to be left nearly dry if shaken immediately on being withdrawn from the water, and this was determined by the very slight addition which was found to have been made to its weight by the immersion. For this addition to the weight of the wood, the water used being at 55° Fahrenheit, a correction was made and added to the quantity of water displaced, although a partial compensation may be considered to have taken place by the expansion pro- duced in the wood in consequence of the absorption of this portion of the water. The water displaced was measured in a deep narrow vessel, provided with a sliding scale, fitted to its interior, for the pur- pose, and found to be 965 cubic inches, from which the quan- tity of plenum, or solid dry wood, in a cord taken under the circumstances described, was found to be 7 1 5 cubic feet, leaving a deficiency for the interstices and diminution in volume by drying oi 56^ cubic feet. Thus, ] : 965 : : 128 : 123520, which -i- 1728 — Tl.^\%\ cubic feet. The method taken, it is supposed, will give the average quantity of combustible matter, in a cord of wood, as usually sold, it being impossible for me to give a scale adapted to every change in volume produced by the different degrees of humi- dity, of which the woods are susceptible. The solid content of a cord of wood being known, if the 28 ON THE HEAT EVOLA^ED specific gravity of any wood is correctly ascertained, its absolute weight may be determined thereby. The usual method of ascertaining the specific gravity of wood, as laid down in the books, is manifestly incorrect, as the absorption of water, during its immersion, produces an enlarge- ment in the magnitude of the body, not compensated for by adding to the water weight, if the body is lighter, (or deduct- ing, if heavier than water,) the weight of water found to have been absorbed, and this absorption must constitute complete saturation before the water weight can be accurately ascertained, because, during^tbis process of absorption, the air being con- stantly expelled from the body, part of it adheres to it in small globules, and renders it more buoyant, in proportion as this bulk of air is lighter than the same bulk of the body ; consequently, the body weighs less than it should do, and this cause of error cannot be counteracted by an attempt to weigh the body " expe- ditiously" as is recommended. During this necessary process of saturating the body with water, the wood increases in magni- tude, and its specific gravity will be found less than it should be ; and the difference will be seen to be very considerable, when it is stgited that the specific gravity of a piece of dry wood. Weighing in air 11.15 grains, was, by the common me- thod found to be .556, and the same piece of wood being then dried with great care to its former weight, its specific gravity found by a process free from this objection, (hereafter to be described,) was .619, the difference in which would be 282 lbs. in one cord of wood. The specific gravity of those bodies which do not change in their magnitude by the absorption of water, and which have no fissures, may be correctly obtained by the common method, as the water absorbed is retained in the body, and can thereby be ascertained, as it will be of the exact weight by which the water w'eight had been increased or diminished in consequence of the expulsion of an equal bulk of air from the body. Our object in ascertaining the specific gravities of bodies, is to find the proportion of their weights under the same volume. Now, by the volume of a body, is to be understood FROM WOOD AND COAL. 2Jf the entire space enclosed within its exterior surface, including its pores and fissures. It is necessary, therefore, in determin- ing the sp. gr. by the usual method of the hydrostatic balance, to use some means for preventing the water from insinuating itself into the pores and fissures of such bodies as are not of a perfectly compact texture. If the article employed for this purpose be of a sp. gr. different from water, and if (as will almost always be the case) it protrude beyond the surface of the body so as to enlarge the bulk, it will be necessary not only to know its weight in air, but its specific gravity ; and even then it is difficult to make a satisfactory correction of the water weight in consequence of the change which the article made use of may sustain in its specific gravity by pressure in apply- ing it to the body, and also, from the different specific gravity of different parts of articles not expressly prepared for the purpose. As it was necessary for me to determine with great accuracy the specific gravities of dry wood, charcoal, and the mineral coals, all of v^' hich absorb water and present more or less fissures, and as I wished to relieve myself from liability to inaccu- racies from the sources which have been detailed, I determined to make a compound which should be convenient to use, and whose specific gravity should be precisely that of water at 60** Fahrenheit. This was effected with white wax and yellow rosin ; the specific gravity of the former was .967, and of the latter 1.079. The compound was of the best possible consistence, and whether compressed by mechanical means at a low tempera- ture, or expanded by the temperature of water at 120°, it would in either case be unity when brought to the tempera- ture of 60°, and the whole mass was perfectly uniform. The difficulty of producing this compound was much greater than had been anticipated, and will be apparent, when it is stated that the mass weighed at the commencement about two ounces, taken by arithmetical calculation in the proportions supposed to be necessary, which were 46 grains of rosin to 100 grains of wax, and although the smallest additions supposed VOL.. lU. H 30 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED necessary, w-ere made at each time to this mass, from two other masses of the same articles compounded, whose specific gravi- ties were known to be about .995 and 1.005, the mass weighed when finished more than thirty ounces, and required seven days to accomplish the undertaking, and the proportions of the ingredients found to have been used, were about 22 grains of rosin to 100 grains of w^ax. Having had occasion to use some of this compound within a short time, I regret to say, that the lapse of two years since it was made, has produced a change in its specific gravity, it being now 1.004 in water at the tem- perature of 60° Fahrenheit. The pieces of wood being made positively dry, in the manner described for drying those experimented upon, they were covered with the compound described without regard to its weight, and their specific gravities being ascertained, the absolute weight of dry wood in a cord of each was found in the following man- ner, and will be seen in the table. The weight of a cubic foot of any substance, whose specific gravity is 1, is known to be very nearly 1000 ounces, or 62^ pounds avoirdupois. Hence, to find the weight of a cord of wood, or 71^ cubic feet of plenum, of specific gravity 1, (for example, shell-bark hickory) we have only to multiply •? 1.5 by 62.5, which gives us 4468.75. Now, to find the weight of a cord of wood, of any other specific gravity, we say. As uniti/ is to (4468.75) the weight of a cord at specific gravity 1, so is the given specific gravity, to the weight of a cord at that specific gravity. Thus, for white ash; 1 : 4468.75::. 772: 3449.87 pounds. In fact, we have, in any case, merely to multiply 4468.75 by the specific gravity of any other wood, to obtain the weight of a cord of this wood, in pounds and decimals avoir- dupois. The quantity of charcoal which can, by the best conducted process, be obtained from the different woods, was deemed an inquiry of considerable importance, there being great dis' crepancies in the results of different experimenters on this subject, and from the vast importance and consumption of this article in the arts generally, and particularly in the process of smelting iron ore. For this purpose all attempts hitherto made FROM WOOD AND COAL. 31 in this country to substitute anthracite coals, have proved nuga- tory ,• and, as equally unsuccessful results have attended the nu- merous and well conducted experiments, which have been made in England, Ireland, and Wales, to substitute anthracite coals for coak, in the same important process, it becomes a matter of national interest, that our forests, intended for this purpose, should not be unnecessarily wasted by conducting the charring process in an improper manner, and this can only be ascertained by first knov> iug the positive quantity of carbon contained in the different woods, from which we shall be able to determine whether any improvements can be made in the process. Xarious methods have been adopted by different experi- menters on this subject ; that most generally used appears to have been charring the woods in dry sand ; but I found this objectionable, as the finer portions of the sand were liable to enter the interior of the coal, if it had any fissures, and the weight of the product was too large, while on the other hand, the interstices between the particles of sand were found to admit sufficient air to consume part of the coal, and the pro- duct in consequence of this combustion was liable to be found too small. To obviate both these objections, pulverized char- coal, known to have been perfectly charred and dry, was sub- stituted for sand, having ascertained that it could be almost entirely shaken out of the fissures in the coal, and that, should any remain, the error would be immaterial. The pieces of wood were closely packed in it, and presented an inch in thick- ness of powdered coal between the sides and bottom of the crucible and the wood, and about three inches of powdered coal on the top of the wood, the whole being covered by an inverted crucible luted down. In this latter crucible a small orifice only being made, any air, therefore, which should enter through the pores of the crucible or the aperture at top, would be decomposed before it could reach the wood in the interior, and the air which may be supposed to have existed between the interstices of the powdered coal, or in the coal itself in the first instance, would also be decomposed and rendered inert, 32 ON THE HEAT EVOLVEiD before the wood could be charred. The whole of the woods, which had been previously filed into oblong solids, presenting sharp edges, to detect any loss by fracture, each being designated by notation letters, made by incision, were thus surrounded and exposed in the first instance to a moderate heat in an air fur- nace, which was increased to a white heat, and so remained for about two hours, during which time additional quantities of powdered coal were introduced through the aperture at the top of the inverted crucible. The product of charcoal from the several woods obtained in this manner, will be found in the table. Among the many experiments made to discover the best manner of ascertaining the weight of charcoal product from the different woods, and to satisfy myself whether any loss could take place in a solid piece of coal surrounded by pow- dered charcoal, a piece of box wood coal without fissures was taken, weighing. 23.7 grains, and after having been exposed to a white heat for three hours; was found to weigh 23.1 grains; the loss of ^V of a grain, was, however, undoubtedly, produced by the air contained in the piece of coal, or conjointly with that in the interstices between the powdered coal, contiguous to the piece when first ignited. A similar experiment was made in clean dry white sand, upon a piece of maple coal without fissures, which had been previously exposed in powdered charcoal to a white heat, and known to be perfectly charred and dry. This piece of coal weighed 26 grains, and lost by the process 6 grains ; the surface was found entirely changed from its original hard texture, having become soft, and the colour was changed from slate to jet black, which is often found to be the case in charcoal ob- tained in the large way, and is always objectionable, as it pro* duces loss both to the collier and consumer. The charcoal produced by surrounding the wood with pow- dered coal was found of a slate colour on its surface, dense, sonorous, brittle and equal in all respects to that made in cylinders or retorts for gunpowder, which is known to be much superior to that produced by the ordinary method, even fo?- lUOM WOOD AND COAL. J8 common purposes, from its greater durability, although, for these purposes, no particular necessity exists that the pyrollg- neous acid and tar should be perfectly expelled. From the pre- ceding experiment in sand, it occurred to me that an important improvement might be made in the common process, by filling the interstices between the sticks of wood with the culm or fine coal left on the ground after the large coal has been drawn from the pit, and by covering the wood more perfectly than is usually done. In this way we may more perfectly prevent the access of the air, which is not only destructive in many oases to a large portion of the coal, but also renders what re- mains, less valuable. That my remarks on this subject may not be considered entirely theoretical, it is proper to state, that an intelligent collier in New Jersey applied in a partial manner the plan proposed, and found the product to be about 10 per cent, more in quantity by measure, than he had ever before .obtained from the same kind and quantity of wood, and I found the coal when brought to market nearly 20 per cent, heavier than usual, and as an evidence that the coal had been w^ell charred, a cir- cumstance which is too often neglected, the hydrogen gas appeared to have been almost entirely expelled, and it lost very little in weight by exposing it to a red heat in powdered char- coal. The quality of this coal was considered by competent judges to be superior to any other ever offered in this market, and was as cleanly to handle as the anthracite coals, and sold readily at an advanced price. Prom an examination made during the last summer, of the common manner of piling and covering wood which is to be converted into charcoal, the practice of piling it two and three tiers in height, appears to be objectionable for two reasons ; the, first is, that the second and third tiers cannot be so well de- fended from the air as the first, which rests upon the ground, this being a better barrier against the air, than the former can be made to present: and the second is, that this disposition of the wood is not favourable for producing the ignition of the whole mass at one and the same time, the usual practice being either to commence the ignition in the centre of the upper tier, VOL. III. 1 34 ON THE HUAT EVOLVED or, in other cases, to drop the fire into a hole, or chimney, left in the centre of the pile which extends to the bottom, or ground ; and by giving air holes at the sides of the pit, to use the lan- guage of the colliers, the fire is said to be " drawn to the sides of the pit." It is very true, that the fire does eventually extend to the sides of the pit ; but a much more uniform and speedy process^ and by which less loss would be sustained, would be to place the fire in the first instance in a number of holes at the sides, near the bottom, leaving an opening at the top by which the heat generated at the sides would be communicated to the wood in the interior, and facilitate the uniform ignition of the whole mass, and the moment this is effected, let the holes at the sides be closed, and that at the top may be lessened, but should not be wholly closed, until the extrication of hydrogen gas has nearly ceased, which, from its prodigious expansion^ sometimes bursts the pits, and as this generally occurs when the wood is well covered, and sometimes produces very inju- rious effects, by firing the adjacent woods, (as the column of flame has been known to extend from twenty to thirty feet,) it has probably led many colliers into the belief that the proper remedy is to give the wood a slight covering, by which nu- merous escapes are allowed for the gas ,' but in effecting this object, as the holes at the sides are left open, a very strong current is produced through the pit by the slight covering, and another evil is produced, that of burning through the sides of the pit. In those instances where pits have been known to burst, when well covered, the cause may probably be traced to having closed the chimney at the top too soon, this being generally done in about fifteen minutes, and having left those open at the sides too long, as the gas will make its escape in some manner, which should be provided for, and this provision is as necessary to a coal pit, as the safety valve is to a steam boiler. Both the objections which have been alluded to against piling the wood two or three tiers high, may in part be remedied by changing the manner of igniting the wood as proposed, and if FROM WOOD AND COAL. 35 clay can be procured, (with sand on the top, to fill the cracks as it dries,) as a covering, which should be preferred in all cases, the evils may be reduced ; but the best manner is, undoubtedly, to pile the wood in single lengths, and if the fine coal is used to fill the interstices, and can be made subservient in its combustion to produce the required heat or any portion of the heat necessary to char the wood, that portion which can be so used is as effectual as the combustion of an equal portion of the char. The process being, when conducted in retorts, similar to that of distillation, the qualities of the wood necessary to be expelled being volatile, no necessity exists that any combustion should take place either in the wood or char ; yet this cannot be entirely prevented, in the common process, unless some means are devised to burn the hydrogen gas which escapes, and make it applicable to produce the heat necessary to char the wood as is done when the process is conducted in retorts. The hard texture of the coal will be in proportion to the heat given it. and the exclusion of air ; the advantage therefore of using clay will be obvious from its being a bad conductor of heat, and a good barrier to exclude the air. I have been informed by a gentleman well acquainted with the iron works in this state, that in consequence of the slow growth of the extensive forests belonging to the same, not being sufficient to furnish a constant supply of charcoal, many of the works are obliged to suspend their operations, about three months in each year, by which very great loss is sustained. If an improvement can be made in the manner of producing the charcoal required, by which these works, and all others similarly situated shall be enabled, from their present forests, to continue their operations without interruption, such an im- provement must be considered as important, not only to indi- viduals, but to the community generally. A series of experiments was made on a large number of woods, to determine the difference, if any existed, in the pro- duct of charcoal from green and dry wood; and these being taken from the same sticks in equal weights when green, they would both contain the same quantity of ligneous matter. The 36 ON THE HEAT EVOLVED product v\^as not found to be essentially different, but, invariably, rather larger from the dry than from the green wood, and the specific gravity of the former was also greater ; I have no hesi- tation, however, in saying that there will be less loss in charring wood in the large way by using dry wood, as it can be ignited more equally, and with greater facility. It is my intention, so soon as my other avocations will per- mit, to make some experiments in the charring process in the large way, and to use the fine coal as suggested, for which purpose a number of cords of wood have been cut for a con- siderable period of time. Dead wood was found to pi'oduce the same quantity of charcoal as the same wood in a living state, and the limbs of trees produced coal of much greater density than the trunk. Among the most dense woods, stove dry ebony, sp. gr. 1.090, gave a product of charcoal from 100 parts of wood, of 33.82, which is larger than was obtained from any other wood, and its specific gravity was also greater, being .888 ; its fracture so much resembles that of some of the mineral coals, that it is difficult to say in what respects they differ. Stove dry live oak, sp. gr. .942, gave 32.43, sp. gr. .591. Tortoise-shell wood, sp. gr, 1.212, gave 30.31, sp. gr, .866. Cocoa, sp. gr. 1,231, gave 28,53, sp. gr. ,742. Turkey box, sp. gr. .933, gave 27.24, sp. gr. ,622, A piece of box wood polished, lost very little of its lustre by charring in powdered coal, and the beautiful variations in the grain of the wood were as apparent in the coal as in the wood, and this experiment may be considered as conclusive, as to the complete exclusion of air by this process. It does not appear from the products of charcoal from the different woods, that their density or durability is to be attri- buted to the quantity of carbon they contain. As the woods differ materially in the quantity of charcoal product by mea- sure, it appeared necessary to give the product from a cord of each is bushels, and as the value of these can only be deter- mined by their weight, this also appeared necessary, both of which will be found in the table. FROM WOOD AND COAL. 37 The bushel generally used in this country contains 2150.4 cubic inches, but as coals are sold by what is termed " rounded measure" or partially heaped, it became necessary to ascertain the cubical content of a body of coal thus measured. For this purpose one bushel of charcoal was made perfectly dry, and the mean specific gravity of a large number of pieces was found to be .285, and the weight of the bushel of coal was fifteen pounds avoirdupois, or 105000 grains, and the absolute weight of a cubic foot of coal whose specific gravity is .285, is 124687 grains, and a cubic foot being 1 728 cubic inches, then we have the following statement : As 124687: 1728: : 105000 : 1455 solid inches of coal in the bushel, which being known, the absolute weight of a bushel of each of the coals was calculated from their specific gravities, in the following manner: The weight of a cubic foot, or 1728 cubic inches of any substance, whose specific gravity is 1, being 1000 ounces, consequently the weight in ounces of a bushel containing 1455 cubic inches of any substance, of the same specific gravity, will be found by the following proportion : As 1728: 1000:: 1455: 842 = 52.62 pounds. Now to find the weight of a bushel of a substance of any other specific gravity, we say ; As unity isio (52.62) the weight of a bushel at specific gravity 1, so is the given specific gravity, to the weight of a bushel at that specific gravity. Thus for white ash charcoal, we have, As 1 : 52.62: : .547 : 28.78pounds. From a number of comparisons, made by actual measure- ment, of different mineral coals, it is believed the weights ex- pressed in the table will be found sufficiently correct in every instance. The hydrostatic balance made use of to ascertain the specific gravities of the different bodies expressed in the table, is sen- sibly affected by ^ part of a grain, when not loaded, and the weights were made to twentieth parts of a grain in every in- stance. From experiments made to ascertain the weight of moisture absorbed by the different woods, which had previously been VOL.. III. — K 38 ON THE HEAT EVOIiVED made perfectly dry, and afterwards exposed in a room in which no fire was made during a period of tw^elve months, the average absorption by weight, for this period, was found to be 10 per cent, in forty six different woods, and 8 per cent, in the driest states of the atmosphere, and an unexpected coincidence was found to exist in the absorption by weight of forty six pieces of charcoal made from the same kinds of wood, and similarly exposed, the latter being also 8 per cent. The quantity of moisture absorbed by the woods individually, was not found to diminish with their increase in density ; while it was found that the green woods, in drying, uniformly lost less in weight in proportion to their greater density. Hickory wood taken green, and made absolutely dry, experienced a diminu- tion in its weight of 37|- per cent., w^hite oak, 41 per cent, and soft maple, 48 per cent. ; a cord of the latter will therefore weigh nearly twice as much when green as when dry. If we assume the mean quantity of moisture in the woods, when green, as 42 per cent., the great disadvantage of attempt- ing to burn wood in this state must be obvious, as in every 100 pounds of this compound of wood and water, 42 pounds of aqueous matter must be expelled from the wood, and as the capacity of water for absorbing heat is nearly as 4 to 1, when compared with air, and probably greater during its conversion into vapour, which must be effected before it can escape, the loss of heat must consequently be very great. The necessity of speaking thus theoretically on this point, is regretted; but, it will be apparent, that this question of loss cannot be solved by my apparatus, as the vapour would be con- densed in the pipe of the stove, and the heat would thereby be imparted to the room, which, under ordinary circumstances, escapes into the chimney. The average weight of moisture in different woods which have been weather seasoned from eight to twelve months, will not be found to vary materially from 25 per cent, of their weight; every economist, therefore, will see the propriety of keeping his wood under cover in all cases where this is practi- cable. PROM WOOn ANT> OOAti. 39 Numerous experiments have been made to determine the law which obtains in the cooling of heated bodies. Although my apparatus did not admit of making experiments on this subject at. high temperatures, yet it appears in one respect better adapted for the purpose than any other which has, to my knowledge, been made use of, as we are enabled to maintain both the heated body and the refrigerating medium at the same difference of temperature, for a sufficient period of time, to determine the question with accuracy. My experiments con- sisted in maintaining the temperature of the interior room 1 0°, 20', 30°, and 40° above the temperature of the exterior room for the same period of time, and the quantity of fuel required was found to be directly proportional to the increased diffe- rence in temperature. These results are in agreement with the assumption of Newton, the geometrical law of Richmann, and also correspond at these differences of temperature with the experiments of MM. Dulong and Petit, although the latter gentlemen found very different results at higher tempe- ratures. The usual method which has been adopted to determine this question, by finding the period which fluids require, when heated, to cool through a given number of degrees in different parts of the scale of a thermometer, appears liable to some objections, which it becomes me, however, to notice with de- ference. The shape or size of the containing vessel is not, perhaps, material, but as spheres have been most generally used, my remarks will be confined to that shape. We will, forillustratiou, assume the containing vessel to be the bulb of a thermometer two inches in diameter, and filled with mercury. This we will suppose to be heated to 300° of Fahren- heit, and placed in vacuo, in which case it is said to lose its heat by radiation only. Now, as the stratum of mercury in contact with the bulb, parts with its heat, it contracts and occupies less space in the bulb, which causes a portion of that within the tube to sink into the bulb in order to supply the deficiency. This exterior stratum must then be supposed, from its loss of heat, to have acquired greater density, and to leave the sides of 40' QN THE LOSS OF HEAT the bulb ; hence, motion in the fluid commences, and in pro- portion to its heat will be its fluidity, and consequently, the velocity with which the change will be made, and as the strata lessen in volume as they approach the centre of the bulb, their heat must either be transmitted through the exterior interven- ing strata, or be subject to the necessary delay in coming in contact with the bulb, in consequence of the decreasing velocity with which the changes are made ; and, in either case, the cool- ing process will be retarded. If we suppose the fluid, under the circumstances described, incapable of locomotion, it will not be denied that the interior strata will require more time to impart the same heat than the exterior, consequently, pro- portional to the coolmg of the body must be the increased time required to deprive it of any given number of degrees. Experiments upon this subject would be much more satis- factory, and would probably give different results from those hitherto obtained at high temperatures, by using an apparatus which should admit of maintaining the heat at fixed points upon the scale of the thermometer ; in which case motion in the fluid would be immaterial, and an equally heated surface would always be exposed to the refrigerating medium. Experiments to determine the comparative loss of Heat sustained by different constructions of apparatus ordinarily used for the combustion of Fuel. The comparative loss of heat which arises from the different manner in which fuel is consumed, is a subject intimately con- nected with the question of economy in its use, but it is a distinct subject of inquiry from the former investigation, which was to determine the comparative heat disengaged in the combustion of the various kinds of fuel. It is presumed the remarks which have already been made, in anticipation, on this point, in detailing the first course of experinients, (at page 23,) will be considered conclusive- TROM DIFFERENT APPARATUS. 41 For the purpose of performing these experiments, a slight alteration, only, of the interior room, was required. The chimney of the exterior room being situate within twelve inches of the board partition on the east side of the interior room, an opening was made through the partition of a sufficient size fairly to expose the fire-place of the chimney to the interior room ; the sides, top, and bottom of this aperture were then closed by boards perfectly tight, and may now be considered as forming part of the interior room. All the apparatus, with the exception of the stove, remained the same, and was made use of as has been before described. Those constructions of apparatus in most common use, and of proper size for the room were selected. The experiments could not, without great inconvenience, be extended so as to embrace all the inventions which have been presented to the public as improvements upon these constructions, but it is be- lieved those selected will be sufficient for the object of the inquiry. This course of experiments was conducted on the same plan as the former, namely, by determining the period of time which the air of the interior room could be maintained 10° of temperature above that of the exterior room, in the combus- tion of equal quantities of fuel, by weight, in each apparatus. In some cases, indeed, it was necessary to use larger quantities of fuel than in others, in order to make satisfactory experiments, yet the results are given for equal weights, and exhibit the time which the air of the room was thus maintained by each apparatus, and are compared with the time which the same weight and kind of fuel had maintained the same difference of temperature in using apparatus No. 9, in the former state of the room ; a correction having been made for the slight in- crease in its size, in consequence of the alteration which has been described. The fuel used in all the experiments was shell-bark hickory wood, of the same quality, and absolutely dry. It had been apprehended that considerable difficulty would be experienced in producing the required equality in the tem- VOIi. III. 1, 42 ON THE LOSS OF HEAT perature of the interior room, from the ahsence of proper means, in some of the apparatus experimented upon, to regu- late the comhustion ; hut from very few trials with each, it was found less difficult than had heen anticipated, and that the difficulty could be entirely avoided by making the quantity of fuel administered to the fire, the regulator of the rapidity and extent of combustion necessary to be produced, which was effected by using the wood in small pieces. The results have been thrown into a tabular form, and ex- hibit, as before stated, the comparison of each apparatus with No. 9, in which it is assumed that no loss of heat is sustained, this assumption being necessary, for the purpose of determining the comparative loss of heat sustained by each apparatus, which is the object of the experiments. The manner of obtaining the results in time, having been stated, it is evident, that, as the same quantity of fuel was con- sumed in every experiment, consequently the same quantity of heat must have been generated. In all the experiments, (ex- cept the standard experiment No. 9,) we find part of the heat escaped by the pipe or flue of the grate and fire-place into the chimney, and was lost, and proportional to this loss must have been the quantity of the fuel required to be consumed in a given time, to maintain the temperature of the room, and, con- sequently, the duration of each experiment was proportionally affected thereby. The numbers, therefore, which express the duration of each experiment, are proportional to the heat saved, and assuming the positive quantity of heat generated as 100, this being the result of apparatus No. 9, if the time occu- pied in any other experiment is deducted from 100, the re- mainder gives the positive loss sustained in every hundred parts of heat generated by using this apparatus, and by which we de- termine that in using No. 1, as only 10 parts in every hundred parts of heat generated are saved, consequently we lose 90 per cent of heat. As the important difference which exists in the quantity of fuel required to be consumed in different apparatus to produce the same effect, might not in all instances be obvious by a cur- FROM DIFFERENT APPARATUS. 43 sory inspection of the numbers in the first column of the table, the second column of numbers has been inserted to facilitate these comparisons, and the great disparity in the quantity of fuel required to produce the same effect in No. 1 and No. 2, may. at first view, appear paradoxical, if compared with the quantity of heat saved by each, from 100 parts generated, as only 8 parts more heat are saved by No. 2, than is saved by No. 1, and yet the positive saving in fuel by using No. 2, is nearly 45 per cent. To find the numbers in the second column, we assume the fuel used in all the experiments as 100 ; and for the facility of comparison, we will say this quantity of fuel maintained the temperature of the room 100 minutes when consumed in ap- paratus No. 9. In experiment No. l,we find this quantity of fuel maintained the temperature of the room only 10 minutes, and, consequently, it would have required 10 times as much fuel as apparatus No. 9, (or 1000,) to maintain the room at the same temperature for 100 minutes. In the same manner the other numbers are found. The proportion for the experiments will be clearly explained in the following manner : As the time of the experiment is to the quantity of fuel consumed, so is the assumed time of com- parison, to the fuel that would be required for that time. Thus for experiment No. 2: As 18 : 100 : : 100 : 555. By an examination of the numbers in the second column of the table, it will be seen that one dollar expended in fuel con- sumed in apparatus No. 9, is as effective as ten dollars expended' in the same kind of fuel consumed in No. 1, the same quantity of heat being imparted to the room in both cases. The com- parison may be extended in the same manner between any two experiments inserted in the table, and the figures in the second column will be found to express the relative value of fuel for each apparatus, in dollars and cents, by adding a decimal point at the left hand of the two last figures. Experiments No. 6, 7, and 8, were made with the same stove for the purpose of determining the difference in the loss of heat by different constructions and positions of pipe of the 44 ON THE LOSS OF HEAT same lengthy which in all other respects were similar. From these experiments it will be seen, that the same length of pipe in elbow joints is much more efficacious in imparting heat to the room than straight pipe, and as the length of pipe producing a descending current, was nearly equal in experiments No. 6 and No. 8, the great advantage which has been supposed to be derived from the descending current, does not appear to exist, although it is undoubtedly more efficacious than the same length and position of pipe producing an ascending current, as the velocity of the current in the former is diminished by the increased resistance which must necessarily be overcome in its descent, while the latter gives greater facility for the heated air to escape than is given by any other position in which the pipe can be placed. Experiment No. 7 shows that pipe placed horizontally is more efficacious in imparting heat, than when placed in a vertical position either for an ascending or descend- ing current. The causes which operate to render the same length of pipe in elbow joints more efficacious than any other con- struction, may be satisfactorily explained. The shape of the pipe forces the current of heated air to make abrupt turns, in doing which it impinges against the elbows with sufficient force to invert its internal arrangement, by which change from its former relative situation with the sides of the pipe, a new stratum of hot air from the interior of the current, is brought more frequently in contact with the sides of the pipe, which facilitates the process of imparting heat, particularly by being brought in contact with the lower half of the horizontal part of the pipe, which is necessarily the coldest from various causes, and is of very little service in imparting heat to the room with- out the aid of elbow joints. From experiment No. 8, an important inference may be drawn ; that the advantage gained under ordinary circumstanes, by increasing the length of the pipe, has a limit very far short of that which is found to be necessary to impart all the heat generated to the air of the room, as in this experiment, only five parts of the heat were lost in using 13^ feet of pipe, con- FROM DIFFERENT APPARATUS. 4o sisting of nine elbow joints ; whereas, in apparatus No. 9, eight additional elbow joints, with sixteen and a half feet of straight pipe, amounting together to 28^ feet of pipe, were required to save these five parts of the heat which would otherwise have escaped into the chimney. The reason for this limitation will appear evident, by reflecting that a heated body loses less in equal periods of time, as its temperature approaches that of the surrounding refrigerating medium, and that the loss of heat will be in the proportion which the volume of air in the pipe bears to the volume of air in the room ; and, also, proportional to their difference of temperature. It must not, however, be inferred from this experiment, that 13^ feet of pipe of any diamete)', and thickness of iron, made into elbow joints, will produce the same effect ; as the length will require to be increased with the increase in its diameter, and this will appear obvious, from the fact, that the surface of the pipe does not increase in the ratio of its area or contents of heated air, and as this surface is the medium by which the heat is imparted to the room, and that being effected princi- pally by contact with the sides of the pipe, greater length will be required to produce this necessary contact. The great advantage of sheet iron stoves, is obvious, from the slight obstruction which they present to the rapid commu- nication of the heat generated, to the air of the room. From experiment No. 2, the advantage gained by lessening the current of air into the chimney is clearly demonstrated ; this being the principal cause why this apparatus is more efii- cacious in warming the room than No. 1 ; and this advantage does not arise so much from the excess of heat which enters the room by using No. 2, as from the diminished quantity of cold air necessary to be admitted to supply the place of the air that has been healed, and of which, by using No. 1. the room is constantly deprived in much larger volume than by No. 2. The advantage derived from using stove pipe of small diameter, arises from the same cause, and whether the velocity of the current of heated air is diminished by the construction, position, or length of the pipe, or its volume is diminished by reducing the diameter, the same effect is produced in every case. VOL. III. M 4t) ON THE LOSS OP HEAT I am not in possession of the results of any experiments, if such have ever been made, to determine the ratio of friction experienced by air, when compared with water, in their pas- sage through pipes, under the same pressure. That air does, however, experience a diminution in its velocity from this cause, will not, it is supposed, be doubted, and this must affect, very materially, the current of air through pipes and chimneys. In practical hydraulics, it is well known, that, without alter- ing the column of pressure, the quantity of water discharged is greatly diminished, by merely lengthening the conduit-pipe. " Comparing the experiments on the flow of water through conduit-pipes, as recited in Bossuet's Hydrodynamique, I find, after making the proper reductions, that the velocity ofpro- jection from the bottom of a cistern, is diminished about five times in the passage through an horizontal tube of one inch in diameter, and fifteen feet long. Consequently, while one part of the actuating force is discharged from the orifice, twenty- four parts are consumed in gliding against the sides of the pipe. Every particle contained must hence have repeated its contact no less than twenty-four times, before it made its escape ; that is, the whole column of fluid must have inverted its internal arrangement at each interval of 7^ inches."* The principal article of fuel used in the United States, is forest wood, which, from necessity, or choice, will continue to be so in many sections of the country, notwithstanding the abundant supply of anthracite and bituminous coals already discovered in some of the States. The difficulty of consuming small quantities of anthracite coal in open grates, must operate to prevent its general intro- duction into use, unless this difficulty can be removed ; any suggestions, therefore, which may possibly tend to lessen this objection to an article of such vast importance to the commu- nity, will not be considered irrelevant to my subject. It is very well known, that no particular difficulty is ex- perienced, under ordinary circumstances, in consuming small * Mr. Leslie on Heat, 308, FROM DIFFERENT APPARATUS. 47 quantities of this coal in sheet iron cylinder stoves lined with fire brick; and it is as well known, that an equally small quantity of this coal cannot be consumed in an open grate. The inference, therefore, which should be dra\\'n from the knowledge of these facts, is, that the open grate is an impro- perly constructed apparatus to obtain the desired object, inde- pendent of the deleterious gas which it imparts to the room. The question which then presents itself, is, what are the quali- ties possessed by the former apparatus in which the latter is deficient ? In the former, the coal is known to be completely sur- rounded by a thick substance, which, when heated, retains it with great tenacity. The air admitted is in small quantity, and, from the construction of the stove, it is necessarily consi- derably elevated in its temperature, before it comes in contact Avith the burning body. We infer from these facts, that anthracite coal requires a very high temperature to produce ignition, and, as we know that combustion cannot take place without this prerequisite, the necessary means to effect it, are, consequently, indispensable. We also infer, that the commonly received opinion, that this coal requires a very large quantity of air, or " strong draught," to carry on its combustion, is not correct ; the converse of this opinion being nearer true ; and this may in part be demonstrated by an examination of a single piece of this coal which has been ignited. If we break the piece of coal, the interior will present its original black colour and lustre, with tlie exception of an inconsiderable portion near the surface ; the body of the coal being sufficiently dense to exclude the access of air, no combustion of its interior can take place, and, consequently, the quantity of air necessaiy to be admitted to the coals, is nearly proportional to the quantity of coal con- tained in their surfaces, but not in proportion to their positive quantity, as would be nearer the case, if this article were as pervious to air as charcoal. Any excess of air, therefore, is ihjurious in proportion as the quantity exceeds that which can unite with what is termed the combustible or base, inasmuch as it tends to reduce its temperature, and thereby renders it 48 ON THE LOSS OP HEAT less capable of rapid union with the air, to produce the combus- tion ; and as each successive portion of air in excess robs the combustible of its heat, we see the fire languish for a short period, and then expire, Although atmospheric air is generally necessary to support combustion, an excess of it, it is well known, will, in some cases, extinguish a burning body, as expeditiously as water ; and from this circumstance it may be inferred that, for ignition, the air requires to be heated as well as the combustible body. We may also infer, that the intensity of heat produced by the union of the two bodies will be proportional to the excess with which their united heats exceed their mean heat of ignition. Having had occasion, during the past winter, to warm two warehouses, of different sizes, and it being necessary that the temperature should be permanent during the night season, two cylinder sheet iron stoves, of ordinary construction, lined with fire brick, were procured, of different sizes, which were sup- plied with Lehigh coal. The construction of the stoves being favourable .to apply on a large scale what I had found so advantageous in my experi- ment stove, there being considerable space between the grate and the bottom of the ash pan, this space was converted into a reservoir for heating the air, by closing the apertures usually made for its admission in the front of the ash pan. During the igniting process, the ash pan was drawn out, but when this was effected, it was closed as perfectly as its construction would admit, leaving only the small crevices at its junction with the body of the stove for the admission of air, and although the largest stove usually contained more than half a bushel of coal, this supply of air was found ample for producing intense com- bustion, and the quantity of coal remaining on the grate un- consumed, was found to be much less than when the stove was supplied with a larger quantity of air, and a very important saving was made in the heat by the diminished quantity and velocity with which the current of heated air passed into th*e chimney. Very important improvements may be made in the construction of sheet iron stoves, for burning anthracite coal, TRO-M DIFFERENT APPARATUp. 4J> tod if provision is made for supplying the burning body with intensely heated air, any required quantity of coal may be con- sumed, and the present manner of lining them with thick bi'ick may be entirely dispensed with, by substituting either thin tiles, or a thin coating of clay lute, sufficient to preserve the iron from fusion or oxidation, and as this would present less obstruction to the speedy communication of the heat generated to the air of the room, consequently less would escape into the chimney. In examining the construction of the open parlour grate, we do not find in it one entire quality possessed by the close stove : the only one which bears any approach to similarity, is that three sides of the grate are lined with fire brick, but as the fourth is almost wholly exposed, its utility is thereby defeated. It is admitted that the combustion is very perfect and rapid, when the sheet iron door, or "6/oit'er," as it is technically termed, is applied to close the front of the grate ; and this must be a necessary consequence, as its application transforms the open grate into a powerful air furnace, by which the space for the admission of air is very much reduced, and the air is also, probably, reduced in quantity, this not being compensated by its increased velocity, and as the blower defends the body of coal in front from the cold air, to which it was before exposed, the required elevation in temperature is effected and main- tained without difficulty. It i§ only by radiation that any heat is imparted to the room from coal consumed in open grates, and as the radiated heat is known to be very small from the surface of that portion of coal which is exposed to the front or open part of the grate, the amount of heat imparted to the room would not probably be diminished, but rather increased, by using a thin plate of cast iron for the front of the grate, by which the difficulty of consuming small quantities of coal would be very much dimi- nished ; and this would not be less agreeable in its appearance than the equally sombre aspect presented by the unignited coal in the front of the generality of small grates, and particularly as the top of the coal would be exposed to view, and present a more luminous appearance. VOL. III. N 50 ON THE LOSS OF HEAT Although iron is a good conductor of heat, the plate suggested would hecome sufficiently heated to maintain the necessary temperature of the coal to carry on the comhustion of the sur- face exposed to it, with the exception of the points actually in contact with it, which would he unimportant ; and this being the case, its conducting power would, in other respects, be obviously advantageous, and no danger of melting the iron, in this situation, need be apprehended. If, however, danger from melting or oxidation of the iron is feared, as a flat plate of iron could not be permanently covered with any composition of clay, it should be made circular, and defended at the top and bottom by a flange projecting on the inside, the required thickness of the clay. In addition to the plate suggested to cover the front of the grate, a still further improvement might be made by enclosing the ash pit also, both of which might be done with one plate of iron, and the grate for sustaining the coal might rest upon cleats projecting from the interior, taking care to give sufficient room for the expansion of the grate, to pre- vent its being pressed outwards. A door for the removal of ashes and the admission of air would be required, by which the necessary quantity of air could be admitted without an ex- cess. This construction would also be favourable for heating the air which is to supply the combustible body, the advantage of which must be obvious, when we reflect on the necessity of cooling the burning body as little as possible. By the greater expansion of the air, the quantity which comes in contact with the burning body would be less in excess, at any one time, and better adapted to attain the object ; the contact being more frequent, from its increased velocity, the quantity actually united in any given time, would probably be greater, and more heat would consequently be produced. This construction, besides the advantages already stated, would be more cleanly than the open grate, would not require the blower, and could also be made use of for culinary purposes, which is a very desirable object to be attained. The construction of many grates is very objectionable, in an important particular not yet noticed, which is, making the FROM DIFFERENT APPARATUS. 51 receptacle for the coal of greater length than it has breadth or depth, by which the body of coal is not as much heated, and requires to be replenished more frequently to maintain the relative position of the coal, necessary to continue the combustion. A much better shape, and which would require less coal at any one time, would be in the proportions of twelve inches deep, to eight inches square at the top, and gradually diminished to six inches at the bottom, by which the heat generated in the combustion of the coal at the lower part of the grate, in its passage to escape into the chimney, would come in contact with nearly the whole body of coal, and keep it heated, which cannot be the case in the former shape, sup- posing the contents of the two grates, and the coal in each to be equal; and if we suppose them to be only half filled with coal, the position of that in the deep grate, will be very favourable for combustion, although less in quantity ; while that in the shallow grate, from the unfavourable situation in which it is placed, would scarcely burn at all. The advantage of placing the body of coal in a deep grate, as described, may be illustrated by the well known fact, that a stick of wood burns much more rapidly in a vertical, than in a horizontal position, and for the reason already described. Being well aware of the strong predilection in favour of those constructions which will permit the burning body to be seen, which, with other reasons, prevents the use of close stoves in many instances, and particularly where elegance is required, the necessity is apparent^ that some new construction should be devised, which can be substituted for the open grate, that will obviate the difficulty, not only of consuming anthracite coal in small quantities, for rooms of small dimensions, but, what is a still greater objection made to its use generally, that the quantity cannot be varied to meet the changes in the tem- perature of the atmosphere. In the plan which I will- venture to suggest, a partial com- promise must be made in the first particular stated, but all the others may be realized. In those instances where simplicity of construction is requir- 5^ ON THE LOSS OF HEAT ed, take a cylinder, or rather, an inverted conical frustum, of cast iron, of any required thickness and diameter, and of suffi- cient height to form the receptacle for the coal and ashes ; in- sert a grate at a sufficient height from the bottom to leave the required room for the ash pit, which should be provided with a door to remove the ashes and unconsumed coal, as usual in close stoves, and, also, to regulate the admission of air, which may be heated as in those stoves. This cylinder may be bricked in the ordinary manner on the outside ; and this can be done with greater facility than for the grate, and the cylin- der will remain more permanently fixed, as it will rest on the hearth. From the satisfactory experiments which have been made in double cylinder stoves, in which the interior cylinder is made of cast iron, without any coating of clay, it is not probable that this construction would require it. In those instances in which beauty of construction must be consulted, the ornamental parts or appendages to the open grates may be added ; the only change suggested, being the substitution of a cylinder, or other shape more desirable, of cast iron, in place of the open grate. The particular requisites necessary to be attended to in the construction of any apparatus intended for the combustion of anthracite coal, in small quantities, having been sufficiently, and, perhaps, tediously expatiated upon, those whose business it is to construct, will apply any suggestions which may be considered as valuable. Before closing my paper, I cannot forbear making a few desultory remarks ; and, first, on the commonly received opi- nion, that the " draught" of a chimney, or, more properly, the current of air through it, has greater velocity under one degree of barometric pressure than another, and that this is the cause why a combustible body burns better at one time than another. That the velocity of the current cannot be greater under one degree of atmospheric pressure than another, cseteris pari- bus, may be satisfactorily shown, by supposing a room, with one window open, in which is a fire-place and chimney, and, that the temperature of the air in the room, and that within the FROM DrPFERENT APPARATl'S. Sii chimney, is the same as the temperature of the atmosphere. No current of air would be found to pass either up or down the chimney, because the pressure of the column of air in thi' room would be counterbalanced by the equal pressure of the column of air within the chimney, and, consequently, both must remain stationary. If the temperature of the air within the chimney be elevated by any means, it expands, and become*; specifically lighter, and an ascending current will be produced ; and if the same elevation of temperature remain, and we sup- pose any change, however great, in the pressure of the atmo- sphere, as that change must, of necessity, operate on both columns of air, consequently, the velocity of the current must remain the same. The current of air through a chimney, be- ing wholly an artificial production, it^ velocity will always be proportional to its temperature above that of the exterior air, whereby the column of air in the chimney being rendered lighter than the exterior column, yields to its superior pressure, and thus the current is established. If the air in the room is warmer than that in the chimney, a descending current will be produced ; which shows the pro- priety of closing, during the winter season, those fire-places not used, to prevent the descent of cold air and smoke from the adjoining flues ; and the advantage of leaving them open during the hot season, when the exterior air is known to be at a lower temperature than the rooms with which they are connected. The existence of counter currents in a chimney, when in use, and properly supplied with air, spoken of by some writers on this subject, appears to be an illusion, produced by eddies in the air, at the sides of the chimney, as it enters from the room, as it would be difficult to assign any satisfactory cause for such an effect under the circumstances described. In tight rooms, where fire-places are left open, and are not in use, counter currents will exist, so long as difference in tem- perature exists between the air of the room and the external atmosphere*. In those instances where the room is too tight to admit air in sufficient quantity to supply the current necessary to take vol.. III. — o 54 ON THE LOSS OF HEAT off the smoke, a descending current is produced, and the smoke is driven into the room as a necessary consequence. The pas- sage of the external air through the small crevices of the room, is not only diminished by the increased friction which it sustains in passing through a large number of crevices, instead of only one of equal capacity, but the pressure is absolutely prevented from exerting its full influence in raising the column of air within the chimney, by which the smoke is made to ascend. If we open a window, the air within the chimney, which be- fore was the heavier column, will become the lighter, and con- sequently the current will be inverted, and the evil thereby instantly corrected. It is not my intention to notice the various causes which operate to produce what are termed "bad draughts" to chim- neys; there, is one cause however of considerable importance, which will be noticed. Chimneys which are new, are found very frequently, if not invariably, to smoke, when an attempt is made to use them before they become perfectly dry. This being attri- buted to their bad construction in many cases, alterations are consequently made, without knowing the true cause, which will generally be found to be entirely owing to their not being dry. The materials of which they are composed being damp, they are consequently good conductors of heat, and unless very large fires ai'e made, it is difficult to elevate the temperature of the air, throughout the chimney, sufficiently, to produce an ascending current ; but when the chimney becomes dry, and covered with carbonaceous matter, it presents a bad conducting surface, and, if then found to smoke, this may be attributed to its bad construction, for which, however, no necessity exists in any case, save that the highly important class of artisans, who wield the trowel, have, too generally, discarded science from their craft. A sufficient quantity of air must be admitted into every room to supply the demands of respiration and combustion, but any excess is injurious. The usual manner of admitting air for these purposes, through the joints or crevices of the doors, windows, and other parts of the room, appears very objectionable. FROM DIFFERENT APPARATUS. 55 as the cold air, thus admitted, is very annoying in its passage to the fire-place, and particularly to those seated near the doors or windows. Now, these inconveniences may be entirely avoided, and all parts of the room rendered equally comfortable, by fur- nishing the room, as is now done in some instances, with a supply -pipe, near the fire-place, for the admission of air. In this pipe there should be a valve, to regulate the quantity of air necessary to be admitted, by which the pressure of the external air, at the joints, or crevices, may not only be wholly taken off. but an outward current produced, through the crevices at the higher parts of the room. The objection which has been made to this manner of ad- mitting the air, that it does not change the air in the room sufficiently for respiration, appears to be gratuitous, and has been disproved by experience, in rooms of ordinary size, when not unusually crowded. An additional improvement, to obviate the inconvenience experienced by over-heated or crowded rooms, would be to furnish a ventilator in the chimney, near the ceiling ; but the most rational plan, in these cases, would be to remove the cause, by diminishing the fire. Having showai very clearly, during the preceding remarks, that the reason why a combustible burns better at one time than another, cannot be owing to any change in the velocity of the current within a chimney, in consequence of changes in the pressure of the atmosphere, it becomes obligatory on me, as an objector to this opinion, to assign a more satisfactory cause. The fact that combustible bodies generally burn better, when the barometer is at 30, than when it is at 28 inches, other things being equal, is admitted. The principal cause of this, appears to be, that the air is generally drier, and better adapted to produce rapid combustion, having less aqueous vapour mechanically mixed with it. Now moist air retards combustion, and cools the burning body, more than dry air, because it possesses a greater capacity for heat, and, consequently, requires more from the burning body to raise its temperature to / 56 ON THE LOSS OF HEAT the point of ignition. In chimney fire-places, it is generally observed, that wood fires burn most rapidly in cold weather: and, even while the air of th^ room is quite cold, they are known to burn very well. This fact will probably be urged, to disprove the necessity of heating the air, to produce more complete combustion in anthracite coal. It should be recol- lected, however, that wood ignites at a much lower tempera- ture, and, that in very cold w-eather, a much larger quantity is required to be in combustion at one time, than in moderate weather ; and, consequently, that the air within a few feet of the fire, and before it comes in contact with it, is more heated than it is at the same distance in moderate weather, when less fire is required. The intense heat produced by an air furuace, does not appear to be in consequence of an increase in the volume of air, as those furnaces which are said to have the strongest "draught," will be found to have the most contracted throats. But, by thus contracting the throat, the friction of the air is increased, and its velocity being also increased, the sound which is said to denote a strong "draught," follows, as a necessary conse- quence. The air being very much expanded from its increase in temperature, and its rapid escape in large volume, being prevented by the contraction of the throat, the contact with the combustible is not only prolonged, but the real quantity in contact, at any one time, may be supposed to be considerably diminished ; yet, this being more frequent and rapid, the union is more perfect, and, consequently, more intense heat is pro- duced. The superior light of an Argand lamp, is, probably, in con- sequence of surrounding the burner with a glass chimney, by which the current of air is considerably elevated in its tempera- ture, and the volume admitted is diminished, and not increased, as is generally supposed. Whether its increased velocity through the chimney is advantageous in the process of com- bustion, when abstractly considered, may be questionable; but it is evidently advantageous in dissipating the products of combustion, or rather, imperfect combustion, which would FROM DIFFERENT APPARATUS. 57 otherwise remain longer in contact with the flame. If the chimney be removed from the burner, the flame will he increas- ed to double its former length, yet the light is pale, and the quantity emitted is much less. When the burner is surrounded by the glass chimney, if the wick remain at the same height, the strength of light required can be better regulated by the quan- tity of air admitted, than in any other manner ; and for this purpose, these lamps should be furnished with delicate valves, and the most intense light will not be found, when the largest quantity of air is admitted. The advantage of elevating the temperature of the air, is demonstrated by the increased intensity of light, which is pro- duced by the button sometimes used in these lamps. VOL. III. — r 60 GENERAL TABLE. Common Kamei o["\Voo(Is anil Coals. WHITE ASH, APPLE TREE, WHITE BEECH, BLACK BIRCH, WHITE BIRCH, BUTTER-NUT, RED CEDAR, AMERICAN CHESNUT, . . . . WILD CHERRY, DOG WOOD, WHITE ELM, SOUR GUM, SWEET GUM, SHELL-BARK HICKORY, . . . PIG-NUT HICKORY, REU-HEART HICKORY, . . , WITCH-HAZEL, AMERICAN HOLLY, AMERICAN UORNBEAN, . . MOUNTAIN LAUREL, .... HARD MAPLE, SOFT MAPLE, LARGE MAGNOLIA I CHESNUT WHITE OAK, . . WHITE OAK, SHELL-BARK WHITE OAK BARREN SCRUB OAK, . . . PIN OAK, SCRUB BLACK OAK, RED OAK, BARREN OAK ROCK CHESNUT OAK, . . . YELLOW OAK, SPANISH OAK, PERSIMON, Sp. Gi-avities of dry Wood. Prodi AvoirdU' ot pois Charcoal pounds from of dry parts of Wood in] drj- cord. I Wood by weight. Fra:ci?nis americana, . . . Pyrus mains Fagus si/lvestris, Betula lenta, Betula popiiUfoUa, Jnglans cathartica, .... Junipenis virginiaiia, . . Castanea uesca, Cerasiis virginiana, .... Comiis JloriJa, Ulmns americana, J\^yssa st/lvatica, Liquidambar styracijlua, Juglans squamosa Jnghms porcinUf Jvglans lacijiiata? Hamamelis virginica, . . . Ilex opaca, Carpinits americauOy . . . Kalmia latifoHa Acer snccharinmn, Acer rubnim, •Magnolia grandifora, . . Qnercus prinus palustris, Qtiercus alba^ Qitercvs obtvsihba? .... Qiterctis catesb.^i, Quercus pahtstris, Querrus hanisteri, Quercns riibra^ Quercus Jerrugi neat . ■ ■ . Quercus pmius monticala, Quercus prinus acuminata^ Quercus falcata, Diospyros virginiana, . . .772 .697 .724 .697 .530 .567 .565 .522 .597 .815 .580 .703 .634 1.000 .949 .829 .784 .602 .720 .663 .644 .597 .605 .885 .855 .775 .747 .747 .728 .728 .694 .678 .653 .548 .711 Specific Gravities Coal. 3450 3115 3236 3115 2369 2534 2525 2333 2668 3643 2592 3142 2834 4469 4241 3705 3505 2691 3218 2963 2878 2668 2704 3955 3821 3464 3339 3339 3254 3254 3102 3030 2919 2449 3178 25.74 25 19.62 19.40 19 20.79 24.72 25.29 21.70 21 24.85 22.16 19.69 26.22 25.22 22.90 21.40 22.77 19 24.02 21.43 20.64 21.59 22.76 21.62 21.50 23.17 22.22 23.80 22.43 22.37 20.86 21.60 22.95 23.44 Founds of dry Coal bustiel. .547 .445 .518 .428 .364 .'237 .238 .379 .411 .550 .357 .400 .413 .625 ,637 .509 .368 .374 .455 .457 .431 .370 .406 .481 .401 .437 .392 .436 .387 .400 .447 .436 .295 .362 .469 Pounds Bushel: Charcoal I cord *)f diy Charcoal cord of dry 28.78 23.41 27.2S 22.52 19.15 12.47 12.52 19.94 21.63 28.94 18.79 21.05 21.73 32.89 33.52 26.78 19.36 19.68 23.94 24.05 22.68 19.47 21.36 25.31 21.10 22.99 20.63 ■22.94 20.36 21.05 23.52 22.94 15.52 19.05 24.68 Time 10° of Heat were maintained in the room bustion of oe pound of each article, Valo :ificd or quanti each article, compared »ith Shell- bark Hicko- ry as the standard. "79. 635 604 450 527 624 590 579 765 644 696 558 1172 1070 848 750 613 611 712 617 551 584 900 826 745 774 742 774 630 694 632 631 562 745 31 33 23 27 24 42 50 30 27 26 34 26 36 32 32 39 31 25 30 27 28 27 35 39 38 32 38 30 29 28 41 30 30 H. M. 6 40 6 40 6 6 6 6 6 40 6 40 6 10 6 10 6 40 6 20 6 6 40 6 40 6 50 6 10 6 20 6 6 40 6 10 6 6 10 6 30 6 20 6 20 6 30 6 20 6 30 6 20 6 20 6 6 10 6 20 6 30 GENERAL TABLE CONTINUED. ei Common Karnes of Woods and Coals. Botanical Names. YELLOW PINE, (SOFT.) . . , JERSEY PINE, , PITCMPINE, WHITE PINE, YELLOW POPLAK, LOMBARDY POPLAU, SASSAFRAS, WILD SERVICE, SYCAMORE, BLACK WALNUT, SWAMP WHORTLE-BERRY, LEHIGH COAL, LACKAWAXEN COAL, . RHODE-ISLAND COAL, . SCHUYLKILL COAL,. . . SUSQUEHANNA COAL, SWATARA COAL, WORCESTER COAL, . . . Pimis mills, Pinna inops, Pin us rigida, Pimis strobuSj Ijyriodendron tnlipifera, Popuhis dilatata, .... Jjatitits sassafras, , . . . Aronia arborea, Acer pseudoplatanus, . Juglans nigra Vaccinium corymbosum. CANNELCOAL, LIVERPOOL COAL, NEWCASTLE COAL SCOTCH COAL, K\RTHAUS COAl RICHMOND COAL STONY CREEK COAL, HICKORY CHAK0O.\L, . . . . MAPLK CHARCOAL, OAK CHARCOAL PINE CHARCOAL, COAK COMPOSITION OF TVVO~| PARTS LKHIG < COAL. I ONE CHARCOAL, AND f ONE CLAY, BY W EIGHT, J Speci6c Gravities of dry Wood. AToirfu. pounds 2463 2137 1904 1868 2516 1774, 2762 3964 2391 3044 3361 Product of Charcoal from 100 parts of Wood.b)- nvight. Time 10" of Bushels Heat were maintained 23.75 24.88 26.76 24.35 21.81 25 22.58 22.62 23.60 22.56 23.30 .333 .385 .298 .293 .383 .245 .427 .594 .374 .418 .505 1.494 1.400 1438 1.453 1.373 of t Charcoal cord of dry Wood. by the bustion of one pound of each ar ' Value of specified quantities of cfach article, compared with Shell- bark Hicku. 17.52 20.26 15.68 15.42 20.15 12.89 22.47 31.26 19.68 78.61 73.67 75.67 76 46 72.25 1.459 I 76.77 2,104 110.71 l.:40 1 331 1.204 1.140 1.263 1.246 1.396 .625 .431 .401 .285 .557 65.25 70.04 63.35 59.99 66.46 65.56 73.46 32.89 22.68 21.10 15 29.31 585 532 510 455 549 444 624 897 564 687 783 26 2,i 30 27 34 28 29 29 H. M. 6 30 6 40 6 40 6 40 6 10 6 40 6 20 6 20 6 30 6 20 6 30 13 10 13 10 9 30 13 40 13 10 11 20 7 50 10 30 9 10 9 20 9 30 9 20 9 20 9 50 15 15 15 15 12 50 Cord. 54 43 42 52 40 59 84 52 65 72 Tod. 99 99 71 103 99 85 59 100 Bushels. 230 215 198 191 208 205 243 166 114 106 7S 126 TABLE, 63 Exhibiting the results of experiments made to determhie the comparative loss of heat sus- tained by using apparatus of different constructions, for the combustion of fuel. Description of Apparatus used, Time the room was maintained at the same temperature in the combustion of equal weights of fuel compared with apparatus No 9. Weight of fuel re quired by each ap paratus to main- tain the room the same time and temperature com- pared with No. 9. CHIMNEY FIRE-PLACE, of ordinary construction for burning Wood. . OPEN PARLOUR GRATE, of ordinary construction for burning anthracite Coal, ........ OPEN FRANKLIN STOVE, with one elbow joint and 5 feet of six inch pipe placed vertically, the fire-place being closed with a fire-board, ........ CAST-IRON TEN PLATE STOVE, with one elbow joint and five feet of four inch pipe placed horizontally, entering the fire-board, SHEET IRON CYLINDER STOVE, the interior surface coated with clay lute, with one elbow joint and 5 feet of two inch pipe placed horizontally, entering the fire- board, SHEET IRON CYLINDER STOVE, as before described, with three elbow-joints, 4j feet, and 9 feet of two inch pipe, the whole placed as follows: 3 J feet horizontally, 5 feet vertically, for an ascending current, and 5 feet vertically for a descending current, entering the fire-board, . , . SHEET IRON CYLINDER STOVE, as before described, with three elbow joints, 4^ feet, and 9 feet of two inch pipe, placed as follows : nine inches vertically and 12j feet horizontally entering the fire-board, SHEET IRON CYLINDER STOVE, as before described, with nine elbow joints, measuring 13^ feet of two inch pipe, enter- ing the fire-board, SHEET IRON CYLINDER STOVE, as before described, with 42 feet oj two inch pipe, as used in the course of experiments on fuel, 10 18 67 78 82 95 100 1000 555 270 222 149 128 122 105 100 .^■^ No. II. A Grammar of the Language of the Lenni Lenape or Dela. war (^ Indians. Translated from the German Manuscript of the late Rev. David Zeisberger, for the American Phi- losophical Society., by Peter Stephen Duponceau. Presented to the Society, 2d December 1816. ?rti( ?rtanslatot*s J^teface. THE astonishing progress wiiich the comparative science of languages has made within the last thirty years is not among the least important of the many wonders which the present age has produced. The first strong impulse was given towards the close of the last century by the pub- lication of the Comparative Vocahulaiy*, compiled by pro- fessor Pallas, under the direction of the empress Catharine of Russia; a woik indeed better conceived than executed, but which nevertheless has been and still is of great use to th* learned, in the prosecution of philological studies. This work, which was left incomplete, being confined to the lan- guages of Europe and Asiaf, was followed in this country * Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia comparativa, augustissimse cura coUecta. Petrop. 1786 — 1787, 4to. t The empress, wishing her work to be completed, committed it to M. Theodore Jankiewitsch de Miriewo, with a view, it is presumed, that he should merely add to the European and Asiatic words which Pal- VOli. HI. R 66 GRAMMAR or THE LANGUAGE by Dr B. S. Barton's " New Views of the Origin of the Tribes and Nations of America." The object of the learned au- thor at first was to supply the deficiency of the s;reat phi- lological monument which the empress Catharine had bej2;un as far as related to the laDguages of America. Happy would it have been if he liad not suffered his imagination to draw him away from that simple but highly useful design ! But he conceived that by comparing the American vvith the Asiatic languages he could prove the origin of our Indians from the nations which inhabit the opposite coast of Asia ; and thus he sacrificed the real advantage of science to the pursuit of a favourite theory. He has nevertheless brought together, in a comparative view, fifty-two select words in about thirty or forty of our aboriginal idioms; by which he has shewn, that he might, if he pleased, have completed professor Pallas's Vocabulary, as far as it could have been done at that period, when we had not the means that have been obtained since. His was the first attempt to collect and compare to some extent* specimens of our Indian Ian- las had given the corresponding terms in the African and American lan- guages. But M. Jankiewitsch took upon himself to alter the whole"plan of Pallas's work, and, instead of pursuing the original system, which was to give the same Russian word in the different languages in due succes- sion, he made an alphabetical catalogue of exotic words, which he ex- plained into Russian, and in which he mixed all nations and languages together, with a view to shew how the same sounds received different meanings in different idioms. The empress was displeased, and the edition was suppressed. A few copies, however, have gone abroad, one of which is in the library of the American Philosophical Society. M. Jankiewitch did wrong in not following the plan of his predecessor, whose work he thus left incomplete, when its completion was the very object which was entrusted to his care. He should first have executed his task : he might afterwards have published a vocabulary on his own sys- tem, which would have been a useful counterpart to tiie other. Indeed these two parts seem essential to a good comparative vocabulary, pre- cisely as in a dictionary of two languages there must be a part beginning with each and explaining the words of each into the other. * Relandus, in the third volume of his dissertations, published voca- bularies of nine American languages, extracted from different authors. They are the Brazilian, Chilese. Peruvian, Poeonchi, Caribbee, Mexican, Massachusetts which he calls Virginian, Aigonkin, and Huron. OP THE LENNI liENAPE INDIANS. '*' 67 guae;es, and as such it is useful to philologists and entitl6d to respect. The next performance that appeared on a comprehensive scale on the suhjeci of laiisuaKes was the Mithridatks, the glory of our science. 1 have spoken of it at large in my Report to the Historical Conmiittee, made in the year 1819. on thf progress then made in the investigation com- mit'ed to me respecting the character and gra nmatical forms of (he langnagis of the American Ii'di*. Excellent as the Mithridates was at the time when it was pul)lished, such is the progress which the p.hilological science has made since that period, that it would require to he almost entirely written anew. But Vater is no more, and who will ven- ture to assume his vacant placef ? About the same ti ue appeared at Madrid, in six octavo volumes, "A catalogue of all the known languages, classed according to the drversity of their iilioms and dialects," by the At>be Don Lorenzo HeivasJ. It had been before pub- lished in Italian at Cesena, in the Roman states, as part of a great encyclopedical perlbrmance, by the same author, entitled "An idea of the universe," in 51 vohnnes quarto. The five last volumes (except the 17th which treats of the arithmetic of nations) relate exclusively to languages. The 17th volume contains the catalogue above mentioned. The 18ih is a treatise on the oriLtin, lormation, mechanism, and harmony of languages. 1*he I9th is entitled "A polyglot vocabulary of more than one hundred and fifty languages." And lasdy, the 3lst volume is a practical essay on lan- guages, with prolegomena, and the loi'd's prayer in more than three hundied languages and dialects^. It is piobal)le that the Spanish translation, though it would seem that it only bears the title of the I7th volume in the Italian, con- * Historical Transactions, Vol. I. p. xi.x. f Professor Vater died at Halle on the 16th of March 1826. i Discours sur i'Etude Pliilosophique des Langues, par M. de Volney, p. 31. § Eichhorn, Geschichte der neuen Sprachkunde, Vol. I. p. 31. 68 '^ GRAMMAR OF THE liANGSJAGE tains all the philological treatises of the author, or at least a great part of them. As, however, neitlier the original nor the translation have, to my knowledge, made their way imo this country, I can not say anything more upon the subject, nor can I form a judgment of the merits of the work itself: all I can say is, that it does not appear to have been written on the same plan with the Mithridates*, whose authors, how- ever, have occasionally availed themselves of its contents, but always with due acknowledgment. Since that period nothing has appeared, as far as T know, in Europe or elsewhere, embracing the whole science of languages; and indeed the works which I have cited cannot be said to be entitled to be so considered; for the Compa- rative Vocabulary is purely etymolo-rical, and the MiMiri- dates, although it takes in a much wider scope and fs.\ves a view of the structure and grammatical forms of the different languages, is in an important point entirely defi- cient, being confined exclusively to oral language, while the various modes by which nations express their thoughts in writing are. a no less interesting part of the philological science. I have heard of an Ethnographical Atlas by IM. Balbi, which has lately appeared at Paris, conta nina: a de- scription of the world geographically divided by languages * The title of this work in Italian is Idea deW Universo, Cesena, 1778 — 1787, 21 vols, quarto. The I7th volume is entitled Catalogo delle lingxie conosciute, e notizia delle loro affinita e diversita, 1784. The i8th, Origine, formazione, mecanismo, ed armonia degli idiomi, 1785. The 19th, Aritmetica delle nazioni e divisione del tempo fra gVorientali, 1786. The 20th, P'ocabu- lario poliglotto con prolegomeni sopra piii di 150 lingue. And the i ist, Saggio prattico delle lingue. con prolegomeni, e una raccolta di orazioni domenicali in piii de trecento lingue e dialetti, 1787. The exotic words are all written in Roman characters. As some of the public libraries of this country may wish to become possessed of this work or some of its parts, these titles are given in order to facilitate the means of obtaining them. I have not the Spanish title of the Madrid translation. The 1st volume was published in i ■^' !". and the ' th and last in 1806. Volney, Discours sur Vetude philosophique des langues, Paris, 1821. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 69 and dialects. The late M. Malte Brun, in a review to which he affixed his name*, spoke favourably of this performance. If well executed, it will afford considerable aid to the learned. It is very doubtful whether philology has yet reached that degree of advancement that will allow of its various parts being methodized and reduced to a general system. There are yet, perhaps, too many unsettled opinions to be fixed, too many prejudices to be dispelled, before we can take a clear, distinct, and comprehensive view of the various modes by which mankind communicate their perceptions and ideas to each other, through the medium of the senses, and trace with a steady eye their origin and progress. New and important facts are daily exhibited to us by the unwearied labours of learned men, which overthrow long established theories and turn in a g;reat measure the current of our ideas. By means of the light afforded in the works of Morrison, Marshman, Abel Remusat, and De Guignes,we have acquired a clear conception of the nature and character of the writ- ing of the Chinese, about which so many fal)les have been disseminated by missionaries and others, who echoed the boastings of the literati of that countryf. We no longer believe it to be an original written language, unconnected * Journal des Debats, 1st December 1826. f Les caractt res chinois sont signes immediats des idees qu'ils ex- priment. On dirait que cette ecriture aurait ete inventee par des muets qui ignorent I'usage des paroles. Nous pouvons comparer les caracteres qui la composent avec nos chiffres numeraux, avec les signes algebriques qui expriment les rapports dans nos livres de mathematiques, &c. Que Ton presente une demonstration de geometric exprimee en caracteres algebriques aux yeux de dix mathematiciens de pays diflerents; ils en- tendront la mt me chose : neanmoins ces dix hommes sont supposes parler des langues differentes, et ils ne comprendront rien aux termes par les- quels lis exprimeront ces idees en pariant. C'est la meme chose a la Chine ; I'ecrituie est non seulement commune a tous les peuples de ce grand pays, qui parlent des dialectes trcs differents, mais encore aux japonais, aux tonquinois, et aux cochinchinois, dont les langues sont to- talement distinguees du chinois. — Rijlexions sur les principes grnraux de Vart d'ecrire, &c. par M. Frt'ret, in the Memoirs of the Academy of Inscriptions and Belles Lettres, Vol. VI. p. 609. VOL.. III. s 70 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE with and indepenflent of speech, conveying ideas imme- diately to the mind, and which may be read in ail the diffe- rent idioms of the earth. Philology has taught us the impossibility of the existence of such a cosmopolite writing. The important discoveries of M. Champoilion the younger* have also drawn aside the mystic veil which concealed the real character of the writing of the ancient Egyptians; he has shewn it beyond all controversy to be chiefly alphal)etical5 with some auxiliary abbreviations of the hieroglyphic kind, such as we use in our almanacs to represent the sun, the moon, and other planets, and the signs of the zodiac, and in our books of mathematics to express certain words wliich often recur in the science. From all these lights it seems to result, that a purely ideographical system of writing is a creature of the imagination, and cannot exist anywhere i)ut for very limited purposes. The paintings of tite Mexicans, as they are called, remain to be investigated, in order to tix our ideas on this intt;resting subject. This task ou2;ht properly to belong to the learned societies and individuals of this con- tinent, who, it is to be hoped, will emulate those of the old world in prosecuting researches so interesting to the philolo- gical sciencef. In this pursuit the method which M. Cliam- poUion has followed of making the oral language subservient to the study of the written characters cannot be too strongly recommended ; for it is by audible sounds that the ideas of * Precis du systeme hieroglyphique des anciens egyptiens, par M. Champoilion le jeune, Paris, J 824. 1 Vol. 8vo, 410 pp. with a volume of plates. f It is now very difficult to procure original specimens of the Mexican paintings; the government of that country having lately established a museum in their capital where all that can be collected are to be pre- served, and taken measures to prevent any being exported to foreign countries. Our learned associate, Mr Poinsett, minister to that republic not only of our government but of science, gives us reason to hope that correct fac similes can be obtained, by means of which this study may be pursued to a certain extent ; but certainly not with the same ad- vantage as in tlie city of Mexico, where the ancient language is still in use, and where a large collection of written monuments will be at all times accessible. OF THE liENNI t^ENAPE INDIANS. 71 mankind are eml)odied, and acquire an outward form to the ear and an inward t'ortn to the inin 1 ; while writina; is but a secondary mode of communication, much more limited in its oljjfcts and use, and whicli is in necessary connection with the oral signs ot ideas. It seems idle at this day to talk of a written language, entirely independent of speech, and unconnected wiih it. There is little reason to doubt but that such a connection will be discovered in the iVIexican writing, as it has been m the Egyptian a'ld Cliincse. Auxiliary to tliese vast lalmurs, Kurope has produced, since the beginnini; of the present century, a great nuinber of grammars and dictionaries of languages, which till then were little known, and some of them not at all*. Several of those whidi had lieen composed by the catholic mission- aries, and either never pulilished or printed ■solely for the use of the missions, have lieen drawn foi th from their re- cesses, and pul)lished with learned notes and ad iitions. Among them we remark the Chinese d ctionary of Father Ba«;uages of Asia. The same may be said of the Melanges Asiatiques of M. Remusatf, and the Memoires relaiifs a I'Asie of M. Kla- prothj. The Asia Poiyglotta of the latter is a work of great merit§. There is also in London, as we are informed, an Asiatic Society lately established, but their memoirs have not yet reached us. It is said that the sacred scriptures, or parts of them, have been translated into one hundred and fifty different lan- guages or dialects by the exertions of the British, Russian, aud American Bil)le Societies. The christian missionaries of different sects and countries, and the European and American navigators and travellers, have immensely in- creased our stock of vocal)ularies and other specimens of languages hitherto unknown. Among the latter we are bound to notice lieutenant John White of the United States navy, who brought to this country, from Cochin China, a comparative vocabulary of the Chinese and Cocliin Clii- * Essai sur le Pall, ou langue sacree de la presqu'isle au dela du Gange, avec 6 planches. Par E. Burnouf & Chr. Lassen. Paris. 1826. f Melanges Asiatiques, ou choix de morceaux de critique relatifs aux religions, aux sciences, &c. des nations orientates. Par M. Abel Remusat, 2 vols, Svo. Paris, 1815. f Mt'moires relatifs a J'Asie, contenant des recherches historiques, geographiques, et philologiques sur les peuples de I'orient. Par M. J. Klaproth. 2vols, 8vo. Paris, 1824 — 1826. § Asia Poiyglotta von Julius Klaproth. 1 vol., quarto, with an atlas of languages, folio. Paris, 1823. OP THE LENNl LENAPE INDIANS. 73 nese languai^es, which he has deposited in the Marine East India Company's Museum at Salem in Massachusetts, an extract from which is subjoined to the History of his Vf.y- age to the China Sea*. It is hoped that the Boston Academy of Arts and Sciences will cause the whole to be puHished in their valuable Transactions. It will be interesting not only to the learned of this country, but also to those of Kurope ; as it not only shews the degree of affinity in the idioms of the two nations, Chinese and Cochin Chinese, but also in what manner the characters of the former are emj)loyed lo represent the words of the latter, when they differ in sound or in sense : It proves to demonstration that the Chinese characters cannot be read alike in every language; not even in those which have the greatest reseml)lance to that of China and may be considered in a measure as Chinese dialects. Thus learned and industrious men are collecting in all parts of the world the valuable materials out of which is to be erected the splendid edifice of Universal Philology. Various attempts have been made to reduce this science into a body of doctrine, but none has completely succeeded, because the facts on which it rests have not yet been sufficiently ascertained. Innumerable works have been written on the origin of language, while the greatest number of the idioms of the earth were entirely unknown. Theories have been accumulated instead of facts, every one of which had its day until superseded by some newer and more fashionable sys- tem. Now and then some gifted men pierced through the cloud of darkness by the mere force of their intuitive genius, * History of a Voyage to the China Seas. By John White, Lieutenant in the U. S. Navy. Boston. Wells & Lilly. 1823. This book has been since reprinted in London. But the booksellers, probably for want of Chinese characters, have left out of their edition all that relates to the Cochin Chinese language. Thus in our American edition of Barrow's Travels in China, the specimens of Tartar characters have been omitted, because the booksellers did not think it expedient to have them cast or engraved. In this manner trade prospers at the ex- pense of science. VOL. III. T 74 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE and their writings have not a little contributed to the ad- vancement of knowledge. Among those we must place in ihe first rank tiie illustrious president De Brosses, whose excellent treatise on the mechanical formation of language* contains more .correct reasoning than any other work on the same subject. Nor can I pass over in silence the liglits that are diffused through the Elements of Ideo- logy of oiu- venerated associate Destutt Tracyt, so fruit- ful of important principles that still remain to be applied to various unsettled points of our science. But. with these helps and many others that could be mentioned, we are not yet prepared for a general elementary tieatise on phi- lology taken in its whole extent : more facts are yet to be collected, and inveterate theories sulimitted to the test of truth, before this great work can be undertaken with hopes of success. Philology in fact, in the sense in which I wish to be undei'stood, is of immense extent. It not only embraces oral language in all its varieties, but also writing and all the signs by means of which ideas are communicated through the organs of sight. The language of signs which the deaf and dumb make use of is alone a science. But setting these aside, and confining ourselves to speech pro- perly so called, we find in that alone a boundless field of inquiry. We are arrested in the outset by the uniuimbered languages and dialects which are spread over the surface of the earth, of which a very few only can be acquired by any individual. But philology comprehends them all, it ob- liges us to class and compare them with each other, f )r "which we have no other aid than the knowledge more or less perfect of a few, and a superficial view of the rest. The philologist must learn to catch the prominent traits by wiiich the different modes of speech are distinguished, * Traite de la formation mecanique des langues et des principes physiques de lYtymoIogie, 2 vols, 12mo. Paris, An IX. f Elements d'ideologie, par A. L. C. Destutt Tracy, Senaleur, 3 vols, Svo. Paris. 1804—1805, OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. ■ 75 and for that must trust to the labours of others in the shape of grammars, dictionaries, vocabularies, and other works of detail. This is enough to occupy a whole life. But it is not all. The single branch of philology which relates to oial languages has its subdivisions, eacii of which niay lie considered as a separate science: There is phono- i^oGY, which teaches us to distinguish the various sounds produced by the human voice, with their tones, accents, and infltctions, to analyze, class, and compare them with each other, and represent them, as nmch as possil)le, by visible signal*; KTVMoLOGv, or the know|ed.{e of those constituent parts ol' laimuage that we call rvords. by means of which we are enabled to trace the affinities of the different idioms of ihf t-arth, and the tiliation of the numerous races and fami- lies of men who inhaiiit it ; and lastly, ideology, or the com- paiative study ol the '^^rammat-cal forms and idioinatic con- struction of languages, by which we are taught to analyze and distingUiS!) t.he different shapes in wliich ideas combine them-^elves in order to fix perceptions in our minds, and transmit them to those of others; while we observe with wch I would translate into Knglish. give me your pretty little pau\ or what a preftif little paw you have! This word is compounded in the following manner: K is the inseparable pronoun of the second person, and may be rendered by thou or thy, according to the context. Uli (pronounced oolee) is part of the word wulit, which signifies handsome or pretty. It has also other meanings not necessary to be here specified. Gat is part of the word wichgat, which signifies a leg or paw. Schis is a diminutive terminaUon, and conveys the idea of littleness. * Hist. Trans, p. 405. OF THE LENNl LENAPE INDIANS. 83 Thus in one word the Imlian woman says to the animal, Thif pretty little paw ! and according to the tone in which she speaks, and the gestures which she maiies, either calls upon it to present its foot, or simply expresses her fondling admiration. In the same manner Pilape, a youth, is formed from Pilsit. chaste, innocent, and Le?iape, a man*. It is dif- ficult to find a more elegant combination of ideas in a single Word of any existing idiom. 1 do not know of any language out of this part of the world in which words are compounded in this manner. The process consists in putting toi^eiher poitions of different words, so as to awaken at the same lime in the mind of the hearer the various ideas which ihey separately express. There are prol)ahly principles or rules pouting out the particular parts that are to t)e selected in order to form the compound locution. Sometimes a whole syllahle, and perhaps more; so letimes a single sound, or, as we would call it, a single letter: to discover those rules would require a great jjroficiency in the language, and at the same time a very sound discriminating mind ; qualities which are seldom found united ; perhaps also the ear, an Indiati ear, is the guide which is generally followed; but the ear has also its rules, to which the mind imperceptilily con- forms: however it may he, this is an interesting^ fact in the natural history of human language, justly entitled to the atten- tion of philologists. This is not the only manner in which the American In- dians combine their ideas into words. They also have many of the forms of the languages which we so much ad- mire, the Latin, Greek, Sanscrit, Slavonic, ^c. mixed with others peculiarly their own. Their conjugations are as re- gular as those of any language that we know; and for the proof of tliis I need only to refer to the numerous paradigms of Delaware verbs that are contained in this grammar, in which will be found the justly admired in- * MS. letter of Mr Heckewelder, 22d of October 1818. 84 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE flections of the languages of ancient Europe. Although they do not appear to have the numerous tenses which the Greek boasts of, they are not, however, deficient in the expression of the relations of the present, past, and future to each other. There .is no shade of idea in respect to the time, place, and manner of action which an Indian verb cannot express, and the modes of expression wliich they maiie use of for those purposes are so numerous, that if they were to be considered as parts of the conjugation of each verb, one single paradigm tnight fill a volume. Tims n'mitzi signifies 1 eat, in a general sense, and n'mamitzi. I am eating at this moment. Each of these verbs is separately conjugated in all its forms. Indeed, the multitude of ideas which in the Indian lan- guages are combined with the verb has justly attracted the attention of the learned in all parts of the world. It is not their transitive conjugations expressing at the same time the idea of the person acting, and that acted upon, that have excited so much astonishment. They are found also, though not with the same rich vaiiety of forms, in the Hebrew and other oriental languages. But when two verbs with intermediate ideas are combined together into one, as in the Delaware ti^schif/giwipoma, I do not lily private sul)scril)ers, among vxhom the late Ho- nourabh- Elias Boudinot of New Jersey was conspicuous. The original manuscript of this grannnar the author order- ed by his will to remain deposited in the library of the United Brethren at Bethlehem, where it now is. In the * Onondagoische Grammatica. MS. 4to, pp. 17G ; and a shorter one also in 4to, pp. 87. f Essay of an Onondago Grammar, or a short introduction to learning the rinondago alias Maqua tongue. MS. 4to, pp. 67. X Delaware and English Spelling Book, for the use of the Missions of the United Brethren. Philadelphia, 177f) and 1806. The second edition is much improved, and contains pp. 179, l2mo. § Ehelittonhenk li amemensak gischitak Elleniechsink, untschi David Zeisberger. Philadelphia, 1803, pp. 115, IJmo. II A Collection of Hymns for the use of the Christian Indians of the Mission of the United Brethren in America. Philadelphia, 1803, pp. 358, l2mo. These hymns are all in the metre of German poetry, and Eire to be sung to German tunes. It would have required more genius than falls to the common lot of man to have discovered a rhythm suited to the character of the language, and melodies adapted to it. Such diversified talents are seldom to be looked for in those who devote their lives to the conver- sion of savage nations. IF Elekup Nihillalquonk woak Pemauchsohalquonk Jesus Christ, seki ta lauchsitup wochgidhakamike. New York, 1821, pp. 222, 12mo. 88 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE year 1816, our late lamented associate, the Reverend John Heckewelder, having been requested to aid our Historical Committee in tlieir investigation of the forms and struc- ture of the Indian languai!;es, was kind enougli, with the permission of his superiors, to confide to them that va- luable manuscript for their temporary use. The Commit- tee ordered it to be translated into English ; and 1 willingly undertook the task : various circumstances have hitherto prevented its appearance. Several learned men, however, both in Europe and in this country, having repeatedly ex- pressed their wish to see it in print, its publication could no longer be delayed. The reader must not expect to find here a philoso- phical grammar, as this was not made for the use of philo- sophers, l)ut of young missionaries — its object was entirely practical. The author never dreamt tiiat the theory of the Indian languages would ever become the subject of philo- sophical study. He has followed the usual divisions of the parts of speech ; but has not endeavoured, like the Spanish American grammarians, to force the Indian forms of lan- guage into too close an analogy with our own. To a cer- tain dogiee it is necessary to explain the forms of the Indian languages by those to which we are accustomed ; to do otherwise would be following the old exploded me- thod of teaching the Latin language by means of a gi am- Tnar written entirely in Latin ; at the same time, the peculiar forms of the new idiom ought to be pointed out in a clear and intelligible manner, and their principles analyzed so as to lay down their rules, when differing from our own, with the greatest possible perspicuity. It were to be wished that our author had devoted a chapter to the syntax and phraseology of the language ; but that, I presume, he left to be acquired by practice. Upon the whole, however, 1 think his grammar the best that I have seen of an Ame- rican dialect. It is copious and rich in examples, and his paradigms of the conjugatiuns of Indian verbs are suf- ficiently numerous to give a correct idea of the manner in OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 89 which that part of speech is constructed. The personal verbs or transitions are fully and clearly explained. Indeed, it may be said that he has the merit of clearness lhrou2;iiout ; a merit so very rare, that it deserves to be noticed. Those who before him have treated of Indian languages have either not always understood themselves, or not been very anxious to he understood by others. I do not even except the vene- rable Eliot, whose Grammar of the Language of the Massa- chusetts Indians is not free from obscurities ; soine of which the present one of its kindred dialect, the Dtilaware, will help to clear up. The Indian words in this Grammar are to be pronounced according to the powers of the German alphabet, which Mr Zfisberger thought proper to adopt*. It has long been a desideratum in the philological science, that there should be a uniform mode of writing exotic words, in order to convey, as much as possible, the same idea of their sounds, at least to the learned, through the civilized world. But, independ- ent of the numerous difficulties which niturally attend such a df sisn, from the almost entire impossibility of conveying to the mind through the eye the idea of sounds which the "ear never heard, an ill understood national pride makes every nation desire that their own alphabet should be chosen as the m.dium of communication. The least |)rejudiced on this sulyect insist at least on the Roman character being univer- sally used. The celebrated Volney wished all the Oriental * The translator has preserved the orthography of the original, except that he has substituted the letter y for the German j, because y has the same sound according to the English and German pronunciation. Also where the author has introduced the vowel o after w, in order to shew that the latter is to have the English and not the German sound, and so vvrites woagan to be pronounced wagan, the translator has suppressed the o, thinking it sufficient to give notice that w consonant is always to be pronounced as in English, whether it be followed by another conso- nant or by a vowel. In the former case a sheva or mute vowel is interposed between the two sounds : thus, wdanis (daughter) is pronounced lo'danis and not oo-dams. FollowingHhe same principle, where the author writes wiquoam (a house) the translator writes wikwam, which is precisely the sound which Zeisberger meant to represent. VOL. III. Z 90 GRAMMAR OF THK LANGUAGE languages to be written in tliat character, and not only pro- posed a plan to that effect, but left a considerable legacy by his will to be employed in premiums to those who should suggest the best means of carrying it into execution. This shews how far a favourite idea may take hold of the mind of a man, however distinguished by his genius and talents. It is not for those languages that have already an alphabet and an orthography of their own that a uniform mode of writing their words is desirable ; uniformity in this respect, even among the nations that use the same characters, is ab- solutely unattainable. All that is desired is a common mode of communicating the sounds of unwritten languages, in or- der to facilitate the comparison of their woidsand gramma- tical forms with each other with the greater exactness. To this object the powers of our English alphabet are not ade- quate ; because its vowel sounds are uncertain and a 2;reat part of them are represented by diphthon2:s. But most nations seem to think that their national honour is concerned in forcing their own orthography upon the learned world. Thus since the study of the Chinese language has become fashionable in Europe, the Portuguese mode of spelling Chi- nese words, to which all were before accustomed, has been entirely abandoned, and the Englisli and French have each adopted the orthography of their own lansjuage ; so that it is sometimes difficult to recognize the same words in the giam- mars and dictionaries whicli they have respectively pul^lished. In this country we are free from this prejudice; tiierefore my learned friend Mr Pickering, with tlie liberality wliich characterizes an American man of science, has pioposed a uniform mode of writing the words of our Indian languages*, which 1 am happy to find has been almost universally adopted by our Missionaries not only on this continent, i)ut in the South Sea Islands. I am also informed that our go- * An Essay on a uniform Orthography for the Indian Languages of North America. By John Pickering. PuWiished at Boston in the Me- moirs of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences, Vol. IV. p. 319. OF THE LENNr LENAPE INDIANS, 91 vernment, who, it is repoited and generally believed, are preparing to pulilish an important national work on the languages of the Ind ans who inhabit these United States on the model considerably improved of that of the empress Ca- therine, have recommended to the agents and other persons employed in collecting the materials to conform themselves as much as possil)le to the alphabet proposed by Mr P ck- ering. Tluis America will have the honour of giving an example which it is to be hoped will be more generally followed. 'Ibis alphabet is entirely formed of our Roman characters. The vowel sounds are those of the Gt^rman and Italian lan- guages. The nasals are expressed by a comma or cedilla ur der each nasal vowel, after the Polish manner. The En- glish sh is preserved, and its correlative zh is adopted for the sound of the French and Portuguese j. The compound consonant sounds are represented by their component signs, thus ks, ksh. ts, tz. ^c. The Author has been care- ful not to introduce any new characters. Even the sound of the Greek x and Spanish 70/a is expressed in the most usual manner by kh ; and although there is a real diffe- rence between these two sounds, the one being k, and the other g aspirate, Mr Pickering did not think it ne- cessary to appropriate to each a separate character, well knowing that approxinmtion is all that can be reached, and that every attempt to distinguish nice differences of sound would eventually prove vain. 'I'hus with a liberality which cannot be too much praised, Mr Pickering lias selected among the various powers which the nations of Europe have given to the characters of the R(MT)an alphabet those which best suited his purpose, without shewing favour or partiality to any country, and least to his own. His plan, moreover, is simple and easy of execu- tion. If it is not the l)est that could possibly be devised, it is the one that is most likely to be certainly adopted. Bril- liant tlieories and highly complicated schemes may dazzle for a while : but simplicity in plans presented for genera! 92 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGTTAGE practice is the mark of true genius, and must ultimately pre- vail. Before I conclude this preface, I beg leave to say a few words respecting the present translation. When, eleven years aso, I undertook to make it for the Philosophical So- ciety I had never turned my attention to the Indian lan- guages, and I was entirely ignorant of their forms and con- struction. I therefore thought of nothing beyond a close and literal translation of the manuscript. I soon per- ceived, however, that it had been written on loose sheets, which had been bound together after the Author's death by persons not conversant with the subject. It also became clear to me that Mr Zeisberger had not given the last finish- ing hand to his work. He probably meant to have con- densed it, and to have exhibited the various forms of the conjugations of the verbs in a lesser number of paradigms. Tiiese observations struck me as I went on with the transla- tion which 1 finished as I had begun it. I left out only one chapter, in which the author explained the manner of ex- pressing the German compound verbs into the Delaware language; as it would have required too much labour to adapt it to the English forms of speech, and would have participa- ted in too great a degree of an original composition. I regret, however, that I did not attempt it. It is now too late, as Mr Zeisberger's manuscript has been returned to the Bethlehem library. I had no idea at the time that this grammar would ever be published. Since the Society came to a resolution to commit it to the press, it became my duty to revise what I had done; I saw that it would require to l)e almost entirely recast, and above all to be considerably abridged, in order to give it that form which alone could satisfy the taste of the present age. But on this 1 could not venture. For more than ten years, indeed, I have applied myself to the study of the Indian languages, and have become more conversant with their structure and forms than those who have not paid a similar attention to the subject. Besides the usual helps OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 93 of grammars, dictionaries, vocaliularies, ^c. I liave had the benefit of correspondences and personal comniunicaiions with Indians, missionaries, and otiier p« rsons from various parts of this hemisphere, more or less skilled in those id oms. With regard to the Delaware, f have received much infoimation from my deceased friend Mr Heckewelder, whom I always found ready to answer my queries, and solve my doultts, whenever I thought proper to communicate them to him. If he were still alive, I would not have hesitated, with his kind assistance, to have presented this gram.nar in a more acceptal)le form to the* public. Without such aid I could not undertake it, being in want of that practical know- ledge which can only be acquired by a long residence among the Indians. Another reason has induced me not to make too free with this grammar, although 1 ain saiisfitd that it might have been advantageously al)ridg(d. Seveial genilomt-n, par- ticularly of the army, who are stationed or reside in the ■vicinity of the Indian country, and const quently have much intercourse with the alwiigines. have expressed a wisti that Mr Zeisberger's Work should he given in as ample a form as poss hie, as it would be of great use to them in studying not only the language of the Delawares, but also those of the Chippevvays, Menomonics, and other cognate idioms. Therefore it is to be considered that it is not only intended as an exhibition of 'the forms of the Indian dialects in a scientific point of view, but also as a 2;uide to those who may l)e engaged in tiie study of this language. To them the multiplicity of examples which others may think unne- cessary will be ol" great value, as there are no other writ- ten sources from which they can derive information, if we except Mr Zeisberger's Spelling Book, which has long l)een out of piint, and his Translation of Liebeikuim's Harmony of the Gospels, which was printed only for the use of mis- sionaries, and is not to be purchased. Neither is the Trans- lation of St John's Epistle by Dencke to be had in the shops. It is much to be regretted that a certain number of copies VOL. III. — 2 A 94 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE of such works are not put in the hinds of booksellers for sale. They would be purchased, at leas', by the pul)lic libra- ries of this country, and perhaps also, of Europe. For tliese reasons I have ventm-ed upon fnv alterations of the Manuscript now published. I have, however, some- times varied frou) the Author's method, when I thought it too defeclive, and I have modified his explanations, so as to give them (as I thought) a greater degree of clear- ness and precision, and make thein more easily under- stood. I have even occasionally, always with the same view, added some facts and illustrations which were not in the text. But this I have chiefly done in the form of noies at the bottom of the page, under my own name and responsil)ility. Upon the whole, I have taken no liberty with the Author's work which I was not sure he would have approved of if he had been liviu^. As a fair copy of the original manuscript of this translation still re- mains in the Society's library, the alterations which I have made nmy be seen and judged of by all who will take the pains to compare it with the one now pulilished. I hope this Grammar will convince those who may still be incr edulous, that 1 did not go too far when I asserted in my Report to the Historical Committee that the Indian lan- guages are rich in words and grammatical forms, and that their general structure displays as much order and me- thod as that of any of those that exist on the face of the earth. They are higldy synthetical, and coinbine ideas toge- ther in a maimer so artificial and so unifoi mly consistent with the rules of analogy, that it is not to be wondered at if men, reasoning d prioj^i, have thought it impossible that such combinations could proceed from the minds of savages. As the fact cannot be denied, the pride of civilization has at last found out that it is very natural that it should be so ; because analysis is the most difficult operation of the human mind, and barbarous nations l)eins incapable of it, their lansuaaies must necessarily be synthetical. But Mr Adam Suiith, who first broached this doctrine in a disser- OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 95 tation on the orisiin of langiiase subjoined to his Theory of Moral Seniinif nis. and who has been highly applauded for this discovery, d'd nnt sinely consider that before the huliaiis could have comliined their ideas, and arranged them in re- gular order in the forms in which tiiey now appear, tl'.ey must first have analysed them, otlierwise they could not liave discovered their analogies and adhered to them so closely. But in this they did not proceed as philosophers would have done in their closets; the operations of nature are much quicker tiian those of science, and perhaps a'e not the less sure. 1 leave it to others to ex|)lain the details of this pro- cess; my task is to exiiiijit the facts, not to trace them to their oiigin, I am rn)t an enthusiastic or exclusive admirer of the In- dian lansuagfs, and am far from l)eing disposed to assert that their fornis are superior to those of others. Compa- risons on such sulyects appear to me idle, and can lead to no useful results. Language is the instruinmt of thought and must always he adtquate to its object. Therefore no language has yet l)eeti and |)robably never will be found, des- titute ot forms; foi' without them none can exist. By forms I do not mean only inflexions of words and the like; I mean every regular and methodical arrangement of the ele- ments of speech for practical purposes. This the Chinese have as well as the Delawari s, although in vuliiar accepta- tion it is commonly said that the Cliinese idiom has no forms. Like every thing else in nature, the forms of lan- guage, are various, and in that variety consists the chief beauty of the works of tiie Almighty Creator. A lan- guage, it is true, may be more or less adapted to certain objects. Some are more poetical than others, while there are those which are better suited to the perspicuity of logical reasoning. But it is only after they have been moulded by the hand of genius that this particular cha- racter becomes apparent. Who can say what Homer would have produced if he had had for his instrument the language of the Lenni Lenape? This, however, we 96 GRAMMAR OF THE liANGlTAGE may with safety assert; that he would have been able to say more in fewer words, than even in his own admirable Greek. Every mode of si)eech has its peculiar qualities, susceptiltle of beinii; developed and improved l)y cultivation ; but, like flowers and plmts, all languages have a regular organiza- tion, and none can be called barbarous in the sense wliicli presumption has affixed to that woid. An unorgaiiiz"d lan- guage would be a chaos, unfit to be used as the niedium of intercourse between men. No memory could retain a long list of arbitrary words, if order and method, founded on analogy, did not come to its aid. Grammatical forms, therefore, are as necessary to human languages as the or- gans of hfe and vegetation are to animals and plants. Nei- ther could exist without them. In the idiom before us we have an example of what na- ture can produce, unaided hy the theories of science and the refinements of art. 'Co assign to eacli its proper share in the composition of such noble instruments as the languaijjes of men is not among the least important questions wliich philology presents to our inquiry. It deserves to be tho- roughly investigated. The result, it is true, will be morti- fying to our pride; but that pride, which makes us ascribe so much to our own efforts, and so little to the silent and unperceived operations of nature, is the greatest obstacle that we meet in our road to knowledge, and we catinot pro- ceed very far in the discovery of natural causes while we remain disposed to attribute every thing to our so much boasted civilization, our limited sciences, and our mimic arts. Of THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 97 INTRODUCTION. T HE Delaware Indians have no / nor r in their language*. The letters must be prdnounced as in German or Latin. The language has no resemlilance to any of ours ; it has, however, its own fi\ed rules, to which those must conform who will speak intelligilily. Whoever will speak Indian must learn to think in Indian. This treatise will greatlv facilitate those who wish to learn this language, if thev wll only impress themselves with the rules, which are neithei- numerous nor difficult. In propor- tion as the knowledge of ihem is acquired, a greater plea- sure will be found in this study, and every day new treasures will be discovered; but above all. there must be a desire to learn, without which nothing can be effected. * JSTote by the Translator. — The Delawares who inhabited Pennsylvania, while it was under the Swedi-h doiiiinioD, used the r instead of the /. They called themselves Renni Renape. See iMtheri Cutrchismus, Oefwersat pao American- Vlrginiike Spraoket. Stockholm, 1696. This race appears to be extinct. VOL. III. — S B 98 GRAMMAR OP THE I.ANGVAGB GRAMMAR. SHALL treat in this essay of the different parts o^ speech, to wit : * Noun, Protioun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Con- junction, and Interjection. I Nouns are of two kinds, substantive and adjective. Of the JVoun Substantive. The Indians have no declensions, properly so called ; that is to say, the nouns are not declined by inflections, as in the Latin and Greek, except in two cases, the vocative and the local. In the others the place of these terminations is supplied by the relative position of the noun, or by gram- matical forms or combinations of the verbs and other parts of speech, as will be shewn in the following examples. These grammatical forms or combinations are peculiar to the Indian languages, and I believe are not to be found in any others. They will be more fully explained under their proper heads. At present I shall only shew in what manner what are commonly called the cases of nouns are expressed or indicated. JVominative. This case (if it may be so called) has no particular form or inflection. It is simply the name of the substantive, as in English. Lenni, the man | Sipo or sipu, the river Ochqueu, the woman Getanittowit, God Wikwam, the house | Gischuch, the sun. ' JVote by the Translator. — The Author does not speak of the article ; yet there is one in the Delaware language, the article mo, which is used either in a definite or indefinite sense, as m'hittuck, a tree or the tree. The Minsi say michluk. This article was discovered by the Trans- lator in the Massachusetti language, and on inquiring of Mr Heckewi'ldc' , he said that the same article was also in the Delaware, but wa« not frequently used, because the word was sufficiently understood without it. See his letter to the Translator in the notes to Eliot's Grammar, 11th Mas- sachusetts' Historical Collections, Second Series, p. xv. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 99 [of nouns.] Genitive. The genitive is expressed by placing the noun employed in that sense immediately before that which is used in the nominative. Sometimes also by prefixing to the nominative the inseparable pronoun of the third person w, as we say in English John his book for John's book. Getannirtowit quisall, God'3 son , Nihitlalquonk wtanglowagan*, the Lord's death Gelarnitcwit wtahoaltowagan, God's love Getannitowit gektemagelowagan, God's mercy Lennowikit, the man's house * Getannitowit wtallewussowagan, God's ma» jesty NihiUalquonk allogewaganall.the Lord's works. The Dative Is expressed by inflections in the verbs and by prefixes and suffixes which will be more particularly explained. Nemilan, I give (to) him Milap, he gave to him NdeUap, I said (to> liim Nowitschemap, I fetched (to^ him Melat hallemiwi pommauchsowo^an, eternal life Ndatschimolschap, I related to him Notschap, I went, came to him Nowitschewap, i went with him. TAc Accusative Is likewise expressed by means of the verbs, as is said above. Ndahoala, I love him Nowaha, I know him Npendawa, I understand him Npenauweiema, I take care of him Npennauwa, I look at him Neniachelema, I honour him Getanittowit nquitayala, I fear God. (God I fear him). The Vocative Is expressed in the singular by the termination an, and by enk, when coupled with the pronoun our. Wo Kitanittowiant ! O God ! Nihillalan ! O Lord ! Nihillaliao ! O my Lord ! Nihillaliyenk ! O our Lord ! Elangoniellan ! O my friend ! Wetocheraellan ! O njy father ! Wetochemellenk ! O our father ! Wetochemuxian ! O father ! Pemauchsohalian ! 0 my Saviour ! Peraauchsohaluweyan ! O Saviour ! Nocha ! for Nochan), O my father! child to its father) Elenapewian ! Thou Indian ! Shawanowian ! Thou Siiawanese I Metapewian ! O wicked man ! Weliljssian ! 0 pious man ! The Local case J. This as well as the preceding may be properly so called. It is formed by means of the suffixes ink and unk, and expresses in, in the, on, out of. * JVote by the Translator. — Wtanglowagan. In this word, anglowagan signi6es death, from ongel, to die. Wis the inseparable piououn his, and tia interposed for euphony's sake. t A'nte by the Translator. — The .\uthot frequently uses tlie letters g and k and d and t indis- criminately. t J\'ute by the Translator. — The Author calls this case the ablative. I have preferred the de- nominatioa local. 100 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [or NOUNS.] EXAMPLES. Utenink (from Uteney, a city or town), in the town, in town Utenink nda, I am going to town, or into the town Utenink noon, I am coming from er out of town Sipunk (from Sipo, river, creek, water), to or into the river Mbink (from Mbi, water), in the water Hakink (from HacM, earth, ground), in or on the earth Awossagaraewunk (from Awossagame, hea- ven), in heaven Wachtschunk nda (from Wachtschu, hill, moun- tain), 1 am going up the hill Wachtschunk noom, I come from the hill Gamunk nJa or noom, I am ■going over the wa- ter or coming from thence Machtschikamigunk, in the hole (meaning a hole in the ground) Ochunk, at his father's. OF NUMBERS. The singular has in general no particular inflections to distinguish it from the plural, except in the third person, where it ends in I, but most commonly in wall. The plural is variously inflected. There is a singu- lar number combined with the plural, as in our father, my fathers, and a double plural, as in our fathers. These are distinguished by particular inflections, the double plural, by the duplication of a syllable. Substan- tives are generally combined with the inseparable possessive pronoun, which in the singular is n for the first person, ft; for the second, and w or o for the third. The inseparable pronoun is often omitted in the plural and in the third person singular, and the sense is determined by the nu- meric inflection, which is at the same time pronominal. Those inflec- tions are na or nana in the first person, wa or waioa in the second, and wall, wak and wawall in the third. The duplication of a syllable, as na- na, wawa, wawawall, indicates the double plural. EXAMPLES. Wetoochwink, Father. Singular. Nooch, my father Kooch, thy father Ochwail, his or her father Singular with Plural. Noochena, our father Koochuwa, your father Ochuwawall, their father. Double Plural. Noochenana, our fathers Koochewawa, your fathers Ochuwawawall, their fatliers. Gahowes, Mother. Singular. Ngahowes, my mother Kahowes, thy mother Gohessal, his or her mother. Singular with Plural. Gohessena, our mother Kohe»suwa, your mother Gohessuwawall, their mother. TTie double plural is formed as in the pre- ceding example. Sometimes the singular receives numerical inflections, and the substan- tive itself is somewhat modified, as we have already seen in wetoochwink, father, from which are formed nooch, kooch, &c. So in the following ex- ample : OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [of nouns.] 101 Jlchpoan, Bread. Singular. N'dappoanum, my bread KMappoaoaum, thy bread Wdappoanum, his bread Plural. N'dappoanummcna, our bread K'dappoanumowa, your bread Wdappoanumowawall, their bread. The following examples are sufficient to point out the general form of numerical declension : Hakihacan, the field or plantation, Singular. N'dakihacan, my plantation K'dakihacan, thy plantation Wdakihacan, his plantation Plural. N'dakihacanena, our plantation K'dakihacanena, your plantation W'dakihacanowawall, their plantation. Wuschkink, the eye or sight. Singular. Neschkink, my sight or eye Keschkirdf , thy sight or eye Wuschkink, his sight or eye Plural. Neschkinkuna, our sight or eye Keschkinkuwa, your eight or eye Wuschkinkuwawall, their sight or eye. The singular with plural and the double plural are formed as in the lormer examples. The termination naninga is employed in the double plural, when speaking of deceased persons. ^ ' Nochena, our father Noch^nana, our fathers Nochenanlnga, our deceased fathers Muchomsena, our grandfather EXAAIPLES. Muchomsenamnga, out deceased grandfathers Kunachtenaninga, our deceased brothers Chesmussenaninga, our deceased sisters Gohesseaaninga, our deceased mothers. Substantives Without the prefi.xed pronouns are generally inflected in the plural by allot ah, the former termination being applied to inanimate and the latter to animate objects. Trees and the larger plants are con- sidered animate. There are some cYceptions to this rule, as for instance narmssall, fishes, which takes the inanimate termination : but they are not numerous. ^ Hakihacanall, plantations ■ Menachgaquall, fence-rails .Siposall, rivers, creeks Wikwahemall, houses Uteneyall, cities, towns Lennowak, men Ochquewak, women Amemensak, children EXAMPLES. Inanimate Form. Achsinall, stones Ulakensall, dishes Amocholall, canoes Kitoaltewall, ships I Oyosall, pieces of meat or flesh. Animate Form. VOL. III. 3 B Amangamequak, large fishes Tiposak, hens, fowls Achsinnaminschiak, sugar trees 4^ (^AA^ ^fc. (yv^Uii^^'fUd^ 102 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE [or NOUNS.] Wsehumaissak, cows, calves Nenayimgesak, horses Hi.quak or hitgook, trees I Tscholensak, birds Tsquallak, frogs. . Substantives derived from active or neutral verbs take in the plural the termination ik : EXAMPLES. Wenitschanit, falher nr mother, parent, .' froraj Peyatschik, those who are coming Wentschikin, to descend, grow out of) Wenitschanitschik, parents Wdallemansitschik, the owners of cattle, birds, fowls, &c. Pemsitschik, those who are going Eleiuussitschik, those who are going away Wikhetschik, the cultivators of the earth Mikemo^sitschik, laljouring people Mannachetschik, hewers of wood Elauwitschik, hunters. Of the various kinds of Substantives. The substantive combines itself in this language with almost every part of speech, but principally with the verb. We have seen those immediately derived from active or neutral verbs : we shall now proceed to others of an analogous description. 1. There are substantives derived from passive verbs: they end in loa- gan and have no plural : EXAMPLES, honour, the being ho Machelemuxowagan; noured Getteinegelemuxowagan, the being shewn fa- vour, mercy, tenderness Mamschalgussowagan, the being held in re- membiance Mamintochimgussowagan, the being esteemed W\dakenimgussowagan, the being praised And many others of the same kind. Machelemoachgenimgussowagan, the receiv- ing honour and praise Amangachgenimgusswagan, the being raised or elevated by praise Sciiingalgussowagan, the being taken Mamachtschimgussowagan, the being insulted Pilsohalgussowagan, holiness, purity JVote. — It might, indeed, be said that substantives in this language have a passive mood, so nearly are they allied to verbs, as will be shewn in its place. 2. There are, moreover, substantives which are akin to participles, such as, Ahoalgussit, the beloved Mechelemuxit, the honoured Nilchgussit, the killed Lekhikit, tije one who is writing Mikemossit, the one who is labouring, the la- bourer Nanhillowit, the one who takes care of the dead Schingaluesit, the enemy, the adversary. 3. There are also those which are derived from verbs but assume the character of participles, such as, Ppmmauchsowaganit, he who is living Ahoaltowaganit, he who is love Wulamoewaganit, he who is the truth Wacheyekumuit, he who i-^ the light Wdallemuusit, the owner of the cattle Wewikit, the master of the house Wenitschanit, a child's father or mother Getlemagelowaganit, he who is mercy Tschitanessowaganit, he who is strength. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 403 [of nouns.] _ — — - — ^ « — 4. There are also substantives formed of two substantives together, or a substantive with an adjective or verb : EXAMPLES. Yagawan, a hut I Tipas, a hen or fonl. From whicfr two words are formed, Tipasigawan, the hen coop I Pitawikhani, the front roof of a house Go5chgoschigawan, the hog sty PaUraoewigayan, a house of prayer, (the Lord's Mosigawan, the cow stable | house, from Patamawos, God, tlie Lord). Also, Pemauchsowaptonamik, the word of life Wulelendainowaptonainik, the glad tiding of the gospel Etemakau^ichsowagan, a poor miserable life Machtapan, bad, stormy weather Matalogacan, a bad wicked servant Pallalogasowagan, crime, evil deed Maltalogfisowagan, a wicked, sinful act Machtatenawagan, discontent, unhappiness Tschitanatenawagaii, strength of the spirit of the inner man Kschiechauchsowagan, a holy life and conduct. Diminutives are formed by the suffix tit*, as. Amemens, ameroentit, a little child Nitschan, nilsrhantit, my little friend (from Nilis, friend; a coaxing expression used by parents to their children) Pilawetschitsch, pilawetit, a little boy Ochquetit or quetit, a little girl Lennotit, a little man Wikwamtit, a little room (house) Sipotit, a little creek or brook Hitguttit, a little tree Goschgotit, a pig Tipatit, a chicken Motit, a little calf Achpoantit, a little loaf or little piece of bread Oyotit, a little piece of meat (as is given to chil- dren) Tscbolentit, a little bird — Tscholentittak, i^Plur. ) OF ADJECTIVES. There are not many of these, because those words, which with us are adjectives, here are verbs, and althougli they are not inflected tlirouorh all the persons, yet they have tenses. The adjectives proper end in uwi and otvi, and are derived sometimes from substantives and sometimes from verbs. EXAMPLES. Hallemiwi, eternal Genarnuwi, grateful; from genam, thanks Tgauchsuwi — good, kind; from tgauchsin, to be good or kind Wulelendamuwi, merry; from wulelendam, to re- joice, to be joyful or merry Wschitschanquiwi, spiritual; from wtschitschank, the spirit. • J\rote by the Translator. — The diminutive tit is only used in Ihe animate gender. In the inanimate the termination es is employed, as wikwames, a small h luse, amocholes, a small canoe. In speaking of a pretty little animal, the diminutive form is is, schis, or tschis, as mamalis, the fawn of a deer, kulitiatschis, thy pretty little paw. (See the Preface.) There are some excep- tions to this rule, as for instance, allumes, a little dog, in which the inanimate diminutive Is era- ployed. But these are not numerous. 104 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [of nouns.] Hakeyiwi, corporeal ; from hakey, the body Pomraauchsuwi, living ; from pommauchsin, to live Wdehiwi, hearty, cordial ; from Wdehin, the heart Ahoaltiwi, loving ; from ahoalan, to love Wachtuchwepiwi, personal, bodily ; from wach- tuchvpepi, the body, the flesh Pilsuwi, piluwi, clean, chaste; from pilsin, to be clean or chaste Wulatenamuwi, wulatenamowi, happy; from wulatenamen, to be happy WulamallessuWi, well, happy; from wulamalles- sin, to be in health or happy Allowiwi, more, yet more Nungiwi, trembling; from nungihillan,to tremble Schauwewi, tired, weak ; from schauchsin, to be weak Nolemiwi, invisible, unseen Apendawi, useful ; from apendamen, to enjoy, to make use of Mattelemuwi, contemptible ; from mattelendam, to despise Angellowi, anglowi, mortal ; from angel, to die Mboiwi, mortal; mboiwi wochganall, dead bones; from mboagan, death Awendamowi, awendamuwi, painful; from awen- dam, to suffer pain Ayandamuvri, ayandamowi, to desire, wish for Machtamallessuwi, indisposed, sick; from mach- tamalsin, to be sick Machtalenamuwi, discontented; from machtale- namen, to be dissatisfied or discontented Mhukuwi, bloody; from mliuk, blood Moschiwi, clear, luminous Tengandasuwi, pierced through Petapaniwi, at break of day; from petapan, the day breaks Nipahwi, at night, by night Wschitschanquiwi, ghosUy, spiritual Gischguniwi, in the day, by day Sedpokuniwi, early in the morning Wuschginquiwi, face to face; from wuschgink, face Wewatamowi, wise, pradent ; from wewoatam, to be wise Matiauchsuwi, sinful; from mattauchsin, to sin Mayauchsuwi, of one mind; from mayauchsin, to be of one mind Langomuwi, friendly, peaceably disposed Gettemagelensuwi, humble; from gettemagel- ensin, to be humble Gektemagelemuwi, gcttemageluwi, merciful; from gettemagelin, to be merciful Allowelemuwi, valuable; from allowelenden, to esteem, value Wonattamowi, weak, impotent; from wonatam, to be weak, impotent Schahowapewi, heartless, desponding Awullsittamuwi, obedient ; from awulsittam,, to be obedient Achwandoguwi, very peaceable Amemensuwi, childish; from amemens, child Schacachgapewi, an honest man, (from Schac- achgapewin, to be just, upright) Nihillowewi, murderous ; from nihiUowen, to put to death, to murder Machelemuwi, honourable; from machelendam. to honour Langundowivi, peaceful, peaceable Tachpachiwi, little, low Tachpachelensuwi, little, low, humble Wilawi, rich, valuable Askiwi, raw Tangelensuwl, tangitchewi, humble, modest Schawelemuwi, miserable, painful, burthensome; from schawelendam, to be burthened with sorrow, labour, or trouble '• Scattevpi, burning Scattewi wdehin, a burning heart. There are also adjectives with other terminations, as Nenapalek, unworthy, good for nothing Segachtek, ardent Segachtek ahoaltowan, an ardent love Schewek, weak, tired Wingimaktek, odoriferous, of good smell Nundeyek, defective Scattek, burning, ardent Wisawek, yellow Wapelechen, white Asgask, green Tekek, cold Kschittek, warm, hot Geschtek, ripe, cooked or done Allowad, allohak, powerful, strong Mequik, bloody Mechek, large, great Ktemaki, poor, miserable, infirm Gunigischuk, daily Esseni, stony, flinty ; from achsin, a stone. DEGREES OF COMPARISON. The Comparative is expressed by alloiviwi, more. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [or NOUNS.] 103 EXAMPLES. Wulit, good Coinp. Allowiwi wulit, more good, better Mchinqui, great Coinp AUowiwi m'chek, greater Wahhellemat, wide Comp. Allowiwi wahhellemat, wider There are some exceptions, as, Ika, yonder. Ikalissi, further. The Superlative is expressed by eluwi, most or the most. EXAMPLES. Eluwiwulik, the very best, the supremely good I Eluwassit, the most powerful, the most majestic Allowilen, eluwilek, that which is above every Eluwitschitanessit, the strongest of all thing Eluwitschiechsit, the most holy Eluwaniowit, God above all Eluwitakauwqssit, the best, the supremely good Eluwiahoalgussit, the beloved above all things I Eluwilissit, the most gracious one OF GENDERS. The genders in the Delaware are not divided as in our languages into masculine and feminine, but into animate and inanimate. To the former class belong trees and all plants of a large growth ; annual plants and grasses to the latter. Adjectives of the former class generally end in t, those of the latter in k. The masculine and feminine, where it is neces- sary to discriminate, are expressed in various ways. EXAMPLES. .Animate, scheuchsit, weak Inanimate, schawek, weak Animate, metzil, bad, wicked Inanimate, meiihik, bafl, wicked Animate, wacheyekumuit, he who is the light Inanimate, wacheyek, the light Animate, pommauchsowa(i;anit, he who is the life, from pommauchsowagan, life Animate, tenktitit, the little Inanimate, tengettik, the little. Animate, masculine and feminine, welsit, the best Inanimate, welhik, the best Animate, masculine and feminine, gunaxit, great, long Inanimate, gunaquot, great, long Ani7nate, geschiechsit, pure, holy Inanimate, geschiechek, pure, holy Animate, pilsit, pure, chaste Inanimate, pilhik, pure, clean Animate, allauchsit, allowat, strong, mighty Inanimate, allohak, strong, mighty Speaking of quadrupeds, the masculine is generally expressed by len- nowechum, which signifies the male of beasts, thus : Lennowechum nenayunges, moccaneu, gosch- j And of fowls and birds, gosch, the male of the horse, dog, tiog |Leanawehelleu, the male of fowls, birds. The feminine of the human species is expressed as follows : Ochqueu, a woman Ochquewak, women Ochquetschitsch, a girl Ochdomus, a woman's cousin Masc. Chans, the elder brother Fern. Mis, the elder sister Chesmus, the younger brother or sister, to which is prefixed in the masculine, lenno, man, VOL. III. 2 D and in the feminine, ochque ; from ochqueu, woman Mdsc. Muchomes, the grandfather Fem. Ohura, the grandmother Nohum, kohum, ohumall, my, thy, his or hef grandmother Masc. Noschik, my uncle Fem. Piwitak, the aunt. 106 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE [of nouns.] The females of fowls and birds are called ochquehelleu, and those of quadrupeds ochquechum : Nunschetto, a doe I Nunscheach, a she bear. OF NUMERALS. Numerals may also be classed among adjectives, and are as follows : Ngutti Nischa - Nacha . . - Newo ... Palenach - - . - Guttasch Nischasch . , . Chasch Pee.chkonk . - . Tellen - Tellen attach* ngutU Tellen attach nischa Tellen attach nacha Tellen attach newo - Tellen attach palenach Tellen attach guttasch Tellen attach nischasch Tellen attach chasch Tellen attach peschkonk Nischinachke Nisehlnachke attach ngutti Nischinachke attach nischa Nischinachke attach nacha Nischinachke attach newo Nischinachke attach palenach Nischinachke attach guttasch Nischinachke attach nischasch Nischinachke attach chasch Nischinachke attach peschkonk Nachenachke Nachenachke attach ngutti And so forth to 39 Newinachke Palenach tchenachke Guttasch tchenachke Nischasch tchenachke Chasch tchenachke Peschkonk tchenachke Nguttapachki Nguttapachki attach gutti Nguttapachki atta'ch tellen Nguttapachki attacli tellen wak ngutti Nguttapachki tellen wak nischa Nguttapachki tellen wak nacha Ngnttapachki tellen wak newo And so forth to 119 Nguttapachki attach nischinachke Nguttapachki attach nachenachke 11 Nguttapachki attach newinachke 140 2 ' Nguttapachki attach palenach tchenachke 150 3 ; Nguttapachki attach guttasch tchenachke 160 4I Nguttapachki attach nischasch tchenachke 170 5 i Nguttapachki attach chasch tchenachke 180 ' 6 Nguttapachki attach peschkonk tchenachke 190 Nischapachki - - 200 Nachapachki - - 300 Newopachki - - 400 Palenach tchapachki - - 500 Guttasch tchapachki - 600 Nischasch tchapachki - - 700 Chasch tchapachki - - 800 Peschkonk tchapachki - - 900 Tellen tchen tchapachki, or ngutti kilta- pachki - - 1000 Nischen kitlapachki - - 2000 Nachen kittapachki - 3000 19 Newon kittapachki - - ' 4000 20 ' Palenach tchen kittapachki - 5000 21 Guttasch tchen kittapachki - 6000 22 Nischasck tchen kittapachki - 7000 23 . Chasch tchen kittapachki - 8000 24 Peschkonk tchen kittapachki - 9000 25 i Tellen tchen kittapachki - 10,000 26 Nischinachk tchen kittapachki 20,000 27 j Nachenachk tchen kittapachki - 30,000 28 Newinachk tchen kittapacliki 40,000 Palenach tchenachk tchen kittapachki 50,000 Guttasch tchenachk tchen kittapachki 60,000 Nischasch tchenachk tchen kittapachki 70,000 Chasch tchenachk tchen kittapachki 80,000 Peschkonk tchenachk tchen kittapachki 90,000 Nguttapachki tchen kittapachki 100,000 Nischapachki tchen kittapachki 200,000 Nachapachki tchen kittapachki 300,000 Palenach tchapachki tchen kittapachki 500,000 Guttasch tchapachki tchen kittapachki 600,000 Nischasch tchapachki tchen kittapachki 700,000 Chasch tchapachki tchen kittapachki 800,000 Peschonk tchapachki tchen kittapachki 900,000 We may either say Tellen tchapachki tchen kittapachki, ten hundred times one thousand 1,000,000 60 80 90 100 101 110 111 112 113 114 Ngutti kittapachki tchen kittapachki, one tliousand times one thousand 1,000,000 * JVote by the Translator. — Attach means beyond, above ( Zeisberger's Vocab.). len attach ngutti means ten and one over, beyond, above, more. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 107 [of nouns.] v^. JVote. — Kittapachki, from kitta, great, properly means the great hun- dred. KiltaD, a great river Kittahican, ihe great ocean I Kittoaltewall, the great ships I Kittanittomt, the Great Almighty God. And so on in many other mstances. JVote. — Although few of the Indians are accustomed to calculate, so far as we have seen, and in genera! they do not trouble themselves much about it, because they have no use for it, yet their language has the means of doing it as well as ours. Since the Europeans have been among them, and particularly since the wars, they have got more into the use of it, the armies having afforded them more frequent opportunities. The number of times is thus expressed : Nguiten, once Nischen, twice Nachen, 3 times Newen, 4 times Palenach tchen, 5 times Guttasch tchen, 6 times Nischasch tchen, 7 times Chasch tchen, 8 times Peschkonk tchen, 9 times Tellen tchen, 10 times Tellen tchen attach gutti, 11 times Tellen tchen attach nischa, 12 times, &c. Nichinachk tchen, 20 times Nachenachk tchen, 30 times Newenachk tchen, 40 times Palenach tchenachk tchen, 50 times Guttasch tchenachk tchen, 60 times Nischasch tchenachk tchen, 70 times Chasch tchenachk tchen, 90 times Ngutta pachki Ichen, 100 times, &c. Speaking of inanimate things, as towns, rivers, houses, &c. they say ; Mawat, ngutti, one, only one And in the Plural Nischenol, 2 (Nischenoll uteneyall, wikwahemall, tiposall, wachtschawaU, two towns, houses, rivers, mountains, &c.) Nachenol,3 Newenol, 4 Palanach tchennol, 5 Guttasch tchennol, 6 Nischasch tchennol, 7 Chasch tchennol, 8 Peschkonk tchennol, 9 Tellen tchennol, 10 Tellen tchennol attach gutti, 11 Tellen tchennol attach nischa, 12 Tellen tchennol attach nacha, 13 Nischinachk tchennol, 20 Nachenachk tchennol, 30 Palenachtchennachk tchennol, 50 Nguttapachki tchennol, 100 When men, animals, or other things are spoken of, which among thi> Indians are considered as belonging to the animated class of beings, they say : Mauchsa, mayauchsu, one person, or a person, or living being It is truly incorrect to say, Ngutti lenno, a man, ngutti ochqueu, a woman. In the Plural they say : Nischowak lennowak, ochquewak, amemensak, wdallemansak, tipasak, &c. two men, wo- men, children, beasts, fowls, &c. &c. Nachoak, 3 Neyuwak, 4 Palenach tchoak, 5 Guttasch tchoak, 6 Nischasch tchoak, 7 Chasch tchoak, 8 Peschkonk tchoak, 9 Tellen tchoak, 10 Tellen tchoak attach gutti, 11 Tellen tchoak attach nischa, 12 Tellen tchoak attach nacha, 13 Nischinachk tchoak, 20 Nachenachk tchoak, 30 Ngutapachaowak, 100 Nischapachawak, 200 Palenach tchapachawak, 500 Tellen tchapachawak, 1000 108 GRAMiMAR OF THE liANGUAGE [of nouns.] ORDINAL NUMBERS. Netami, the first, (animate) I Nechit, the third Nelamiechen, the first, (inanimate) Palenachtchit, the fourth Tacquak, the second | Palenachtchegit, the fifth, &c. In the Preterite. Mauchsop, mayauchsop, there was one Nischopanik, there were two Nachopanik, there were three Newopanik, there were four Palenach tchopanik, there were five Tellen tchopanik, there were ten Nischinachk tchopanik, there were twenty Nachenachk tchopanik, there were thirty Ngutta pachxopanik, there were a hundred Palenach tchapachxopanik, there were five hun- dred Tellen tchapachxopanik, there were a thousand of them. OF THE COMPUTATION OF TIME. The days among the Indians are reckoned by nights. It is, however, not improper to say : Nffutti gischque, one day I Nacha gischquewi, three days, &c. Nischa gischquevri, two days I But the most proper and usual mode of computing nights, is as fol- lows : Nguttokuni, one night Nuktokuni, only ( ne night Nischogunak, two nights Kachogunak, three nights Newogunak, four nights Palenach tchogunak, five nights Guttasch tchogunak, six nights Tellen tchogunak, ten nights Nischinachk tchogunak, twenty nights Newinachk tchogunak, forty nights, &c. In the Preterite. The preterite is always connected with the plural, as below. You cannot say in the singular nguttokunakat, one night ago, as you say in the plural. You must say welaquik. last night, or wulaque, yesterday. But speaking of several nights, you say : Nischoiranakat, two nights ago I Mischinachk tchokunakat, twenty nights ago Nachokunakat, three nights ago Newinaschk tchokunakat, forty nights ago Newokunakat, four nights ago 1 Palenach tchonachk tchokunakat, fifty nights Palenach tchokunakat, five nights ago ago. Tellen tchokimakat, ten nights ago I The Indians reckon their months by moons, from one new or full moon to another : Ngutti gischuch, one month I Nacha gischuchak, three months Nischa gischuchak, two months I Tellen tchi gischuchak, ten months. Their reckoning of the year is from one spring, summer, autumn, or winter, to another. They have properly no beginning of the year, ex- cept that they have learned from the Europeans to distinguish New OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 109 [or PRONOUNS.] Year's Day. They reckon commonly from one seeding time to another, from the time when the deer are red in the Spring and grey in the Au- tumn, when the corn is ripe or cut down and laid up in heaps, &,c. and so back again. The interval between is one year : Ngutti eachtiD, one year I Newinachk tendchi gachtinamo, he is forty Nischa gachtin, two years years old Nacha gachtin, three years, &c. Newinachk tendchi gachtinamiyenk, we are Nischinachk ntendchi gachtinami, I am twenty forty years old years old Newinachk tendchi gachtinamiyek, you are Gachtinamichump (jneterite), I was twenty forty years old years old Newinachk tendchi gachtinamoak, they are I forty years old. NAMES OF THE MONTHS. Anixi gischuch (Squirrel month), January TsqualU gischuch (Frog month), February M'choamowi gischuch (Shad month), March Quitauweuhewi gischuch {Spring month), April Tauwinipen {Beginning of summer). May Kitschinipen (Summer), June Yugatainoewi gischuch, July Sakauweuhewi gischuch {Deer month,) August Kitschitachquoak {Autumn month), September Pooxit {Month of vermin), October W'ini gischuch {Snow month), November M'chakhocque ( Cold month, the month when the cold mcjces the trees croc/c), December. JVote by the Translator. — For the above explanation of the names of the months, the Translator is partly indebted to the Author's text, and partly to some notes of the late Professor Barton, which have supplied what was wanting in the original, except the meaning of the name of the month of July, which neither has explained. Loskiel calls it the month when th^ Indian corn is gathered. There is little to be said about this part of speech, of which a view has already been given under the head of nouns. Personal pronouns are either separable or inseparable, but are much more frequently used in the latter form. Singular, Ni, I Ei, thou Neka or nekama, he or she The Separable Pronouns are : Plural. Kiluna or niluna, we Kiluwa, you Nekamawa, they. The inseparable pronouns are in both numbers n' for the first person, /c' in the second, w' in the third. When two pronouns are employed VOL. III. 3 E 110 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [or VERBS.] in verbs, the last or the pronoun governed is expressed by an inflection, as in Kdahoalohhumo, I love you, k'dahoalineen, thou lovest us, k'daho- alatoak, thou lovest them, as will be seen more fully under the head of conjugations. The possessive pronoun is the same as the personal, separable and inseparable, which is employed in a possessive sense. No ambiguity results from this similarity; the meaning is always understood from the context or the form or inflexion of the word with which the pronoun is combined. The various combinations of these pronouns must be gathered from their connection with the other parts of speech, and cannot all be given under this head. Thus the personal pronoun combines itself with the conjunction also: Nepe, I also kepe, thou also Nepena or kepena, we also, (as the word is used in the general or particular plural) Kepewo, you also Kepoak, tieyalso. JYote by the Translator. — The particular plural refers to a certain description of persons, as we Delawares, we who are here together; the other has a more general application, and shews that no discrimination is intended. In verbs, n prefixed (from niluna) indicates the particular and ft (from kiluna) the general plural, in the first person. See Hecke- welder's Corresp. in Histor. Trans, p. 429. The author is silent on this subject. DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. The modes of expressing these by various forms and combinations with other parts of speech are so numerous, that a few examples can only be given : Auwen, who .' Keku, ta, koen, what .' Auweni, who is he ? Auwenik, who are they ? Won, this Na, nanne, nail, nan, tliat Wentschim na lenno ! call that man ! Na icka ni pawit, he that stands there Nil, nellnill, yuk, yuUick, these Nik, nikik, those Wemi, all Wemi auween, every man Alende, some Alendemiyenk, some of us Alendemiyeek, some of you Alendeyuwak, some of them Mamayauchsiyenk, each of us Mamayauchsiyeek, each of you, &c. The remainder must be learned by practice. OF THE liENNI LENAPE INDIANS. Ill Ml^-m Tettis. There is a great variety of verbs in this language. To exhibit all their compound forms would be an endless task. Every part of speech may be compounded with the verb in many ways, as will be seen in the course of this work. The verbs to have and to be do not exist in the Delaware language, either as auxiliaries, or in the abstract substantive sense which they pre- sent to an European mind. The verb to have always conveys the idea of possession, and to be that of a particular situation of the body or mind, and they may be combined like other verbs with other accessary ideas. Thus the verb to have or possess is combined with the substantive, or the thing possessed, as follows : N'damochol, I have a canoe Wtamochol*, he has a canoe Malta n'damocholiwi, I have no canoe N'temahican, 1 have an axe Nowikin, I have a house Wiku, he has a house W'lkuwek, they have a house N'dallemansin, I have cattle W'dalleniansu, he has cattle N'pachksikan, I have a knife N'peyakhikan, I have a gun. The idea conveyed by the substantive verb to be is expressed by various combinations with other parts of speech, as for instance : fVith the Substantive. Nekamawa w'damochowawall, it is their canoe Si n'dalloquepi, it is my hat Ki k'dalloquepi, it is thy hat iNekama w'dalloquepi, it is his or her hat Ni n'dacquiwaa, it is my blanket. Ni n'damochol, it is my canoe Ki k'damochol, it is thy canoe Nekama w'damochol, it is his or her canoe Kiluna n'damocholena, it is our canoe Riluwa n'damocholuwa, it is your canoe JVith the Pronoun. Auwen, who. Singular. Ewenikia, who I am Ewenikian, who thou art Ewenikit, who he is Alendemiyenk, some of us Alendemiyek, some of you I Plural. Ewenikiyenk, who we are Ewenikiyek, who you are I Ewenikiehtit, who they are. AUnde, some. Plural. I jVlendemowak or aleudemichtit, some of them. * JVote by the Translator. — The apostrophe between the inseparable pronoun and the noun or verb indicates a sheva or mute vowel. Eliot, in his Mas.sachusetts Grammar, indicates it by the English short u .• he would write, for instance, nuttappin lor n'dappin. This apostrophe is some- times omitted in the course of this grammar, but is always to be understood. US GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [of verbs.] The idea of the verb to be is also combined with adjectives and adverbs, as will be seen under the heads of " adjective and adverbial verbs." OF THE CONJUGATIONS. There are eight conjugations. The first ends in in, as Achpin, to be there, in a particular place | Mikemossin, to work. The second ends in a, (Infinitive in an,) as N'da, I am going | Paan, to come. The third ends in elendam, and indicates a disposition of the mind, as Schiwelendam, to be sorry | Wulelendam, to be glad. The fourth ends in men, as N'gattamen, I request I N'pendamen, I hear. The fifth ends in an, as Ahoalan, to love. The sixth ends in e or we (infinitive en), as N'dellowe, I say I Infin. Luen, to say. The seventh ends in in. It has no simple active or passive voice, and is only conjugated through the personal forms or transitions, as Miltin, to give. The eighth ends in tan — has the simple active, but not the passive form, and has the personal indicative and subjunctive transitions, as Peton, to bring I N'peton, 1 bring. The same inseparable pronouns are used with the verbs as with the substantives. The letters which indicate the pronoun, and are prefi.xed to the verb, are n, k, and w or o. They must be pronounced, with a short interval, when followed by a consonant. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 113 [of verbs.] jFirst etonfusation. No. I. POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. AcHPiN, to be there, in a particular place; PARTICIPLE. Singular. . Plural. Epit*, he who is there, being there j Epitschik, those being there. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Singular. N'dappin, I am there ( Lat adsum) K'dappin, thou art there Wdappin or achpin, he is there Plural. N'dappineen ffrn'dappihheno, we are theref K'dappihhirao, you are there Wdappiuewo, they are there. JVote. — The plural is formed by suffi.xes as in the substantives, and the prefi.\es are preserved. Preterite. Singular. N'dappineep or n'dappihump, I was there K'dappineep or k'dappihunip, thou wert there Wdappineep or achpop, he was there Plural. N'dappihhenap, we were there K'dappihimoap, ye were there Achpopannik, they were there. * JVote by the Translator. ^Epit is used in the sense of the preposition at. Philadelphia epit, at Philadelphia, or being at Philadelphia. — Heckcw. Corresp. p. 425. t A''ole by the Translator. — This is the particular plural above mentioned, and is restricted to persons who are specially spoken of; when a more general idea is meant to be conveyed, another form is made use of, and the inseparable pronoun A: is prefixed instead of the pro- noun n. Thus n^penameen, we see, and n^pendameen, we hear, means, we who are here assembled see or hear ; but if the plural is used in a general sense, it should be k'penameen, k'pendameen. See Heckew. Corresp. in 1 Hist. Trans. 428. The author makes no mention in this Grammar of these two plurals, which is, however, a remarkable peculiarity in the Indian languages. As has been observed in the preface, Mr Zeisberger did not write for Philologists and has left many curi- ous facts respecting the forms of this language entirely unnoticed, and to be acquired by practice. Those who wish for more information on these interesting subjects are referred to the above cited correspondence of Mr Heckewelder, where they will find enough to satisfy their curiosity. The reader will also observe that the author gives two different forms n'dappineen or n'dappi- henno, to express the words, we are there, and he does the same in many places throughout these conjugations. This Mr Heckewelder said, was in order to shew the inflections of the Delaware verbs in the Unami and the Minsi dialects, and he promised to point out to the Translator, which belonged to the one and which to the other. But he died before he could fulfil his promise. VOL. III. 2 P 114 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] Future. The future is characterized by tsch; it is to be observed that when the verb is preceded by- an adverb, preposition, or inseparable pronoun, it is frequently added to it. EXAMPLE. Singular. Ikatsch n'dappin, I shall or will be there Kepe sch k'dappin, thou shalt or wilt be there Nekamatsch w'dappin, he shall or will be there Plural. Kepenatsch n'dappineeD,weshalI orwillbe there Witsciiitsch k'dappihhirao, ye shall or will be there Nekamawaktsch w'dappinewo, they shall or will be there. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. i Plural. Achpil, be or stay thou there " Achpik, be or stay ye there Achpitetsch, let him or he shall or must be or Achpititetsch, let them or they shall or must be stay there or stay there Achpitam, do thou let us be or stay there I Achpitamook, do ye let us be or stay there. Note by the Translator. — There is such a compound mixture of per- sons and numbers in this mood, that it is impossible to designate either by marginal annotations. It is not one of the least remarkable particu- larities of this singular language. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. ■ Plural. Achpiya, when or if I am there | Achpiyenke, when or if we are there Achpiyane, when or if thou art there I Achpiyeque, when or if ye are there Achpite, when or if he is there | Achpichtite, when or if they are there. Singular. Achpiyakup, as or when I was there Achpiyanup, as or when thou wast there Achpitup, as or when he was there Preterite. Plural. Achpiyenkup, as or when we were there Achpiyekup, as or when ye were there Achpichtitup, as or when they were there. Singular. Achpiatpanne, if I had been there Achpianpanne, if thou hadst been there Achpitpanne, if he had been there Pluperfect. Plural. Achpiyenkpanne, if we had been there Achpiyekpanne, if ye had been there Achpichtitpaane, if they had been there. JVote. — The subjunctive has only a pluperfect in the active and passive voices, but not otherwise. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [riRST CONJUGATION.] 115 Future. .singular. Achpiyaktscb, if or when I am or shall be there Achpiyanetsch, if or when thou art or shalt be there Achpitetsch, if or when he is or shall be there Plural. Achpiyenketsch, if or when we are or shall be there Achpiyequetsch, if or when ye are or shall be there Achpichtitetsch, if or when they are or shall be there. Another form of this verb ivhich may be called Adverbial. Singular. Epia, where I am Epian, where thou art Epit, where he is Sijigular. Eplakup, where I was Epiyannup, where thou wast Epitup, where he was Singular. Tatschta epia, where I shall be Tatschia epian, where thou shalt be Tatschta epit, where he shall be Present. Plural. Epiyenk, where we are Epiyeek, where ye are Epichtit, where diey are. Preterite. Plural. Epiyenkup, where we were Epiyekup, where ye were Epichtitup, where they were. Future. (Plural. Tatschta epiyenk, where we shall be Tatschta epiyeek, where ye shall be Tatschta epichtit, where they shall be. JVEGATIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. {J^ot given.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta n'dappiwi, I am not there Malta k'dappiwi, thou art not there Matta w'dappiwi, he is not there Singular. Matta n'dappiwip, I was not there Matta k'dappiwip, thou wast not there Matta w'dappiwip, he was not there Plural. Matta n'dappiwuncen, we are not there Matta k'dappiwihhiino, ye are not there Matta achpiwiwak, they are not there. Preterite. Plural. Matta n'dappiwunenap, we were not there Malta k'dappiwihhinioap, ye were not there Matta achpiwipBonik, they were not there. 116 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] Future. Singular. Matta n'dappiwitsch, I shall or will not be there Matta k'dappiwitsch, thou shalt or wilt not be there Matta w'dappiwitsch, he shall or will not be there Plural. Matta n'dappiwuneentsch, we shall or will not be there Matta k'dappiwihhimotsch, ye shall or will not be there Matta achpiwlwaktsch, they shall or will not be there. IMPERATIVE MOOD. {Kot given.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta achpiwake, when or if I am not there Matta achpiwonne, when or if thou art not there Matta achpique, when or if he is not there Plural. Matta achpiwenke, when or if we are not there Matta achpiweque, when or if ye are not there Matta achpichtique, when or if they are not there. Preterite. Singular. Matta achpiwakup, when or if I was not there Matta achpiwonnup, when or if thou wast not there Matta achpikup, when or if he was not there Plural. Matta achpiwenkup, when or if we were not there Matta achpiwekup, when or if ye were not there Matta achpichtitup, when or if they were not there. Pluperfect. Singular. I Plural. Matta achpiwakpanne, if I had not been there Matta achpiwenkpanne, if we had not been there Matta achsiwonpanne, if thou hadst not been • Matta achpiwekpanne, if ye had not been there there Matta achpichtikpanne, if they had not been Matta achpikpanne, if he had not been there ' there. Future. Singular. Matta achpiwaktsch*, when or if I shall not be there Matta achpiwonnetsch, when or if thou shalt not be there Matta achpiquetsch, when or if he shall not be there Plural. Mattatsch achpiwenque, when or if we shall not be there Mattatsch achpiweke, when or if ye shall not be there Mattatsch achpichtique, when or if they shall not be there. * JVote by the Translator. — It will be observed that tsch, the sign of the future, is here affixed in the singular to the adverb, and in the plural the verb is inflected by it. It will be found, in the preceding page, combined in both numbers with the adverb ta, which signifies, where. I have been informed by Mr Heckewelder, that either form may be ado])led, whether in the singular or plural, and that the ear is the best guide in such cases. So the negative may be expressed by atta or matta, as the ear directs. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] iir No. II. Lissuf, to be or do so, to be so situated, disposed, or acting. POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. I Preterite. LissiD, to be or do so I Lissineep, to have been, or done so Future. Lissioitsch, to be or to do so at a future time. INDICATIVE MOOD. Singular. N'dellsln, I am or do so K'dellsin, thou art or dost so Wdellsin, he is or does so Singular. N'dellsineep, I was or did so K'dellsineep, thou wert or didst so Wdellsineep, he was or did so Present. Plural. N'dellsineen, we are or do so K'dellsihhimo, ye are or do so Wdellsinewo, they are or do so*. Preterite. Plural. N'dellsihhenap, we were or did so K'dellsihhimoap, ye were or did so W'dellsinewoap, they were or did so. Future. Singular. Nantsch n'dellsin, I shall or will be or do so Nantsch k'dellsin, thou shall or wilt be or do so Nantsch w'dellsin, he shall or will be or do so Plural. Nantsch n'dellsineen, we shall or will he or do 8° Nantsch k'dellsihhimo, ye shall or will be or do so Nantsch w'dellsinewo, they shall or will be or do so. Another form of the Future. Singular. N'dellsintchi, I shall be or do so K'dellsintchi, thou shalt be or do so Wdellsintchi, he shall be or do so Plural. N'dellsineentsch, we shall be or do so K'dellsinewotsch, ye shall be or do so VV'dellsinewotsch, tliey shall be or do so. * A''ote by the Translator. — The verbs ending in si and in are conjugated according to this nde, and have generally, though not always, w prefixed and u or o suffixed to the third person of the singular. Examples : achpin, to be there — w'dappin or achpo he is there ; palsin to be sick — palau, he is sick ; mikemossin, to work — mikemosau, he works, &.c. &c. VOL. in. — 2 G 118 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first^conjugation.] IMPERATIVE MOOD. SinguJar. Lissil, be or do thou so Singular with Plural. Lissitam, do thou let us be or do so Singular. Lissititsch, be or do he so ; he shall be or do so Plural. Lissik, be or do ye so Double Plural. Lissitamook, do you let us be or do so Plural. Lissichtititsch, let them be or do so ; they shall be or do so. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Lissiye, if I am or do so Lissiyanne, if thou art or doest so Lissite, if he is or does so Singular. Lissiyakup, if I was or did so Lissiyannup, if thou wert or didst so Lissitup, if he was or did so Plural. Lissiyenke, if we are or do so Lissiyeque, if ye are or do so Lissichtite, if they are or do so. Preterite. Plural. Lissiyenkup, if we were or did so Lissiyekup, if ye were or did so Lissichtitup, if they were or did so Pluperfect Singular. Lissiakpanne, if I had been or done so Lissiyanpanne, if thou hadst been or done so Lissitpanne, if he had been or done so Plural. Lissiyenkpanne, if we had been or done so Lissiyekpanne, if ye had been or done so Lissichtitpanne, if they had been or done so. Future. Singular. Lissiyaktsch, I shall be or do so Lissiyantsch, if thou shalt be or do so Lissitsch, if he shall be or do so Plural. Lissiyenketsch, if we shall be or do so Lissiyeketsch, if ye shall be or do so Lissichtitetsch, if they shall be or do so. Another form of the same verb. INDICATIVE MOOD. Singular. Elsiya, as I am or do Elsiyan, as thou art or dost Elsit, as he is or does Singular. Elsiyakup, as I was or did Elsiyanup, as tl ou wei t or didst Elsitup, as he was or did Present. Plural. Elsiyenk, as we are or do El*iyek, as ye are or do Elsichtit, as they are or do. Preterite. 1 Plural. Elsiyenkup, as we were or did Elsiyekup, as ye were or did 1 Elsichtitup, as they were or did. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] 119 Future. Singular. Tatsch* elsij'a, as I shall or will be or do Tatsch elsiyan, as thou shalt or wilt be or do Tatsch elsit, as he shall or will be or do Plural. Tatsch elsij'enk, as we shall or will be or do Tatsch eliaiyeek, as ye shall or "will be or do Tatscli elsichtit, as they shall or will be or do. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Elsiyake, if I am or do so Elsiyanne, if thou art or dost so Elsite, if he is or does so Singular. Elsiyakup, if I was or did so Elsiyannup, if thou wert or didst so Elsitup, if he was ojdid so Singular. Elsiyakpanne, if I had been or done so Elsiyanpanne, if thou hadst been or done so Elsitpanne, if he had been or done so Plural. Elsiyenke, if we are or do so Elsiyeque, if ye are or do so Elsichtite, if fiiey are or do so. Preterite. Plural. Elsiyenkup, if we were ot did so Elsiyeekup, if ye were or did so Elsichtitup, if they were or did so. Pluperfect. Plural. Elsiyenkpanne, if wc had been or done so Elsiyekpanne, if ye had been or done so Elsichtitpanne, if they had been or done so. Singular. Elsiyatsch, if I shall be or do so Elsiyannetsch, if thou shalt be or do so Elsitetsch, if he shall be or do so Future. Plural. Elsiyenketsch, if we shall be or do so Elsiyequetsch, if ye shall or will do so Elsichtitetsch, if they shall or will do so. Impersonal Forms. EIek, as it is Elekup, as it was Tatsch elek, as it will be Leu, it is so ; it is true Leep, it was so Atta ne lewi, it is not so Atta ne lewip, it was not so. .NEGATIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Lissiwi, not to be or do so. * JVote by the Translator. — This word tatsch is compounded of ta, which here is an adverb of similitude, and of tsch^ the usual indication of the futme, which is sometimes atlixed to the ad- verb and sometimes to the verb, as has before been observed. ISO GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta n'dellsiwi, I am not or do not so Matta k'dellsiwi, thou art not or dost not so Matta w'dellsiwi, he is not or does not so Plural. Matta n'dellsiwuneen, we are not or do not so Matta k'dellsiwunewo, ye are not or do not so Matta w'dellsiwiwak, they are not or do not so. Preterite. Singular. Matta n'dellsiwip, I was not or did not so Matta k'dellsiwip, thou wert not or didst not so Matta w'dellsiwip, he was not or did not so Plural. Matta n'dellsiwuneenakup, we were not or did not so Matta k'dellsiwunewakup, ye were not or did not so Matta w'dellsiwipannik, they were not or did not so. Future. Singular. I Plural. Mattatsch n'dellsiwi, I shall or will not be or do so Mattatsch k'dellsiwi, thou shalt or wilt not be As in the Present tense, with mattatsch pre- or do so tixed. Mattatsch w'dellsiwi, he shall or will not be or do so IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Katschi lissiham, do not thou do so i Plural. Katschi lissihek, do not ye do so. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta n'lissiwake, if or when I am or do not so Matta lissiwonne, if or when thou art or dost not so Matta lissique, if or when he is or does not so Plural. Matta lissiwenke, if or when we are or do not so Matta lissiweqne, if or when ye are or do not so Matta lissichtique, if or when they are or do not so. Preterite. Singular. Matta n'lissiwakup, if or when I was or did not Matta lissiwonnup, if or when thou wert or didst not so Matta lissitup, if or when he was or did not so Plural. Matta lissiwenkup, if or when we were or did not so Matta lissiwekup, if or when ye were or did not so Matta lissichtitup, if or when they were or did not so. The future is formed from the present tense, by affixing tsch to the adverb matta, as mattatsch nlissiwake, &c. OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] 121 No. III. MiKEMossix, to work. POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. Mikemossin, to work I Preterite. ' Mikemossinep, to have worked. Present Mikemossit, working PARTICIPLES. Past. I Mikemossitschik, having worked Future. Mikemossintsch, being to work, having work to do. Singular. N'mikemossi, I work K'mikemossi, thou workest Mikemossu, he works INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural Mikemossihhena', we work K'mikemossihhimo, ye work Mikemossuwak, they work. Singular. N'mikemossihump, I worked K'mikemossihump, thou workedst Mikemossop, he worked Singular. N'mikemossitsch, I shall or mil work K'mikemossitsch, thou shalt or wilt work Mikemossutsch, he shall or will work Preterite. Plural. Mikemossihhenap, we worked K'liiikemosMhhiinoap, ye worked Mikemossopannik, they worked. Future. Plural. Mikemossihhenatsch, we shall or will work K'mikemossihhimotsch, ye shall or will work Mikemossuwatsch, they shall or will work. .•or\hTtle^oftDro?v*'"'-S^rH'^KVr.'=°°*"'=""°°^ - "ft^" "'ed ^ngvwel is short ^' ^°""' '^ '"' "'" " ^""^ ^"""'^ ' '' """^'y ^^ews that the prece- VOL. in. 2 H 122 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Mikemossil, work thou Mikemossitetsch, let him work, he shall work Singular with Plural. Mikemossitam, do thou let vis work Plural. Mikemossik, work ye Mikemossichtitetsch, let them work, they shall work Double Plural. Mikemossitamoak, do ye let us work. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Mikemossiya, when or if I work K'mikemossiyan or yanne, when or if thou work- est Mikemossit, when or if he works Mikemossiyenk, when or if we work Mikemossiyek, when or if ye work Mikemossichtit, when or if they work. Mikemossiyakup, when or if I worked Mikemossiyannup, when or if thou workedst Mikemossitup, when or if he worked Preterite. Plural. Mikemossiyenkup, when or if we worked Mikemossiyekup, when or if ye worked Mikemossichtitup, when or if they worked. Singular. Mikemossiyakpanne, when or if I had worked Mikemossiyanpanne, when or if thou hadst worked Mikemossitpanne, when or if he had worked Pluperfect. Plural. Mikemossiyenkpanne, when or if we had worked Mikemossiyekpanne, when or if ye had worked Mikemossichtitpanne, when or if they had worked. Future. Singular. Mikemossiyatsch, when or if I shall work Mikemossiyanetsch, when or if thou shalt work Mikemossitetsch, when or if he shall work Plural. Mikemossiyenketsch, when or if we shall work Mikemossiyequetsch, when irif ye shall work Mikemossichtitsch, when or if they shall work. JVEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. Singular. Atta n'mikemossiwi, I do not work Atta k'ndkemossiwi, thou dost not work Attta mikemossuwi, he does not work Present. Plural. Atta n'mikemossuwune or mikemossuwuneen, we have not worked \!ta k'mikemossihhimowi, ye have networked Atta mikemossivriwak, they have not worked. OP THE LENNl 1.ENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] 1S3 Singular. Atta n'mikimossiwip, I did not work or have not worked Atta k'mikemossiwi, thou didst not work or hast not worked Atta mikemossuwik, he did not work or has not worked Preterite. Plural. Atta n'mikemossiwunap, we did not work or have not worked Atta k'mikemossiwihhimoap, ye did not work or have not worked Atta mikemossiwipannik, they did work or have not worked. Smgutar. Atta n'mikemossiwitsch, I shall not work Atta k'mikemossiwitsch, thou shalt not work Atta mikemossuwitsch, he shall not work Future. I Plural. I Atta mikemossiwunatsch, we shall not work Atta k'mikemossiwihhiniatsch, ye shall not work Atta mikemossuwiwaktsch, they shall not work. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Katschi mikemossihon, work not thou I Plural. ' Katschi mikemossihek, work ye not. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta mikemossiwa, when or if I do not work Matta mikemossiwonne, when or if thou dost not work Matta mikemossique, when or if he does not work Plural. Matta mikemossiwenk, when or if we do not work Matta mikemossiwek, when or if ye do not work Matta mikemossichtik, when or if they do not work. Singular. Matta mikemossiwakup, when or if I did not work Matta mikemossiwonnup, when or if thou didst not work Matta mikemossikup, when or if he did not work Preterite. Plural. Matta mikemossiwenkup, when or if we did not work Matta mikemossiwekup, when or if ye did not work Matta mikemossichtitup, when or if they did not work. Singular. Atta mikemossiwatsch, when or if I shall not work Atta mikemossiwonnetsch, when or if thou shalt not work Atta niikemossiketsch, when or if be shall not work Future. Plural. Atta mikemossiwenketsch, when or if we shall not work Atta mikemossiweketsch, when or if ye shall not work * Atta mikemossichtiktsch, when or if they shall not work. 124 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGVAGE [first conjugation.] Present. Mitzin, to eat Singular. Mitzit, he who is eating there N'mitzi, I eat K'mitzi, thou eatest Mitzu, he eats Singular. No. IV. Mitzin, to eat. POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Preterite. Mitzineep or mitzihump, to have eaten. PARTICIPLES. I Plural. Mitzichtit, they who are eating there. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. N'mitzineen or mitzihhenna, we eat K'mitzihhimo, ye eat Mitzowak, they eat. Preterite. Singular. Sf 'mitzineep orn'mitzihuinp, I have eaten K'mitzineep or k'mitzihump, thou hast eaten Mitzoop, he has eaten Plural. N'mitzihhenakup, we have eaten K'mitzihhimoakup, ye have eaten Mitzopannik, they have eaten. Future. (Not given.) IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Mitzil, eat thou Mitzitetsch, let him eat Singular with Plural. Mitzitam, do thou let us eat Plural. Mitzik, eat ye Mitzichtitetsch, let them eat Double Plural. Mitzitamoak, do you let us eat. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. N'mitzianne, when or if 1 eat K'mitzianne, when or if thou eatest Mitzite, when or if he eats Plural. Mitziyenke, when or if we eat Mitziyeque, when or if ye eat IVIitzichtite, when or if they eat. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] 125 Preterite. Singular. | Plural. N'mitziyannup, when or if I did eat or have eaten N'raitziyenkup, when or if we did eat or have K'mitziyannup, when or if thou didst eat or hast eaten eaten Mitziyekup, when or if ye did eat or have eaten Mitzite, when or if he did eat or has eaten Mitzichtitup, when or li they did eat or have I eaten. The Future Is conjugated like the present tense, nmitziyanetsch, when or if I shall have eaten, &.c. The preterite is often joined to or preceded by the adverb metschi (already), as for instance, metschi mitziyanne, when or if I shall have eaten, metschi mitzite, when or if he shall have eaten. No. V. PoMMissiN, to go, to walk. Pommissio, to go Singular. Pemsit, one who is going Singular. N'pomsi, I go K'pomsi, thou goest Pomsu, he goes POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. . Preterite. I Pominissineep, to have gone. PARTICIPLES. I Plural. Pemsitschik, those who are going, (euntes, am- I bulantes) INDICATIVE MOOD. Preserit. Plural. N'pommissineen, we go Pomsihhiino, ye go Pommissowak, they go. Singular. N'pomsineep, I went K'ponisineep, thou didst go Ponimissop, he went VOL. III. 3 I Preterite. I Plural. Pommissihhenakup, we went Pomruissihhimoakup, ye went Pommissopannik, they went. GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [rmST CONJUGATION.] The Future Is conjugated like the present, with tsch suffixed : EXAMPLE. SingyXaT. N'pomsitsch K'pomsitch Pommissutsch or pomsutch Plural. N'pommissineentsch Pommissihhimotsch or pomsihhimotsch Pommissowaktsch. Singular. Pommissil, go thou IMPERATIVE MOOD. I Pommissik, go ye. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Pommissiyane, when or if I go K'pommissiyane, when or if thou goest Pommissite, when or if he goes Singular. Ponunissiyannup, when or if I went K'pommissiyannup, when or if thou didst go Pommissitup, when or if he went Plural. Pommissiyenke, when or if we go Pommissiyeque, when or if ye go Pommissichtitc, when or if they go. Preterite. Plural. Pommissiyenkup, when or if we went Pommissiyekup, when or if ye went Pommissiehtitup, when or if they went Future. Singular. Pommissiyanetsch, when or if I shall go K'pommissiyanetsch, when or if thou shalt go Pommissitetsch, when or if he shall go Plural. Pommissiyenketsch, when or if we shall go Pommissiyequetsch, when or if ye shall go Pommissichtitetsch, when or if they shall go. J^ote. — This verb is not used in the sense of " going to or away from a particular place." In this case aan, to go, and allumsin, to go away, are used. No. VI. GAtrwtN, to sleep. POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. I Preterite. Gauwin, to sleep I Gauwineep, to have slept OP THE LENNI liENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] Future. Gauwintschi, to be about to sleep (dormiturus esse). 127 Singular. Gewi, he who sleeps, (dormiens) Suigular. Gewitup, he or one who has slept PARTICIPLES. Present. I Plural. I Gewitschik, they who sleep, (dormientes) Preterite. I Plural. I Gewitpannik, they who have slept. Singular. N'gauwi, I sleep K'gauwi, thou steepest Gauwiu, he sleeps INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I Plural. Gauwineen, we sleep Gauwihhimo, ye sleep Gauwiwak, they sleep. Preterite. Singular. N'gauwineep, I slept K'gauwineep, thou didst sleep Gauwip, he slept Singular. N'gauwintschi, I shall or will sleep K' gauwintschi, thou shalt or wilt sleep Gauwiuchtsch, he shall or will sleep Gauwihhenakup, we slept Gauwihhimoakup, ye slept Gauwipanoik, they slept. Future. Plural. Gauwihhenatsch, we shall or will sleep Gauwihhimotsch, ye shall or will sleep Gauwiwaktsch, they shall or will sleep. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Gauwil, sleep thou Gau?piwetsch, let him or he shall sleep Singular with Plural. Gauwitam, do thou let us sleep Plural. Gauwik, sleep ye Gauwichtitetsch, they shall sleep Double Plural. Gauwitamook, do ye let us sleep. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. {JVot given.) JVote. — Gauwoheen, to lie down to sleep. 138 GRAMMAR OP THE LAXGVAGE [first conjugation.] No. VIL POMMATJCHSIN, tO live. POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pommauchsin, to live Pommauchsineep, to have lived I Pommauchsintsch, victurus esse. The idea I cannot be expressed in English. PARTICIPLES. Present. Pemauchsit, living Perfect. Pemauchsitpannik, he who lived Future. Pemauchsitschick, he who shall live. Singular. N'pommauchsi, I live K'pommauchsi, thou livest Pommauchsu, he liveth INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. N'pommauchsihummena, we live K'pommauchsihhimo, ye live Pommauchsowak, they live. Singular. N'pommauehsineep, 1 lived K*poinmauchsineep, thou livedst Pommauchsop, he Uved Singular. N'pommauchsitsch, 1 shalllive K'pommauchsitsch, thou shall live Pommauchsutsch, he shall Uve Preterite. Plural. N'pommauchsihummenakup, we lived K'pommauchsik, ye lived Pommauchsopannik, they lived- Future. Plural. N'ponamauchsihumnienatsch, we shall live K'pommauchsihhimotsch, ye shall live Pommauchsowaktsch, they shall Uve IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Pommauchsil, live thou Future Singular. Pommauchsitetscb, he shall live Plural. Pommauchsik, live ye Future Plural. Pommauchsichtitetscb, they shall live. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fibst conjugation.] 139 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD Present. Singular. N'pommauchsiyanne, if or when I live K'pomniauchsiyanne, if or when thou Uvest Pommauchsite, il" or when he Uves Plural. Pommauchsiyenke, if or when we live Pommauchsiyeque, if or when ye live Pommauchsichtite, if or when they live. Singular. N'pommauchsiyannup, if or when I have lived S'pommauchsiyannup, if or when thou hast lived Pommauchsitup, if or when he has Uved Preterite. Plural. Pommauchsiyenkup, if or when we have lived Pommauchsiyekup, if or when ye have lived Pommauchsichtitup, if or when they have Uved Pluperfect. Singular. N'pommauchsiyanpanne, if or when I had lived K'pommauchsiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst Uved Pommauchsitpanne, if or when he had lived Plural. Pommauchsiyenkpanne, if or when we had lived Pommauchsiyek panne, if or when ye had lived Pommauchsichtitpanne, if or when they had Uved. The Future Is like the present with only tsch suffi.\ed netsch, k'pommauchsiyannetsch, &.c. thus n'pommauchsiyan- JVEGATIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. {JVot given.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Malta n'pommauchsivri, I do not hve Malta k'pommauchsiwi, thou dost not live Matta pommauchsiwi, he does not Uve Singular. Matta n'pommauchsiwip, I have not Uved Matta k'pommaucbsiwip, thou hast not Uved Matta pommauchsiwip, he has not Uved Plural. Matta n'pommauchsiwuneen or n'pommauchsi- wenk, we do not live Matta k'pommauchsiwunevo or k'pommauchsi- week, ye do not live Matta pommauchsiwiwak, they do not Uve, Preterite. Plural. Matta n'pommauchsiwenkup, we have not Uved Matta k'pommauchsiwekup, ye have not lived Matta pommauchsiwipannik, they have not lived. VOL. III. 2 K 130 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] The Future Is like the present with tsch suffixed. IMPERATIVE MOOD. {J^ot given.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta n'pommauchsiwonne, if I do not live Malta k'pommauchsiwonne, if thou dost not live Matta pommauchsique, if he does not live Plural. Matta pommauchsiwenke, if we do not live Malta pommauchsiweque, if ye do not live Matta pommauchsichtique, if they do not live. Preterite. Singular. Plural. Matta n'pommauehsiwonnup, if or when I did Matta pommauchsiwenknp, if or when we did not live I not live Matta k'pommauchsiwonnup, if or when thou Matta pommauchsiwekup, if or when ye did not didst not live I live Matta pommauchsitup, if or when he did not Matta pommauchsichtitup, if or when they did live I not live. Pluperfect. Singular. Matta n'pommauchsiwipanne, if or when I had not lived Matta k'pominauchsiwonpanne, if or when thou hadst not lived Matta pommauchsiwipanne, if or when he had not lived Plural. Matta pommauchsiwenkpanne, if or when we had not lived Matta pommauchsiwekpanne, if or when ye had not lived Matta pommauchsuwiwakpanne, if oc when they had not lived. The Future Is formed from the present, as is said above, by adding tsch. CAUSATIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD Pommauchsoheen, to make to live. PARTICIPLES. Present. Singular. Pemauchsohaluwed, he who makes to live Pemauchsohalid, be who makes me live Pemauchsohalquon, he who makes thee live Pemauchsobalat, he who makes him Uve Pemauchsohalquenk, he who makes us live Peniauohsohalqueek, he who njakc? you live Pemauchsohalquichtit, he who makes them Uve. OF THE LENNI LBNAPB INDIANS. [first conjugation.] Preterite. Pemauchsohalitup, he who made me live. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. 131 Singular. N'pommauchsohalgun or n'pommauchsohaluk, he makes me live K'pommauchsohalgun, he makes thee Uve , n. pommaucnsonaiguwa, ne makes you Uv( Fommauchsohalal or pommauchsohalgol, he Pommauchsohalawak, he makes them Uve makes him hve > Plural. Pommauchsohalguna or pommauchsohalquenk, he makes us live K'pommauchsohalguwa, he makes you live Preterite. Singular. N'pommauchsohalguneep, he made me live K'pommauchsohalguneep, he made thee live Pommauchsohalap, he made him live Plural. Pommauehsohalquenkup, he made us live Pommauchsohalquekup, he made you live Pommauchsohalapamiit, he made them live. Futtire Singular. N'pommauchsohalaktsch, he shall or will make me live K'pommauchsohalaktsch, he shall or will make thee live Pommauchsohaluchtsch, he shall or will make him Uve Plural. N'pommauchsohalgunatsch, he shall or will make us live K'pommauchsohalguwaktsch, he shall or will make you live Pommauchsohalawaktsch, he shall or will make them live. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Pommauchsohalil, make me Uve j Plural. I Pommauchsohalineen, make us Uve. JVEGATIVE FORM. Present. Singular. Matta n'poimnauchsohalgowi, he does not make me Uve Matta k'pommauchsohalgowi, he does not make thee live Matta pommauchsohalawi, he does not make him hve Plural. Matta pommauchsohalguwuneen, he does not make us live Matta k'pommauchsohalguweek, he does not make you live Matta pommauchsohalawiwak, he does not make them live. Singular. Matta pommauchsohalgowip, he did not make me live Matta k'pommauchsohalgowip, he did not make thee live Matta pommauchsohalawip, he did not make him uve Preterite. Plural. Matta pommauchsohalguwcnkup, he did not make us live Matta pommauchsohalgawekup, he did not make you Uve .Malta pommauchsohalawipannit, he did not make them Uve. 132 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] The Future. May be formed from the present tense, as has been already shewn. J^fote. — From the xerh pomihauchsin\s also iotm&A petauchsin, to live so long, till now, to this time, and is conjugated through all the moods and tenses of the radical verb. When we say petauchsohalgun, it is as much as to say " he" (the Saviour) " has preserved our lives or kept (keeps) us living until this time." In this sense, it can only be said of the Deity and of no one else. It is, as one might say, a religious verb. No. IX. Lauchsin, to live, to walk. This verb is derived fiom pommauchsin above conjugated*. INFINITIVE MOOD. Lauchsin, to live, walk. INDICATIVE MOOD. Singular. N'dellauchsin, I live or walk K'dellauchsin, thou livest or walkest Wdellauchsin or lauchsu, he lives or walks Present. Plural. N'dellauchsineen or n'dellauchsihummena, we live or walk K'dellauchsihhimo, ye live or walk W'dellauehsinewo or lauchsowak, they live or walk. Preterite. Singular. N'dellauchsineep' or a'dellauchsihump, I lived or walked K'dellauchsineep or k'dellauchsihump, thou livedst or walkedst Wdellauchsineep orlauchsop, he lived orwalked Plural. N'dellauchsihummenakup, we lived or walked K'dellauchsihimoakup, ye lived or walked W'dellauehsinewo or lauchsopannik, they lived or walked. * JVoie by the Translator. — The author does not explain himself further, but I have been in- formed by Mr Heckewelder that the Delawares have various verbs in which they combine the idea of life with actions of living men. Thus a person who has been sick, being asked how he is, will answer, 1 live, I walk, I am on my feet, I am lively, able to walk about. In other circumstances, the answer to such a question will be given by a different verb. The author, in his copious Dela- ware Vocabulary, in the form of a spelling book, has neither lauchsin nor pommauchsin, he has pommissin, to walk, pommixin, to creep. These shades of language can only be acquired by practice. OF THE liENNI LENAIJE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] 133 SingiUar. N'dellauchsintsch, I shall live or walk K'deUauchsintsch, thou shall live or walk Lauchsutsch, he shall live or walk Future. Plural. N'dellauchsihummenatsch, we shall live or walk K'dellauchsihiniiuotsch, you shall live or walk W'dellauchsowaktsch, they shall live or walk. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Lauchsil, live thou or walk I Plural Lauchsik, live ye ' Lauchsitam, let us lire. More of this mood is not given. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Lauchsiya, if I live or walk Lauchsiyanne, if thou livest or walkest Lauchsite, if he lives or walks Sirtgular. Lauchsiyakup, if I lived K'dellauchsiyannup, if thou livedst Lauchsitup, if he lived Plural. Lauchsiyenke, if we live or walk Lauchsiyeque, if ye live or walk Lauchsichtite, if they live or walk. Preterite. Plural. Lauchsiyenkup, if we lived Lauchsiyekup, if ye lived Lauchsichtitup, if they lived. Pluperfect. Si7igular. Lauchsiyanpanne, if I had lived K'dellauchsiyanpaiiDe, if thou hadst lived Lauchsitpanne, if he had lived Singular. Lauchsiyannetsch, if 1 shall live K'dellauchsiyaDoetsch, if thou shall live Lauchsitetsch, if he shall live Plural. Lauehsiyeukpanne, if we had lived Lauchsiyekpanue, if ye had Uved Lauchsichtitpanne, if they had lived. Future. Plural. Lauchsiyenketsch, if we shall live Lauchsiyequetsch, if ye shall live Laucbsichtitetsch, if they shall live. CAUSATIVE FORM. Lauchsoheen, to cause or make one to Uve, walk, be lively, happy. INFINITIVE MOOD. Lauchsoheen, to make one live (in the sense above mentioDed). VOL. lU. 3 L 1 34 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] PARTICIPLES. Singular. I Plural. Lauchsohalid, he who makes me live I Lauchsohalquenk, he who makes us live. Lauchsohalitup, he who made me live • | ^ INDICATIVE MOOD. Present: Singular. N'dellauehsohalgun, he who makes me live Lauehsohalquon, he who makes thee live Lauchsohalgol, he who makes him hve Plural. N'dellunchsohalguneen, he who makes us live K'dellauchsohalguwa, he who makes you live Lauchsohalawak, he who makes them Uve. N'dellauchsohalguneep, he made me live K'dellauchsohalguneep, he made thee live Lauchsohalgop, he made him live Preterite. Plural. Lauchsohalquenkup, he made us live Lauchsohalquekup, he made you live Lauchsohalapannit, he made them live. Singular. Nekamatsch n'dellauehsohalgun, he will make me live Nekamatsch k'dellauchsohalgun, he will make thee live Future. Plural. N'dellauchsohalgunatsch, he will make us live K'dellauchsohalguwatsch, he will make you live Lauchsohalawatsch, he will make them live. Nekamatsch lauchsohalgol, he wUl make him live I IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. I Plural. Laiichsohalil, make me live | Lauchsohalineen, make us live. No more of this verb is given. No. X. WuLAMALLsiN, to be well, happy. POSITIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Wulamallsin, to be well, happy. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS, [fiest conjugation.] 135 Singular. Ntilamallsi, I am well Kulamallsi, thou art well Wulamalisi, be is well INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I Plural. Nulajnallsihhummena, or shorter, nulamallsih- hena, we are well Kulamallsihhimo, ye are weU Wulamallsowak, they are well. Preterite. Singular. Nulamallsihump, I was well Kulamallsihump, thou wast well Wulamalessop, he was well I Plural. Nulamallsihhummenakup, we were well Kulatuallsihhimoakup, ye were well I Wulamallsopannik, they were well. Singular. Nulalmalsitsch, I shall or will be well Kulamallsitsch, thou shalt or wilt be weD Wulamallessutsch, he shall or will be well Future. Plural. Nulamallsihhenatsch, we shall or will be well Kulamallsihhimotsch, ve shall or will be well WulamaUsowaktsch, they shall or will be well. IMPERATIVE MOOD. (JYot given.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Singular. Nulamallsiyanne, if or when I am well Kulamallsiyanne, if or when thou art well Wulamallsite, if or when he is well Present. I Plural. Wulamallsiyenke, if or when we are well Wulamallsiyeque, if or when ye are well Wulamallsichtite, if or when they are well. Preterite. Singular. Nulamallsiyannup, if or when I was well Kulamallsiannup, if or when thou wertwell Wulamallsitup, if or when he was well Plural. Nulamallsyenkup, if or when we were well Kulamallsiyekup, if or when ye were well Wulamallsinhtitup, if or when they were welL Pluperfect Singular. NulamaUsiyanpanne, if or when I had been well Kulamallsiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst been well WulamaUessitpanne, if or when he had been well Plural. Wulamallsiyenkpamie, if or when we had been well Wulamallsiyekpanne, if or when ye had been well WulamaUsichtitpanne, if or when they had been well. 136 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] Future. Singular. Plural. Nulamallsiyannetsch, if or when I shall or will be well Kulamallsiyannetsch, if or when thou shall or wilt be well Wulamallsitetsch, if or when he shall or will be well Wulamallsiyenketsch, when or if we shall or will be well Wulamallsiyequetsch, when or if ye shall or will be well Wulamallsichtitetsch, when or if they shall or will be well. jvegjitivb form. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta nulamallsiwl, I am not well Malta kulamallsiwi, thou art not well Malta wulamallsiwi, he is not well Plural. Matta nulamallsiwuneen, we are not well Matta kulamalllwihhimo, ye are not well Matta wulainallsiwiwak, they are not well. Preterite. Singular. Malta nulamallsiwip, I have not been well Matta kulamallsiwip, thou hast not been well Malta wulamallsiwi, he has not been well Plural. Matta nulamallsiwenkup, we have not been well Matta kulamallsiwekup, ye have not been well Matta wulamallsiwipannik, they have not been well. The remainder may be easily conjugated by following the negative form of pommauchsin, to live, above given. COJVTIJVUOUS FORM. To be conjugated as the preceding with wa prefixed. EXAMPLE. Wawulamallsin, to be always well or happy. Singular. N'wawulamallsi, I am always well K'wawulamallsi, thou art always well Wawulamallsu, he is always well Plural. Wawulamallsihhummena, we are always well K'wawulamallsihhiiQO, ye are always well Wawulamallsowak, they are always well, &c. CAUSJlTIVE FORM. Wulamallesscheen, to make or cause a person to be well or happy. INFINITIVE MOOD. Wulamallesscheen, to make one happy. OP THE LBNNI LENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] . 137 PARTICIPLES. Wulamallessohaluwed, he who makes one happy Wulainallessohalid, he who makes me happy WulaDiaIles!-ohalian (vocative), 0 ihou Kho ma- kes! ine happy ! WulamaUessohalquon, he who makes thee happy Wulamallessohalat, he who makes him happy Wulaaiallessohaiquenk, he who makes us happy WuUmallessohaJqueek, he who makes you hai^py Wulamallessohalquichtit, he who makes them happy. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Nulamallsohalgun, he makes me happy Kulamall-ohalsun, he makes thee happy Wulamallsohaigol, he makes him happy Singular. Nulamallsohal^neep, he made me happy Kulaniall>ohalguneep, he made thee happy Wulamallsohalap, he made him happy Plural. Wulamallsohalguna.he makes us happy \\ ulaiiialUohalguwa, he makes you happy Wulaiuallsohalawak, he makes them happy. Preterite. Plural. Wulamallsohalgunap, he made us happy Wulaniall^ohalguwoap, he made you happy WulamaUsohalapannik, he made them happy. Future. Singular. i Plural. Nulamallsohaluktsch, he shall make me happy I Wulamallsohalgunatsch, he shall make us happy Kulamallsohaluklsch, he sliall make thee happy j Wulamallsohalguwalsch, he shall make youhappy Wulamallsohalauchtsch, he shall make him happy Wulamallsohalawaktsch, he shall make them I happy. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Wulamallsohalil, make me happy Plural. VVulamallsohalineen, make us happy. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, Present. Singular. Wulamallsohalite, if or when he makes me happy Wulamallsohalquonne.if or whenhe makes thee happy Wulamallsohalate, if or when he makes him happy Plural. Wulamallsohalquenke, if or when he makes us happy Wulamallessohalqueque, if or when he makes you happy Wulamallsohalquichtite, if or when he makes them happy. Preterite. Singular. . Plural. Wulamallsohalitup, if or when he made me Wulamallsohalquenkup, if or when he made us hap|)y happy Wulamallsohalquonnup.if orwhenhemadethee WulamalUohalquekup, if or when he made you happy happv Wulamall-ohalatup, if or when he made him Wulanjallsohalquichtup, if or when he made happy j them happy. VOL. III. 2 M 138 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] Future. (Not given.) JVote. — The proper orthography of this verb is wulamallessin, wulam- allesscheen, wulamallessi, &,c. ; but the e is frequently left out for brevity's sake, both in speaking and writing, therefore in this conjugation the two modes of spelling are indifferently used. No. XI. NiHiLLAPEWiN, to be one's own master, to be free. INFINITIVE MOOD. Nihillapewin, to be free. PARTICIPLES. Present. Singular. Nihillapewid, he who is free Singular. Nihillapewi, I am free K'nihillapewi, thou art free Nihillapeu, he is free I Plural. NihiDapewitschik, they who are free. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Phiral. Nihillapewineen, nihillapewiyenk, nihillapewi- huiumena, we are free Nihillapewihhimo, nihillapewiyek, ye are free Nihillapewak, they are free. Preterite. Singular. Nihillapewihump, I was free K'nihillapewihump, thou wast free Nihillapewip, he was free Plural. Nihillapewihummenakup, we were free K'nihilJapewihummoakup, ye were free JVihillapewapannik, they were free. The Future Is as usual formed from the present by^eans of the suffix tsch. IMPERATIVE MOOD. {JYot given.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Nihillapewiyake, when or if I am free K'niliillapewiyane, when or if tliou art free Nihillapewite, when or if he is free Plural. Nihillapewiyenkej when or if we are free Nihillapewiyeque, when or if ye are free Nihiilapewichtite, when or if they are free. OF THE L.ENKI LENAPE INDIANS. [first CON'JUGATION.] 139 Preterite. Singular. Nihillapewyannup, when or if I was free K'nihillapewiyanDup, when or if thou wert free Nihillapewitup, when or if he was free Plural. Nihillapewiyenkup, when or if we were free Nihillapewiyekup, when or if ye were free Nihillapewichtitup, when or if they were free. Pluperfect. Singular. Nihillapewiyanpanne, when or if I had been free K'nihiliapewiyanpanne, when or if thou hadst been free Nihillapewipaune, when or if he had been free Plural. NihiUapewiyenkpanne, when or we had been free Nihillapewiyekpanne, when or if ye had been free Nihillapewichtitpanne, when or if they had been free. Future. (Not given.) J\''ote. — As this verb has the syllable tvi, which in general indicates a negative form, its negative has ivitvi. CAUSATIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. NihiUapucheen, to liberate or make free. PARTICIPLES. Present. Singular. Nihillapeuhoalid, he who makes me free, my de- liverer Nihillapeuhalquon, he who makes thee free, thy deliverer Nihillapeuhoalat, he who makes him free, his de- liverer Plural. Nihillapeuhoalquenk, he who makes us free, our deliverer Nihillapeuhoalqueek, he who makes you free, your deliverer Nihillapeuhoalquichtit, he who makes them free, their deliverer. Preterite. Nihillapeuhoalitup, he who made me free. Sic. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Nihillapeuhalgun, he or one" makes me free K'nihillapeuhoalgun, he or one makes thee free Nihiliapeuhoalgol, he or one makes him free Plural. Nihillapeuhoal2;una or nihillapeuhalquenk, he or one makes u? free Nihillapeuhoalguwa or nihillapeuhoalqueek, he or one makes you free Isihillapeuhoalgook or nihillapeu}ioalawak, he or one makes them free. * J\rote by the Translator. — One answers here to the French particle on : on me delime. 140 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE [first conjugation.] Preterite. Singular. I Plural. Nihillapeuhoalgoap, he made me free Niliillapeuhoaleunakup, he made us free K'nihilla|)eu!ioal!»op, he made thee free I Nihillapeuhoalguwoakiip, he made yoii free AV'nihillapeuhoalap, he made him free I W'nipihillapeuhoalapannik, he made them free. The Future. Is formed from the present, by means of the suffix tsch. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. I Plural. Nihillapeuhoalil, make me free I Nihillapeuhoahneenj make us free. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Nihillapeuhoalite, if or when he makes me free Nihiliaiieuhoalquonne, if or when he makes thee free W'nihillapeuhoalate, if or when he makes him Plural. Nihitlapeuhoalquenke, if or when he makes us free Nihillapeuhoalqueque, if or when he makes you free Nihilla])euhoalquichtite, if or when he makes them free. Preterite. Singular. | Plural. Nihillapeuhoalitup, if or when he made me free Nihillapeuhoalquenkup, if or when he made us Nihillapeuhoalquonnup, if or wlien he made thee free free Nihillapeuhoalquekup, if or when he made you Nihillapeuhoalatup, if or when he made him free free j Nihillapeuhoalquichtitup, if or when he made I them free. Singular. Nihillapeuhoahtpanne, if or when he had madi me free Nihillapeuhoalatquonpanne, if or when he hai made thee free Nihillapeuhoalatpanne, if or when he had madi him free Pluperfect. Plural. Nihillapeuhoalquenkpanne, if or when he had made us free Vihillapeuhoalqueekpanne, if or when he had made you free Nihillapeuhoal(iiiichlitpanne, if or when he had made them free. Future. (Not given. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [first conjugation.] 141 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Nihillapeuhoalgussia, if or when I am made free K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyane, if or when thou art made free Nihillapeuhoalgussite, if or when he is made free Plural. Nihillapeuhoalgussiyenque, if or when we are made free Nihillapeuhoalgussiyeque, if or when ye are made free Nihillapeuhoalgnssichtite, if or when they are made free. Preterite Singular. Niliillapeuhoalgussiyakup, if or when I was made free K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyanup, if or when thou wert made free Nihillapeuhoalgussitup, if or when he was made free Plural. Nihillapeuhoalgussiyenkup, if or when we were made free K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyekup, if or when ye-were made free Nihillapeuhoalgussichtitup, if or when they were made free. Pluperfect Singular. Nihillapeuhoalgussiyakpanne, if or when I had been made free K'nihillapeufaoalgussiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst been made free Nihillapeuhoalgussitpanne, if or when he had been made free Plural. Nlhillapeuhoalgussiyenkpanne, if or when we had been made free K'nihillapeuhoalgussiyekpanne, if or when ye had been made free Nihillapenhoalgussichtitpanne, if or when tliey had been made free. Future Singular. Nihillapenhoalgussitsch, if or when I shall be made free K'nihillapeuhoalgussitsch, if or when thou shalt be made free Nihillapeuahoalgussutscb, if or when he shall be made free Plural. Nihillapeuhoalgussihummenatsch, if or when we shall be made free K'nihillapeuhoalgussihimatsch, if or when ye shall be made free Nihillapeuhoalgussowaktsch*, if or when they shall be made free. ' A'ote by the Translator. — This verb in its various forms is derived from, or at least con- nected with nihillatamen, I own, 1 am master of, and to that class belong words which may be used as substantives, signifying lord or master, or as participles, in their personal forms, as he who owns me, thee, him, Sic. See the 4th conjugation, No. ill. to which that verb belongs. With this family of verbs and substantives is connected the verb, nihilla, 1 kill, or strike dead, and its forms, knihillall, I kill thee, strike thee dead ; and nilchgvssiani, (used only in the subjunc- tive mood) if or when I am killed or struck dead. It is very curious to observe the chains of ideas which different nations pursue in the formation of their languages. Here we find right, power, and force confounded together, as if there was no difference between them — I am owner, mas- ter, lord; I strike, kill, destroy; all— words derived fiom the same root produced under different forms, and this will, no doubt, be ascribed to the barbarity of American Indians. But may not similar connections and derivations be found in the languages of civihzed nations? For instance the Italian cattivo, wicked, from captivus, a prisoner, whence the English word cailif is derived ; the French gueux, a scoundrel, which signifies also a beggar; thus stigmatizing misfortune with the imputation of baseness and crime ; and in almost all European languages, the words wretch, malheureux, miserable, &c. used to express the highest degree of defamation and contempt.' " Take physic, pomp !"— Let us learn first to know ourselves, before we pass too severe a judg- ment on other nations. • VOL. III. 2 N 143 GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE [of verbs.] ScronK eronfusatfon. No. I. A AN, to go (thither, to a place.) POSITIVE FORM. Eyat, going Ahek, gone Sinf^lar. N'da, I go K'da, thou goest Eu or Traeu, he goes Singular. N'dahump, n'danep, I went K'dahump, kManep, thou didst \ Eep, w'danep, he went Singular. N'dantsch, I shall or will go K'dantsch, thou shalt or wilt go Euchtsch, he shall or will go INFINITIVE MOOD. Aao, to go. PARTICIPLES. Eyatschik Ahektschik. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. N'daneen or n'dahhena, we go K'dahhimo, ye go Ewak, waewak, or w'danewo, they go. Preterite. Plural. N'dahhenap or n'dahhenakup, we went KMahtiimoakup, ye went Epannik, they went. Future. Plural. N'dahhenatsch, we shall or will go K'dahhimotsch, ye shall or will go Ewaktsch, they shall or will go. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. .\al, go thou Atam let us go I Aak, go ye. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [second conjugation.] 143 Singular. Atetsch, he shall go Future. I Plural. I Achtitetsch, they shall go. Singular. Aane, when or if I go Ayane, when or if Aou goest Ate, when or if he goes •SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. Ayenke, when or if we go Ayeque, when or if ye go Aachtite, when or if they go. Preterite. Singular. Aanup, when or if I went Ayanup, when or if thou didst go Atup, when or if he went Singular. Aanpanne, when or if I had gone Ayanpanne, when or if thou badst gone \tpanne, when or if he had gone Singular. .\anetsch, when or if I shall go Ayanetsch, when or if thou shalt go Aktsch, when or if he shall go Plural, Ayenkup, when or if we went Ayekup, when or if ye went - Aachtitup, when or if they went. Pluperfect. Plural. Ayenkpanne, when or if we had gone Ayekpanne, when or if ye had gone Achtitpanne, when or it they had gone. Future. Plural. Ayenketsch, when or if we shall go Ayequetsch, when or if ye shall go Aachtitetsch, when or if they shall go. LOCAL RELATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Eyaya, where or whither I go Eyayan, where or whither thou goest Eyat, where or whither he goes Singular. Eyayakup, where or whither I went Eyayanup, where or whither thou didst go Eyatup, where or whither he went Plural. Eyayenk, where or whither we go Eyayek, where or whither ye go Eyachtit, where or whither they go. Preterite. Plural. Eyayenkup, where or whither we went Eyayekup, where or whither ye went Eyachtilup, where or whither they went. Future. Singular. Eyayatsch, where or whither I shall or will go Eyayannetsch, where or whither thou shalt or wilt go Eyatsch, where or whither he shalJ or will go Plural. Eyayenktsch, where or whither we shall or will go Eyayektsch, where or whither ye shall or will go Eyaktitsch, where or whither they shall or will go . 144 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [second conjugation.] JVEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta n'dawi, I do not go Matta k'dawi, thou dost not go Matta ewi, he does not go Singular. Matta n'dawip, I did not go Matta k'dawip, thou didst not go Matta ewip, he did not go Plural. Matta n'dawuneen, we do not go Matta k'dawunewo, ye do not go Matta ewiwak, they do not go. Preterite. Plural. Matta n'dawunenap, we did not go Matta k'dawihhimoap or k'dawunewoap, ye did not go Matta w'dawunewoap or ewipannik, they did not ffo. Future. Singular. Mattatsch n'dawi, I shall not go Mattatsch k'dawi, thou shaltnot go Mattatsch w'dawi or ewi, he shall not go Plural. Mattatsch n'dawuneen, we shall not go Mattatsch k'dawunewo, ye shall not go Mattatsch ewiwak, they shall not go. Singular. Katschi ta ahan, do not go IMPERATIVE MOOD. I Plural. Katschi ta ahek, go ye not. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta n'dawonne, when or if I do not go Matta awonne, when or if thou dost not go Matta aque, when or if he does not go Plural. Matta awenke, when or if we do not go Matta aweque, when or if ye do not go Matta achtite, when or if they do not go. The other tenses of this verb in the subjunctive mood are not given. SOCIAL FORM. Witeen*, to go with To go with some body. INFINITIVE MOOD. I Witeneep, to have gone with. * J^ote by the Translator. — The derivation of tliis word witeen from n'da, I go, does not immediately appear. In the first place it must be observed, that the author frequently con- OP THE LENWT T.EWAPB INDIANS. [second conjugation.] 143 PARTICIPLE. Witetschik, he who goes with his companion. N'wite, I go with K'wiie, thou goest with Witeu, he goes with Singular. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. N'witeneen, we go with K'witenewo, ye go with Witewak, they go with. Preterite. Singular. N'witeneep, I went with K'witeneep, thou didst go with Witeep, he went with SinguUtr. Vwitetsch, I shall go with K'witetsch, thou shall go with Witeuchtsch, he shall go with Plural. N'witenenakup, we went with K'witenewoakup, ye went with Witepannik, they went with. Future. Plural. N'witeneentsch, we shall go with K'witenewotsch, ye shall go with Witewaktscb, they shall go with. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sirtgular. Witel, go thou with Witscheewil, go thou with me Plural. Witek, go ye with Witscheewik, go ye with me. cisowadaotJw'H TSjWSITIOJVS.— FIRST TRjWSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'witscbewulanne or k'witschewulen, I go with thee N'witschewan, I go with him K'witschewullohhumo, 1 go with you N'witschewawak, 1 go with them. Preterite. Singular. K'witschewuUeneep, I went with thee N'witschewoap, I went with him Plural. K'witschewullohhumoap or k'witschewullenne- woap, I went with you N'witschewoapannik, I went with them. founds the sounds d and (, which to a German untutored ear appear to be the same ; therefore if we write uyideen,l}\e etymology becomes at once apparent. H^is the inseparable pronoun of the third person he or she, him or her ; t is interposed for euphony's sake, and deen or teen is a form of the verb aan, to go, as n'da or n'ta is another. We should be very careful how we ascribe a want of analogy to Indian derivations ; although it may not be always observable at first sight, it will be discoveied by those who investigate the subject with the necessary attention. VOL. III. S O 146 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [second conjugation.] SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Witschewane, when I go with him ) No more of this tense is given, nor of the subjunctive mood through- out these transitions, except two persons in the second, and two in the third. SECOJVD THAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. .J,, ENNI LENAPB INDIANS. [fourth conjugation.] 165 Pluperfect. Pendawachriyenkpanne, if or when we had heard each other Pendawachtiyekpanae, if or when ye had heard each other Pendawachtichtitpanne, if or when they had heard each other. Future. PendawachUyenketsch, if or when we shall or will hear each other Pendawachtiyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will hear each other Pendawaktichtitetsch, if or when they shall or will hear each other. JVEGATIVE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Atta pendawachtiwuneen, we do not hear each other Atta pendawachtiwek, ye do not bear each other Atta pendawachtiwiwak, they do not hear each other. Preterite. Atta pendawachtiwunenap, we did not hear each other Atta pendawachtiwihhimoap, ye did not hear each other Atta pendawachtiwipannik, they did not hear each other. Future. Atta pendawachtiwiineentarh, we shall or will not hear each other Atta pendawachtiwihhirnotsch, ye shall or will not hear each other Atta pendawachtiwiwaktsch, they shall or will not hear each other. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Katschi* pendawachtihek, do not hear each other. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Atta pendawachtiwenke, if or when we do not hear each other Atta pendawachtiweque, if or when ye do nor hear each other Atta pendawachtiehtite, if or when they do not hear each other. Preterite. Atta pendawachtiwenkup, if or when, we did not hear each other Atta pendawaclitiwekup, if or when ye did not hear each other Atta pendawachtichtitiip, if or when they did not hear each other. Pluperfect. .\tta pendawachliwenkpanne, if or when we had not heard each other Atta pendawachtiwekpanne, if or when ye had not heard each other Atta pendawachtichtitjianne, if or when they had not heard each other. Future. Atta pendawachtiwenketsch, if or when we shall or will not hear each-Other Atta pendawachtiwequetsch, if or when ye shall or will not hear each other .\tta pendawachtichtitetsch, if or when they shall or will not hear each other. ♦ JVote by the Translator. — Kalaehi is a word of prohibition, as in English don't, and appears to be compounded from alia. The Author classes it with adverbs. See below, adverbs of nega- tion, prohibition. VOL. Ill, 2 T 166 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fourth conjugation.] REFLECTED FORM. There is also a reflected form of the verb As N'penda n'hakey*, Ihear myself K'pendawa hakey, thou hearest thyself Pendawawall hokeyall, he hears himself. Likewise N'dahowala n'hakey, I love myself K'dahowala hakey, thou lovest thyself Wdahoalawall or w'dahowalawall hokeyall, he loves himself. PERSOJVAL FORMS OR TRAJVSITIOJVS. In order to enable the reader to compare these forms in the positive and negative voices, they are placed here in opposition to each other. .*■ FIRST TRAJ\rSITIOJ\r. First Person Singular, /. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. POSITIVE. K'pendelen, I hear thee N'pendawa, I hear him K'pendolohhumo, I hear you N'peudawawak, 1 hear them. K'pendolenep, I did hear thee N'pendawap, I did hear him K'pendolohhumoap, I did hear you N'pendawoapannik, I did hear them. JVEGATIVE. Atta k'pendolowi, I hear not thee Atta n'pendawawi, I hear not him Atta k'pendolhummowi, I hear not you Atta n'pendawawiwak, 1 hear not them. Preterite. Atta k'pendolowip, I heard not thee Atta n'pendawawip, I heard not him Atta k'pendolohummowip, I heard not you Atta a'pendawawipannik, 1 heard nut them. Future. K'pendolentsch, I shall or will hear thee N'pendawatsch, I shall or will hear him K'pendolohhuinotseh, I shall or will hear you N'pendawawaktsch, I shall or will hear them. Atta k'pendolowitsch, I shall or will not heat thee Atta n'pendawawitsch, I shall or will not hear him Atta k'pendolhummowitsch, I shall or will not hear you Atta n'pendawawiwaktsch, I shall or will not hear them. * JVote by the Translator.— JVhakey signifies litefally " my body," which is synonymous to "my person," or "mys-lf " In English we say "somebody, nobody," for oKguis, nemo. There is notiiiDg barbarous in those words. OF THE liBNNl LENAPE INDIANS. [fourth conjugation.] 167 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. POSITIVE. K'pcndolane, if or when I hear thee Pendawake, if or when I hear him Peniloleque, if or when I hear you Pendawawake, if or when I hear them. JiTEGJlTIVE. Atfa pendolowonne, if or when I do not hear thee Atta n'pendatnawonne, if or when I do not hear him Atta n'pendoleque, if or when I do not hear you Atta n'pendawawiwonne, if or when I do nothear them. Preterite. K'pendolannup, if or when I did hear thee N'pendawakup, if ^r when I did hear him N*pendolekup, if or when I did hear you R'pendawawakup, if or when I did bear them. Atta pendolowonnup, if or when I did not heai thee Atta n'pendamawonnup, if or when I did not hear him Atta n'pendolekup, if or when I did not hear you Atta n'pendawawiwonnup, if or when I did not hear them. Pluperfect K'pendolanpanne, if or when I had heard thee N'pendawakpanne, if or when I had heard him Pendolekpanne, if or when I had heard you N'pendawawakpanne, if or when I had beard them. Atta pendolowonpanne, if or when I had not heard thee Atta n'pendamawonpanne, if or when I had not heard him Atta pendolowekpanne, if or when I had not heard you Atta pendawawipanne, if or when I had not heard them. Future. K'pendolanetsch, if or when I shall or will hear thee N'pendawanetsch, if or when I shall or will hear him N'pendolequetsch, if or when I shall or will hear you N'pendawawaketsch, if or when I shall or will hear them. Atta n'pendotowonnetsch, if or when I shall or will not hear thee Atta n'pendamawonnetsch, if or when I shall or will not hear him Atta n'pendolowequetsch, if or when I shall or will not hear ynu Atta n'pendawawiwonnetsch, if or when I shall or will not hear them. SECOJVD TRAJVSITIOJV. Second Person Singular, THOU. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. R'pendawi, thou hearest me K'pendawa, thou hearest him K'pendawihhena, thou hearest us K'pendawawak, thou hearest them. Atta k'pendawiwi, thou hearest not me Atta k'pendawawi, thou hearest not him Atta k'pendawiwuneen, thou hearest not us Atta k'pendawawiwak, thou hearest not them. 168 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fourth conjugation.] Preterite. POSITIVE. K'pendaninep, thou didst hear me K'pendawap, thou didst hear him K'pendawihhenap, thou didst hear us K'pendawoapannik, thou didst hear them. JYEGATIVE. Atta k'pendawiwip,thou didst not hear me Atta k'pendawasvip, thou didst not hear him Atta k'pendawiwunap, thou didst not hear us Atta k'pendawawapannik, thou didst not hear them. Future. K'pendawitsch, thou shalt or wilt hear me K'pendawatsch, thou shalt or wilt hear him K'pendawihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt hear us K'pendawawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt hear them. Atta k'pendawiwitsch, thou shalt or wilt not hear me Atta k'pendawawitsch, thou shalt or wilt not hear him Atta k'pendawiwuneentsch, thou shalt or wilt not hear us Atta k'pendawawiwaktsch, thou shalt or wilt not hear them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. K'pcndawiyane, if or when thou hearest me K'pendawane, if or when thou hearest him K'pendawiyenk, if or when thou hearest us K'pendawawonne, if or when thou hearest them Present. Atta k'pendawiwonne, if or when thou dost not hear me Atta k'pendawawonne, if or when thou dost not hear him Atta k'pendakuwenque, if or when thou dost not hear us Atta k'pendawawiwonne, if or when thou dost not hear them. Preterite. K'pendawiyanup, if or when thou didst hear me K'pendawanup, if or when thou didst hear him K'pendawiyenkup, if or when thou didst hear us K'pendawawawonnup, if or when thou didst hear them. Atta k'pendawiwonnup, if or when thou didst not hear me Atta k'pendawawonnup, if or when thou didst not hear-him Atta k'pendawenkup, if or when thou didst not hear us Atta k'pendawawiwonnup, if or when thou didst not hear them. Pluperfect. K'pendawiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst heard me K'pendawanpanne, if or when thou hadst heard him K'pendawiyenkpanne, if or when thou hadst heard us K'pendawawawonpanne, if or when thou hadst heard them. Atta k'pendawiwonpanne, if or when thou hadst not heard me Atta k'pendawonpanne, if or when thou hadst not heard him Atta k'pendawenkpanne, if or when thou hadst not heard us Atta k'pendawawiwonpanne, if or when thou hadst not heard them. OF THE LENNI I.ENAPE INOIANS. [fourth conjugation.] 169 Future. POSITIVE. Fpendawiyanetsch, if orwhenllioushalt or wilt hear me K'pendawanetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt hear hiui K'penilawiyenqoetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt hear us K*pen<1awawawonnetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt hear them. JVEGATIVE. Atta k'pendawiwonnetsch, if or when thou shalt or will not hear rae Atta k'pendawawonnetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt not hear him Alta k'pendawenquetsch, if or when thou shalt or vvilt not hear us Atta k'pendawawiwonnetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt not hear them. THIRD TRAJ\rSITIOJS: Third Pt'rson Singular, HE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'pendagun, he hears me K'pendagun, he hears thee Tendagoi,he hears him Penda^na, he hears us K'pendaguwa, he hears you Pendawawak, he hears them. Alia n'pendagowi, he does not hear me Atta k'pendagowi, he does not hear thee Atta pendamawi, he does not hear him Atta pendaguwuneen, he does not hear us Atta k'pendaguwawi, he does not hear you Atta pendawawiwak, he does not hear them. Preterite. N'pendagop, he heard or did hear me K'pendagop, he heard or did hear thee Pendagop or pendap, he heard or did hear him N'pendaguuap, he heard or did hear us Pendaguwap, he heard or did hear you Pendawapannik, he heard or did hear them. Alia n'pendagowip, he did not hear me Alia pendagowip, he did not hear thee Alia pendawawip, he did not hear him Atta n'pendaguwuneenap, he did nol hear us Alta pendaguwawip, he did not hear you I Atla n'pendawawipannik, he did not hear them. Future. N'pendaguktsch, he shall or will hear me K'pendaguktsch, he shall or will hear thee Pendagollsch, he shall or will hear him N'pendagunatsch, he shall or will hear us K'peudaguwatsch, he shall or will hear you Pendawawaktsch, he shall or will hear them. Atta n'pendagowitsch, he shall or will not hear me Atta k'pendagowitsch, he shall or will not hear thee Atla pendawawitsch, he shall or will not hear him Atta pendaguwuneentsch, he shall or will not hear us Atta k'pendaguwawitsch, he shall or will not hear you Atta pendawawiwaktsch, he shall or will nol hear them. VOL. III. 3 V 170 QRAMMAB OP THE LANGUAGE [fourth conjugation.] SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. POSITIVE. Pendawite, if or when he heareth me Pendagake, if or when he heareth thee Pendawate, if or when he heareth him Pendaquenke, if or when he heareth us Pendaqueque, if or when he heaieth you Pendawachtite, if or when he heareth them. JVEGATIVE. Atta pendawique, if or when he does not heat me Atta pendaquonne, if or when he does not hear thee Atta pendawaque, if or when he does not hear liim Atta pendaguwonque, if or when he does not hear us Atta pendaguweque, if or when he does not hear you Atta pendawachtique, if or when he does not hear them. Preterite. Pendawitup, if or when he did hear me Pendaftukup, if or when he did hear thee Pendawatup, if or when he did hear him Pendaquenkup, if or when he did hear us Pendaquekup, if or when he did hear you Pendawachtitup, if or when he did hear them. Atta pendawikup, if or when he did not hear me Atta pendaquonnup, if or when he did not hear thee Atta pendawakup, if or when he did not hear him Atta pendawenkup, if or when he did not hear us Atta pendawekup, if or when he did not hear you Atta pendawachtitup, if or when he did not hear them. Pluperfect. Pendawitpanne if or when he had heard me Pendagukpanne, if or when he had heard thee Pendawatpanue, if or when he had heard him Pendayquenk{)anne, if or when he had heard us Pendaquekpanne, if or when he had heard you Pendawachtitpanne, if or when he had heard them. Atta pendawikpanne, if or when he had not heard me Atta pendaquonpanne, if or when he had not heard thee Atta pendawatpanue, if or when he had not heard him Atta pendaquenkpanne, if or when he had not heard us Atta pendaquekpanne, if or when he had not heard you Atta pendawachtitpanne, if or when he had not heard them. Future. Pendawitetsch, if or when he shall or will hear me Pendaguketsch, if or when he shall or will hear thee Pendawatetsch or pendagoltsch, if or when he shall or will hear him Pendaquenquetsch, if or when he shall or will hear us Pendaqueketsch, if or when he shall or will hear you Pcndawachtitsch, if or when he shall or will hear them. Attatsch* pendawite, if or when he shall or will not hear me Attatsch pendaquonne, if or when he shall or will not hear thee Attatsch pendawaque, if or when he shall or will not hear him Attatsch pendaquenque, if or when he shall or will not hear us Attatsch pendaqueque, if or when he shall or will not hear you Attatsch pendawachtite, if or when he shall or will not hear them. * JVofe by the Translator. — Here the sign of the future tense, tsch, is suflSxed to the adverb not, and not to the verb. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fourth conjugatiox.] 171 FOURTH TRAJVSITIOJV. First Person Plural, WE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. POSITIVE. S'pendoloneeu, we hear thee N'pendawaneen, we hear him K'pendolohhena, we hear you N'pendawawunaaak, we hear them. .XEGATIXTE. Atta kYendoIowuneen, we do not hear thee Atta n^pendawawuneen, we do not hear him Atta k'pendolhumraowuneen, we do not heat you Atta n'pendawawunanak, we do not hear them. Preterite. K'pendolonenap or k'pendolohhenap, we did hear thee N'pendawawunap, we did hear him K'pendolohhenap, we did hear you N'pendamawunapannik, we did hear them. .-Vtta k'pendolowtmeenap, we did not hear thee Atta n'pendamawunap, we did not hear him Atta k'pendolhummowuneenap, we did not hear you Atta n'pendawawuneenak, we did not hear them. Future. K'pendoloneentsch or k'pendolohhenatsch, we shall or wijl hear thee N'pendawaneentsch, we shall or will hear hitn K'pendolohhumenatsch, we shall or will hear you N'pendawawunanaktsch, we shall or will hear them. .Atta k'pendolowuneentsch, we shall or will not hear thee Atta n'pendawawuneentsch, we shall or will not hear him Atta k'pendolhuraowuneentsch, we shall or will not hear you Atta n'pendawawunaktsch, we shall or will not hear them. Pendolenque, if or when we hear thee Pcndamanque, if or when we hear him Pendolohhumanque, if or when we hear vou Pendawamanque, if or when we hear them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Atta pendolowonque, if or when we do not hear thee Atta pendawanque, if or when we do not hear him Atta k'pendamolanque, if or when we do not hear you Atta pendawawonque, or if when we do not hear them. Preterite Pendolenkup, If or when we did hear thee Pendamankup, if or when we did hear him Pendolhumankup, if or when we did hear you Pendawawankup, if or when we did hear them Atta pendolowonkup, if or when we did not hear thee Atta pendawankup, if or when we did not hear him Atta k'pendamolekup, if or when we did not hear you Atta pendawawankup, if or when we did not hear them. 17S GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fourth conjugation.] Pluperfect. POSITIVE. Pendolenkpanne, if or when we had heard thee Pendamenkpanne, if or when we had heard him Pendolhumopanne, if or when we had heard you Pendamawawonkpanne, if or when we had heard them. J^EGATIVE. Atta pendolowankpanne, if or when we had not heard thee Atta pendawankpanne, if or when we had not heard him Atta pendamowekpanne, if or when we had not heard you Atta pendawawonkpanne, if or when we had not heard them. Future. Pendolenquetsch, if or when we shall or will 1 Atta pendolowunatsch, if or when we shall or hear thee will not hear thee Pendainanquetsch, if or when we shall or will Atta pendawanquetsch, if or when we shall or hear him will not hear him Pendolohummanquetsch, if or when we shall or Atta pendamolhummotsch, if or when we shall will hear you j or will not hear you Pendawawanquetsch, if or when we shall or j Atta pendawawonquetsch, if or when we shall will hear them. ' or will not hear them. FIFTH TRAJVSITIOJV. Second Person Plural, YE. K'pendawihhimo, ye hear rae K'pendawawa, ye hear him K'pendawihhenook, ye hear us K'pendawawak, ye hear them. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Atta k'pendawihhimo, ye do not hear me Atta k'pendawawunewo, ye do not hear him Atta k'pendawiwuna, ye do not hear us Atta k'pendawawunewo, ye do not hear them. Preterite. K'pendawihhimoakup, ye heard or did hear me K'pendawawap, ye heard or did hear him K'pendawihummenakup, ye heard or did hear us K'pendawawapannik, ye heard or did hear them. Atta k'pendawihhimoap, ye heard not or did not hear me Atta k'pendawawihhimoap, ye heard not or did not hear him Atta k'pendawiwunap, ye heard not or did not hear us Atta k'pendawawunewo, ye heard not or did not hear them. Future. "K'pendawihhimotsrh, ye shall or will hear me 1 Atta k'pendawihhimotsch, ye shall or will not K'pendawawatsch, ye shall or will hear him hear nie K'pendawihummenatsch, ye shall or will hear Atta k'pendawawunewotsch, ye shall or will not us hear him K'pendawanewotsch, ye shall or will hear them. ; Atta k'pendawihummenatsch, ye shall or will not hear us Atta k'neii.lawawunewotsch, ye shall 01 will not hear them. OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fourth conjugation.] 173 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. POSITIVE. K'pendolane, if or when ye hear me Pendawake, if or when ye hear him Pendoleqiie, if or when ye hear U9 Pendawawake, if or when ye hear them. K'pendolannup, if or when ye did hear me N'pendawakup, if or when ye did hear him N'pendolekup, if or when ye did hear us N'pendawawakup, if or when ye did hear them JVEG.aTIVE. Atta pendawiweke, if or when ye do not hear me Atta pendamaweque, if or when ye do not hear him Atta pendawonquek, if or when ye do not hear us Atta pendawiweque, if or when ye do not hear them. Preterite. Atta pendawiwekup, if or when ye did not hear Atta pendamawekup, if or when ye did not hear him Atta pendawonquekup, if or when ye did not hear us Atta pendawawiwekup, if or when ye did not bear them. Pluperfect. K'pendolanpanne, if or when ye had heard me N'pendawakpanne, if or when ye had heard him Pendolekpanne, if or when ye had heard us N'pendawawakpanue, if or when ye had heard them. Atta pendawiwekpanne, if or when ye had not heard me Atta pendamawekpanne, if or when ye had not iieard hitn .\tta pendawonquekpanne, if or when he had not heard us Atta pendawawiwekpanne, if or when ye had not heard them. Future. K'pendolanetsch, if or when ye shall or will hear me N'pendawanetsch, if or when ye shall or will hear him N'pendolequetsch, if or when ye shall or will hear us N'pendawawaketsch, if or when ye shall or will hear them. Atta pendawiwektsch, if or when ye shall or will not hear me Atta pendamawequetsch, if or when ye shall or will not hear him Atta pendawonquektsch, if or when ye shall or will not hear us Atta pendawawiwektsch, if or when ye shall or will not hear them. VOL. III. — 2 X 174 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fourth conjugation.] SIXTH TRAJVSITIOJ\: Third Person Plural, THEY. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. POSITIVE. N'p^ndagenewo, they hear me K'pendae;uwak, they hear thee Pendawawall, they heard him Pendageneen, they heard us Pendaguwawak, they heard you Pendawawawall, they heard them. N'pendagopannik, they beard me K'pendagopannik, they heard thee Pendawawoapannik, they heard him Pendagunapannik, they heard us Pendaguwapannik, they heard you Pendawawaponnik, they heard them. J^EGATIVE. Atta n'pendaguwiwak, they do not hear me Atta k'pendaguwiwak, they do not hear thee Atta pendawawiwak, they do not hear him Atta pendaguwuneen, they do not hear us Atta pendaguwawiwak, they do not hear you Atta pendawawiwak, they do not hear them. Preterite. Atta n'pendagewip, they did not hear me Atta k'pendagewip, they did not hear thee Atta pendawawip, they did not hear him Atta pendaguwunenap, they did not hear us Atta pendaguwawip, they did not hear you Atta pendawawipaunik, they did not hear them . Future. N'pcndagunewotsch, they shall or will hear me Pendagooktsch, they shall or will hear thee Pendawawaktsch, they shall or will hear him Pendagunepntsch, they shall or will hear us Pendaguhhimotsch, they shall or will hear you Pendawawaktsch, they shall or will hear them. Atta n'pendaguwiwaktsch, they shall or will not hear me Atta k'pendaguwiwaktsch, they shall or will not hear thee Atta pendawawiwaktsch, they shall or will not hear him Atta pendaguwuneentsch, they shall or will not hear us Atta pendaguwawitsch, they shall or will not hear you Atta pendawawiwaktsch, they shall or will not hear them. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sing. Pendawil, do thou hear me Sing, with Plur. Pendawik, do ye hear me Plur. Pendawaneen, heat us. (JVot giveH.) OF THE 1.ENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fourth conjugation.] 175 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. POSITIVE. Pendamichtite, if or when they hear me Pendageyane, if or when they hear thee Pendawachtit, if or when they hear him Pendageyenke, if or when they hear us Pendageyeque, if or when they hear you Pendawawachtite, if or when Uiey hear them. JVEG^STIVE. Atta pendamichtike, if or when they do not hear me Atta pendagewiehtike, if or when they do not hear thee Atta pendawachtike, if or when they do not hear him Atta pendagewenke, if or when they do not hear us Atta pendageweque, if or when they do not hear you Atta pendawawachtite, if or when they do not hear them. Preterite. Pendamichtitup, if or when they heard me Pendageyannup, if or when they heard thee Pendawachtitup, if or when they heard him Pendageyenkup, if or when they heard us Pendageyekup, if or when they heard you Pendawawachtitup, if or when they heard them. Atta pendagewichtikup, if or when they do not hear me Atta k'pendagewichtikup, if or when they do not hear thee Atta pendawachtikup, if or when they do not hear him Atta pendakewenkup, if or when they do not liear us Atta pendagewekup, if or when they do not hear you Atta pendawawichtitup, if or when they do not hear them. Pluperfect. Pendamichtitpanne, if or when they bad heard me Pendakhittitpanne, if or when they had heard thee Pendawachtitpanne, if or when they had heard him Pendageyenkpanne, if or when they had heard us Pendageyekpanne, if or when they had heard you Pendawawachtitpanne, if or when they had heard them. Atta pendamichtikpanne, if or when they had not heard me Atta pendagewichtikpanne, if or when they had not heard thee Atta pendawachtikpanne, if or when they had not heard him Atta pendagewenkpanne, if or when they had not heard us Atta k'pendagewekpanne, if or when they had not heard you Atta pendawawichtikpanne, if or when they had not heard them. Future Pendamichtitsch, if or when they shall or will hear me Pendakliittitsch, if or when they shall or will hear thee Pendawachtitsch, if or when they shall or will hear him Pendageyenktsch, if or when they shall or will hear us Pendageyektsch, if or when they shall or will hear you ' Pendawawachtitsch, if or when they shall or will hear them. Atta pendamichtiketsch, if or when they shall or will not hear me Atta pendagewichtiktsch, if or when they shall or will not hear thee Atta pendawawichtiktsch, if or when they shall or will not hear him Atta pendagewenktsch, if or when they shall or will hear us Atta pendagewpktsch, if or when they shall or will heir you Atta pendawaffichtiketsch, if or when they shall or will hear them. 176 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fotjuth conjugation.] No. III. NiHiLLATAMEitr, I owQ OT am master of. ACTIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. {JVot given.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. KTihillatamen, I own K'nihillatamen, thou ownest Wnihillatamen, he owns Singular. Nihillatameneep, I did own K'nihillatameneep, thou didst own Wnihillatameueep, he did own Plural. Nihillatameneen, we own K'nihillatohhimo, ye own Nihillatamenewo, they own. Preterite. Plural. Nihillatamohhummoakup, we did own K'nihillatamohhummoakup, ye did own Nihillatamenewoakup, they did own. Future. Nihillafamentsch, I shaU or will own K'nihillalamentsch, thou shall or wilt own Wunihillatamentsch, he shall or will own Plural. ^Jihillataraeneentsch, we shall or will own K'nihillatainohhumotsch, ye shall or will own Nihillatamenewotsch, they shall or will own. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. i Plural. Nihillalil, own me, let me belong to thee ( Nihillalineen, own us. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Nihillatamane, if or when it belongs to me K'nihiilatamane, if or when it belongs to thee NUiillatanke, if or when it belongs to him Plural. Nihillatamenke, if or when it belongs to us Nihillatanieque, if or when it belongs to you Nihillatamichtite, if or when it belongs to them. Preterite. Singular. Nihillatamanup, if or when it belonged to me K'nihillatanianup, if or when it belonged to thee Nihillalankup, if or when it belonged to him Plural. Nihillatamenkup, if or when it belonged to us Nihillatamekup, if or when it belonged to you Nihillataroichtitup, if or when it belonged to them. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fourth conjugation.] 177 Pluperfect Singular. Niliillatamanpanne, if or when it had belonged to me K'nihillatamanpanne, if orwhenithad belonged to thee Nihillatankpanne, if or when it had belonged to him Plural. Nihillatamenkpanne, if or when it had belonged Nihillatamekpanne, if or when it had belonged to you Nihillatamichtitpanne, if or when it had belong- ed to them. The Future Is like the present, vvitli the addition of" tsch. Imperativo Caret. PASSIVE FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. [The proper Infinitive Form is not given.) PARTICIPLES. Singular. I Plural. Nihillalgussid, he who is owned or under power Nihillalgussitschik, they who are owned or un- ' der power. Singular. Nihillalgussi, I am owned E'nihillalgussi, thou art owned NihiUalgussu, he is owned INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. Nihillalgussihummena, we are owned K'nihillalgussihhimo, ye are owned Nihillalgussowak, they are owned. Preterite. Singular. Nihillalgussihump, I was owned K'uihillalgussihump, thou wast owned Nihillalgussop, he was owned Plural. Nihillalgussihhummenakup, we were owned K'nihillalgussihhiiiimoakup, ye were owned Nihillalgussopannik, they were owned. Future. Singular. Nihillalgussitsch, I shall or will be owned K'nihillalgussitsch, thou shait ur wilt be owned Nihillalgussulsch, he shall or will be owned Plural. Nihillalgussihummenotsch, we shall or will be owned K'nihillalgussihhiniotsch, ye shall or will be owned iN'ihillalgussowaktsch, they shall or will be own- ed. VOL. III. 2 Y Imperativo Caret. 178 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fourth conjugation.] SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Nihillalgussiane, if or when I am owned K'nihillalgussiane, if or when thou art owned NihiUalgussite, if or when he is owned Plural. Nihillalgussiyenke, if or when we are owned Nihillalgussiyeque, if or when ye are owned Nlhillalgussichtite, if or when they are owned. Preterite. Singular. Nihillalgussiyannup, if or when I was owned K'niliiUalgussiyannup, if or when thou wertowtied Nihillalgussitup, if or when he was owned Plural. Nihillalgussiyenkup, if or when we were owned Nihillalgussiyekup, if or when ye were owned Nihillalgussichtitup, if or when they were owned. Pluperfect. Singular. Nihillalgussianpanne, if or when I had been owned K'nihillalgussianpanne, if or when thou hadst been owned Nihillalgussitpanne, if or when he had been owned Plural. NihiUalgussiyenkpanne, if or when we had been owned Nihillalgussiyekpanne, if or when ye had been owned Nihillalgussichtitpanne, if or when they had been owned. The Future Is like the present, adding tsch. Imperativo Caret. pessojvjil forms. INFINITIVE MOOD. {JVot given.) PARTICIPLES*. Singular. Nihillalid, he who owns nie, my Lord, my master Nibill.ilquonk, be who owns thee, thy Lord NiliiUalat, he who owns him, his Lord Plural. Nihillalquenk, he who owns us, our Lord Nihillalqueek, he who owns you, your Lord Nihillalquichtit, he who owns them, their Lord. Substantively in the Vocative case. Singular. j Plural. Nihillalian, O thou my Lord ! I JN'ihillaliyenk, 0 thou our Lord ! Hence the following verbal form : Nihillalek, 1 am your Lord. * See above, p. 141 in note. OF THE l,ENNI EENAPE INDIANS. [fourth conjugation.] 179 TRjWSITIOJVS.— FIRST TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Sinevlor. K'nihillalel, I own, am the master of thee Nihillala, 1 own him I Plural. iNihillalek or k'nihillalellhuramo, I own yon I Nihillalawak, I own them. Sinsrular. K'nihillali, thou ownest toe R'nihillal, thou ownest him SECOJVD TRjUVSITIOjV. I Plural. K'nihillalineen, thou ownest us I K'nihillalawak, thou ownest them. Singular. Nihillaluk, he owns me K'i;i'iilUluk,he owns thee WniliillalawaU, he owns him THIRD TRAMSITIOJV. Plural. WnihiUalguneen or w'nihillalquenk, he owns Wnihillalqueek he owns you Wnihillalawak, he owns them. FOURTH TR.1.,VSITI0JV. Singular. K'nihillalellohhena, we own thea Nihillalaneen, we own him I Plural. K'nihillalhummo, we own you Nihillalawuna, we own them. Singular. K'nihillalihhirao, ye own me K'nihillalanewo, ye own him FIFTH TIUJVSITIOJV. K'nihillalineen or k'nihillalihhena,ye own ue I K'nihillalawak, ye own them. SIXTH TILi.VSITIOJV. Singular. . Plural. Nekamawa nihillalukgunewo or nihillalgunewa, |Nekaniawa nihillalguna, they own us they own m- Nekaniawa k'nihillalukgunewo or k'nihillalgu- newo, ;hey own thee Nekamawa w'niliillalawak, they own him Nekaniawa k'nihillal£:uwa, they own you Nekamawa nihillalawak, they own them. IMPERATIVE MOOD Singular. | Nihillalil, own me, be thou my Lord Plural. Nihillalineen, own us, be thou our Lord. 480 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [or VERBS.] iTtftft (Eoniufiatton. Note by the Translator. — Of this conjugation, one verb alone is given : Ahoulan, to love. It is conjugated through the Active, Passive, Perso- nal, and Reciprocal forms, positive and negative. The negative transi- tions, however, have been omitted in the Subjunctive mood. They are left blank in the original, and were probably meant to have been filled up by the Author. They therefore do not appear in this grammar. Ahoalan , to.love. ACTIVE FORM.— POSITIVE. N'dahoala, I love K'dahoala, thou lovest Ahoaleu or w'dahoala, he loves Singular. N'dahoalep, I loved K'dahoalep, thou lovedst Ahoalep, he loved INFINITIVE MOOD. AhoalaUj to love. PARTICIPLES. [JS'ot given.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. ..^. Plural. N'dahoalaneen, we love K'dahoalohhumo, ye love Ahoalewak, they love. Preterite. Plural. N'dahoalennenap, we loved K'dahoalohhuminoap, ye loved Ahoalepaiinik, they loved. Singular. N'dahoalatsch, I shall or will love K'dahoalatsch, thou shalt or wilt love Ahoaleuchtscb, he shall or will love Future. Plural. N'dahoaleneentsch, we shall or will love K'dahoalohhummotsch, ye shall or will love Ahoalewaktsch, they shall or will love. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. I Plural. Ahoal, love thou ' Ahoalek, love ye. OF THE LENNl l,EN\PE INDIANS. [fifth conjugation.] 181 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Singular. Ahoalak, if or when I love Ahoalanne.'if or when thou lovest Ehoalat, if or when he loves Singular. Ahoalachkup, if or when I loved AhoalaoDup, if or when thou lovedst Ehoalachtup, if or when he loved Present. Plural. Ahoalenke, if or when we love Ahoaleque, if or when ye love Ahoalachtite, if or when they love . Preterite. Plural. Ahoalenkup, if or when we loved Ahoalekup, if or when ye loved Ahoalachtitup, if or when they loved. Pluperfect. Singular. Ahoalakpanne, if or when I had loved Ahoalanpanne, if or when thou hadst loved Ehoalatpanne, if or when he had loved Plural. Ahoalenkpanne, if or when we had loved Ahoalekpanne, if or when ye had loved Ahoalachtitpanne, if or when they had loved. Future. Singular. Ahoalaktsch, if or when 1 shall or will love Ahoalantsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt love Ehoalatsch, if or when he shall or will love Plural. Ahoalenketsch, if or when we shall or will love Ahoalequetsch, if or when ye shall or will love Ahoalichtitetscb, if or when they shall or will love. JSTEGATIVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. Atta ahoalan, not to love. PARTICIPLES. [J^'ot given.) INDICATIVE MOOD. Singular. Atfa n'dahoalawi, I do not love Atla k'(!.ihoalawi, thou AoA not love Atta ahoalewi, he does not love Singular. Atta n'dahoalawip, I did not love Atta k'dahoalawip, thou didst not love Atta ahoalewip, he did not love YOL. 111. 3 Z Present. Plural. Atta n'dahoalawuneen, we do not love Atta k'dahoalawunewo, ye do not love Atta ahoalewiwak, they do not love. Preterite. Plural. Atta n'dahoalowunenan, we did not love Atla k'dahoalo'.vunewo, ye did not love Atta ahoalewipannik, they did not love. 18S GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fifth conjugation.] Singular. Atta n'dahoalawitsch, 1 shaU or will not love Atta k'dahoalawitsch, thou shalt or wilt not love Atta ahoalewitsch, he shall or will not love Future. Plural. Atta n'dahoalawuneentsch, we shall or will not love Atta k'dahoalawunewotsch, ye shall or will not love Atta ahoalawiwaktscb, they shall or will not love. IMPERATIVE MOOD. {J\fot given.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. I Plural. Atta n'dahoalawanne, if or when I do not love I Atta ahoalawonk, if or when we do not love Atta k'dahoalawonne, if or when thou dost not ' Atta aboalawek, if or when ye do not love love I Atta ahoalachtik, if or when they do not love. Atta ehoalaque, if or when he does not love I Preterite. Singular. Atta ahoalawonnup, if or when I did not love Atta ahoalawonnup, if or when thou didst not love Atta ehoalakup, if or when he did not love Plural. Atta ahoalawonkup, if or when we did not love Atta ahoalawekup, if or when ye did not love Atta ahoalachtikup, if or when they did not love. Pluperfect. Singular. Atta ahoalawakpanne, if or when I had not loved Atta ahoalawonpanne, if or when thou hadst not loved Atta ahoalakpanne, if or when he had not loved Plural. Atta ahoalawonkpanne, if or when we had not loved Atta ahoalawekpanne, if or when ye had not loved Atta ahoalachtikpanne, if or when they had not loved. Atta n'dahoalawiwonne, if or when I shall or will not love Atta k'dahoalawonnetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt not love Atta ehowalequetsch, if or when he shall or will not love Future. Plural. Atta ahoalawonktsch, if or when we shall or will not love Atta ahoalawektsch, if or when ye shall or will not love Atta ahoalachtiktsch, if or when they shall or will not love. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fifth conjugation.] 183 PASSIVE FORM— POSITIVE. Singular. N'dahoalgussi, I am loved K'dahoalgussi, thou art loved Ahoalgussi, he is not loved INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. N'dahoalgussihhena, we are loved K'dahoalg^sihhimo, ye are loved Ahoalgussowak, they are loved. Singular. N'dahoalgussihvimp, I was loved K'daboalgussiiiep, thou wast loved W'dahoulgussop, he was loved Preterite. Plural. N'dahoalgussihhenap, we were not loved K'dahoalgussihhunoakup, ye were not loved W'dahoaigussopaonik, they were not loved. Future. Singular. N'dahoalgussitsch, I shall or will be loved K'dahoalgussitsch, thou shall or wilt be loved .\hoalgussutsch, he shall or will be loved Plural. N'dahoalgussihhenatsch, we shall or will be loved K'dahoalgussihhimotsch, ye shaU or will be loved Ahoalgussiwiwaktsch, they shall or will be loved. Singular. Ahoalgussiya, if or when I am loved Ahoalgussiyen, if or when thou art loved Ahoalgussite, if or when he is loved SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. I Plural. Ahoalg;ussiyenk, if or when we are loved Ahoal^ssiyek, if or when ye are loved I Ahoalgussichtit, if or when they are loved. Preterite. Ahoale;ussiyakup, if or when I was loved Ahoalp^ssiyannup, if or when thou wast loved Ahoalgussitup, if or when he was loved Plural. Ahoalgussiyenkup, if or when we were loved Ahoalgussiyekup, if or when ye were loved Ahoalgussichtitup, if or when they were loved. Pluperfect Singular. Ahoalgussiyakpanne, if or when I had been loved Ahoalgussiyanpanne, if or when thou hadst been loved Ahoalgussitpanne, if or when he had been loved Plural. Ahoalgussiyenkpanne, if or when we had been loved Ahoalg;ussiyekpanne, if or when ye had been loved Ahoalgussichtitpanne, if or when they had been loved. Future. Singular. i Plural. Ahoalpjssiyaktsch, if or when I shall or will be Ahoalgussiyenktsch, if or when we shall or will loved j be loved .Ahoalgussiyantsch, if or when thoushalt or wilt' Ahoalgussiycktsch, if or when ye shall or will be loved : be loved Ahoalgitsch, if or when he shall or will be loved Ahoalgussichtitscb, if or when they shall or I will be loved. 18+ GRAMMAR OP THE LANGUAGE [fifth conjugation.] JVEGATIVE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Atta n'dahoalgussiwi, I am not loved Atta k'dahoalgussiwi, thou art not loved Atta w'dahoalgussuwi, he is not loved Singular. Atta n'dahoalgussiwip, I was not loved Atta k'dahoalgussiwip, thou wa^t not loved Atta w'dahoalgussiwip, he was not loved Plural. Atta n'dahoalgussiwuneen, we are not loved Atta k'dahoalgussiwihhimo, ye are not loved Atta ahoalgussiwiwak, they are not loved. Preterite. Plural. Atta n'dahoalgussiwunenap, we were not loved Atta k'dahoalgussihhimoap, ye were not loved Atta w'dahoalgussiwipannik, they were not loved. Future. Singular. Atta n'dahoalgussiwitsch, I shall or will not be loved Atta k'dahoalgussiwitsch, thou shall or wilt not be loved Atta ahoalgussuwitsch, he shall or will not be loved Plural. Atta n'dahoalgussiwuneentsch, we shall or will not be loved Atta k'dahoalgussiwunewotsch, ye shall or will not be loved Atta ahoalgussiwiwaktsch, they shall or will not be loved. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Atta ahoalgussiwak, if or when I am not loved Atta ahoalgussiwonne, if or when thou art not loved Atta ahoalgussique, if or when he is not loved Plural. Atta ahoalgussiwenk, if or when we are not loved Atta ahoalgussiwek, if or when ye are not loved Atta ahoalgussichtik, if or when they are not loved. Preterite. Singular. Atta ahoalgussiwakup, if or when I was not loved Atta ahoalgussiwonnup, if or when thou wast not loved Atta ahoalgussikup, if or when he was not loved Plural. Atta ahoalgussiwenkup, if or when we were not loved Atta ahoalgussiwekiip, if or when ye were not loved Atta ahoalgussichtikup, if or when they were not loved. Singular. Atta aboaleussiwakpanne, if or when I had not been loved Atta ahoalgusiiwonpanne, if or when thou hadst not been loved Atta ahoalgussikpanne, if or when he had not been loved Pluperfect. Plural. -Atta ahoalgussiwenkpanne, if or when we had not been lo''ed Atta aboalgussiwekpanne, if or when ye had not been loved , Atta ahoalgussichtitpanne, if or when they had not been loved. ft OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fifth conjugation.] 185 Future. I Plural. Atta ahoalgussiwaktsch, if or when I shall or Atta ahoalgussiwenktsch, if or when we shall or will not be loved I will not be loved Atta ahoalgussiwonktsch, if or when thou shalt : Atta ahoalgussiwektsch, if or when ye shall or or wilt not be loved I will not be loved Atta ahoalgussiktsch, if or when he shall or will j Atta ahoalgussichtitsch, if or when they shall or not be loved I will not be loved. PERSOJV.SL FORMS.— POSITIVE. FIRST TRAJVSITIOJ\l'. K'dahoatell, I love thee N'dahoala, I love him K'dahoalennep, I loved thee N'dahoaJap^ 1 loved him INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dahoalohhummo, I love you N'dahoalawak, 1 love them. Preterite. K'dahoalohhuramoap. I loved you N'dahoalapannik, I loved them. Future. K'dahoalelltsch, I shall or will love thee N'dahoalauchtsch, I shall or will love him K'dahoalohhummotsch, I shall or will love you N'dahoalawaktsch, I shall or will love them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Ahoalanne, if or when I love thee Ahoalachte, if or when I love him Ahoalannup, if or when I loved thee Ahoalachtup, if or when I loved him Ahoaleque, if or when I love you Ahoalachtite, if or when I love them. Preterite. Ahoalekup, if or when I loved you Ahoalachtup, if or when I loved them. Pluperfect. Ahoalanpanne, if or when I had loved thee I Ahoalekpanne, if or when I had loved you Ahoalachtuppanne, if or when 1 had loved him | Ahoalatpanne, if or when I had loved them. Future. Ahoalanhetsch, if or when I shall or will love thee .Uioalachtetsch, if or when I shall or will love him Ahoalequetsch, if or when I shall or will love you Ahoaldchtiletsch, if or when I shall or will love them. VOL. III. 3 A 186 GRAMMAR OF THE LAN GU AGE [fifth conjugation.] SECOJVD TRAJVSITIOJV. K"dahoali,' thou lovest me K'dahoala, tliou lovest him INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. IK'dahoalineen, thou lovest us K'dahoalawak, thou lovest them. K'dahoalinep, thou didst love me K'dahoalap, thou didst love him K'dahoalitsch, thou shalt or wilt love me E'dahoalauchtsch, thou shalt or wilt love him Preterite. iK'dahoalihhenap, thou didst love us K'dahoalapannik, thou didst love them. Future. I K'dahoalihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt love Ui K'dahoalawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt love them. Ahoalil, love thou me IMPERATIVE MOOD. I Ahoalineen, love thou us. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Ahoaliyanne, if or when thou lovest me K'dahoalanne, if or when thou lovest him Ahoaliyenke, if or when thou lovest us K'dahoalachte, if or when thou lovest them. Preterite. Ahoaliyannap, if or when thou didst love me Ahoalannup, if or when thou didst love him .^hoaliyenkup, if or when thou didst love us K'dahoalachtup, if or when thou didst love them. Pluperfect. Ahoaliyanpanne, if or when thou hadst loved me I Ahoaliyenkpanne, if or when thou hadst loved us Ahoalanpanne, if or when thou hadst loved him K'dahoalachtuppanae, if or when thou hadst loved them. Future. Ahoaliyannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt " love me Ahoalachtetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt love him Ahoaliyenketsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt love us Ahoalachtitetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt love them. OF THE LENNl LENAPE INDIANS. 187 [fifth conjugation.] THIRD TRAJVSITIOJ^. PARTICIPLES. Ehoalid, he who loves me | Ehoalquenk, he who loves us Ehoalat, he who loves him Ehoalquek, he who loves you I Ehoalquichtit, he who loves them. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'dahoaluk, he loves me I Wdahoalguna, he loves us E'dahoaluk, he loves thee I Wdahoalguwa, he loves you Wdahoalawall, he loves him | Wdahoalawak, he loves them. Preterite. N'dahoalgunep, he loved me I N'dahoalgunap, he loved us K'dahoalgunep, he loved thee I K'dahoalguwap, he loved you W'dahoalap, he loved him | W'dahoalapamiik, he loved them. Future. N'dahoalauchtsch, he shall or will love me 1 N'dahoalgunatsch, he shall or will love us K'dahoalauchtsch, he shall or will love thee W'dahoalguwatsch, he shall or will love you W'dahoalauchtsch, he shall or will love him | W'dahoalawaktsch, he shall or will love them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Ahoalite, if or when he loves me I Ahoalquenke, if or when he loves us Ahoalquonne, if or when he loves thee Alioalqueque, if or whon he loves you Ahoalate, if or when he loves him | Ahoalachtite, if or when he loves them. Preterite. Ahoalitup, if or when he loved me I Ahoalquenkup, if or when he loved us Ahoaliyonnup, if or when he loved thee Ahoalquekun, if or when he loved you Ahoalatup, if or when he loved him | Ahoalachtitup, if or when he loved them. Pluperfect. Ahoalitpanne, If or when he had loved mo I Ahoalquenkpanne, if or when he had loved us Ahoa anpanne, if or when he had loved thee .\hoalquekpanne, if or when he had loved you Ahoalatpanne, if or when he had loved him | Ahoalachtitpanne, if or when he had loved them. Future. Ahoaletsch, if or when he shall or will love me I Ahoalquenketsch, if or when he shall or wUl Ahoalquonnetsch, if or when he shall or will love love us »i. '.'^'^L . u r ,. I ■ „ . I Ahoalquequetsch, if or when he shall or will Ahoalechtetsch, if or when he shall or will love love you *"" AhoalechUtetsch, if or when he shall or will love them. 188 . GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fifth conjugation.] FOURTH TRAJVSITIOA''. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dahoalenneen, we love thee N'dahoalawuna, we love him K'dahoalennenap, we loved thee N'dahoalawunap, we loved him K'dahoalohummena, we love you N'dahoalowawuna, we love them. Preterite. K'daholohummenap, we loved you N'dahoalawawunap, we loved them. Future. K'dahoalohhenatsch, we shall or will love thee I K'dahoalohummenatsch, we shall or will love N'dahoalawunatsch, we shall or will love him you I N'dahoalawawunatsch, we shall or will love them . SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. K'dahoalenk, if or when we love thee Ahoalanque, if or when we love him Ahoalenkup, if or when we loved thee Ahoalankup, if or when we loved him Ahoaleque, if or when we love you I Ahoalawonque, if or when we love them. Preterite. Ahoalekup, if or when we loved you Ahoalawawonkup, if or when we loved them. Pluperfect. K'dahoalenkpanne,if or when we had loved thee I Ahoalekpanne, if or when we had loved you Ahoalankpanne, if or when we had loved him ( Ahoalawonkpanne, if or when we had loved them. Future Ahoalenquetsch, if or when we shall or will I Ahoalequetsch, if or when we shall or will love love thee I you Ahoalanquetsch, if or when we shall or will Ahoalawonquetsch, if or when we shall or will love him love them. FIFTH TRAJVSITIOJ\r. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dahoalihhimo, ye love me K'dahoalanewo, ye love him K'dahoalihhena, ye love us 1 K'dahoalawawak, ye love them. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fifth conjugation.] 18^ Preterite. E'dahoalihhimoap, ye loved me K'dahoaianewoap, ye loved him E'dahoalihhenap, ye loved us KMahoalawapannik, ye loved them. Future. K'dahoalihhimotsch, ye shall or will love me K'daboalanewotsch, ye shall or will love him K'dahoalihhe^atsch, he shall or will love Os K'dahoalawawaktsch, ye shall or will love them. Ahoalik, love you me Ahoalo, love you him IMPERATIVE MOOD. ' Ahoalineen, love you us Ahoalatam, love you them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Ahoaliyeque, if or when ye love me Ahoalaque, if or when ye love him Ahoaliyekup, if or when ye loved me Ahoalaclitup, if or when ye loved him Ahoaliyenke, if or when ye love us Ahoalachtike, If or when ye love them. Preterite. Ahoaliyenkup, If or when ye loved us Ahoalachtiyekup, If or when ye loved them. Pluperfect. Ahoaliyekpanne, if or when ye had loved me I Ahoaliyenkpanne, If or when ye had loved us Ahoalekpanne, if or when ye had loved him | Ahoalachtitpanne, if or when ye had loved them. Futwe. Ahoaliyequetschjif or when ye shall or will love I Ahoaliyenquetsch, if or when ye shall or will me 1 love us Ahoalaquetsch, if or when ye shall or will love Ahoalaehilquetsch, if or when ye shall or will him I love them. SIXTH TRAjVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. N'dahoalgenewo, they love me K'Hahnaltrenewo, they love thee W'dahoalanewx), they love him N'dahoalpjenewoap, they did love me K'dahoalgenewoap, they did love thee W'dahoalgenewoap, they did love him Present. N'dahoalgehhena, they love us K'dahoai^ehhiino, they love you W'dahoalawawak, they love them. Preterite. I N'dahoalgehhenap, they did love ua K'dahoalgehhimoap, they did love you I W'dahoalawapannik, they did love them. VOL. III. 3 B 190 GRAMMAR OF THE liANGUAGE [fifth conjugation.] Future. N'dahoalgenewotgch, they shall or will love rae I N'dahoalgehhenatsch, they shall or will love ue K'dahoalgenewotsch or k'dahoalgetsch, they I K'dahoalgehhimolsch, they shall or will love you shall or will love thee I W'dahoalawawaktsch, they shall or will love Wdahoalanewotsch, they shall or will love him | them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Ahoalinhe, if or when they love me Ahoalquonne, if or when they love thee Ehoalinde, if or when they love him Ehoalinktip, if or when they loved me Ehoalquonnup, if or when they loved thee Ehoalindup, ijf or when they love him IEhoalquenke, if or when they love us Ehoalqueque, if or when they love you Ehoalachtite, if or when they love Uiem. Preterite. Ehoalquenkup, if or when they loved us Ehoalquekup, if or when they loved you I Ehoalachtitup, if or when they loved them. Pluperfect. Ehoalinkpanne.. if or when they had loved me I Ehoalquenkpanne, if or when they had loved us Ehoalquonpanne, if or when they had loved thee Ehoalquekpanne, if or when they had loved you EhoaUndpanne, if or when they had loved him I Ehoalachtitpanne, if or when they had loved them. Future. Ehoalinketsch, if or when they shall or will love me Ehoalquonnetsch, if or when they shall or will love thee Ehoalindetscb, if or when they shall or will love bim Ehoalquenketsch, if or when they shall or will love us Ehoalquequetsch, if or when they shall or will love you Ehoalachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will love them. PERSOJVAL FORMS.—JVEGATIVE. FIRST TSJUVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. K'dahoalowi*, I do not love thee N'dahoalawi, I do not love him Present. [ K'dahoalohhumo, I do not love you I N'dahoalawiwak, I do not love them. K'dahoalellowip, I did not love thee N'dahoalawip, I did not love him Preterite. K'dahoalohhumowip, I did not love you N'dahoalawipannik, I did not love them. ' Atta or Matta prefixed throughout. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [fifth conjugation.] 191 Future. K'dahoalellowitsch, I shall or will not love thee N'dahoalawitsch, I shall or will not love him K'dahoalobhumowitsch, I shall or will not love you N'dahowalawiwaktsch, I shall or will not love them. The Pluperfect and the Subjunctive are not given in any of the Tran- sitions. SECOJVD TBAJVSmOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dahoaliwi, thou dost not love me K'dahoalawi, thou dost not love him K'dahoaliwip, thou didst not love me K'dahoalawip, thou didst not love him R'dahoaliwuneen, thou dost not love us K'dahoaliwiwak, thou dost not love them Preterite. K'dahoaliwunenap, thou didst not love us K'dahoaluwipanoik, thou did^t not love them Future. K'dahoaliwitsch, thou shalt er wilt not love me K'dahoalawitscb, thou shalt or wilt not love him K'dahouli wuneentsch, thou shalt or wilt not love E'dahoalawiwaktsch, thou shalt or wilt not love them. THIRD TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'dahoalguwi, he does not love me K'dahoalguwi, he does not love thee Wdahoalawi, he does not love him N'dahoalguwip, he did not love me K'dahoalguwip, he did not love thee Wdahoalawip, he did not love him N'dahoalguwuneen, he does not love us K'dahoalguwawi, he does not love you W'dahoalwiwak, he does not love them. Preterite. N'dahoalguwunenap, he did not love us K'dahoalguwawip, he did not love you W'dahoalawipannik, he did not love them. Future. N'dahoalguwitsch, he shall or will not love me K'dahoalguwitsch, he shall or will not love thee V\''dahoalawit8cfa, he shall or will not love him N'dahoalguwimeentsch, he shall or will not love us K'dahoalguwawitsch, he shall or will not love you W'dahoalawiwaktsch, he shall or will not love them. 193 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fifth conjugation.] FOURTH TRMJVSITIOA': INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dahoalowuneen, we do not love thee N'dahoalawuneen, we do not love him K'dahoalohhummowuneen, we do not love you N'dahoalawunena, he does not love them. Preterite. K'dahoalowunenap, we did not love thee N'dahoalawunenap, we did not love him K'dahoalohhummowunenap, we didnotloveyou N'dahoalawawunenap, we did not love them. Future. K'dahoalowuneentsch, we shall or will not love thee N'dahoalawuneentsch, we shall or will not love him K'dahoalohhummowuntsch, we shall or will not love yoQ N'dahoalawunanetsch, we shall or will not love them. FIFTH TRAjYSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. K'dahoalihhimowi, ye do not love me K'dahoalawiwa, ye do not love him K'dahoalihhimowip, ye did not love me K'dahoalawiwoap, ye did not love him Present. I K'dahoaliwunena, ye do not love us I E'dahoalawiwak, ye do not love them. Preterite. I K'dahoalihhimowunap, ye did not love us I K'dahoalawipannik, ye did not love them. Future. K'dahoalihhinowitsch, yeshall or will not love me I K'dahoaliwuneentsch, ye shall or will not love us K'dahowalawiwatsch, ye shall or will not love him K'dahoalawiwaktsch, ye shall oc will not love I them. SIXTH TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'dahoalguwiwak, they do not love me KMahoal^uwiwak, they do Dot love thee Wdahoalawiwak, they do not love him N'dahoalguwuneen, they do not love us K'dahoalguwunewo, they do not love you W 'dahoalawiwak, they do not love them. Preterite. N'dahoalgewipannik, they did not love me K'dahoalgewipanaik, Ihcy did not love thee Wdahoalawipannik, they did not love him [ N'dahoalguwunenap, they did not love us K'dahoalguwunenap, they did not love you I W'dahoalawawipa'iinik, they did not love them. OF THE liENNI I.ENAPE INDIANS. [fifth conjugation.] 193 Future. N'dahoalguwiwaktsch, they shall or will not love me K'dahoalguwiwaktsch, they shall or will not lore thee W'dahoalawiwaktsch, they shall or will not love him N'dahoalguwuneentsch, they shall or will not love us K'dahoalguwunewotscb, they shall or will not love you Wdahoalawawiwaktsch, they shall or will not love them. RECIPROCAL FORM.— POSITIVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. Ahoaltin, to love one another. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'dahoaltineen, we love one another K'dahoaltihhimo, ye love one another Ahoaltowak, they love one another. Presevt. Preterite. N'dahoaltihhenap, we loved one another K'dahoaltihhimmoap, ye loved one another Ahoaltopannik, they loved one another. Future. Ahoaltineentsch, we shall or will love each other. K'dahoaltihhimobich, ye shall or will love each other Ahoaltowaktsch, they shall or will love each other. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Sifigular. Ahoaltik, love ye each other I Plural. ■ Ahoaltitam, let us love each other. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Ahoaltiyenk, that we may love each other Ahoaltiyek, that ye may love each other Ahoaltichtit, that they may love each other. Preterite. Ahoaltiyenkup, that or as we have loved each other Ahoaltiyekup, that or as ye have loved each other Ahoaltichtitup, that or as they have loved each other. Pluperfect. Ahoaltiyenkpanne, if or when we had loved each other Ahoaltiyekpaime, if or when ye had loved each other Ahoaltichtitpanne, if or when they had loved each odier. Future. Ahoaltiyenketseh, as we shall or will love each other Ahoaltiyeketsch, as ye shall or will love each other Ahoaltichtitetsch, as they shall or will love each other. VOIi. III. 3 C 194 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [fifth conjugation.] JVEGjITIVJE. INFINITIVE MOOD. Matta ahoaltin, not to love each other. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present- Matin n'dahoaltiwuneen, we do not love each other Matta k'dahoaltiwihhimo, ye do not love each other Matta ahoaltiwiwak, they do not love each other. Preterite. Matta n'dahoaltiwunenap, we did not love each other Matta k'dahoaltiwihhimmoap, ye did not love each other Matta ahoaltiwipannik, they did not love each other. Future. Mattatsch n'dahoaltiwuneen, we shall or will not love each other Mattatsch k'dahoaltiwihhimo, ye shall or will not love each other Mattatsch ahoaltiwiwak, they shall or will not love each other. IMPERATIVE MOOD. (JVot given.) SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Preterite. Matta ahoaltiwenk, when or as we may not Matta ahoaltiwenkup, when or as we have not love each other loved each other Matta ahoaltiwek, when or as ye may not love Matta ahoaltiwekup, when or as ye have not each other 1 loved each other Matta ahoaltichtik, when or as they may not love Matta ahoaltichtikup, when or as they have not each other. I loved each other. Pluperfect. Matta ahoaltiwenkpanne, if or when we had not loved each other Matta ahoaltiwekpanne, if or when ye had not loved each other Matta ahoaltichtikpanne, if or when they had not loved each other. Future. Mattatsch ahoaltiwenk, when or as we shall or will not love each other Mattatsch ahoaltiwek, when or as ye shall or will not love each other Mattatsch ahoaltichtik, when or as they shall or will not love each other. The Reciprocal Forms of Verbs are distinguished by their Infinitive termination in tin, as in the following examples : Pendawachtin, to hear each other Pennawachtin, to look at each other Nostawachtin, to understand each other Neuchtin, to see each other Mochfenalittin, to light with each other Schin^inawachtin, schingaltiii, to hate eachother Pakantin, to box (fight with fists) with each other Nilchtin, to strike each other dead Eenhawachtin, to pay, satisfy each other Witahentin, to help each other N'galtin, to quit each other Pakitatamawacliiin, to forgive each other Wulaptonaltin, to be reconciled to each other Aptonaltin, to speak with each other OP THE I.EN]!n LENAPE INDIANS. [sixth conjugation.] 195 Littin, to say to or among each otlier Mattaptonaltiu, to scold, abuse each other Nawalittin, to pursue each other Wjpantin, to eat with each other Menachtin,to drink, tipple with each other W'itawentin, to live or dwell with each other Getteniagelentin, to be kind, merciful to each other Miguntin, to remind each other Manschaltin, to keep each other in remembrance Sachga^untin, to lead each other Wipentin, to lie or sleep %vith each other Ntutemawachtin, to question each other Gettschihhilalittin, to betray each other Wentschintin, to call each other Ndoochtawachtin, to inquire of each other Achgacheraawachtin, to share with each other Waletittin, to inform, advise each other, &c. Stjrth CfTonfusatton. LnEN, to say or tell. ACTIVE FORM.— POSITIVE. Luen, to say Luehund, one says INFINITIVE MOOD. j Luehundi, they say or it is said. Singular. N'dellowe, I say E'dellowe, thou sayest Wdellowe, he says N'dellowenep, I said K'dellowenep, thou saidst Wdellowenep, he said INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. N'delloweneen, we say K'dellowehhimo, ye say W'dellowenewo, they say. Preterite. Plural. N'dellowehhenap, we said K'dellowehhimoap, ye said W'dellowenewoap, they said. Future. Singular. N'dellowentsch, I shall or will say K'dfllowontsch, thou slialt or wilt say Wdellowentsch, he shall or will say Plural. N'dcllowehhenatsch, we shall or will say K'dellowchhimotsch, ye shall or will say Wdellowenewotsch, they shall or will say. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Lueya, if or when 1 say Lueyane, if or wVion tiiou sayest Luete, if or when he says Plural. Lueyenk, if or when we say Lueyek, if or when ye say Luecbtit, if or when they say. 196 GRAMMAR OF THE liANGUAGE [sixth conjugation.] Singular. Lueyakup, if or when I said Lueyannup, if or wlien thou saidst Luetup, if or when he said Singular. Lueyakpanne, if or when I had said Lueyankpanne, if or when thou hadst said Luetpanne, if or when he had said Preterite. Plural Lueyenkup, if or when we said Lueyekup, if or when ye said Luechtitup, if or when they said. Pluperfect. Plural, Lueyenkpanne, if or when we had said Lueyekpanne, if or when ye had said Luechtitpanne, if or when they had said. Future. Singular. Lueyaktsch, if or when I shall or will say Lueyanetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say Luetetsch, if or when he shall or will say Plural. Lueyenktsch, if or when we shall or will say Lueyektsch, if or when ye shall or will say Luechdtsch, if or when they shall or will say. The negative voice of this verb is not given in this Grammar, nor is the Imperative Mood in the positive. PERSOJVAL FOSMS.— POSITIVE. FIRST TSAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dellell, I say to thee I K'dellohumo, I say to you N'dellan, I say to him | N'dellawak, I say to them. Preterite. K'dellenep, I said to thee I K'dellohumoap, I said to you N'deUap, I said to him | N'dellapannik, I said to them. Future. K'delletsch, I shall or will say to thee 1 K'dellohiunmotsch, I shall or will say to you N'dellantseh, I shall or will say to him | N'dellawaktsch, 1 shall or will say to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Lellane, if or when I say to thee I Lelleque, if or when I say to you Lake, if or when I say to him \ Lakpanne, if or when I say to them. Preterite. Lellanup, if or when I said to thee I Lellekup, if or when I said to you Lakup, if or when I said to him | Lekpanne, if or when I said to them. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 197 [sixth conjugation.] Pluperfect. Leilanpanne, if or when I had said to thee I Lellekpanne, if or when I bad said to you Lalnippanne, if or when I had said to him | Lalipanne, if or when I had said to them. Future. Lelianetsch, if or when I shall or will say to I Lellequetsch, if or when I shall or will say to thee J y"*^ Laketsch, if or when 1 shall or will say to him Lakpannetsch, if or when I shall or will say to them. SECOJVD TRJUVSmOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'delli, thou sayest to me 1 K'dellineen, thou sayest to us E'dellan, thou sayest to him | K'dellawak, thou sayest to them. Preterite. K'dellineep, thou saidst to me I K'dellinenap, thou saidst to us K'dellanep, thou saidst to him | K'dellapannik, thou saidst to them. Future. K'dellitsch, thou shalt or wilt say to me I K'dellihhenatsch, thou shall or wilt say to us K'dellantsch, thou shalt or wilt say to him | K'dellawawaktsch,thoushaltorwiltsay totheta. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Ill, say thou I Lo, say to him Luel, say on, go on witli your discourse | Mauwi lo, go and say to hira Lil, tell me I Lineen, say to us Lime, tell me at some particular time | Litam, say to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Liyane, if or when thou sayest to me I Liyenkpanne, if or when thou sayest to us Latpanne, if or when thou sayest to him | Lakpaime, if or when thou sayest to them. Preterite. Liyannup, if or whon thou saidst to me I Liyenkpannup, if or when thou saidst to us Latpannup, if or when thou saidst to him | Lakpannup, if or when thou saidst to them. Future Liyannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say to me Latpannetscb, if or when thou shalt or wilt say to him Liyenquetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say to us Lakpannetsch, if or when thou shalt or wilt say to them. VOL. III. 3 D 198 GRAMMAR OF THE liANGUAGE [sixth conjugation.] THIRD TBJlA''SITIOJ\r. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'delluk, n'dellgvm, he says to me Wdellan, w'dellawall, he says to thee K'dellgun, k'dellak, he says to him N'dellgop, he said to me K'dellgop, he said to thee Wdellanep, he said to him N'dellgetsch, he shall or will say to me K'dellgetsch, he shall or will say to thee W'dellantsch, he shall or will say to him IN'dellguna, lukguna, he says to us K'dellguwa, k'dellgehhimo, he says to you Wdellawak, he says to them. Preterite. IN'dellgunenap, n'dellgehhenap, he said to us K'dellguwap, k'dellgehhimoap, he said to you W'dellapannik, he said to them. Future. N'dellgunatsch, lukgunatsch, he shall or will say to us K'dellguwatsch, k'tellgehhimotsch, he shall or will say to you W'dellawaktsch, he shall or will say to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Lite, if or when he says to me Lukquonne, if or when he says to thee Late, if or when he says to him Present. ILukquenke, if or when he says to us Lukqueque, if or when he says to you Lakhittite, if or when he says to them. Preterite. Litup, if or when he said to me I Lukquenkup, if or when he said to us Lukquonnup, if or when he said to thee Lukquekup, if or when he said to you Latup, if or when he said to him | Laachtitup, if or when he said to them. Future. Litetsch, if or when he shall or will say to me Lukquonnetsch, if or when he shall or will say to thee Latetsch, if or when he shall or will say to him Lukquenketsch, if or when he shall or will say to us Lukqueketsch, if or when he shall or will say to you Laachtitetsch, if or when he shall or will say to them. FOURTH TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'delleneen, we say to thee N'dellaneen, we say to him K'dellohhena, we say to you N'dellawawuna, we say to them. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 199 [sixth conjugation.] Preterite. K'dellenenap, we said to thee I K'dellohhumoakup, we said to you N'dellawunakup, we said to him | N'dellawawapaimik, we said to them. Future. K'delleneentsch, we shall or will say to thee I K'dellohhenatsch, we shall or will say to you N'delleneentsch, we shall or will say to him N'dellawawaktsch or n'dellawunantsch, we shall I or wUl say to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Lellanque, if or when we say to thee I Lellenque, if or when we say to you Lanke, if or when we say to him | Lenke, if or when we say to them. Preterite. Lellankup, if or when we said to thee I Lellenkup, if or when we said to you Lankup, if or when we said to him | Lenkup, if or when we said to them. Future. Lellanquctsch, if or when we shall or will say to thee Lanketsch, if or when we shall or will say to him Leilenquetsch, if or when we shall or will say to you Lenketsch, if or when we shall or will say to them. FIFTH TJtAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dellihhimo, ye say to me I K'dellihhena, ye say to us K'dellanewo, ye say to him | K'dellawawak, ye say to them. Preterite. K'dellihhimoakup, ye said to me I K'dellihhenakup, ye said to us K'dellanewoap, ye said to him | K'dellawoapannik, ye said to them. Future. K'dellihhimotsch, ye shall or will say to me I K'dellihhenatsch, ye shall or will say to us K'dellanewotsch, ye shall or will say to him | K'deUawawaktsch, ye s^all or will say to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Liyeque, if or when ye say to me I Liyenque, if or when ye say to us Leque, if or when ye say to him | Leke, if or when ye say to them. 200 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [sixth conjugation.] Preterite. Liyekup, if or when ye said to me Lequekup, if or when ye said to him ILiyenkup, if or when ye said to us Lekup, if or when ye said to them- Future. Liyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will say to me Lequetsch, if or when ye shall or will say to him Liyenquetsch, if or when ye shall or will say to us Leketsch, if or when ye shall or will say to them. SIXTH TSJlJVSlTJOJV. N'dellge, they say to me K'dellge. they say to thee W'deUanewo, they say to him INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. IN'dellgeneen or n'dellgehhena, they say to us K'dellgehhimo, they say to you W'delianawak, they say to them. N'dellgenep, they said tome K'dellgenep, they said to thee W'dellanewoap, they said to him Preterite. N'dellgenenap, they said to us N'dellgehhimoap, they said to you W'dellawawapannik, they said to them. Future. N'dellgetsch, they shall or will say to me K'dellgetsch, they shall or will say to thee W'dellanewotsch, they shall or will say to him N'dellgeneentsch or n'deUgehhenatsch, they shall or will say to us K'dellgehhimotseh, they shall or will say to you W'dellawawaktsch,theyshallor will say to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Lichtinke or links, if or when they say to me 1 Lukquenke, if or -when they say to us Lukquonne, if or, when they say to thee Lukqueque, if or when they say to you Lachtinke or linde, if or when fliey say to him | Lachtitpanne, if or when they say to them. Lichtinkup or linkup, if or when they said to me Lukquonkup, if or when they said to thee Luchtinkup or lindup, if or when they said to him Preterite. Lukquenkup, if or when they said to us Lukquekup, if or when they said to you Lachtitpannup, if or when they said to them. Future. Linketsch, if or when they shall or will say to Lukquonnetsch, if or when they shall or will say to thee Lindetsch, if or when they shall or will say to him Lukquenquetsch, if or when they shall or will say to us Lukquequetsch, if or when they shall or will say to you Lachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will say to them. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIAMS. [sixth conjugation.] 201 PESSOJVAL FORMS.— JVEGATIVE. FIRST TRAJVSITWJV. K'dellowi*, I do not say to thee N'dellawi, I do not say to him K'dellowip, I did not say to thee N'dellawip, I did not say to him. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. I K'dellohhumowi, I do not say to you I N'dellawiwak, I do not say to them. Preterite. K'dellowitsch, I shall or will not say to thee W deUawitsch, I shall or will not say to him The Subjunctive Mood is wanting throughout I K'dellohhumowap, I did not say to you I N'dellawipannik, I did not say to them. Future. I K'dellohhumowitsch, I shall or will not say to I you N'dellawiwaktsch, I shall or will not say to them. SECOJVD TRAJ\rSITIOJ\: INDICATIVE MOOD. K'delliwi, thou sayest not to me K'dellawi, thou sayest not to him K'delliwip, thou didst not say to me K'delJawip, thou didst not say to him K'delUwitsch, thou shalt or wilt not say to me K dellawitsch, thou shalt or wilt not say to him Present. I K'delliwuneen, thou sayest not to us I K'deUawiwak, thou sayest not to them. Preterite. I K'delliwunenap, thou didst not say to us I K dellawipannik, thou didst not say to them. Future. K'deUiwuneentsch, thou shalt or wilt not say to ^''*«JJ^^^^«'aktsch, thou Shalt or wilt not say to Katschi liyeketsch, say not to me Katschi liyannetsch, say not to him IMPERATIVE MOOD. I Katschi llyenketsch, say not to us I Katschi liyanketsch, say not to them. * Atta or Matta prefixed throughout. VOL. III. 3 E SOS GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [sixth conjugation.] THIRD TILiJVSlTIOJ\r. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. NMellguwi, he says not to me K'deliguwi, he says not to thee Wdellawi, he says not to him N'dellguwuneen or lukguwvineen, he says not tons K'dellguwawi, he says not to you W'dellawiwak, he says not to them. Preterite. N'dellguwip or lukuwip, he did not say to me K'dellguwip, he did not say to thee Wdellawip, he did not say to him Lukguwuneenep, he did not say to us Lukguwawip, he did not say to you Wdellawipannik, he did not say to them. Future. N'dellguwitsch, he shall or will not say to me I Lukguwuneentsch or n'dellgunwuneentsch, he K'dellguwitsch, he shall or will not say to thee | shall or will not say to us W'dellawitsch, he shall or will not say to him 1 Lukguwawitsch, he shall or will not say to you Wdellawiwaktsch, he shall or will not say to them. FOURTH TRMJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'dellowuneen, we do not say to thee N'dellawuneen, we do not say to him K'dellowuneenap, we did not say to thee N'dellawunap, we did not say to him K'dellowuneentsch, we shall or will not say to thee N'dellawunatsch, we shall or will not say to him I K'dellohhummowuneen, we do not say to you I N'dellawawuna, we do not say to them. Preterite. I K'dellohhummowunap, we did not say to you 1 N'dellawawunapannik, we did not say to them. Future. K'dellohhummowunatsch, we shall or will not say to you N'dellawunanatsch, we shall or will not say to them. FIFTH TRAJVSITIOJV. (Not given.) OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS, [sixth conjugation.] S03 SIXTH TRjljySITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. N'de1l2;ewi, they do not say to me K'dellsewi, ihey ilo not say (o thee W'dellawiwak, (hey do not say to him Present. N'delleeweneen, they do not say to us K'dellgewunewo, they do not say to you W'dellawiwawall, they do not say to them. N'dellgewip, Ihey did not say to me K'dellgewip, they did not say to thee Wdellawipannik, they did not say to him Preterite. I N'dellgewunenap, they did not say to us K'dellstehhimovvi, they did not say to you I W'deliawiwapannik, they did not say to them. Future. N'dellpewitsch, they shall or will not say to me K'delltrewi'srh, they shall nr will not say to thee W'dellamwaktsch, they shall or will not say to him N'dellgewuneentsch, they shall or will say to us K'dellgewunewotsch, they shall or will say to you W'dellawiwawaktsch, they shall or will say to them. REL.aTIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Eloweya, as or what ! say Eloweyan, as or what thousayest Elowit, as or what he says Singular. Eloweyakup, as or what I said Eloweyannup, as or what thou saidst Elowettjp, as or what he said Plural. Eloweyenk, as or what we sa' Eloweyek, as or what ye say Elowechtit, as or what they sa Preterite. Plural. Eloweyenkup, as or what we said Eloweyekup, as or what ye said Elowechtitup, as or what they said. Pluperfect. Singular. i Plural. Eloweyakpanne, as or what I had said Eloweyenkpanne, as or what we had said Eloweyanpanne, as or what thou hadst said I Eloweyekpanne, as or what ye had said I Elowechtitpanne, as or what they had said. Elowetpanne, as or what he had said The Future Is like the present, aclding tsch. 204 GRAMMAR OF THE liANGUAGE [sixth conjugation.] TSjIJYSITIOJVS.— FIRST TRMJVSITIOA''. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Elen, as or what I say to thee I Elek, as or what I say to you Elak, as or what I say to him 1 Elachkup, as or what I say to them SECOJVD TRAJVSITIOJV. Eliyan, as or what thou sayest to me | Eliyenk, as or what thou sayest to us Elan, as or what thou sayest to him | Elachtup, as or what thou sayest to them. THIRD TRAJVSIT10J\r. Elit, as or what he says to me I Elquenk, as or what he says to us Elquon, as or what he says to thee Elquek, as or what he says to you Elat or elguk, as or what he says to him | EUatup, as or what he says to them. FOURTH TRAJVSITIOJV. Elenk, as or what we say to thee I Elek, as or what we say to you Elank, as or what we say to him | Elanquik, as or what we say to them. FIFTH TRJIJVSITIOJV. Eliyek, as or what ye say to me I Eliyenkup, as or what ye say to us Elatup, as or what ye say to him | Elaachtup, as or what ye say to them. SIXTH TBAJVSITIOJV. EUnk, as or what they say to me I Elgeyenk, as or what they say to us Elquonnik, as or what they say to thee Elgeyek, as or what they say to you Elachtit, as or what they say to him | Elachtitup, as or what they say to them. RECIPROCAL FORM. INFINITIVE MOOD. Littin, to say to each other | Littinep, to have said to each other. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [sixth conjugation.] 805 INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Preterite. LitUneen or littihhena, we say to or among each Littenenap or littilihenap, we said to or among other each other Littihhimo or k'delltihhimo, ye say to or among Littihhimoap or k'dellihhimoap, ye said to or each other j among each other Littowak, they say to or among each other. I Littopannik, they said to or among each other. Future. Littihhenatsch, we shall or will say to or among each other Littihhimotsch, ye shall or will say to or among each other Littowaktsch, they shall or will say to or among each other. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Littiyenk, if or when we say to or among each other Littiyek, if or when ye say to or among each other Littichtit, if or when they say to or among each other. Preterite. Littiyenkup, if or when we said to or among each other Littiyekup, if or when ye said to or among each other Littichtitup, if or when they said to or among each other. The Future Is formed from the present, tsch suffixed. REFLECTED FORM. This form is used in the Singular as follows : N'della n'hakey, I say to myself K'della k'hakey, thou sayest to thyself Wdellawall hakeyall, he says to himself N'dahowala n'hakey, I love myself K'dahowala k'hakey, thou lovest thyself Wdahowalawall hakeyall, he loves himself. N'pennauwelema n'hakey, I take care of myself Pennauwelem k'hakey, take care of thyself Pennauwelemawal hakeyall or lachauwelema- wall hakeyall, he is anxious about himself (or troubled in mind) Pcnnauwelemo hakeyuwa, be anxious about yourselves {or troubled in mind)*. • JVute by the TVanslator. — This expression, which probably was first introduced by the mis- sionaries in their sermons, has nothing very spiritual in it ; the ideas of body and mind will appear here to be strangely confounded. But the most polished nations of antiquity have hardly been more successful in their endeavours to express ideas that are not perceptible to our senses. The words jrvEUyua, spiritus, are at best metaphors drawn from sensible objects, and the same result will probably be found in all languages if we recur to the etymology of the words which are meant to express soul, mind, &c. See the note above, p. 166. VOL. III. •3 F 306 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [of verbs.] Seiif ntli ©onjttflflttoH. MiLTiN, to give*. This verb has no simple active voice ; we cannot say, I give, thou giv- est, he gives, &c., but the personal forms must be used, I give to thee, him, &c. It is the same in the passive voice. There is an active verb, however, which expresses the idea of giving away, or parting with something, without recurring to the persona! forms; thus we say n'meken, I give away, Wmeken, thou givest away, meken, he gives away, &c. Preterite, mekenep, I have given away. Imperative, meek, give awayf . ACTIVE VOICE. PERSOJVAL FORMS.— POSITIVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. Miltin, to give to some body or make a present of. PARTICIPLES. Milit, he who gives to me 1 Milquenk, he who gives to us Milat, he who gives to him Milqueek, he who gives to you I Milquichtit, he who gives to them. FIRST TRMjySITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'milellt, I give to thee I K'milellohhumo, I give to you N'milan, I give to him | N'milawak or n'milanewo, I give to them. * JVote by the Translator. — The Author gives only this example of the Seventh Conjugation, and does not tell us whether all the verbs belonging to it want the abstract forms active and pas- sive, or whether this defect is peculiar to some of them. 1 have sought in vain tor an explanation of this difficulty, which I am not qualified to solve. t JVote by the Translator. — The verbs ending in en do not appear to be classed with any of the eight conjugations. From a comparison of the forms, it would appear that they belong to the first, ending in in. In an unwritten language the vowels are easily mistaken for one another, and it is difficult to presei-ve a consistent orthography. Thus the Author writes sometimes Getanni- towit, (God), and sometimes Kitannitowit. Similar inconsistencies will appear in the course ol this work, which the judicious reader will easily account for. X JVote by the Translator. — The Author writes gemilell, nemilan, &c. ; it is evident that he uses the g, instead of the k, to indicate the inseparable pronoun of tlie second person. For this OP THH liENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [seventh conjugation.] S07 K'milellanep, I gave to tiee N'milap, I gave to him K'milletsch, I shall or will give to thee" N'lnilantsch, I shall or will give to him PreterUe. I K'milellohhtimoap, I gave to you I N'milapaiinik, I gave to them. Fvture. I K'milellohhumotsch, I shall or will give to you N'milawaktsch, I shall or will give to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. K'milellane, if or when I give to thee N'milachke, if or when I give to him K'milannup, if or when I gave to thee N'milachkup, if or when I gave to him N'mileque, if or when I give to you Milatpanne, if or when I give to them. Preterite. N'milekup, if or when I gave to you N'milawaJsup, if or when I gave to them. Pluperfect. K'milenpanne, if or when I had given to thee I N'milekpanne, if or when I had given to you N'milachkpanne, if or when I had given to him | N'milakpanne, if or when I had given to them. Future. K'milellannetscb, if or when I shall or will give to thee N'milaketsch, if or when I shall or will give to him N'milequetsch, if or when I shall or will give to you N'milachtiquetsch, if or when they shall or will give to them. SECOJVO TIUJVSITIOJ\l'. INDICATIVE MOOD. K'mili, thou givest to me K'milan, thou givest to him Present. K'milineen or k'milihhena, thou givest to us K'milowak or k'milanewo, Ihou givest to them. K'milihump, thou hast given to me K'milap, thou hast given to him Preterite. K'milihhenap, thou hast given to us K'milapannik, thou hast given to them. he gives as a reason, in one of the printed works, that his printer not having a sufficiency of ft's, he was obliged to employ the letter g in its stead. Like the £ which follows, it is meanl (o repre- sent the sheva or mute sound between the two consonants, wliich elsewhere is represented by the apostrophe, and sometimes is not at all designated, as the interval between the consonants is suificiently apparent. 308 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [seventh conjugation.'] Future. K'miletsch, thou shall or wilt give to me K'milantsch, thou shall or wilt give to him K'milihhenatsch, thou shall or wilt give to us K'milawaktsch, thou shall or wilt give to them Mil, give Milil, give me Milau, give him IMPERATIVE MOOD. Milineen, give us Milo, give them Milatom, let us give Miltin, it is given. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Miliyanne, if or when thou givest to me Milanne, if or when thou givest to him Miliyenke, if or when thou givest to us [ Milawawanne, if or when thou givest to them. Preterite. Miliyannup, if or when thou hast given to me Milannup, if or when thon hast given to him Miliyenkup, if or when thou hast given to us K'nulannik, if or when thou hast given to them. Pluperfect. Millyanpanne, if or when thou hadst given to me Milanpanne, if or when thou hadst given to him Miliyenkpanne, if or when thou hadst given to us Milawatpanne, if or when thou hadst given to them. Future. Miliyannetsch, if or when thou shall or wilt give to me Milannetsch, if or when thou shall or wilt give to him Miliyenketsch, if or when thou shall or wilt give to us K'milachtitetsch, if or when thou shall or wilt give to them. THIRD TBAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. N'miluk, he gives to me K'miluk, he gives to thee Milan, milgol, milawall,he gives to him N'milgap, he gave or has given to me K'milgap, he gave or has given to Ihee Milap, he gave or has given to him Present. IN'milguneen, n'milguna, he gives to us K'milguwa, he gives to you Milawak, he gives to them. Preterite. K'milgunenap, he gave or has given to us K'melguwap, he gave or has given to you Milapannik, he gave or has given to them. Future. N'miluktsch, he shall or will give to me 1 N'milgunatsch, he shall or will give to us K'miluktsch, he shall or will give to thee 1 K'milguwatsch, he shall or will give to you IVIilgotsch or milauchtsch, he shall or will give Milawaklsch, he shall or will give to them, to him I OF THE LENNI 1.ENAPB INDIANS. [seventh conjugation.] S09 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Milite, if or when he gives to me AlilquonDe, if or when he gives to thee Milate, il or when he gives to him IMilquenke, if or when he g^ves to us Milqueque, if or when he give* to you Milachtite, if or when he gives to them. Preterite. Uilitup, if or when he has given to me Milquonnup, if or when he has given to thee Milatup, if or when he has given to him Milquenkup, if or when he has given to us Milqueliup, if or when be has given to you Milachtitup, if or when he has given to them. Pluperfect. Militpanne, if or when he had given to me I Milquenkpanne, if or when he had given to us Milquonpanne, if or when he had given to thee Milquekpanne, if or when he had given to you Milatpanne, if or when he had given to him | Milachtitpanne, if or when he had given to them. Future. Militetsch, if or when he shall or will give to me Miliquonnetsch, if or when he shall or will give to thee Milatetsch, if or when he shall or will give to him Milquenketsch, if or when he shall or will give to us Milqueketsch, if or when he shall or will give to you Milachtitetsch, if or when he shall or will give to them. FOURTH TIUJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'milenneen or k'milohhena, we give to thee N'milohhena, we give to him K'milohhumo, we give to you N'milawawuna or n'mitawawak, we give to them. Preterite. K'milohhenap or k'milonnenap, we gave or have I E'milohhummenap, we gave or have given to given to thee you N'milawunap, we gave or have given to him | N'milawawunap, we gave or have given to them. Future. K'mileneentsch, we shall or will give to thee N'mileneentscb, we shall or will give to him K'milohhumotsch, we shall or will give to you N'milawawunatsch, we shall or will give to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Milenqne, if or when we give to thee N'milanque, if or when we give to him Mileque, if or when we give to you I Milinde, if or when we give to them. VOL. III. 3 G 210 GRAMMAR OF THE LATfGVAGB [seventh conjugation.] Milenkup, if or when we gave or have given to thee Milanliup, if or when we gave or have given to him Preterite. Milekup, if or when we gave or have given to you Milawankup, if or when we gave or have given to them. Pluperfect. Milenkpanne, if or when we had given to thee I Milekpanne, if or when we had given to you Milankpanne, if or when we had given to him | Milindpanne, if or when we had given to them. Miienquetsch, if or when we shall or will give to thee Milanquetsch, if or when we shall or will give to him Future. Milequetsch, if or when we shall or will give to you Milindpanne, if or when we shall or will give to them. FIFTH TRAjySITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. E'miUhhimo, ye give to me I K'milihhena ye give to us K'milanewo, ye give to him | K'milawaw'ak, ye give to them. Preterite. E'milihhimoap, ye gave or have given to me I K'milihhenap, ye gave or have given to us K'milanewoap, ye gave or have given to him | E'milawawak, ye gave or have given to them. Future. K'milihhimotsch, ye shall or will give to me I K'millihhenatsch, ye shall or will give to us K'milanewotsch, ye shall or will give to him | K'milawawaktsch, ye shall or will give to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Miliyeque, if or when ye give to me I Miliyenque, if or when ye give to us Milaque, ijf or when ye give to him | Milachtique, if or when ye give to them. Preterite. Miliyekup, if or when ye gave or have given to I Miliyenkup, if or when ye gave or have given me J to us Milakup, if or when ye gave or have given to I Milachtikup, if or when ye gave or have given him I to them. Pluperfect. Miliyekpanne, if or when ye had given to me I Miliyenkpanne, if or when he had given to us Mili^uppanne, if or when ye had given to him Milachtiyekpaone, if er when ye nad given to them. OF THE liENNI liENAPE INDIANS. [seventh conjugation.] 311 Future. Miliyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will give I Miliyenquetsch, if or when ye shall or will give to me I to u? Milaquetsch, if or when ye shall or will give to I Milachtiyequetsch, if or when ye shall or will him I give to them. SIXTH TRAjySITIOJ\i\ N'milge, they give to me K'milge, they give to thee Milanewo, they give to him N'milgenep, they gave or have given to me K'milgenep, they gave or have given to thee Milapannik, they gave or have given to him INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. IK'milgeneeD, they give to us Kmilgehbimo, they give to yoti Milawawall or milawawak, they give to theiu. Preterite. N'milgenenap, they gave or have given to us K'milgehhimoap, they gave or have given to you Milawawapannik, they gave or have given to them. Future. N'milgetsch, they shall or will give to me K'milgetsch, they shall or will give to thee Milawawaltsch, they shall or will give to him I N'milgeneentsch, they shall or will give to us K'milgehhimotsch, they shall or will give to you I Milanewotsch, they shall or will give to them. Milinke, if or when they give to me Milgeyane, if or when they give to thee Milachtite, if or when they give to htm SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Mllgeyenke, if or when they give to us Milgcyeke, if or when they give to you Milaachtite, if or when they give to them. Preterite. Milinkup, if or when they gave or have given to me Milgeyannup, if or when they gave or have given to thee Milachtitup or milintup, if or when they gave or have given to him Milgeyenkup, if or when they gave or have given to us Milgeyekup, if or when they gave or have given to you Milaachtitup, if or when they gave or have given to them. Pluperfect. Milinkpanne, if or when they had given to me Milgej Milgpyanpanne, if or when they had given to us thee Milachtitpanne or milintpanne, if or when they bad given to him Milgeyenkpanne, if or when they had given to us Milgeyekpanne, if or when they had given to you Milaachtitpanne, if or when they had given to them. SiS GRAMMAR OF THE LANGCAGE [seventh conjugation.] Future. Milinketsch, if or when they shall or will give to me Milgeyannetsch, if or when they shall or will give to thee Milachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will give to him The Negative Forms are not given. Milgeyenketsch, if or when they shall or will give to us Milgeyeketsch, if or when they shall or will give to you Milaachtitetsch, if or when they shall or will give to them. PASSIVE VOICE.— POSITIVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. Milgussin, to have (something) given to one. PARTICIPLES. I Plural. MilguBsitschit, they to whom is given Future. Milgussitpannik, they to whom will he given. PERSOJVAL FORMS.— FIRST TJLSJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD Present. Singular. N'milgussi (Lat. mihi datur), it is given to me K'milgussu, it is given to thee Milgussu, it is given to him Plural. Milgussineen, it is given to us Milgussihhimo', it is given to you Milgussowak, it is given to them. Preterite. Singular. N'milgussihump, it was given to me K'milgussihump, it was given to thee Milgussop, it was given to him Plural. Milgussihhenap, it was given to us Milgussihhimoap.it was given to you Milgussopannik, it was given to them. Future. Singular. N'milgussitsch, it shall or will be given to me K'milgussitsch, it shall or will be given to thee Milgussutsch, it shall or will be given to him Milgussihhenatsch, it shall or will be given to us K'milgussihhimotsch, it shall or will be given to you Milgussowaktsch, it shall or will be given to them. • JVote by the Translator.— The double hh, here and in other places, does not indicate a par- ticular sound or stronger aspiration, but only that the preceding vowel i is to be pronounced short. This mode of writing is borrowed from the orthography of the (}lerman language. OP THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [seventh conjugation.] 213 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. N'milgussiya, if or when it is given to me Milgussiyanne, if or when it is given to thee Milgussite, if or when it is given to him I Plural. Milgussiyenk, if or wlien it is given to us Miigussiyek, if or when it 1= given to yotl I JVIilgussichtit, if or when it is given to them. Preterite. Singular. Migussiyaknp, if or when it was given to me Milgussiyannup, if or when it was given to thee Milgussitup, if or when it was given to him Plural. Milgussiyenkup, if or when it was given to us MUgussiyekup, if or wii'?n it was given to you Milgussichtitup, if or when it was given to them. Pluperfect. Singular. Milgussiyakpanne, if or when it had been given to rue Milgussiyankpanne, if or when it had been given to thee Milgussitpanne, if or when it had been given to him Plural. Milgussiyenkpanne, if or when it had been given to us Milgussiyekpanne, if or when it had been given to you Milgussichtitpanne, if or when it had been given to them. Future. Singular. Milgussiyatsch, if or when it shall or will be given to me Milgussiyannetsch, if or when it shall or will be given to thee Milgussitetsch, if or when it shall or will be given to him Plural. Milgussiyenketsch, if or when it shall or will be given to us Milgusslyeketsch, if or when it shall or will be given to you Milgussichtitetsch, it shall or will be given to them. J\'ote by the Translator. — The other Transitions are not given, and the negative form of this Transition is given only in the Subjunctive Mood, as follows: JVEGATIVE FORM.— FIRST TR,iJVSITIOJV. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Singular. Matta milgussiwak, if or when it is not given to me Matta niilgussiwoime, if or when it is not given to thee Matta milgussique, if or when it is not given to him Plural. Matta milgussiwenk, if or when it is not given to us Matta milgussiwek, if or when it is not given to you Matta milgussichtik, if or when it is not given to them. VOL. III. 3 H 314 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [eighth conjugation.] Preterite Singular. Matta milgussiwakup, if or when it was not given to me Matta milgussiwonnup, if or when it was not given to thee Matta miJgussikup, if or when it was not given to him Plural. Matta milgussiwenkup, if or when it was not given to us Matta milgussiwekup, if or when it was not given to you Matta milgussichtikup, if or when it was not given to them. Pluperfect. Singular. Matta milgussiwakpanne, if or when it had not been given to rae Matta milgussiwonpanne, if or when it had not been given to thee Matta milgussikpanne, if or when it had not been given to him Plural. Matta milgussiwenkpanne, if or when it had not been given to us Matta milgussiwekpaune, if or when it had not been given to you Matta milgussichtikpanne, if or when it had not been given to them. Singular. Matta milgussiwaktsch, if or when it shall or will not be given to me Matta milgussiwonnetsch, if or when it shall or will not be given to thee Matta milgussiquetsch, if or when it shall or will not be given to him Future. Plural. Matta milgussiwenketsch, if or when it shall or will not be given to us Matta milgussiweketsch, if or when it shall or will not be given to you Matta milgussichtikelsch, if or when it shall or will not be given to them. », 3Et0htfi Confugatton. No. I. Singular. N'peton, I bring K'peton, thou bringest Peton, he brings Sitigular. N'petonep, I have brought K'petonep, thou hast brought Petonep, he has brought Peton, to bring. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Plural. N'petoneen, we bring K'pettohhumo, ye bring Petonewo, they bring. Preterite. Plural. N'petonenap, we have brought K'petohhumoap, ye have brought ^etonewoap, they have brought. OF THE I.ENNI LENAPE INDIANS. Si5 [eighth conjugation.] Singular. N'petontsch, I shall or will bring K'oetontsch, thou shall or wilt bring Petontsch, he shall or will bring Future. Plural. N'petoneentsch, we shall or will bring K'petohhuraotsch, ye shall or will bring Petonewotsch, they shall or will bring. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. . Plural. Petol, bring thou f Petook, bring ye. Ab^e by the Translator. — The Subjunctive of this verb is not given, except in the Personal forms, which follow : PERSOJVAL FORMS.— FIRST TRAjVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'petolen, I bring to thee | K'petolohhumo, I bring to you N'petawan, I bring to him | N'petawawak, I bring to them. Preterite. K'petolenep, I brought to thee I K'petolohhumoap*, I brought to you N'petawap, I brought to him j N'petawapannik, I said to them. Future. K'petolentsch, I shall or will bring to thee I K'petolohhumoUch, I shall or will bring to you N'petawantsch, I shall or will bring to him | N'petawawaktsch, I shall or will bring to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. K'petolanne, if or when I bring to thee I N'petoleque, if or when I bring to you N'petewake, if or when I bring to him | N'petawawake, if or when I bring to them. Preterite. N'petolanup, if or when I have brought to thee I N'petolekup, if oc when I have brought to you N'petawannup, if or when I have brought to him N'petawawaniiup, if or when I have brought to them. N'petolannetsch, if or when I shall or will brine to thee * N'pelawannetsch, if or when I shall or will bring to him ^ Future. N'petolequetsch, if or when I shall or will bring to you N'petawawaketsch, if or when I shall or will bring to them. * JVote by the Translator.— This is by contraction (torn k'petolohhuinmoakup, which is the most correct form ; but is generally contracted in speech. Si6 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [eighth COtfJUGATION.] SECOJVD TRAJ\rSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'petawi, thou bringest to me K'petawa, thou bringest to him K'petawinep, thou broughtest to me K'petawap, thou broughtest to him K'petawineen, thou bringest to us K'petawawak, thou bringest to them. Preterite. I K'petawinenap, thou broughtest tons I K'petawapannik, thou broughtest to them. Future. K'petawitsch, thou shalt or wilt bring to me I K'petawihhenatsch, thou shalt or wilt bring to us K'petawatsch, thou shalt or wilt bring to him K'petawawaktsch, thou shalt or wilt bring to them. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Petawil, bring to me now Petawime, bring me at a future time Petawik, bring ye to me Petawineen, bring to us. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. K'petawiyane, if or when thou bringest to me I K'petawiyenke, if or when thou bringest to us K'petawanne, if or when thou bringest to him | K'petawawannejiforwhenthoubringesttothem. Preterite. K'petawiyannup, if or when thou hast brought to me K'petawannup, if or when thou hast brought to him K'petawiyenkup, if or when thou hast brought to us. K'petawawakup, if or when thou hast brought to them. Future. {JVot given.) THIRD TRAJ\rSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. N'petagun, he brings to me K'petaguk, he brings to thee Petagol, he brings to him Present. 1 N'petaguncen, he brings to us K'petaguwa, lie brings to you Petawawak, he brings to Uiem. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 217 [eighth conjugation.] Preterite. N'petagop, he brought to me I N'petagunap, he brought to us K'petagop, he brought to thee K'petaguwap, he broujjht to you Petawap, he brought to him | Petawapannik, he brought to them. Future. N'petaktsch, he shall or will bring to me 1 N'petageneent?ch, he shall or will bring to us K'petaguklsch, he shall or will bring to thee K'petaguwatsch, he shall or will bring to you Petagoltsch or petawatsch, he shall or will | Petawawaktsch, he shall or will bring to them, bring to him SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Petawite, if or when he brings to me I Petaquenke, if or when he brings to us Peiaquonne, if or when he brings to thee Petaqueke, if or when he brings to you Petawate, if or when he brings to him | Petawachtite, if or when he brings to them. Preterite. Petawitup, if or when he brought to me I Petaquenkup, if or when he brought to us Petaquonnup, if or when he brought to thefr Petaquekup, if or when he brought to you Petawatup, if or when he brought to him | Petawachtitup, if or when he brought to them Future. Petawitsch, when or if he shall bring to me I Petaquenktsch, when or if he shall bring to us Petaquonnetseh, when or if he shall bring to thee Petaquektsch, when or ifhe shall bring to you Petawatsch, when or ifhe shall bring to him | Petawachtitsch, whenorifheshallbriugtothem FOURTH TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'petoleneen, we bring to thee I K'petolohhena, we bring to you N'petawaneen, we bring to him | N'petawawuna, we bring to them. Preterite. K'petolenenap, we have brought to thee I K'pptolohhenap, we have brought to you N'petawanenap, we have brought to him | N'petawawunap, we have brought to them. Future. K'petolenneentsch, we shall bring to thee I K'pefolohhenatsch, we .shall bring to you N'petawaneentsch, we shall bring to him | N'petawawunatsch, we shall bring to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Petolengue, when or if we bring to thee I Petaquonquek, when or if we bring to you Petawonque, when or if we bring to him j Petawawonque, when or if we bring to them VOL. HI. — 3 I 318 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [eighth conjugation.] Preterite. Petolenkup, when or if we brought to thee I Petaquekup, when or if we brought to you Petawonkup, when or if we brought to him I Petawawonkup, when or if we brought to them. Future. Petolenketsch, when or if we shall bring to thee I Petaquenketsch, when or if we shall bring to you Petawonketsch, when or if we shall bring to him | Petawawanketsch, when or if we shall bring to them. FIFTH TIUJ\rSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. K'petawihhimo, you bring to me I K'petawihhena, you bring to us K'petawanewo, you bring to him | K'petawawawak, you bring to them. Preterite. K'petawihhimoap, you brought to me I K'petawihhenap or k'petawihummenakup, you K'petawanewap or k'petawanewakup, you brought to us brought to him | K'petawapannik or k'petawanewakup, you brought to them. Future. K'petawihhimotsch, you shall bring to me I K'petawihhenatsch, you shall bring to us K'petawauewotsch, you shall bring to him | K'petawawawaktsch, you shall bring to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Petawiyek, when or if you bring to me I Petaquiy ek, when or if you brought to us Petaquek, when or if you bring to him Petawaque or petawachtique, when or if you I brought to them. Preterite. Petawiyekup, when or if you brought to me I Petaquiyekup, when or if you brought to us Petaquekup, when or if you brought to him | Petawaquekup, when or if you brought to them. Future. Petawiyektsch, when or if you shall bring to me I Petaquiyektsch, when or if you shall bring to us Petaquektsch, when or if you shall bring to him Petawaquektsch, when or if you shall bring to I them. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 219 [eighth conjugation.] SIXTH TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'petake, they bring or one brings to me I Petakeneen, they bring or one brings to us K'petake, they bring or one brings to thee K'petakenewo, they bring or one brings to you Petawanewo, they bring or one brings to him | Petawawanewo.theybringoronebringstothem. Preterite. N'petakep, they brought to me I N'petakenenap, they brought to us K'petakep, they brought to thee K'petakenewap, they brought to you Petawanewap, they brought to him | Petawavrapanoik, they brought to them. Future. N'petaketsch, they shall bring to me I N'petakeneentsch, they shall bring to us K'petaketsch, they shall bring to thee K'petakenewotsch, they shall bring to you Petawanewotsch, they shall bring to him | Petawawanewotsch, they shall bring to them. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Petamichtite, when or if they bring to me I Petaqucnke, when or if they bring to us Petakeyanne, when or if they bring to thee Petaqueque, when or if they bring to you Petawachtite, when or if they bring to him | Petawawachlite, when or if they bring to theiB. Preterite. Petamichtitup, when or if they brought to me I Petaquenkup, when or if they brought to us Petakeyannup, when or if they brought to thee Petaquekup, when or if tliey broughl to you Petawachtitup, when or if they brought to him | Petawawachtitup, when or if they brought to them. Petamichtitpanne, when or if they had hmiighf to me Petakeyanpanne, when or if they had brought to thee Petawachtitpanne, when or if they had brought to him Pluperfect. Petakeyenkpanne, when or if they had brought to us Petakeyekpanne, when or if they had brought to you Petawawachlitpanne, when or if they had brought to them. Future. Petamichtitsch, when or If they shall bring to me Petakeyannetsch, when or if they shall bring to thee Pctawachtitsch, when or if they shall bring to him Petaquenketsch, when or if they shall bring to us Petaquequetsch, when or if they shall bring to you Petawawachtitsch, when or if they shall bring to them. GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [eighth conjugation.] Note by the Translator. — In another part of this Grammar, the follow- ing partial forms of this verb are given : IJ\rDEFIJVITE TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'peschogun, one brings to me 1 N'peschoguneen, one brings to us K'peschogun, one brings to thee j K'peschguwa, one brings to you Pescliogol, one brings to him | Peschguwawals, one brings to them. AJVLMATE FORM.— FIRST TRAJVSITIOJV. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'peschuwa, I bring to him I N'peschuWaneen, we bring to him K'peschuwa, thou bringest to him K'peschuwanewo, you bring to him Peschuwa, he brings to him | Peschuwawak, they bring to him. This last form is only used when speaking of animals, as for instance, nenayunges n'peschuwa, I bring the horse to him*. No. II. Olhatton or WuiiATTON, to have or possess something or have it in one's custody. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. Olhatton or wulatton, to have or possess. Preterite. Olhattonep or wulattonep, to have had or possessed. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Nolhatton or nulatton, I have or possess I Nolhattoneen or nulattoneen, we have or possess Kolhatton ot Isulatton, thou hast or dost possess Kolhattonewo or kulattohhumo, you have or Olhatton or wulatton, he has or possesses possess Olhattonewo or wulattonewo, they have or pos- • JVote by the Translator.— This is all that is said in this grammar respecting the animate and inanimate forms of the verbs, which distinction is very general in the language. The following verb, olhatton, is in the inanimate form. In the animate it is olhaila. JVenayunges nolhallau, I have a horse (a horse I have him). See Heckew. Corresp. p. 438. OP THE liENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [eighth conjugation.] Nolhattoneep ornulattonep, I had Kolhattoneep or kulattonep, thou hadst Olhattoneep or wulattonep, he had Nolhattontschi, I shall have Kolhattontschi, thou shalt have OlhattoDtschi, he shall have Preterite. j Nolhattonenakup or nulattonenap, we had Kolhattonewoakup or kulattohhumoap, you had I Olhattonewoakup or wulattonewoap, they had. Future. I Nolhattoneeutsch, we shall have Kolhattonewotsch, you shall have I Olhattonewotsch, they shall have. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Present. Sing. Wulhattol, wulattol, have, keep, preserve Plw, Wulhattook, wulatlook, do you have, keep, preserve. Future. Sing Wulattaketsch, he must, shall have, keep, preserve Plur. Wulattschitetsch, they must, shall have, keep, preserve. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Nulattawak, when or if I have Kulattawonne, when or if thou hast Wulattaque, when or if he have Nulattawakup, when or if I had Kulattawonnup, when or if thou hadst Wulattakup, when or if he had Present. iNulattayenke, when or if we have Wulattayeque, when or if you have Wulattochtite, when or if they have. Preterite. Nulattakenkup, when or if we had Wulattaquekup, when or if you had Wulattochtitup, when or if they had. Pluperfect Nulattakpanne, when or if I had had Kulattawonpanne, when or if thou hadst had Wulattakpanne, when or if I had had Nulattawenkpanne, when or if we had had Wulattaquekpanne, when or if you had had Wulattochtitpanne, when or if they had had. The Future Is formed from the present as above mentioned. JVEGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present- Sing. Nulattowi, kulattowi, wulattowi Plur. Nulatlowuneen, kulattowihhimo, wulat- towunewo. VOL. HI. 3 E Preterite. Sing. Nulattowip, kulattowip, wulattowip Plur. Nulatlowunenap, kulattowihbimoap, wu- lattowunewoap. GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [eighth conjugation.] Future. Sing. Nulattowitsch, kulattowitsch, wulatto- I Plur. Wulattowunnentsch.kulattowihhimotsch, witsch wulattowunewotsch. The other Moods are not given. In the same manner with this verb the follovk^ing are conjugated with very little variation. Maniton, to make*. Wuliton, to make something well. Palliton, to spoil something, to do it wrong. Matschiton, to do mischief Kschiechton, to wash, clean. N'gieschiechton, kischiechton, guschiechton, I clean, thou cleanest, he cleans, or 1 wash, &c. Gischiton, to make, prepare sometliing. N'gis- i Schellachton, to hang up chiton, I prepare, has all the tenses, but not j Pagachtschaton, to ml. the personal forms. I Logillachton, to tear, to destroy. Pakantschiechton, to fulfil, complete. | Hatton, to place or fix something. Pakandhatton, to repair something, to make it | Gaton, to conceal, hide. whole. Apachtschiechton, to display, to spread, to self Poniton, to let something be or remain. Pakiton, to throw away. Palaton, to earn, to acquire. Nipachton, to raise or set up something, as a post or pole. Nitaton, to do or be able to do something. Niskiton to dirty, to bewray. * JVote by the Translator. — From this word probably comes manitto, manitou, God, the crea- tor, the maker. Patamawos, another name for God, comes from pataman, to pray ; the one to whom we pray. t JVote by the Translator. — In the original manuscript there is in this place a number of para- digms of verbs and parts of verbs not classed under their different conjugations, but mostly belong- ing to the first. In the translation which I made for the Philosophical Society I inserted them un- der the head of additional verbs. On examining them afterwards more closely, I found several were deficient in moods and tenses, and were clearly considered by the author only as materials to be made use of in a revision of his work. Among them were repetitions of verbs already given, but in some respects more complete, containing moods and tenses, which in the first examples were wanting. It will be seen in the verbs, particularly of the first conjugation, that they are not all carried through their different voices, forms, moods, and tenses, so that one often supplies the deficiencies of the others. If the author had lived, it is probable that he would have brought his work to a greater degree of perfection. This I could not undertake to do : but I thought it unne- cessary to swell this grammar with these additional verbs and fragments of verbs thus inserted with- out order or method. 1 therefore left out all that belonged to the first conjugation, already full enough, contenting myself with extracting what was wanting in the first paradigms, in order to complete them as much as possible. Of the other additional verbs I have inserted two or three under their proper conjugations, leaving out the remainder, which 1 am satisfied was not intended to remain in its present form. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 223 [or VERBS.] IRREGULAR VERBS, OR, VERBS THAT ARE DEFICIENT IN PERSONS OR TENSES iN'ote by the Translator. — These are chiefly of the class which we call impersonal ; but they do not all belong to it, as will be seen by the ex- amples. Therefore the denomination of the author has been preserved. Of those which are called irregular in the ancient and modern languages of Europe, that is to say, of which the several tenses and moods appear to have sprung from different roots, as in Latin sum, erain.fui, in French alter, je vais, firai, and in English I go, I went, he gives no examples; and probably there are none in this language. It is a fact worthy of some attention. Among the examples the author had included some of the adjective verbs hereafter mentioned, which we have transferred to their proper head. EXAMPLES OF IRREGULAR VERBS. Sokelan, it rains Sokelaneep, it rained Sokelantsciii, it will rain Sokelanke, if it rains Sokelanketscli, when it will rain Sokelankpanne, if it had rained. K'schilan, it rains hard K'schilaneep, it rained hard Popetelan, it rains now and then, by showers, by stai-ts Popetelanep, it rained now and then Alhacquot, it rains a general rain (extending over a large surface of country) Achkikalan, it sleets. Wineu, it snows Wineep, it snowed Wineuchtschi, it will snow Wineke, if or when it snows Winekpanne, if it had snowed. Topan, it freezes a white frost Topaneep, it did freeze a wliite frost. K'schakan, the wind blows hard K'schakaneep, the wind blew hard K'schachinke, when or if it blows hard Tamseetsch* kschakan, it will perhaps blow hard Apitchanehelleu, it blows a contrarj' wind Apitchanehellewak, they have a contrary wind Wundschun, the wind conies from (a particular quarter) Wundschenneep, the wind did come from, &c. Wundschiuke, when or if the wind comes from. Moschhaquat, the river clears up, is getting free from ice Moschhaquachtcep, the river cleared up Massipook, the river drifts ice M'chaquiechen, the water is high M'chaquiecheneep, the water was high M'chaquiechinke, when or the water is high M'chaquiechinkpanne, when or if the water was or had been high Petaquiechen, the water is rising Petaquiecheneep, the water was rising. * JVote by the Translator. — This word is compounded of tamse sometimes, eet perhaps, and the future termination tsch. GRAMMAR OF THE I.ANGPAGE [irregular verbs.] Wulandeu, it is fine clear weather Wulaadeep, it was fine clear weather Wulandeuchtschi, it will be fine clear weather Wulandeke, when it is fine clear weather Wulandekpanne, if or when it was fine clear weather. Moschhacquat, the weather clears up Moschhacquachteep, the weather was clear. Achgumhocquat, it is cloudy weather Achgumhocquachtop, it was cloudy weather. Wundeu, it boils N'wiechen, I boil Wundeep, it boiled Wiechenin, to boil, cook the food Wundpeu, it leaks, drops — JVegat. Wundpewi Wundpewall, they leak, drop, boil over. Tepiken, it is ripe, fiill grown — JVegat. Tepike- newi Tepikeneep, it was ripe Tepikenol, they are ripe Tepikentschi, it will be ripe enough. Winu, it is ripe (applied to maize or Indian com) Winop, it was ripe Winike, when or if it is ripe — JVegat. Winiwi, when or if it is not ripe. Winxu, it is ripe (applied to fruit on the tree) — JVegat. Winxiwi Winxuwak, they are ripe Winxop, it was ripe*. Saken, it shoots or springs up (the seed) — .A''e- gat. Sakenowi Sakenoll, they shoot up (the beans) Sakenop, it sprang up. Luteu, it burns (from lussemen, to bum) Luteuchtschi, it will bum N'lussi, I burn Lussop, he has burned. K'schippehelleu, the water rans off K'schippehelleup, the water ran off. Petschihilleu, he is coming on Petschihilleep, he came on. Natchaquef , I fetch wood, thou fetchest wood, he fetches wood, we fetch wood, you fetch wood, they fetch wood Natachtu, he fetches wood. Hattau, he has, it has, it is there Hatteep, he had, it was there JVegat. Atta hattewi, he has not, it is not there Hattawawu, when or if I was there Ika or yun hattol,have it there, put it there. N'gatta, I will (from gattamen, to want, will, desire ) K'gatta, thou wiliest Gotta, he willeth Gottalineen, we will Gattati, come ! be willing ! Gattatook, be ye willing ! N'gatta linxumen, I will melt it. Linxumen, to melt something Linkten, it melts Linktup, it melted, was melted. Gandhatton, to hide, conceal N'gandhatton, I hide, conceal N'gandattoneep, I hid, concealed In all other cases gandhatton is unalterably used. Mayawiechen, it agrees, it is right, it suits — JVe- gat. Mayawiechenowi Pret. Mayawiechenep. Aski, must, has neither persons nor tenses, and must be used in the following manner : Aski n'witschema, I must help him Aski n'witschemap, I was obliged to help him Aski witschemepannik, they were obliged to help him Aski sachgapenawall, I must lead him Aski nayumap, I was forced to carry him Aski n'pehawall, I must wait for you. * JVote by the Translator. — The above are property adjective verbs ; but they have been left here out of their proper place in order to shew the variety of ways in which the Indians express the same thing in relation to different objects. Had these words been carried to the following list of adjective verbs, they must have been separated in the different classes. t JVote by the Translator. — This word is compounded from naten, to fetch and tachan, wood. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. 225 [or VERBS.] OF ADJECTIVE VERBS. Kote by the Translator. — The author observes here that he hesitated long whetlier he should class adjectives by themselves or include them all under the head of verbs.' On the one hand he could not but observe that there are in this language pure adjectives, which receive ditlerent forms when employed in the verbal sense, such as wulit, wulik, wulisso, good, handsome, pretty; wulilissu, he, she. or it is good, pretty, or hand- some, and several others of which the author gives examples, as for in- .stance (Class I.) in sabbeleechen, sparkling, glittering, whence sabbeleu, it sparkles, glitters. But tliese are not very numerous. A great number of them are impersonal verbs in the third person of the singular of the present tense, while others are conjugated through various persons, moods, and tenses, as appears from the following examples. He determined, at last, after presenting a few under the head of adjectives, above page 103, to include them all in a list of verbs of this description, which the Trans- lator has called adjective verbs, as he has denominated adverbial verbs those which are formed by or derived from them. It is to be regretted that the venerable missionary did not more particularly distinguish the pure adjectives from the others, and did not enter more fully into this subject. It is most certain that all the adjectives of the Delaware language are not verbs ; but a rule or principle of discrimination is wanting, and the Trans- lator cannot undertake to establish it. The Author here exhibits a list of adjective verbs, divided into eleven classes according to their termination, which in the three first is that of the third person singular of the indicative mood of the first conjugation. The first is in eu; the second in wi; the third in m or o; the fourth in on or an; the fifth in ot, at; the sixth in to; the seventh in i; the eighth in it, ik, et; the ninth in en; the tenth in en or on; and the eleventh in in. This last appears to belong to the first conjugation, and its termination is that of the infinitive mood. It is conjugated through several moods, persons, and tenses. ADJECTIVE VERBS. CLASSED ACCORDING TO THEIR TERMINATIONS. Class I — In eu. Kschitteu, warm, hot (it is) l Atta kscliittewi*, it is not warm Kschittep, It was warm | Atta kschittewip, it was not waim. • JVote by the Translator.— The termination wi is not here adverbial; it is employed in a ne- gative sense, as in the verbs. See above, page 166, k'pendolen, I hear Uiee, atta k'pendolowi, I hear thee not, and in most other negative forms of the verbs. vol.. III. 3 L, 336 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [adjective verbs.] EJDeu, it is sharp Kineep, it was sharp. Guneu, long (it is) Guneep, it was long Guneuchtschi, it will be long. Kschiecheu, clean (it is) Kschiecbeep, it was clean. Machkeu, red (it is) Machkeep, it was red. M'cheu, big, large M'chap, it was big. Gachteu, dry Gacbteep, it was dry. Teu, it is cold Teep, it was cold Teuchtschi, it will be cold. Poquihilleu, it is broken Poquihilleep, it was broken. Pimeu, pimiecheu, oblique Pimihilleu, it is oblique Pimihilleep, it was oblique. Pisgeu, it is dark Pisgeep, it was dark. Takpeu, wet, damp Takpeep, it was wet Takpeuchtschi, it will be wet. Winkteu, winkteek, it is quite done, boiled Winkteep, it was boiled Winkteke, if or when it is boiled. Wisaweu, wisaweek, yellow. Waktscheu, crooked. Woapeu, white Woapeleechen, it appears white. Suckeu, black Suckeleecheu, it appears black Suckeep, it was black. Wtackeu, soft, delicate Wtackeep, it was soft, delicate Wtackeuchtschi, it will be soft, delicate. Acheweu, bushy. Achgameu, broad Achgameeke, if it was broad. Achgiguwen, to be lively, jocular N'gagiguwe, I am lively Kagiguwe, he is lively N'gagiguweneen, we are lively Kagiguwenewo, you are lively Achgiguwewak, they are lively. Achginche, to be quick of hearing N'gaginche, I am quick of hearing Kaginche, thou art quick of hearing Achgincheu, he is quick cf hearing. Achgumeu, dull cloudy weather. Gisehachteu, it is clear, light Gischachteep, it was clear Gischachteke, if or when it was clear Gischacbtekpanne, if it had been clear. Gischhatteu, it is ready Gischhatteep, it was ready Gischhatteke, if it was ready Gischhattekpanne, if it had been ready. Gischuteu, warm, lukewarm Gischuteep, it was lukewarm Gischuweu, it is warm Gischuweep, it was warm Gischuweuchtsch, it will he warm. Gischuweke, if it was warm Eschillandeu, it is hot (weather) Kschillandeep, it was hot Kschillandeke, if it was hot. Moschachgeu, bald, bare Moschantpeu, bald headed. Pimochqueu, turned, twisted. Sabbeleu, it sparkles, glitters Sabbeleechen, sparkling, glittering. Schauwutteu, it is faded Schauwutteep, it was faded Schauwutteke, when or if it is faded. Wapaneu, easterly Wundchenneu, westerly Lowaneu, northerly Schawaneu, southerly Gachpatteyeu, south easterly. Tihhilleu, it is cool (the meat) Tihhille, I am cool (after being heated) Tihhilleu, he is cool. Tschitaneu, strong (it is) Tschitaneep, it was strong Tschitaneke, if it was strong. OF THE LENNI LENAPE INDIANS. [adjective verbs.] SS7 Waseleu, woacheyeu, clear, light. Wtackaneu, it is mild (weather) Wtackaneke, when it is mUd Wtackanup, it was mild Wtackaneuchtsch, it will be mild. Acbgepioque, to be blind INDICATIVE MOOD PRESENT TEIfSE. Singular. N'gagepinque, I am blind Kagepinque, thou art blind Achgepinque, he is blind Plural. N'gagepinqueneen, we are blind Kagepinquenewo, you are blind Achgepinquewak, they are blind PRETERITE TENSE. Singular. N'gagepinquep, I was or have been blind Kagepinquep, thou wast or hast been blind Achgepinquep, he was or has been blind Plural. N'gagepinquep, we were 07 hare been blind Kagepinquenewoap, you were or have been blind Achgepinquewapannil, they were or have been blind. Achgepchoan, to be deaf N'gagepchoa, I am deaf Kagepchoa, thou art deaf Achgepcheu, he is deaf Acbsinnigeu, stony, stony land; Piskeu, it is dark (night) Piskeep, it was dark Achwipiskeu, quite dark Achwipiskeep, it was quite dark. Memeechaitin, to be barefooted N'memechaitin, I am barefooted K'memechaitin, thou art barefooted Memeechxiteu, he is barefooted. Mesitcheyeu, whole, entire. Pagatschateu, full, to fill. Penquon, dry Penquihilleu, it is dry Penquibilleep, it was dry. Pikihhilleu, it is torn Pikihhillup, it was torn. Pimachtelinque, squint eyed Pimachtelinqueu, he is squmt eyed. Poquihilleu, it is broken Poquihilleep, it was broken. Chitqueu, chuppecat, deep water Chuppeachtop, it was deep water. Schachachgen, straight, even. Wsehacheu, wschachan, smooth, glossy Wschachihilleu, it is smooth, glossy Wschachihilleep, it was smooth, glossy. Schauwipachteu, it is faded Schauwipaehteep, it was faded. Tachanigeu, woody, full of wood Taachaoigeep, it was woody. Tonquihilleu, it is open. Tsachgihilleu, it is torn off Tschachpihilleep, it was torn oflP. Tschetschpihilleu, split, broken off Tschetschpihillewall, they are split Tschetschpihilleep, it was split. Wulelemileu, it is wonderful WulelemUeep, it was wonderful These words are compounded from wulele- melendam I wonder, and leu it is so. Scappeu, it is wet Scappewall, they are wet fspeaking of things) Scapewak, they are wet (speaking of persons). Wulamoe, he says true or the truth Wulamoyu, it is true, right Kulamoe, thou art right, correct Wulamoe, he is right Nulamoeneen, we are right Kulamoehhimo, you are right Wulamowak, they are right. Assiskuyu, marshy, muddy Gtmdassikuyu, deeply marshy. Wulapeyu, honourable, upright. Wuskiyeyu, it is new. N'chowiyeyu, it is old. 228 GRAMMAR OF THE liANGUAGE [adjective verbs.] Class 11. Contains only the pure adjectives in toi, which see above page 104. Class III. — In u or o Schahacbgckhasu, long, straight, striped. Sassapeekhasu, speckled. Psacquitchasu, crucified (he is) Psacquitchasoop, he was crucified. Wiyagaskau, fickle. Wtacksu, soft, tender, supple. Wschewinaxu, wschewinaquot, painful. Waliechtschessu, puchtschessu, hollow (a tree). Tachpachaxu, little, mean. Schiphasu or schipenasu, spread out, extended, from schiphammen, to spread, extend Schipenasike, when it is stretched, spread out, extended Schipenasop, it was stretched, spread out, ex- tended. Piselisso, it is wrinkled Piselid tulpe, a large sea tortoise, so called be- cause its shell is soft and its skin wrinkled . Pimochkhasu, stirred, moved Piiuochkhasoop, it was stirred, moved Piniochkhasike, if it was stirred, moved. Machtu, machtitso, bad Machtitso sipo, a bad creek (to cross) Machtitsoop, it was bad. Machtississi, thou art ugly, dirty looking Machtississu, he is ugly, dirty looking. Gischambeso, bound. Aschukiso, to be poor, worth nothing, to he a N'daschuki, I am poor K'daschuki, thou art poor Wdaschuku, he is poor Aschukiso, one who is poor Wdaschukuwak, they are poor Aschukoop, to have been poor JVote. — Although the Indians often apply tliis word to themselves, yet it is an insult if applied to them by another. Wulisso, good, handsome Wulilissin, to be good INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Singular. Nulilissi, I am good Kulilissl, thou art good WuUIissu, he is good Plural. Wulilissihummena, we are good Wulilissibimo, you are good Wulilissowak, they are good PHETERITE TENSE. Singular. Nulilissip, I was good Kulilissip, thou wert good Wulilissop, he was good Plural. Nulilissihummenakup, we were good Kulilissihummoakup, you were good Wulilissopannik, they were good. Walhasu, buried (he is). Tschingalsu, stiff, unbending. Papesu, patient. Messiau, naked. Sopsu, soopsu, naked, from sopsin, to be naked. Messissu, whole. Lusasu, burned Lusasike, if it was burned. Linxasu, melted Linxasike, if it was melted. Leekhasu, lekhasik, it is written Leekhasoop, it was written Elekhasik, as appears written. OP THE LENIW LENAPE INDIANS. [adjective verbs.] S39 Epaskhasu, stopped Kpahasu, to stop Kpahasop, it was stopped Kpahasike, if it was stopped. Gaschsasu, dried. Wapsu, white N'wapsi, I am white Wapsi, thou art white Wapsu, he is white Wapelechen, it is white Wapsid, a white person Wapsitschik, the white people. Auchzu, wild, untractable — This is said of beasts ; as applied to men it means avaricious, difficult to deal with, hard, stingy. Wisu, fat (he is) Wisop, he was fat. Kihnsu, from kineu, sharp: as for instance, your discourse is sharp, biting, harsh N'kihnsi, I am sharp, jealous Kihnsi, thou art sharp, jealous Kihnsu, he is sharp, jealous Kihnsop, he has been sharp, jealous As for instance — N'kihnsi ni Getannitowit, I am a jealous God. Winn, it is ripe, tit to eat : as for instance, the Indian corn Winike, when it is ripe Winoop, it was ripe Winuchtschi, it will be ripe. Aloku, lean. Wipiechku, rotten wood. Windasu, mentioned, named Windasike, if it was mentioned, named Windasop, it was mentioned, named Windasutsch, it will be mentioned, named. Class IV. — 'In on or an. Schwon, salt tasted, sour Schwonnoop, it was salt tasted, sour. Achewon, strong, spirituous Achewonnoop, it was strong, spirituous. Kschuppan, blunt, dull. Ksuequon, hard, difficult Ksuequonnool, they are hard (things). Lachcan, it is sharp tasted. Langan, easy {it is) Langannool, they are easy (things) Langannoop, it was easy. Thitpan, bitter. Wingan, good tasted, good to eat Winganool, they were good tasted, good to eat, (apples, &c.) Kopachkan, thick (a board, plank) Eopachkisso, thick (a skin, hide). Wiquon, dull, blunt, not sharp. WschappaD, woasgeyen, thin. Penquon, dry Penquihhilleu haki, the earth is dry. Gulucquot, lame. Apuat, easy (to do) Apuattop, it was easy. Achgepinquot, blind Gegepinquot, a blind man or person. Gegepchoat, a deaf person. Aebpequot, wounded. VOL. III. 3 M Class V. — In ot, at. Achowat, hard, painful, troublesome. Gunalachgat, deep (a hole in the earth, or the canoe is deep) Tepalachgat, deep enough The latter of these two words is formed from tepi, an adverb, which means enough, the for- mer from guneUy an adjective, long, both com- bined with walak,di hole. Ayandaraolquot, gachtalquot, it is to be wished. 330 GRAMMAR OF THE LANGUAGE [adjective verbs.] Class VI. — In to. Chawachto, dear (it is) Talawachto, how dear is it .' how much does it cost ? Apuawachto, cheap, from apuat, easy. Achgepchoa, deaf. Tepawachto, from tepi, enougli, and chxea- wachto, a just, equitable price, it is not too dear. Tangawachto, cheap, low priced. Class VII.~In i. Wuski, new. Amangi, great, big, large Amangewall, (namessal), the fishes are large. Macheli, m'chelit, much, many Machelook, (hey are many Machelopannik, they were many. Class VIII.— In it, ik, et. Mequit mequik, m'hocquik, bloody. Maechgilik, m'chakgilik, the great, the big. Machtit, bad (it is). Wulit, good Wulittol, they are good Wulittoop, it was good. Alett, rotten Alettot, they are rotten. Machkalet, they are rusty, from machkeu, ted. Waseleechen, it is clear, light. Tschitaniechen, it is strong. Class IX. — In en. Waktschiechen, the road is crooked. Tsetschpiechen, it is separated. Achewiechen, strong, spirituous : as for instance, strong lie. Machkeleechen, red. Wapeleechen, white. Tenktschechen, it is open (say, the door). Tauwiechen, it is open (the way thither). Tacquiechen, joined together Psacquiechen, close together. Pequiechen, broken to pieces. Class X. — In en, on, um. Tacquatten, frozen (it is) Tacquatteaol, the potatoes, &c. are frozen Pret, Sing. Tacquattenop, it was frozen Flvr. Tacquattenopannil, they were frozen OP THE LENNI EENAPE INDIANS. [adjective verbs.] 231 K'pattcn, it is frozen up (the river) K'pattenop, it was frozen K'pattentschi, it will be frozen Tscbitanatten, it is frozen hard. Tepiken, it is ripe, full grown (say, the Indian com) Teplkanool, they are fully ripe, fit to pick (the beans, peas, &c.) Packenum, dark. Nolhand, to be lazy Sing. Nolhando, he is lazy Plur. Nolhandowak, they are lazy. Class XI. — In in. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pawalessin, to be rich PARTICIPLES. Singular. Pewallessit, a rich person Plural. Pewallessitschik, rich persons INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Singular. N'pawalessin, I am rich K'pawallsi, thou art rich pawalessu, he is rich Plural. N'pawalhihummena, we are rich K'pawallsihiiuuinio, ye are rich Pawallesowak, they are rich PRETERITE TENSE. Sitigular. N'pawallessihump, I wa.s rich K'pawalles?ihump, thou wast rich Pawallessop, he was rich Plural. N'pawallsihummenakup, we were rich K'pawalisihuminoakup, ye were rich Pawallsopannik, they were rich FUTURE TENSE. Singular. N'pawallsitsch, I shall be rich K'pawallsitsch, thou shalt be rich Pawallessutsch, he shall be rich Plural. N'pawallsihummenat«ch, we shall be rich K'pawalKihhiniolsch, ye Koen eet, what may it be ? Ta hatsch (leu, how will it be ?) VII. — Of Similitude. Elgiqui, as, like as N'delgiqui, I am like E'delgiqui, thou art like I Wdelgiqui, he is like Mallachscbe, like unto. VIII. — Of Comparison. AUowiwi, more Tschitsch, still more IElinaquo, linaquot, as this, that, or the other Tpisqui, exactly so. IX. — Of Extension. Husca, huscateek, very, very much so Wtellgiqui, so much so Elgiqui, as much so Tschitsch, yet, still Quayaqui, yabtschi, yet Ikalissi, still further, still more Pakantschi, fully, entirely. 236 6BAMMAR OF THE IiANGUAGE [of adverbs.] X . — Of Diminution. Tgauwitti, by little and little I Mingachsa, a little better Gachti, almost, nearly Schuk, only Eoechitti, a little I Schuk atta, but not, only not. XI. — Of Affirmation. Gohan, kehella, woak, yes Bischik, yes indeed Kitschiwi (leu) certainly, truly Eitschikele, yes it is true Nanne leu, it is certainly true Schachacki, certainly Huscateek, certainly true. XII. — Of JVegation, Prohibition. Matta, atta, 'ta, no, not Atta am, 'ta am, not at all Atta haschi, no, never Eatschi, let it alone, don't do this Matta tani, in no way | Attago, by no means Ponito, let it alone (this is a verb) Atta ibaschi, not at all Atta ilewi, not at all true. XIII.— 0/DomM. Pit, piteet, eet, perhaps, may be I Taktani, perhaps some where, I don't know Na eet, perhaps j where. Taneek, perhaps I don't know | XIV. — Of Demonstration. Sche, Schela, see there ! (a verb) I Loqueek, see ye (a verb) Schepella, see there ! (a verb) Elinaquot, also, likewise Penna, loquel, see thou (a verb) | Elgiqui, Uke that XV.— Of Asseveration. Ktschiwi (leu) truly | Schachachki (leu), certainly true. XVI.— Of Restriction. Na schachki, so far I Nachgiechen, contrary, against Na yu pitschi, to here | Psacquiechen, close to each other. V OF THE LENNI 1.ENAPB INDIANS. [of adverbs.] 237 Jukella, ab ! that (it were so) XVII.— 0/ Desire. I Ayema, if, if only (it were so). XVIII.— 0/ Exhortation. Gattati, ( Sing. ) well ! allons ! I Gattatook, (,Plur.) well! allons.' Wischekill, (Siiig.) on, brisidy.go on with your j work carefully, attentively. — Wischiksik, Wischiki, {Plur.) XIX. — Of Collection and Separation. Tpettawe, all together N'gutteleneyachgat, a single one Tachqniwi, logelher Limi, secretly NeLips- D>a,vitt. 6v Zic l>raewn on .SCont! fSC rj-.hy J.BioAftoTt ■ V mm ^ ■/ t7m'.c' ii-rvratzi Drunti In- IZt J.Ih-tKyton Ji Mtic. C(51. Tome V. p. 256. '^ Theoria motus corporum solidorum seu rigidorum. Rostoch. 1765. SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 325 perties of the Segnerian axes. This was first effected by Lagrange^' in the Memoirs of the Academy of Berlin for 1773. In the course of this solution, which is repeated with an improved notation in the Mecaniqiie Jlnalytique, the well known values of the resolved angular velocities in terms of the coordinates and resolved velocities of the body's poles, are given first as mere analytical abridgments, and made after- wards to exhibit their geometrical signification; a method which this author has followed on various other occasions. Nine years before this, however, Lagrange had considered another highly interesting case of planetary oscillation, the librations of the moon. His memoir on this subject was crowned by the Academy of Sciences in 1764 and ynW ever be memorable in the annals of Demonstrative Mechanics as containing the application of the beautiful principle of vir- tual velocities in all its simplicity and power to the most ge- neral speculations of Dynamical Philosophy''. Combined with the great theorem of D'Alembert, this principle dis- penses altogether with the slow and enforced aids of Geome- try, and leads the analyst at once from the definition of velocity and force safely and rapidly to the most recondite secrets and the most elevated regions of the Science. In the Berlin Memoirs for 1780, Lagrange resumed the whole sub- ject, and in an admirable dissertation regarded by himself as the most finished of his productions, he terminates in formulas which delineate, in all their intricate variety, the motions of our satellite, for ages Mithout number past and to come. These expressions are the results of a skilful transformation of the general equations in the case of rotation round a body- axis which forms with its mean direction a very small but variable angle, taking into account the figure which the moon '^ Nouvelle solution du Problome du Mouvement de Rotation d'un Corps. Nouv. Mem. Berl. 1773. '* Recherches sur la libration dc la Lune. Hist. Acad. Par. Prix. Tome IX 1764. 326 ON THE MOTION OF must have acquired in the highly probable hypothesis of its original fluidity^'. After the problem of free rotation had been solved, nearer approaches were made to the determination of the motion of a supported body. D'Alembert, who had briefly given in the first volume of his Opuscules the modifications of his ge- neral formulas applicable to this case, resumed the inquiry in the fifth volume of the same work". For this purpose he undertakes a general solution of the question already consid- ered by Euler. A body is supposed to be sustained by one of its points upon a plane, and the circumstances of the mo- tion are required. The resulting differential equations are, however, so involved, that the author evidently abandons in despair all idea of obtaining the necessary integrations. A variety of simplifications and restrictions are then introduced with a view to obtain cases admitting of first integrals. The line which joins the centre of gravity and the point of sup- port is supposed to be a principal axis, and the point is sup- posed to move wthout friction on a horizontal plane, the mode of considering the resistances of friction and the incli- nation of the plane being nevertheless laid down though found to lead to unmanageable results. On the whole, D'Alembert is far from having solved any but the simplest cases of this problem, though he appears to have proceeded somewhat far- ther than any of his cotemporaries. Euler, who had in the earlier volumes of the Commentaries of the St Petersburg Academy considered, in conjunction with Daniel Bernoulli, the effects of friction in retarding the motion of polyhedral solids and homogeneous cylinders on inclined planes'', turned his attention a few years before his death to some varieties of the general problem of greater dif- ficulty than these. His first memoir on this subject is divi- ^' Thtorie de la libration de la Lune. Nouv. Mem. Berl. 1780. '■'^ Sur le mouvenient des Corps qui tournent. Opusc. Tome V. 1768. p. 489. ^■' De descensu corporum super piano inclinato. — De motu corporum super piano horizontali aspero. Com. Acad. Petrop. Tom. XIII. 1751. — De frictione corporum rotuntium. Novi Com. Acad. Petr. Tom. VI. 1761. SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 327 (led into two dissertations ; treating of the oscillations of a heterogeneous vertical circle rolling first without and then with friction upon another vertical circle of supporf\ The entire paper is a favourable specimen of the characteristic perspicuity of Euler, and contains the solution of the problem of the small pendular motions of the body, comprised in two equations expressing in finite terms, the coexisting oscillations of the centre of gravit}' around the centre of the rolling cir- cle, and of this centre around the centre of the circle of sup- port. The integrations are effected by an application of rules which Euler had himself laid down forty years before^' in discussing the coexisting oscillations of a jointed pendulum or string of weights, a problem of which John Bernoulli had previously proposed and resolved the simplest case, namely, that in which all the weights cross the vertical at the same instant of time'\ Euler's solution of the general problem of the jointed pendulum stands precisely in the same relation to Bernoulli's that D'Alembert's essay on the vibrations of a tense string does to the original paper of Brook Taylor, and must be regarded as constituting an era not only in mechani- cal but equally so in analytical science. The singular laws of coexisting oscillations which Daniel Bernoulli had already •■* De motu penduli circa axem cylindricum fulcro clatae fitrurae incunibentem mobilis, reniota frictione. Dissertatio prior. Acta Acad. Pehop. 1780, p. 133. De motu penduli, &c. Iiabitit frictionis rations. Dissertatio altera, p. 164. This subject is continued in one of the numerous posthumous memoirs of Euler. Nova Acta, Tom. VI. 177Q. The friction is liere supposed to prevent all sliding. A general investigation requires the consideration of a friction proportioned to the pressure. This is the basis of a dissertation of Euler's (inserted in the Nova Acta for 1783, the year in which he died), — De motu globi heterogenii super piano horizontali, ejusque motu a frictione impedita. In this paper the a.\is of rotation is parallel to the horizon and invariable in direction. For a more recent investiga- tion by Poisson of this motion in the case of a homogeneous sphere rolling forward and partly sliding on a horizontal plane, see Bulletin des Sciences Math. Tome VT. 1826, p. 161. This paper proceeds on the same principles as those which form the groundworii of Euler's Essay — De effectu frictionis in motu volutorio. Acta Pctrop. 1781. p. 131 — 176. 2' De oscillationibus fih flexilis quotcunque pondusculis onusti. Com. Acad. Petr. 1741. *" De pendulo luxato, et de ejus reductione ad pendulum simplex isochronum. Joli. Bernoulli Opera, Tom. IV. p. 302. VOL. III. 4 O 328 ON THE MOTION OF pointed out without being able to demonstrate, are rigorously deduced from the linear differential equations in which they are comprised ; and the beautiful theory of these equations, including their complete integration in a finite series of the multiples of sines of arcs proportional to the time, is develo- ped and explained with admirable skill. An easy application of the principles of this theory solves the problem of the os- cillation of a heterogeneous circle within a circle, without friction, or what is essentially the same question, of any solid upon any suitable surface, the plane of motion being invaria- ble ; as for instance a spherical segment in a spherical cup, supposing no whirling to take place, or a pendulum with cylindrical pivots working in cylindrical collars, which is the form in which the* problem is proposed by Euler himself. When the friction prevents all sliding, the oscillation is sin- gle, and is determined without reference to the theory just mentioned. The effect which this friction has in diminish- ing the time of a pendulum's vibrations, (along with a va- riety of other circumstances necessary to take into the ac- count when the appareil of Borda is employed) has been also calculated by Laplace in a paper on the seconds' pendulum inserted in the Connaissance des Terns for 1820. His me- moir is remarkable for the subtlety of the analysis, rendered necessary by the multitude of the considerations included in his calculus, but when he mentions the effect of friction without sliding as a singular and interesting result to which he had arrived, he is evidently not aAvare of the formulas of Euler and John Bernoulli, from either of which the same in- ference may readily be drawn. In the Ada Petropolitana ioY 1782, one year before his death, Euler resumes the investigation of the problem he had considered in his Theoria motiis corporum rigidorum. This problem, which consisted, as I have already mentioned, in determining the motion of a heterogeneous sphere along a horizontal plane, is called by Euler himself, qusestio maxime ardua, and is regarded by him as inaccessible by the methods then in use, except in the case in which the centres of gravity SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 329 and of figure are supposed to coincide. This simplification is accordingly introduced, and, under the hypothesis of a fric- tion proportional to the constant pressure, he finally obtains, after a long and complicated process, a solution of the prob- lem, as far as the progressive motion and the velocity about the instantaneous axis are concerned, but the determination of the position of this axis in terms of the time is abandoned as absolutely unattainable^'. The whole theory of simultaneous linear equations, so im- portant in a large class of mechanical inquiries, was left by Euler in a formed, but by no means in a finished state. D'Alembert, in whose capacious and prolific intellect almost every branch of mathematical and mechanical philosophy seems to have found place and to have borne abundant fruit, invented, for the solution of these equations, the method of indeterminate coefficients, a method remarkable for the faci- lity of its application, and the fertile variety of its results''\ This method is not confined as Euler's is, to the case of con- stant coefficients, but brings to their least difficulties many classes of equations which previously had been considered as intractable. It was however not applied by D'Alembert to the case of variable coefficients, until Lagrange and Laplace had considered the same subject in new and interesting lights. In the memoirs of the Academy of Paris for 1772, Laplace gives with numerous developments Lagrange's process for in- tegrating any number of simultaneous linear equations of the first order Avith constant coefficients, and for determining the value of the arbitrary constants, which is by no means the least difficult part of the problem. Both the memoir of Lagrange which discusses the variations of the nodes of the ■*' De motu globi circa axem obliquum quemcunque gyrantis et super piano horizontali incedentis. ActaPetrop. 1782. P. ii. p. 107. ** SurJ'integration de quelques (Equations differentielles. Opuscules, Tome VII. 1780, p. 377. D'Alembert had employed the metliod of indeterminate mul- tipliers in the case of constant coefficients, thirty-two years before in the Berlin Memoirs for 1748. " La belle methode de d'Alembert (these are the words of Laplace) est sOrement une des plus ingenieuses, et des plus f(5condes del'analyse," Miscellanea Taurinensia, Tom. IV. 1766, p. 273. 330 ON THE MOTION OF planets and of the inclinations of their orbits", and that of Laplace which is extended so as to include all their variations, whether periodical or secular"^, are alike remarkable for the analytical treasures they contain and the singular success with which this purely intellectual apparatus is made to declare the minutest and most prolonged of the celestial oscillations. In 1788 Lagrange published his Analytical Mechanics. The first paragraph of the fifth section of the first edition of this work is a masterly investigation of the small oscilla- tory motions of any system of bodies round the places of their rest. The great generality of this solution, along Avith its use- ful applications and manageable formulas, render it altoij,ether one of the most important contributions ever made by mathe- matics to mechanical philosophy". The equilibrium posi- tions of the elements are supposed, in Lagrange's dissertation, to be determinate and unique ; that is, the system is supposed such that it cannot change its position without departing from a state of equilibrium. It is manifest however that in a large variety of cases, a system of material points may have a range, more or less extensive, in any part of which it will remain at rest. If the analysis of Lagrange had been made to comprehend, as far as that is practicable, the motions of a system in the immediate neighbourhood of its range of equi- librium, the subject would have been exhausted, and the limits of the science in no small degree enlarged. After Huyghens and James Bernoulli had completed the ^^ Recherches SUV les equations scculaires des moiivemens des noeuds et des inclinaisons des Orbites des Planetes. Mem. Acad. Paris, 1774, p. 117. This paper, though of posterior date, is quoted by Laplace in the memoir followmg : — *■'■ Recherches sur le calcul integral et sur le systtme du monde. Mem. Acad. Paris, 1772. P. ii. p. 293. *' It may be well to mention for the benefit of those who may find it useful to employ these formulas, that by some oversight on the part of Lagrange the values of all the bracketted coefficients in the final differential equations are deficient in all the quantities which arise from having regard to the terms of the second order in the developments of the coordinates of the elements. In the American Journal of Science and Arts for July — Sept. 1826, p. 398, I have given the terms neces- sary to complete the values of these coefficients, with some remarks as to the best form of the function which expresses the finite action of the impressed forces on any one of the corpuscles of the system. SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 331 theory of oscillations round a constant axis, Clairaut in 1735 generalized the doctrine of the simple pendulum, in an able investigation of its conical vibrations, in which the effects of an oblique impulse were for the first time subjected to mathe- matical determination' \ The results for the cases in which the weight describes a circle either vertical or horizontal were deduced as corollaries from the general formulas, and shown to be coincident with the conclusions to which Huyghens had already arrived for these simpler cases of the question. A more difficult problem still remained. When a pendulous body hangs by a fixed point about which it may turn freely in all directions, its motion will be affected not only by the obliquity of the impulse by which it is set in motion, but also hy the rotation of the pendulum around the line which joins the sustaining point and the centre of gravity, so that even when this axis is dropped vertically from a state of rest with the body revolving around it, this rotation will be sufficient, at every instant of the motion, to wrench (as it were) the axis from the direction in which it would move if it were left at the same instant to vibrate by itself. Up to the present time no solution of this problem has been given for finite oscillations, and even for oscillations infinitely small, none was given until Lagrange published, in the first edition of his Mecanique Jinalytique, an ample dissertation on the subject. After a general investigation of the free rotation of a rigid body, in which the author skilfully combines all the advantages of the various methods he had previously invented, he proceeds to the examination of the well known case in which the hody pirouettes by virtue of the inertia of the ele- ments alone. After a masterly detail of all the circum- stances of this case, Lagrange enters upon the discussion of the general motions of a heavy body pirouetting about a fixed point not the centre of gravity, and advances as far towards ■*= Examen des differentes Oscillations qu'un corps suspendu par un fil, peut laire lorsqu'on lui donne une impulsion quelconque. M^m. Acad. Par. 1735, p. 281. VOL.. III. 4 P 332 ON THE MOTION OF a solution as it is possible to proceed in the present state of the Calculus. The case however in which the natural vertical of the body makes infinitely small conical oscillations around its resting place, w'hile the body itself revolves about this axis with any velocity compatible with such oscillations, is com- pletely solved by means of an analysis remarkable for its bril- liancy, generality and rigour. The problem, it is shown, nat- urally divides itself into two distinct portions, one in which the form and density of the body is absolutely arbitrary, but the rotation round the vertical small and consequently varia- ble ; the other in which the rotation round the vertical is ar- bitrary and consequently constant, but the form and density of the body such that the conditions requisite to constitute the natural vertical a'natural axis of rotation shall be nearly, though it is not necessary that they should be exactly, fulfil- led. Poisson published his excellent Traite de Mecanique in 1811. In the second volume of this work, the author applies his calculus to a determination of the motions of a homoge- • neous ellipsoid upon an inclined plane, both surfaces being supposed perfectly smooth. The investigation does not bring the formulas within the reach of the method of quadratures, and therefore the problem cannot as yet be considered as solved^'. The author then proceeds to give an improved so- lution of the question considered long before by Euler and D'Alembert, of the motion of a solid body when it is sus- tained upon a plane by a point fixed in the body, but mov- ing freely along the plane. In the case in which the density and figure are symmetrical about the axis joining the cen- tre of gravity and sustaining point, the problem is reduced to the method of quadratures, and a complete solution is given in the hypothesis of small departures of the axis from some intermediate inclination to the plane. In this solution Pois- son has been followed by Prony in his Lecons de Mecanique *'' This reduction, it ought to have been remarked, is easily effected when the ellipsoid becomes a spheroid of revolution. SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 333 Jlnalytique'\ Whewell in his Dynamics", and various other authors and compilers. It is, I think, a matter of surprize, that none of the Euro- pean mathematicians should have thought of ascertaining whether the method of Lagrange might not be successfully employed in determining the ', q. r, of the function T = 1(4/ + Bq' H- Cr') — (Fqr -+- Grp + Hpq) , which is one half of the living forces of the body arising from its motion of rotation. By means of equations (20). the relations (4) and the sub- stitutions (6), it will be found that the foregoing equation is susceptible of being presented in the following form : VOL. III. — 4 Y 360 ON THE MOTION OF ( P'{dL, + MilR — N,dQ) d(L,P'-^M,Q-}-N,R') = \Q{dM, + N,dP —L.dR) (R'{dN,^L,dQ— MdP) . These equations are true of all supporting and supported sur- faces whatever. It might easily be shown that this last equa- tion is capable of being derived from the principle that the rate of increase of the sum. of all the areas projected on the plane tangent to the point of variable contact is momentarily constant, the tangent plane being supposed to remain for a moment fixed while the body passes on to its consecutive po- sition on the surface of support. When the sustaining surface is an inclined plane, L, L, L" become constant, and the right member of the last equation will vanish on the substitution of the values which L„ M,, N acquire in such a case, so that the equation becomes integrable with respect to time, and we obtain LP -hM,Q-\-N,R = /, / being an arbitrary constant. Again, if we add together the second triplet (27), after multiplying the three equations respectively by dP, clQ, dR, and reduce by means of "the equation of condition (22), we obtain UdP H- VdQ + WdR — e (Ld^ + L'd^' -+- L'W) = o • Substituting for L, L\ L" their values (20), and performing the operation indicated in the first three terms of this equa- tion, there will result dT-hd^d'^-j-d^'d'^'-^d^"dT' — gd^" = o, an equation whose integral gives us the principle of living for- SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 361 ces applied to the problem of any solid body rolling on any given surface, J being another arbitrary constant, and 3/ = i . It is evident, moreover, that the same triplet furnishes the relation ITx, ^_ Vy, -^TFz, = 0. When the body is in a state of permanent equilibrium upon the surface of support, the velocities and accelerations of the six elements of its position are nought, and the six equations of motion give us L, = a", N,y. — M,z, = o. M, z= b", L,z, — N.x, = 0. N, = c"; M,x, — L,y, = o. The first equations express that the direction of the normal is vertical, the others that it passes through the centre of gravity. In general we may observe, that the equations of the motion of rotation are in fact the equations of the normal at the point of contact, and that the distance of the normal from the centre of gravity is at all times equal to so that \j{ U' -\-V^-\-W") represents the effect which the plane's reaction on the body has iji producing the motion of rotation. The line which passes through the centre of gravity and any one of the points B, of the surface on which it may be balan- ced is not in general a principal axis ; but as the preceding formulas are independent of the position of these axes, we are 362 ON THE MOTION OF permitted to take any of the lines 0,B, for the axis of z,. For the sake of greater brevity we may call the points B, the bal- lancing points and the lines 0,B, the natural verticals of the body. The phenomena of the motions of the body immediately about its state of equilibrium will manifestly depend upon the configuration of the surfaces or areolas as we may term them in the immediate vicinities of the tvvo points B and B. the former denoting any of the points of the sustaining surface with which B^ may be in contact when the body is at rest. From the established theory of contacts, it follows that every point, not singular, of any surface whatever may be brought into a contact of the second order with some curve surface of the second degree. Dupin, in particular, has shewn, in his" excellent supplement to the Analytical Geometry of Monge, that every plane section of any curve surface parallel to a tan- gent plane and infinitely near to it is a conic section, indicating all the characters of the curvature around the point touched by the tangent plane. It is easy to infer from this, that for all phenomena depending upon the curvature of the areolas at B and B^ these points may in all cases be regarded as the summits of paraboloids, elliptical, hyperbolical or intermediate. This proposition, which is fundamental, might be also proved thus. Let X, y, z denote the coordinates of either areola reckoning from B or B^ along the tangent plane and normal. The most general equation of the areola will then be z i= Ax" 4- l^xy -(- Ci/' , the condition of a tangent plane requiring that z should be of two dimensions in x and ?/, and the condition that the point is not a singular one excluding fractional and negative exponents. As the direction of the axes x and y in the tangent plane is arl)itrary, the term Bxy may be made to disappear, and the equation becomes simply z =^ A'x'^C'y\ SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 363 a paraboloid, elliptical, hyperbolical or intermediate, according as C is positive, negative or nought, the constants Ji and C representing the reciprocals of the greatest and least diameters of curvature. In a similar manner it might be shown that every areola whatever may be represented by the areola around the summit of some assignable hyperboloid ^vith an arbitrary vertical axis, — elliptical when the areola is concurvate, that is with the curvatures of all its normal sections directed the same way, — hyperbolical when discurvate, or with the curvatures of its normal sections directed some one way and some the opposite, — cylindrical when the curvature of the areola is in- termediate as in the case of developable surfaces. It follows therefore, from what precedes, that in the prob- lem of the small oscillations of supported bodies, the equations (31) obtained above for surfaces of the second degree, with the positions there proposed, will answer for all possible areo- las of contact, the arbitrary values of the axes a" and y, ena- bling us to avail ourselves completely of this simplification by placing the centre of the osculating figure in the centre of gravity of the body, at the same time that we may take any point at pleasure in the vertical through B for the origin of the invariable axes. The hypothesis that, during the motion of the body, its na- tural vertical declines but very little from the position which it would occupy if at rest, is equivalent to supposing that c and c' are at all times very small, and we shall regard them therefore in the following calculations as infinitesimals of the first order. The hypothesis that the two areolas of contact are indefinitely small is analytically expressed by considering x and x', x, and y, as quantities infinitely small. The preceding formulas will now enable us to ascertain what values the rest of the denoted quantities acquire in consequence of these two hypotheses, and the conditions of their legitimacy will appear in the equa- tions of condition which arise in the course of the solution of the problem. The fundamental relations (4) give us in the first place, neglecting all infinitesimals of higher orders than the first, c" — i, b = —a\ b' = a. The values of VOL. III. — 4 z 364 ON THE MOTION OF j9, q and r are best obtained by means of formulas (6). They furnish immediately (32) p = ra"-\-db", q = rb" — da". The same equations give da = hdR.^ db =z — adR, which, integrated in conjunction with a° + &° = i , give us a = cos R, h = — sin R, the angle R being counted from the axis of x. The nine cosines then become a =cos-ff, b = — sinJS, c = b"smR — a"cosJ2, a' = sinjR, b' = cosR, c' = — b"cosR — a"sinjff, a"=a"; b" := b" ; c" = i. From equations (8) and the equations of the surfaces we ob- tain x" = a", ^" = a" — y,, z, = y ; ^' = a" — y, . The analysis gives these constants the double sign, which I omit, as in case of application it will always be immediately obvious which will be affected with -+- and which with — . Thus if both areolas are concave upward, and the centre of gravity of the oscillating body is above the point of contact and below the centre of the figure which osculates with the areola of support, then the signs remain as above, the ellipsoid or elliptical paraboloid being in such a case the proper oscula- ting figure. If, as in the common pendulum, the point O, is below -S,, and the two areolas are still concave upward, the osculatrix of the areola at B, must be an hyperboloid or el- liptical paraboloid with the point O, taken in the prolongation of the axis, and the constant a" would change its sign. If the pendulum were hung upon a fixed annulus interlinking with another annulus at the upper extremity of the pendulum, both areolas would then become disciirvate and the osculating figures would be either single-napped hyperboloids or hyper- J^.> SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 365 bolic paraboloids. In cases of this kind, it may be well to observe at once, the analysis does not necessarily regard the motion roimd the normal as arrested by the impenetrability of the rings, but implies in general a mutual penetrability so as to admit but a single point of contact. The law of continuity, a law to which analysis, in all its processes, adheres with singular and sometimes indeed with inconvenient faithfulness, requires us to attribute to hoth sides of the supporting surface the power of feeling and sustaining in hoth directions^ the presence of the moving body. Thus, if we suppose a sphere in motion on the outside of another sphere, it would evidently come, at some determinate epoch, into a position where its pressure on the supporting surface would be nought. It would there leave the surface, and its motion afterwards would be a separate problem. An analy- tical solution of the question however w ould regard the mov- ing body as still connected with the surface of support, and exerting on it a pressure tending to draw it outw^ard from its centre. This pressure w^ould be such as would arise from a momentary but continually renewed connecting thread infin- itely short passing from sphere to sphere at the point of va- riable contact, or such as would take place if we supposed the surfaces of one of the spheres to consist of two concentric spherical surfaces infinitely near each other, and the momen- tary point of contact of the other sphere to be always engaged and confined between them. Again, let us suppose that a .circle rolls and slides inside down an ellipsis whose maximum curvature is greater and whose minimum is less than the curvature of the circle. If we suppose moreover the long axis vertical and the short axis longer than the diameter of the circle, the circle in descending wdll come first to a place where it will touch the ellipsis in two points and there phys- ically it would stop, but the analysis (on the hypothesis of one original point of contact) will consider the circle as geo- metrical except at this point of contact, and of course will represent the circle as passing onward unimpeded by this second contact. It will then reach a point in the ellipse where the 366 ON THE MOTION OF curvatures of the two curves are equal, and where on one side of the point of osculation the circle passes inside, and on the other outside of the ellipsis. Before the circle comes into this position the arc of contact is entirely within, after it leaves it entirely without, the ellipsis, and the connection must he maintained as in the preceding example. The same remarks will apply to the motion of an ellipsoid placed within a sphere of a curvature intermediate between the greatest and least curvature of the ellipsoid, to all contacts between dis- curvate surfaces, and in general to all cases in which the max- imum curvature of one of the surfaces is not less than the minimum curvature of the other. In order to determine the actual oscillatory motions of such bodies, we must institute as many equations of condition . similar to (22) as the moving body can have points of contact with the supporting surface. We must then determine when the pressure at any one of these points becomes equal to nought, after which the problem is to be considered as a new one, and the subsequent motion of the body must be traced by applying to it the equations resulting from one contact less than before, until the body either again comes into a fresh point of contact, or loses another of the contacts which it was supposed to have at first. In the course of the various positions into which the moving body would come, it M^ould frequently happen that two of the points would unite into one by an inosculation of the curves of contact, or one would become two, as when a sphere moves upon an oval annulus of smaller dimensions than the sphere from the concurvate to the discurvate portion of it. An inquiry into motions of this kind is however foreign to the purpose of this paper, and I return to the consideration of the problem when restricted to a single point of contact. • The selection of a paraboloid, in its three varieties of ellip- tical, hyperbolical and intermediate, to serve as the osculating figure of the areola at the balancing point of the body, is at- tended with the advantage that, beside suiting all possible cases of curvature, it is always applicable, whether the centre of SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 367 gravity be at the balancing point, above it, or helow it. This is evident from the equation of the curve, ^ + |^ + 2(r,_y,) = o, 'where it is manifest that y, may be taken arbitrarily, positive, negative or nought, without producing any other change than an elevation or depression of the origin, w^hile the different values and signs which we may ascribe to a, and ^, will furnish us with areolas of every variety of curvature. This advantage is however unimportant in the present inquiry, which is rather to ascertain the results of the general problem than to enter into a detailed examination of each particular case. Resuming therefore the expressions (30) before obtained for ellipsoids on ellipsoidal surfaces, and observing that the quantities h and k, in the case of small oscillations become constant and equal to the fixed and moveable vertical semi-axes, retaining at the same time the symbols e", x\ z,, ^", ^,, in order to permit ^^'ithout further substitutions the application of the usual formulas, the second triplet of equations (30) furnish, when the areola of support is spherical, whatever be the form of the areola around the balancing point of the oscillating body, k,^,x, = kJl (ax H- (t!x' -\- a"x") , kB,y, = M(bx-^b'x'-hb"x"), k,C,z, = k^lcx-\-c'x' -hc"x"). By means of equations (3) these become ay, Ax, = a;, -t-^, , X, = ll, <^y.B,y, =1 y,-\-yi,, or y, = >w>7, , ^r.Qz^ = z, -4-^, ; z, z=z nl . Substituting the values of a;,, y„ z, in equations (31) and em- ploying the following abridgments, VOL. III. 5 A 368 ON THE MOTION OF BMnl = :-^ = A, ; -^^rnknl = %^; = B, , omitting infinitesimals of the second order, and restoring At and M, we obtain (34) U —MQB^^Yi, = 0, V -^MeAli = 0, ^ =0. By an examination of the values of the first and second differ- entials of the indefinite integrals ^„ 57,, ^„ ^,, 57^, ^^ given by equations (10), it will readily be seen that, with the assistance of the relations (4), (6), (8), the following expressions will be verified (35) ill = dt — y!,dR-^ IdQ, dy;, = dyi, — ^,dP -+- ^dR, dl = di — ^,rfQ+ y,,dP', d% = d%—dy!M-hd^,dQ, d% = d'Y!, — d^,dP -\-d^,dE, d% = d%—d^4Q-^d^4P- equations analogous to those first obtained by Lagrange to de- note the motions of rotation of a system of particles which have at the same time individual motions of their own. In the case of small oscillations the third and sixth of these equa- SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 369 tions vanish altrgether, as all the terms are infinitesimals of the second order, and the other four become (36) dn, = dn,— I dP-hidH; d% = d^^.—driM, d^y;^ = d'y!,-]-d^,dB: where C becomes a constant, and equal to a — y. These equations are to be taken in connection with the equa- tions of motion, and, as will presently be seen, will, along with these equations, assume the form of eight linear equations in a", b", ^„ *7„ ^,,y;„ ^^, >?„ with constant coefficients, reducible to four, by means of which the motion of the body will be completely determined, and the elements of its position as- signed in finite and explicit functions of the time. It would be easy to show, as Lagrange has done in the case of a body revolving and oscillating about a fixed point, that the centrifugal force of a body revolving on a surface nearly hor- izontal will throw its vertical axis to a finite distance from the fixed vertical, unless wben either the rotation round the body's vertical is very small, in which case the distorsive moments of inertia F and G may be any whatever, or else when F and G are very small, and then the rotation round the vertical may be what we please. In both cases the form of the body and the distribution of its density may be such that the third distorsive moment of inertia H (which is brought into action only by the velocities p and q, and enters into the values of U, Fand JV, multiplied by these velocities only, or by their rates of increase) may be indefinitely great without affecting the truth of the solution. Supposing then in the first place that r is very small, the values oij) and q already found become p = db', 9 = — da", and the four equations last given (omitting hereafter the in- ferior accents of ^, and y„ as no longer wanted) are reduced to (37) 370 ON THE MOTION OP d Yj, z=i dvi, — IdP', d% = d%, rf>, = rf°»?, : whence we obtain By means of these expressions and the equation 6 = g, the two first equations of motion (34) become d^r), ^ Ah" e III At the same time the equation fV = o (15) becomes Cd'R-hF(Va"—Gcn" = o. Substituting, in the expressions for U and F(15), db" (or p, — da" for q, and for dr its value derived from the preceding equation, we shall find (AC-G')'^-^{CH^GF)^-CMgB„y!, = o, (BC-F')'^-^{CH-^GF)^^-CMgAj, = o; which, together with the two equations above involving the same four variables, constitute four linear equations of the second order, with constant coefficients. It is well known that such equations are in all possible cases integrable in finite terms by the method of D'Alembert or other analogous pro- SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 371 cesses. (Lacroix, Cal. Int. Vol. II. p. 37.) In the course of this computation, into which the limits of the present com- munication will not allow me to enter, equations of limitation will arise showing the conditions of the oscillatory motions of the body. These equations will in general be expressed in the form of relations between the constants which determine the form and magnitude of the areolas of contact, the magni- tude and density of the body and the position of its centre of gravity. Among the oscillatory motions possible, there is one of a peculiar nature which I do not recollect ever having seen remarked, — I mean when the motion is around a state of equi- librium, stable from the form of the moving body but unstable from the form of the supporting surface, or the contrary ; as for example, when an ellipsoid is balanced on the outer surface of a sphere, the summit of the shortest axis of the ellipsoid being in contact with the highest point on the surface of the sphere. Into such a position we may conceive the ellipsoid to have descended from some assignable initial place of rest, or some combination of position and velocity. A motion would ensue which in a variety of cases would be oscillatory. The oscillations would however be liable to be broken by the application of the slightest force, and would be followed by the entire departure of the body from the place it occupied. These motions may be called unstable oscillations. They bear the same relation to stable oscillations that unstable does to stable equilibrium. With respect to the four linear equations above obtained, I shall only add that in the present case they may be imme- diately reduced by eliminating ^, and >7, to two equations of the fourth order of the form '^IF-f-^-dF + C'-j^ + Z^^-l-iJ-^H-Ga" = o, VOL. iir. — 5 B 372 ON THE MOTION OF The eight arbitrary constants introduced by the integration of these equations are to be determined from the known val- ues which the variables a", b", ^^, »7^ and their velocities are supposed to have at some given epoch of time. These eight arbitraries are not the only ones of which the body is suscep- tible. There will be ten in all, two being introduced by the equation W=: o, whose integral is CR-+-Fa"—Gb" = et-he', the constants e and e' being functions of the values which a", b", JS, and their velocities have at any given epoch. Let us now suppose that the distorsive moments of inertia F and G are very small, in which case the rotation round the normal may be increased to any assignable rapidity without disturbing by that circumstance alone the smallness of the oscillatory excursions. The equation JV =z o wall now be found reduced to Cdr = o, whence r = a constant quantity, and R = rt-\- R', B! being the angular distance of the first body-axis from the first space-axis when / = o. Equations (35) become at the same time ill =■■ dl—r^,-i-^(rb" — da"), dn, = dyi,-{-it — ^lra"-]-db"); d'^^ =: d^l — rdn: , d^yj^ = 7, + rdl , four linear equations which, in conjunction with the four equations of motion transformed by the substitution of the present values of p, q and r, will make up eight equations of the first degree (six being of the second and two of the first order) with constant coefficients. The equations may be completely integrated either by D'Alembert's method, by which we should be brought to twelve equations of the first order ; or by eliminating the indefinite integrals ^., >?,, ^^, »7^, and then proceeding by the method of exponential substitu- SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 373 tions. D'Alembert's method of integrating simultaneous lin- ear equations is regarded by some of the first mathematicians of Europe as the best, and I have therefore introduced the equations (35) ; but if the direct substitution of exponential functions of the time be preferred (a method which has often the advantage of greater expedition), it would not be necess- ary to form these equations, as the values of iP^^, cfr;.^, d% are derivable from their equations of definition (10) in terms of the rotatory velocities and the coordinates, parallel to the body-axes, of the centre of gravity. For if we multiply by a, a', a", the values of the second differentials of ^, ^', £", the sum of the three products will be equal to cV^^ by the defini- tion of this quantity, which is in fact the velocity which the point O, gains in every interval d^ estimated in the direction which the body's first axis has at the beginning of that inter- val. It is because this acceleration is measured not on the variable axis itself, but on the direction which that axis had at the beginning of df. that the sum of the elements d'^^ will not make up the velocity d^„ nor the sum of the elements d^, the finite rate of increase of ^,. In consequence of these dis- tinctions, many difficulties might arise in considering geome- trically problems of the nature of the one before us ; but they are always either avoided or explained by the adoption of analytical methods of solution, and I feel assured that the ex- perience of those who are conversant with these methods will bear me out in saying that the necessity of even adverting to the difficulties of geometrical mechanics disappears precisely in proportion to the purity and generality of the analysis. While on this subject however I ought to remark that in consequence of this incompleteness of the values of d^„ dr;,, d^„ and in the case of perfect rolling of d^, d^', d^", the applica- tion of Lagrange's Subsidiary Formula (Mec. Jinal. Vol. I. p. 313) is inadmissible in such cases, and would lead to false results even if the velocities d^, d^'. d^ " be expressed in func- tions of the finite angles 4', ?>, ^ and their velocities. In short his method is applicable only when the differential equations connecting the variables fulfil the conditions of integrability. 374 ON THE MOTION OF The values of the resolved partial accelerations of the centre of gravity found as above directed are C (aa)tV^, -+- 2 (ada)di -\- (ad'a)i rf°^. = } {ab)d\ H- 2 {adb)dri, -\- (ad'b)y!, ( lac)d% -+- 2 ladc)d^, -+- lad'c)^ , ( (ba)d% -+- 2 (bda)dl -+- (bd'a)^, d'n, = < {bb)d\ + 2 \bdb)dr„ + {bd'by,. ( {bc)d% 4- 2 {bdc)di -+- {bd\-yi , ( {ca)d'i + 2 (cda)dl + (cd'a)i dX. = < (cb)d\ 4- 2 {cdb)dvi, + (cd'b)>;, ( lcc)dt -t- 2 (crfc)rf^, + (crf^cX, , where the parentheses denote a sum of three quantities of which the first is included between the parentheses and the other two are similar and accented once and twice. These abridgments, combined with analogous ones for the sum of three quantities differing by a change of letters, might be used with great advantage in general inquiries into the phenomena of the progressive and rotatory motions of solid or fluid bodies ; and I should have employed them throughout this paper, had I not been principally desirous of being clearly understood. In case several terms were to be included in the parentheses, an accent or inferior index might be annexed to the second parenthesis for the sake of obviating any ambiguity. Substituting for the quantities in parentheses their values, all of which are given (6) and (7), w-e shall find , = d\ — 2{pdt,, — rdi)~Yi,{r'-\-lf)-\-t{qr—dp)-\rl[j>q-Jrdr), dX, = dX — 2 (qdi —pdri, ) — ^ (p'~{- q') -+- 1 (rp — dq) ^y;,{qr -\-dp). In the case of small oscillations, r at the same time being small, these become, as before SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 375 If r is not small, it is constant, as we have seen, and we have d'ri^ = d\ -\- 2rd^, — r\ -+- C,{rq — dp) . Substituting for p and q their values (32) and employing the abridgments f, — ^a" = u, >?, — ^b" = v, we shall find d"^^ = d'u — 2,rdv — r^u, d\^ = d'v-^-Qrdu — r'v. By means of these values, and the values of ^, and y;, obtained from the abridgments last employed, the two equations of pro- gressive motion are converted into linear equations of the second order involving a", b", u, v and /. At the same time the two equations of rotatory motion are transformed, by the substitution of the values of p and q, into two other linear equations of the same order involving the same variables. In this way we shall obtain IF -2^ dT H-^'M + rg-a" = o, (M) S^' + (M) ^^ -h (^3) 1^' + (^4)a" + (^5) &" -f- (^6) v-hF»'' = o. (J5l)'^H-(52)^' + (53)f' -h(54)6"+(55)a"H-(56)M-t-G^- = o; four linear equations vdth constant coefiicients whose values are VOL. III. — 5 c 376 ON THE MOTION OF (^1)= H, {B\)= H, {M) = A, (B2) = B, (M) = (A-^B — C)r, (BS) = —{J1^B—C)r, (.44) = Hr\ (J34) = Hr\ {M)= (C—B)r' — m'^, (^5)= (^C—Ay—l'^, (M) = — m' = —MgB,, : (Be) = — r= —MgA,^. These equations may, by the elimination of u and y, be redu- ced to two of the fourth order, of eleven terms each, no term being wanting. They may be then completely integrated, and after the determination of the value of the ten arbitrary constants, eight of which are introduced by these equations and two others by the equation W = o, the position of the body and all the phenomena of the motion will be expressed in terms of the sines and cosines of arcs proportional to the time. The conditions of oscillatory motion will also be ex- pressed by equations of limitation arising during the process of determining the integrals. I shall conclude this paper with an application of the pre- ceding formulas to the determination of the small oscillatory motions of bodies of any figure, law of density, and areola of contact, rolling with the three rotations on a surface which from some slight asperity or other cause prevents entirely and in all directions the sliding motion of the body, while in other respects it leaves it free to rock, pitch and spin, with any combination of these motions consistent with a small decli- nation of the natural vertical of the body from the ver- tical of equilibrium. I ought to remark that this motion, although more resembling the actual oscillations of supported bodies, differs from them materially in the circumstance that the friction is supposed not to interfere with the motion round the normal, whereas this cause undoubtedly cooperates with the resisting medium to retard the horizontal rotation of the SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 377 body until it ceases altogether. What I am about to oflfer therefore must be considered, like every advance which has hitherto been made, as merely a step towards the determina- tion of the actual phenomena. It would not be difficult to include in the next place the moments of the forces which resist the rotation round the normal, but this must form the subject of another dissertation. The fundamental equations of condition resulting from the definition of the species of motion we are now considering are, as we have seen (25) o = d^, — tjM+z,^Q, 0 = a^__a-aQ + y,aP. Substituting these values of the variations of the position of O, the centre of gravity in the general dynamical equation, there will result an equation of the form (P)dP-h(Q)dQ-^(R)dR = o; in which the variations are now arbitrary, giving us therefore three equations of motion to be taken in conjunction with the three above, namely, (P) = o, (Q) = 0, (P) = o: or, writing out these equations at full length, in the case of common gravity, U ^M^'^^ -gb")z,-M(^' -gc")y, =0, V+M(;^~-gc")x,-M(;'^-ga")z, = 0, W-^M{'^'-ga")y,-M('^^-gb")x, = o; expressions which are true whether friction be considered or not, and independently of all hypotheses of friction. 378 ON THE MOTION OF If the body remains always nearly upright, these become U-^Mr{^-gh")^gy, = o, V-My(^^-ga")-gx, = o, W = o. These equations furnish the same relations between F, G and r as those obtained before. Either the rotation round the natural vertical, or else those moments of inertia which would (when made effective by a swift rotation) displace that ver- tical, must be very small. If r is very small, the equations of condition of perfect rolling are reduced to d^, = — yqAt, Ay;, = ypAt . Substituting these values in equations (37), and recollecting that ^ + y = a", we shall find d£ = —a'qAt, dv;, = a"pit. But when r is small we have d% = d%-i.^dqdt, d>, = d\—^dpdt. Therefore d"^, = — ydqdt, d>, = ydpdt; equations which are verified by the equation formerly obtain- ed (37) when r is small, d'^^ = d°^„ rf^^ = d\. Finally, these last equations become, in consequence of the values which p and q acquire when r is small, d^^, = yd'a", dV = yA'b"-, SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 379 by which means the equations of motion are reduced to equa- tions with constant coefficients, namely, V—My'^^-hMgyb" — 3Igx, = 0. Where the oscillations take place upon a spherical areola of support, which will include oscillations on a horizontal plane, we have x, = l^„ y, = m/;,, and therefore, by preceding for- mulas, da;, = laia", dy, = niaAb" ■ Integrating, and denoting by x and 4^ the arbitrary constants, there results X, = laa'-hXi y- = rnab"-{-^; which being substituted in the above equations of motion give two equations of the second order in a", h" and / of the form (^1) 5^' + (^2) ^" H- {m)a" + (^4) = 0, {Bl) ^' -t- (52) ^ + {BS)h" H- (54) = o, where the coefficients maybe readily determined, as ?7and V have now the same value as before when there was no friction and when the rotation round the normal was at the same time small. These coefficients being constant, the equations may be completely integrated in finite terms, four arbitrary constants being introduced by the integration, which together with X and -v^ introduced by the last integrals obtained, and e and e' arising as we have already seen from the integration VOL. III. 5 D 380 ON THE MOTION OF of W = 0, make up eight in all, being two less than when the body was not restricted to the peculiar motion to which we now suppose it to be subject. Lastly, let F and G be very small. The equation W = o will now give us, as if there were no friction, r = any arbi- trary constant, and R = rt-\- R. At the same time we have p = ra" -h dh", d^, = di — ry;, -+- ^q , d''^^ = d'^, — rdvi, , q z= rb" — da", dri, = dvi, + r^, — \p , d\^ = d\, -\- rd^, , and, by the equations of perfect rolling, d^, = ry,—yq, dyi, = — rx,-\-yp', whence d% = r^x,-+-rdy,-{-y(d''a"-\-2rdb" — rW), d't^^ = r'y, — rdx, -+- y(d^b" — 2rda" — r'b") . By comparing the two values above given for each of the quantities d^, and dy;„ we obtain, after replacing (^ + y by a, r(x, -hi) = op — (f)7, , ^(y/H->7/) = aq-{-di. When the supporting areola is spherical, these become r2.x, = am (ra" -+■ db") — dy, , . rfiy, = al (rb" — da")-\-dx,, where ?l and fi are abridgments for /-h- and m-f-y. By means of the preceding values of d"^, and d'y;, it will be seen that the first and second equations of motion are transformed into equations of the second order involving a", b", X,, y and t with constant coefficients. These, in con- SOLIDS ON SURFACES. 381 junction with the two last equations which are of the first order involving the same variables, will enable us to determine fully and by finite integrations all the circumstances of the oscillatory motion. The arbitrary constants will be eight in number, six of them being brought in by the four equations just referred to, and two of them, R and r, arising from the third equation of motion W=: o. These four equations will be found to be A'^ + ^3 ?' + -^3 ? + ^. '^' + ^,a" + ^.6" + ^.y,+^„ = o, the value of their coefficients being as follows, A = (^1), B. = (Bl), A = (^2)-H My", B. = (B2)-\- My' , A = (^3)- 2Myy, B. = (JB3)H-2MyV, A = — Myr, B. = Myr, A = (^4), B, = (B4), A = {A5)- Mfr^ -Mgy, B. = (B5)— My'r^ — Mgy, A = Myr' 4-M^ , B. = Myr'-^Mg , A = tV^; B. = Gr'; c. = al , O. = am , c. = - 1 , D. = - 1 , c. = — air, D. = amr, 0. = r(i ; D.= — rx . 382 ON THE MOTION OF SOLHIS ON SURFACES. The principles and formulas detailed in this memoir will also enable us to determine completely all the circumstances of the motion of any solid of rej^^olution rolling or spinning -wdth or without friction upon a horizontal plane, its axis being supposed to form at all times a very small but variable angle with the plane. The length to which this paper has extended itself obliges me, however, to defer for the present the further consideration of this subject. I shall confine myself therefore to the remark, that in some of these cases, and in a variety of others, the equations given at the foot of page 377 may be presented with advantage in the following form : — >\{a"P' + b"Q'+c"R') _ , .dT /™/_e/^dl Mdt — v-^ ^ J df- v-^ ''J de ' ERRATA. Page 342, line 19, /or " (6) and (10)" read " (6), (7) and (10)". .. 352, .. ib, for "a5Q" read "aSR". \e, for "(3SQ" read '"fSSP". .. 354, .. 6 to 11. These formulas should be numbered ^^ {21)' No. X. General Observations on the Birds of the Genus Tetrao ; ivith a Synopsis of the Species hitherto knoum. By Charles Lucien Bonaparte, Prince of Musignano, &(c. Read June 20th, 1828. THE genus Tetrao, in the extent given to it by Linne, was so comprehensive, that he might with almost equal propriety have included in it all typical gallinaceous birds; It comprised species, differing not merely in their external characters, but even in their peculiar habits claiming only a remote affinity. Latham very judiciously separated from it the genera Tinamus and Perdix, which latter he restored from Brissou. Illiger also contributed to our more accurate know- ledge of these birds, by defining two other natural genera, Syrrhaptes and Ortygis. Temminck, in his Histoire des Gallinaces, carried the number of genera to seven, but after- wards reunited Coturnix to Perdix. The real Tetraones are divided by Vieillot into two genera, the Lagopodes forming one by themselves. In our arrangement of these birds, we distinguish three sub- genera. I. Lagopus, which represents the genus in the Arctic polar regions, whose chilly climates they are admirably adapted to withstand, being thickly clad with close set feathers, abundantly intermixed with down, and covering them to the very nails. Their pure white winter plumage is VOL. III. — 5 E 384 ON THE BIRDS an additional protection, by confounding them with the snowy covering of the earth, which prevents their being ea- sily descried by rapacious birds or quadrupeds. II, Tetrao, whose geographical range is limited to the more temperate climates, being still protected by feathers as far down as the toes. III. Bonasia, a new division for which we propose Tetrao JBonasia, L. as the type. In these, the upper portion only of the tarsus is feathered. They occasionally descend to still more southern countries, frequenting wooded plains, as well as mountainous districts, to which latter the true Grouse give the preference. The entire genus is however, properly, bo- real, and is found exclusively in North America, Europe, and Northern Asia. The long and sharp winged Grouse, which replace them in the arid wastes of Africa and Asia, one being met with also in the southern extremity of Europe, we con- sider, in common with all modern authors, as a totally distinct genus. This small group, composed of a limited number of species, inhabits wild regions, remote from man and cultiva- tion, preferring burning deserts to the shelter of the woods. Wandering near the confines of these oceans of sand, so terrific to the eye and the imagination of the human traveller, they boldly undertake to cross them in numerous bands, in search of the fluid so indispensable to lif^, there found only in few and distant spots. Over the intervening space they pass at a great elevation, and with extreme rapidity, being the only birds of their order that are furnished with wings of the form required for such flights. > The Grouse, on the contrary, inhabit forests, especially such as are dense, and situated in mountainous districts ; the Bona- siae however, as well as the American Pinnated Grous and Cock of the Plains, frequenting level countries, where grow shrubby trees of various kinds. The Arctic Lagopodes are also found on the lofty mountains of Central Europe, where the great elevation affords a temperature corresponding to that of more northern latitudes. There they always keep among OF THE GENUS TETRAO. >■ 385 bushes, on the dwarf willows, which, with pines, form the principal vegetation of those summits. The Grouse feed almost exclusively on leaves, buds, ber- ries, and particularly the tender shoots of pines, birch, and other trees, resorting to grains only when compelled by scar- city of their favourite food during severe winters and deep snows : they will, however, pick up a few worms or insects, and, especially when young, are fond of ants' eggs. Like other gallinaceous birds, they are frequently employed in scratching the earth, are fond of covering themselves vvith dust, and swallow gravel and small pebbles to assist digestion. No birds are more decidedly and t3Tannically polygamous. As soon as the females are fecundated, the males separate from them, to lead a solitary life, without showing any further concern for them or their offspring; though, like perfidious seducers, they are full of attentions, and display the greatest solicitude to secure the possession of those they are soon after so ready to abandon. The nuptial season commences with the first appearance of leaves in the spring. The desire of pro- creation manifests itself by extraordinary sounds and gestures. Their voice becomes sonorous, the males appear quite intoxi- cated with passion, and are seen, either on the ground, or on the fallen trunks of trees, with a proud deportment, an in- flamed and fiery eye, the feathers of the head erected, the wings dropped stiffly, the tail widely spread, parading and strutting about in all sorts of extravagant attitudes, and utter- ing sounds so loud as to be heard at a great distance. This season of ardour and abandonment is protracted till June. The deserted female lays, far apart on the bare ground, in some thick and low coppice, from eight to sixteen eggs, breeding but once a year. They hatch and rear their young precisely as the common fowl, the chicks being carefully pro- tected by the mother only, with whom they remain all the autumn and winter, separating in spring on the return of the breeding season. It is at this period only that the males go in search of the females, and show a fondness for their com- pany. 386 ON THE BIRDS The Grouse are shy and untameable, avoiding the settle- ments of man, and retiring to wild and barren tracts, where they associate in packs or families. The Lagopodes only live in very numerous flocks, composed of several broods, which do not disperse until they separate in pairs at the return of the breeding season. Except in spring, the Grouse keep always on the ground, perching on trees only to pass the night, or when disturbed ; by day retiring to the deepest recesses of the forest. The flesh of all is exquisite food, though dark coloured in some and white in others. The black meat is compact, juicy, and highly flavoured ; while the white has in its favour, delicacy and lightness. The Grouse are distinguished by a short stout bill, feather- ed at base ; they are of all gallinaceous birds those in which the upper mandible is the most vaulted ; the feathers of the bill are very thick and close, and cover the nostrils entirely. The tongue is short, fleshy, acuminate, and acute ; and the eye surmounted by a conspicuous red and warty naked skin. Their legs are without spurs in either sex, and partly or wholly covered with slender hair-like feathers, which in the Lagopodes are thicker and longer than in the others, extend- ing not only beyond the toes, but even covering the sole of the foot, a peculiarity which, agreeably to the observation of Buffbn, is of all animals again met with only in the hare; and as if nature wished to carry her liberality to them still fur- ther, this covering becomes longer and closer in winter. The toes of the other species are rough beneath, and furnished with a row of processes or pectinations each side. The roughness of the sole appears requisite to enable the bird to tread securely on slippery ground and frozen snow ; as well as to enable them to grasp the branches of trees covered with ice or sleet. In the Lagopodes, the nails are peculiarly adapted for removing the snow from over the vegetables on which they feed, and are for this purpose not only useful but indispensable instruments. All the genus have short rounded wings ; the first primary is shorter than the sixth, the second being but little shorter than the third and fourth, which are OF THE GENUS TETRAO. > ' 387 longest. The tail is usually composed of eighteen feathers, generally hroad and rounded. The Red Grouse, however, T. scoticus, as well as the T. honasia, and the T. canadensis, have but sixteen, while the two new North American species have twenty : one of the latter, moreover, has these feathers very narrow and pointed, a character which is also found in the sharp tailed Grouse. They have the head small; the neck short, and the body massive and very fleshy. ■ The females of the larger species differ greatly from the males in colour, the latter being glossy black, or blackish, whilst the former are mottled with gray, blackish, or ru- fous: such are all the typical Tetraones of Europe, and the cock of the plains, the dusky, and the spotted Grouse of America, the latter being of smaller size. The smaller, mot- tled species, such as T. phasianellus and T. cupido, exhibit little or no difference in the plumage of the two sexes, which is also the case in the Bonasise. and Lagopodes. The young in their first feathers are like the female in all the species, and moult twice before they obtain their full plumage. All have a double moult, and most of the Lagopodes vary in a remarkable degree with the seasons. The genus Tetrao comprises thirteen species, of which we consider eight as typical, two we arrange under Bonasia. and three under Lagopus*. The species of Lagopus, as might be expected from their high northern habitation, are common to both continents, with the exception of the Red Grouse, which is peculiar to the British Isles ; and which, from the circumstance of its not changing its colour with the season, forms the passage to the true Tetraones. Of these, five inha- bit North America, and three Europe, none being common to both. Of the two Bonasise, one is peculiar to the Old, and the other to the New continent. Thus we find, that of the entire genus, eight are distributed to America, and seven to * Even the modern Tetrao rupestris we do not consider well established : as for that of former authors, it is undoubtedly T. lagopus. We are equally scepti- cal with regard to T. islandicus and T. montanus of Brehm. VOL. III. 5 F 388 ON THE BIRDS Europe. Leaving aside the two that are common to both, and the respective Bonasise, we may draw the following pa- rallel between the remaining species of the two worlds. The cock of the woods, or capercailzie of Europe, ( T. urogallus) corresponds to the American cock of the plains, {T. uropha- sianus). The black game, (T. tetrix) finds its equivalent in the dusky Grouse, ( T. obscurus). The T. hyhridus or me- dius, has no analogue in America ; neither has T. scoticus. They are however more than replaced as to number by T. phasianellus, T. cupido, and T. canadensis, all American spe- cies, that have none corresponding to them in the Old world. Being perhaps the only naturalist who has seen all the known species of Grouse of both continents, having enjoyed the advantage of examining many specimens even of the rar- est, and possessing them all but one in my own collection, I I am peculiarly well situated for giving a monography of this interesting genus. Such a work it is my intention to publish at some future period, illustrated with plates, and accompanied by further details of their habits. They are all found in Eu- rope and North America, some of the European occurring also in Asia, from whose elevated central and northern regions, as yet unexplored, may be expected new species that still remain to be discovered. The extensive wilds of North Ame- rica may also furnish others ; but we do not think it probable ; for since we have become acquainted with both sexes of T. oh- scurus, and T. urophasianus, we are not aware of any indica- ted in the accounts of travellers that cannot be satisfactorily referred to known species. OF THE GENUS TETRAO. 3S9 TETRAO. I. BONASIA. Tetrao, Vieill. Coqs de bruyeres, Cuv. Bonasa, Stephens. Lower portion of the tarsus, and toes, naked. Not varying much with the seasons. Crested and ruffed ; tail elongated and rounded ; female similar to the male ; flesh light coloured. Dwell in dense forests composed of different kinds of trees. 1. Tetrao bonasia, L. Mottled ; tail composed of sixteen mottled feathers, the la- teral gray, with a broad black subterminal band. Male ; sides of the neck with a ruff of small feathers ^ uni- form with the rest ; throat black. Female and young ; ruff smaller, throat white. Ifazel Grouse, Lath. La Gelinotte, Buff, pi. enl. 474, male; 475, female. Inhabits wooded mountains in the central parts of the old continent : rather common in several districts of eastern Ger- many. 2. Tetrao umbellus, L. Mottled; tail of eighteen mottled feathers, all ferruginous, and with a black subterminal band. Male ; a ruff of large black feathers on the sides of the neck ; throat white. Female and young ; ruff smaller, dark brown. Ruffed Grouse, Wils. Am. Orn. vi. pi. 49, male. Inhabits North America; common, especially in moun- tainous pine districts. 390 ON THE BIRDS II. Tetrao. Tetrao, Vieill. Coqs de bruyeres, Cuv. Tetrao, Bonasa, Stephens. Tarsus wholly feathered, toes naked. Not varying much with the seasons. Found in temperate climates, even at a com- paratively low latitude, and in level as well as mountainous countries. Flesh dark coloured. 3. Tetrao urogallus, L. Bearded; tail much rounded, of eighteen broad rounded feathers ; bill white. Male ; glossy black, breast with greenish reflections. Female and young ; mottled. Wood Crrouse, Lath. Penn. Brit. Zool. pi. M. male ; pi. N. female. Inhabits mountainous forests of Northern Asia and Eastern Europe ; less abundantly in central and south-eastern Europe. 4. Tetrao urophasianus, Nob. Tail cuneiform, of twenty narrow, tapering, acute feathers. Male ; black ? Female and young ; mottled. Cock of the Plains, Tetrao urophasianus. Nobis, Am. Orn. iii. pi. 21, fig. 2. Inhabits the extensive plains between the Missouri and the Rocky Mountains. Size of the preceding, and the largest of North American Grouse. 5. Tetrao hybridtis, Sparrm. Slightly bearded ; tail hardly forked, of eighteen feathers ; bill black ; tarsus two inches long. Male ; glossy black, breast with purple reflections. OF THE GENUS TETRAO. 391 Female ; mottled. Tetrao hybridus, Sparm. Mus. Carls. 1. pi. 15. ad. male. Tetrao medius, Meyer, Temm. Inhabits the high north of the old continent : most com- mon in Russia and Lapland, hut nowhere abundant ; rare and accidental in central Europe. 6. Tetrao tetrix, L. No beardlike appendages ; tail deeply forked, of eighteen feathers, the exterior turned outwards; under tail-coverts white : tarsus one inch and a half long. Male ; glossy black, with Aaolaceous reflections. Female ; mottled. Black Grouse, Lath. Buff. pi. enl. 172, male; 173, female. Inhabits Northern Asia, and Northern as well as Centi'al Europe. 7. Tetrao obscurus, Say. Tail slightly rounded, of twenty broad, rounded, blackish feathers. Male ; black. Female and young ; dusky brown, somewhat mottled. Dusky Grouse, Tetrao obscurus, Nob. Am. Orn. iii. pi. 1 8, female. T. Richardsonii, Sabine. Inhabits near the Rocky Mountains. Size of T. tetrix. 8. Tetrao canadensis, L. Tail rounded, of sixteen black, rounded feathers ; breast, flanks, and tail-coverts spotted with white. Male ; black, waved with gray ; throat and breast deep black. Female ; mottled ; throat and breast banded with black and rufous. Spotted Grouse, Tetrao canadensis, Nob. Am. Orn. iii. pi 22, male; pi. 21, fig. 1, female. VOL. III. 5 G 392 ON THE BIRDS Inhabits the north of America, extending from the Rocky Mountains to the state of Maine. 9. Tetrao phasianellus, L. Mottled ; tail short, cuneiform, of eighteen narrow square feathers, the two middle ones much elongated, the outer white at the point. Male and female ; similar. Winter plumage much darker and more glossy. Sharp tailed Grouse, Tetrao phasianellus, Noh. Am. Orn. iii. pi. 19. Inhabits Arctic America, as well as the high ranges of the Rocky Mountains. 10. Tetrao cupido, L. Mottled ; tail rather short, much rounded, of eighteen plain dusky feathers; primaries spotted with white on their outer webs. Male ; furnished with wing-like appendages on the neck, covering two loose, orange-coloured skinny bags. Female and young ; destitute of the cervical appendages and skinny bags. Pinnated Grouse, Wils. Am. Orn. iii. pi. 27, fig. 1, male. Inhabits certain districts both of the eastern and western United States : common on the Missouri, and even on the • Oregan. III. Lagopus. Lagopus, Vieill. Stephens. Lagopedes, Cuv. Tarsus and toes, and even the sole of the foot entirely co- vered with feathers. Head without a crest. Tail rounded. Most of the species varying greatly with the season, becoming white in winter. Female differing but little from the male. OF THE GENUS TETRAO. 393 Confined to Arctic countries, or the regions of perpetual snow. Dwell in forests chiefly composed of pines: never alight on trees ; fond of rocks. Collect in large flocks. Mono- gamous, pairing in spring. 1 1 . Teirao scoticus, L. Reddish chesnut ; feathers of the feet gray ; tail of sixteen feathers, the lateral blackish, tipped with reddish ; primaries sooty black ; eyebrows papillous, elevated, denticulated. Female ; duller, more mottled. Winter and summer plumage alike. Bed Grouse, Lath. Lagopus scoticus, Vieill. Gal. Ois. pi. 221. Inhabits the British Islands : common in Scotland. ^ 12. Tetrao lagopus, L. Feathers of the feet snow-white ; tail of eighteen feathers, the lateral black ; bill moderate, compressed at the point ; nails black, subulate, arcuated. Winter plumage, snow-white ; summer, reddish-gray mot- tled with black. Male ; a black band through the eye, which the female is without. Ptarmigan, or Mock Grouse, Lath. Le Lagopede, Buf- fon, pi. enl. 129, female in winter; pi. 494, female acquiring summer dress. Inhabit the Arctic regions of both continents, as well as the lofty mountains of the old, whence in winter they descend to moderate elevations : common at Hudson's Bay, in Russia, Switzerland, &c. '^■^^'' 13. Tetrao alhus, L. Feathers of the feet white ; tail of eighteen feathers, the lateral black ; bill short, stout, depressed at the point, blunt ; nails white, long, hardly curved. 394 ON THE BIRDS OF THE GENUS TETRAD. Winter plumage snowy white, no black band through the eye : summer, reddish chesnut, mottled with black ; throat vuispotted. Female hardly differing from the male in summer, and perfectly similar in winter. TFhite, and Rehusac Grouse, Lath. Tetrao saliceti, Temm. Frisch, pi. 110 & 111. f^f^hite Partridge, Edw. Glean, pi. 72, male moulting. Inhabits the Arctic regions of both continents, to the very pole ; scarcely ever seen even on the highest mountains of Central Europe; common in Lapland, Iceland, Greenland, and Kamschatka : found also at Hudson's Bay, and on the northern side of Lake Superior. / No. XL Conchological Observations on Lamarck\s Family of Naiades. By Philip Houlbrooke Nicklin. Bead 6 March, 1829. ^T^HE genus Vhio, and its congeners, have become objects -■- of great interest to naturalists in all parts of the world. American conch ologists seem to have had their attention par- ticularly drawn to these objects by the immense number and almost infinite varieties of them that are nourished by the great rivers of the West and their tributaries. Many beauti- ful species of Unio and Anadonta have been added to La- marck's family of Naiades, by the useful labours of Messrs Say, Barnes, Green, and Isaac Lea ; and the former of these naturalists has thought it necessary to add a new genus, called Alasmodonta* , to the same family. Doubts have been expressed by several distinguished con- chologists, whether the family of Naiades contains more than one genus, or at most two. The new genus Alasmodonta of Mr Say seems to form a link of close connection between Anodonta and Unio ; and the three genera exhibit such va- rious forms of hinge, that, in many instances, it is difficult to determine to which genus the individual should be referred. Mr Isaac Lea has upwards of forty varieties of Unio cornutus; which, if arranged in a particular order, exhibit so gradual a ' From It priv., txarfxa. lamina, and itei; dens; meaning without the lamellar tooth. VOL. III. 5 H 396 ON lamarck's family change, as to convince the observer of their identity of spe- cies ; but if any two, near the opposite extremes of arrange- ment, be compared, they would be considered as specifically different. De Blainville, a celebrated conchological anatomist, in the second edition of his " Manuel de Malacologie et de Conchili- ologie," p. 539, says, that the animal of the Unio is precisely like that of the Anodonta : his words are, " Animal entiere- ment semblahle (i celui des anodontes." It has not been disco- vered that the animal of the Jllasmodonta differs in any respect from those of the Unio and Anodonta. Under the genus Unio.) De Blainville cites Hyria corrugata of Lamarck, as the example of his variety A of Unio : his words are — A. Especes obliques, dont le corselet est dilate et releve en crete saillante, ce qui les rend comme auriculees ou aviculaires. He also cites Castalia ambigua* of Lamarck as the example of his variety C of Unio. It is therefore evi- dent that De Blainville believes the animals of Unio, Hyria, and Castalia, to be identical. In the same manner, under the genus Anodonta, he cites Iridina exotica of Lamarck as the example of variety A ; and Dipsas of Leach as the example of variety E of Ano- donta. Thus it appears that De Blainville considers Unio, Hyria, and Castalia to be varieties of one genus, namely Unio ; and Jinodonta, Iridina, and Dipsas to be varieties of one genus, namely Anodonta : and since he expressly declares the animals of Unio and Jinodonta to be identical, may we not safely include the whole six under one genus ? We may also add Mr Say's genus Alasmodontaf, as no- thing has been discovered in the animal to distinguish it from that of Unio ; and as the structure of its hinge proves it to be the connecting link between Uiio and Jinodonta. If the above mentioned seven genei'a are to be considered as permanent, there are strong reasons why another should be added to them, conformably to a suggestion contained in * Possibly, Unio triangularis of Barnes. t Is not Alasinodonia arcuata of Say identical with Unio sinuata of Lamarck ? OF NAIADES. 397 an observation appended by Lamarck to the description of his Unio alata (the Unio alatus of Say) : it is as follows ; "Ici, comme ailleurs dans ce genre, le ligament est en dehors de la charniere ; neanmoins, comme les valves sont connees au bord inferieur de I'aile du corselet, M. Le Sueur, qui a observe cette reunion, pense qu'on doit former un gem'e par- ti culier avec cette coquille." The following observations, appended by De Blainville to his genus Unio, are well worthy of attention : "Les especes de ce genre deviennent tous les jours plus nombreuses : en effet on en trouve dans tous les pays, mais surtout dans I'Amerique septentrionale. M. de Lamarck en characterise plus de cinquante, mais il convient qu'elles sont en general fort difficile a distinguer ; a plus forte raison, les subdivisions generiques qu'on a voulu etablir dans ce genre, d'apres la forme generale de la coquille et celle des dents prseapiciales, comme I'a fait M. Rafinesque. On passe en effet par des nuances presque insensibles des especes dont les dents sont a peine apparentes, jusqu' a celles ou elles de- viennent presque regulieres comme dans la mulette ambigue, que nous croyons avoir ete les premiers a rapprocher de ce genre, contradictoirement avec M. de Lamarck qui alors en faisoit une trigonie*. "Nous pensons meme que par la suite on decouvrira des especes qui etaUiront le passage entre les anodontes et les mulettes, en sorte que ces deux genres devront etre reunis." The sagacity, almost prophetic, displayed in the last para- graph of the foregoing extract, has been fully proved by Mr Say : for whom was reserved the honour of discovering a spe- cies, that precisely fills up the hiatus formerly existing be- tween Unio and ^^nodonta ; and upon which he formed his genus Masmodonta; but which, it is probable, should only be considered as a new species of Unio. This idea derives ad- ditional force from the observations made by Mr Say himself, in page 131. vol. v. of the Journal of the Academy of Natu- * Trigonie? ^VJN^fr- 398 ON LAMARCK S FAMILY ral Sciences ; where, after describing Alasmodonta amhigua, he says, " It forms a link between the genera Alasmodonia and Jlnodonta. When young the primary teeth are obvious, but when the shell arrives at the full growth, the teeth are obsolete, and in some instances not at all visible." From this it appears that some shells of the family of Naiades, at different ages, assume different appearances in those parts which naturalists have fixed upon for the distinc- tive characteristics of different genera. How cautious should we be not to suffer our ingenuity to run before the uner- ring indications of Nature ! Mr Barnes, to whose suggestions great deference is due, in speaking of the almost infinite and nearly indistinguishable varieties of the genus Unio, observes, " that the thought had frequently struck him, that, properly speaking, there is but one species of the whole genus, and perhaps of the whole fa- mily. See Silliman's Journal, vol. vi. p. 115; the whole pa- ragraph is well worth attention. This opinion goes rather too far, but is still strongly corro- borative of the conclusion at which it is wished to arrive, namely, that the seven genera, now referred to the family of Naiades, are founded in artificial distinctions, and not in Na- ture ; and that in fact the whole family contains but one ge- nus, which M'^as originally established by Bruguieres, and should be called Unio. In that case, the present genera might be considered as so many species, and the present spe- cies as so many varieties : or, the genus Unio might be divi- ded into subgenera and species. It often happens with young naturalists that the thirst of fame is greater than the desire of knowledge, which has caused the books to be swelled with genera and species that exist only in imagination ; even the illustrious Lamarck has erred in this respect ; and in the genus Unio has probably de- scribed as different species five or six varieties of Say's purpu- reus. Linnaeus, whose comprehensive mind seemed to scan the universe at a glance, was governed by the severest simplicity OF NAIADES. 399 in his arrangement of the genera of shells ; but by generalizing too much, in some instances he forced the barriers of Nature, and united genera that are totally distinct. The beautiful simplicity of that great naturalist, however, was much more favourable to the acquisition of knowledge than the endless multiplicity of genera and species introduced by the moderns ; and the more we consider and scrutinise his arrangement, the more does our wonder increase, that the same mind should possess so vast a power of generalization, and such minute ac- curacy in observing the details of specific difference. Note. — Since the foregoing observations were written, a paper on the Naiades by G. B. Sowerby, F.L.S., recommend- ing a reunion of the whole family under one genus, and pro- posing a new arrangement, has fallen under the observation of the writer. The paper is in the Zoological Journal, Vol. I. page 53, and is well worthy of perusal. VOL. III. — 5 I No. XII. Some further Experiments on the Poison of the Rattlesnake. By R. Harlan, M.D. Read 20 March, 1829. AGREEABLY to a promise made in a paper published in the first part of this volume, to continue the experiments on the poison of the Rattlesnake, in which the root of the Hieraceum venosum as an antidote was tested, I now offer a few additional observations. It will be observed that though the experiments detailed below afforded different results, in no instance was it found successful, as an antidote, when administered to quadrupeds. In a few instances the medicine did certainly appear to miti- gate the effects of the poison on the system in a slight degree, yet in others not the least benefit was derived from it. The reptiles were fresh healthy animals recently received from the country. Experiment 1. June 5th, 1828. Two kittens were exposed to be bitten by a young male Rattlesnake ; several wounds were inflicted on both without any poisonous symptoms following. A large female snake was next produced ; the bite of this animal was speedily followed by the usual symptoms of simi- lar poisoned wounds in both animals. ON THE POISON OF THE RATTLESNAKE. 401 A decoction of the root of the Hieraceum venosum was freely administered to the animal first bitten, with the appa- rent effect of rendering the poison less narcotic and probably of retarding the death of the subject of the experiment, and it survived the animal subsequently bitten more than an hour. Experiment 2. At 4 h, 21 m. a small black pup was bitten by an active male snake. At 4 h. 34 m. a brown dog was bitten by the same snake severely in the foot ; the wound bled freely. At 4 h. 37 m. the black dog was again bitten in the foot, the wound being severe. At 4 h. 40 m. black dog was drowsy, and unable to stand. At 4 h. 45 m. brown dog evacuated per anum. At 4 h. 46 m. black dog evacuated per anum. At 4 h. 47 m. administered a quarter of a pint of the de- coction to the black dog. At 4 h. 5S m. gave the same dog more of the decoction, say half a pint in all ; he is certainly not more drowsy, while the brown dog appears very sick and restless ; the black dog swelled a great deal, but shows signs of more liveliness. At 5 h. 25 m. gave the black dog half a wine glassful more ; he trembles very much, and the leg is greatly swelled, but he swallows his medicine easily. 5 h. 45 m. Black dog drinks of the decoction voluntarily, and at 6 h. 30 m. went to sleep. The brown dog has be- come more lively, and limps about the room ; the parts in the vicinity of the wounds of both are much tumefied. About this period both became considerably revived ; bloody serum was squeezed out of the black pup's wound, and the swelling thus diminished. On the following morning the black dog was found dead, whilst the brown dog recovered completely. 402 ON THE POISON OF THE RATTLESNAKE. JExperiment 3. 4 h. 10 m. A pup was bitten over the inner canthus of the right eye. At 4 h. 15 m. the effects of the poison were visible, and at 4 h. 20 m. involuntary discharges of faeces occurred. At 4 h. 35 m. the subject was very sick, the parts much swelled and painful. At 4 h. 30 m. six ounces of the decoction have been taken at intervals of six or eight minutes. 5 h. P.M. Two ounces more were swallowed ; the swel- ling is excessive about the eye ; in other respects the symp- toms have mitigated. 4 h. 40 m. A kitten received a wound from the same snake; several wounds were received in all, and the animal died with the usual symptoms in a few hours. The constitutional symptoms in the pup appeared to miti- gate an hour after the wound, but the swelling extended over the whole face. The blood, percolating from the vessels in the vicinity of the wound, became diffused through the cellular tissue, and did not coagulate. Next morning the pup was found dead, having swallowed the last portion of the decoction at 10, P.M. Note. — In enumerating the names of those gentlemen who contributed towards defraying the expenses of the first series of experiments, Dr James Mease was accidentally omitted. No. XIII. Description of a New Genus of the Family of Naiades, inclu- ding Eight Species, Four of which are Neiv ; also the De- scription of Fleveti New Species of the Genus Unio from the Rivers of the United States: ivith Observations on some of the Characters of the Naiades. By Isaac Lea, M.A.P.S. M.A.N.S.P., ^'c. Read March Gth, 1829. T HAD the pleasure to present to this Society in Novemher, •■-1827, a description of six new species of [the genus Unio, which they did me the honour to publish. Since that period I have continued to collect and examine the genera of the family of Naiades with great interest, and more success than I could have anticipated. I propose in this paper to describe fifteen new species, a number which rarely falls to the lot of a naturalist at one period ; and I shall previously indulge my- self in some observations respecting their characters, ha- bits, &c. Strong objections have been made to the study of concho- ^ogy by persons unacquainted with this branch of zoology, and it has been alleged that a collection of shells is merely a collection of the houses or habitations of an animal carefully removed by the naturalist or destroyed by other causes, and therefore unworthy the time and attention of the student of nature. This assertion betrays ignorance, and recoils on the observer ; for it may wdth truth be said, that no part of the VOL. III. — 5 K 404 NEAV GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES works of nature, however minute or unimportant to the pas- ser by, can be examined without creating in the student of nature the utmost wonder and astonishment. In this class of animals nature seems not to have worked with the hand of a stepmother ; she put them out of her lap after having lavished her bounties upon them in the utmost profusion. All the tints and combinations of the colours of the rainbow are called to adorn their coverings ; and in the form of the shells we have almost all the figures that the science of geometry can present. Who can watch the com- mon snail of our woods, and see him commence at a mere point, from which he builds his covering by a secretion from his own body and turns it with the most mathematical exact- ness, vnthout exclaiming, Thou art indeed a great geometri- cian ! and when he comes to finish his arched entrance, graced with a curvation pure and as white as marble, who can refuse to acknowledge him an accomplished architect ? In viewing the covering of this class of animals, I consider it as in some measure analogous to the skeleton in the vertebral animals. The muscular attachments, of which there are many, to the two valves of the conchifera, may be viewed as the attachments of the muscles of the animal frame to the bones, by which we are enabled to enjoy locomotion. The ligament, which firmly connects, exteriorly, the two valves, may be assimilated to those ligaments whose almost exclusive service is to connect some of the important bones of the human skeleton. Is it reasonable to consider the valves as merely a habitation for the animal ? Are they not always acting a more distin- guished part ? The ligament, beautifully formed of a com- bined horny and fibrous substance, is ever in action while the animal lives, and this action is counterbalanced by the con- traction of the muscles attached to the interior of the valves. The epidermis too has its duty to perform in protecting from decomposition the calcareous matter of the shell. It is com- posed of a thin horny substance — somewhat like that of the exterior part of the ligament. The prolongation of the epi- OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 405 dermis beyond the margin of the shell seems well adapted, when the animal closes the valves, to exclude the entrance of water, &c., and doubtless is thus used. When a conchologist examines a shell which to him is new, almost the first question he puts to himself is, "what must be the form of the animal which once inhabited this covering ?" He judges by analogy ; and after examining the form of the shell, he has generally a very good idea of its for- mer inhabitant, and although he may not be able to decide with the same precision as the osteologist, he can place it in its proper family. Each family has a form of shell adapted to the wants of its inhabitant, and peculiarly fitted for its locomotion or its fixed situation. Thus the Ostracea could not exist in the shells of the Naiades, although the forms of the animals are not very dissimilar to the unpractised eye. The naturalist, however, sees in the former the entire want of the muscular foot for locomotion and its attendant pairs of muscles. In the valve of this he sees but one muscular impression, which muscle is used for the sole purpose of closing the valves, while in the other he sees at least four, two of the muscles of which are used for protruding, the other two for retracting the foot by which it propels itself. The species of the family Myti- lacea attach themselves by a strong byssus to stones, &c., and therefore require a very differently constructed shell. The Lithophaga bore into stone, wood, mud, &c., and have no power of locomotion. The Solenacea generally live in pits. and move only between the two extremities of them. To these families might be added many more, all of which are as different in form and habits, as can well be imagined. It may therefore be safely asserted that the student of concho- logy can always form some idea of the animal from the form of the shell. My attention having been particularly drawn to the study of the family of the Naiades, and my cabinet possessing a great number of species and varieties, I feel induced in this preliminary matter to say something on the species of the 406 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEAV SPECIES Uniones, described by naturalists who have written on our shells. The genus TJnio presents in the waters of the United States, particularly in the rivers west of the Alleghany moun- tains, a number of species almost extending beyond belief. Nature has scattered them here with the hand of profusion, after having formed them with the most harmonising beauties. The number of the species adds greatly to the difficulty of distinguishing them, for they glide into each other so insensi- bly through their varieties, that the most experienced are often at fault and perplexed with the difficulty of placing them pro- perly in the most approved systems*. But, although we may at every step meet with these difficulties, I cannot suppose that most of those described as species do not exist ; the fault has been that mere varieties, in the eagerness of authors to make species, have too often been erected into species, and the great Lamarck has committed this error in as great a degree as almost any other writer. It is the opinion of some eminent conchologists that the family of the Naiades possesses but one genus, and that the genera into which it is at present divided are only species, and the species varieties. Were we to adopt this division, we should be in a worse dilemma than before ; for we can scarcely imagine bivalves more different from each other in form than are some of our trans-Alleghany species of Unio. How totally different is the rectus of Lamarck from the irroratus ? (nobis). The first is four times the width of its length, whilst the latter is longer than broad. The one is broad rayed, in fine specimens ; the other possesses dotted lines universally. The triangularis of Barnes is entirely dissimilar to the nasutus of Say, as is also the circulus, herein described, from the lanceolatus (nobis) ; and the same may be said oiperuvianus and pictorum. Two species could * Swainson says, " Indeed so much uncertainty hangs on tlie shells of this ge- nus, that the species can only be fixed by ample descriptions and very correct figures."— ^ooZ. Ilhcs. Vol. I. t. 67. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 407 be scarcely more unlike than the smooth and radiated sili- quoiileus of Barnes and the beautiful tuberculated lacrymo- siis (nobis) ; and the same remark may be applied to the cylindricus and alatus of that excellent conchologist Mr Say. Many other species could be thus contrasted, but I deem the above sufficient, upon examination, to prove the justness of my remarks, and the necessity, in the present state of our knovrledge, to retain the species, whatever may be the changes in the genera*. In a preceding paper on the Uniones I said something on the habits of the animal. I wish now to mention the simple fact that I have kept several specimens about ten months in a basin changing the water every five or six days. During this period they passed through the winter without any change in their usual habits, and nothing in the shape of food was given during the whole period. This truly interesting family presents us with very diffi- cult specific characteristics, rendered so by the species con- stantly approaching in similitude to each other, and by the change made in them by age, locality, and exposure. I propose to offer a few observations on the principal cha- racters, in which it will be seen how little we can depend on any one of them, and shall begin first \^^th the teeth. Teeth. In the species of the Unio these have been used as * In a letter addressed to me by William Cooper, Esq., an intelligent natu- ralist of New York, he says, " There are now, I think, not less than thirty North American species of Unio well established, and perhaps seven or eight more. That they are species, each perpetuating its peculiar form, subject to certain va- riations, but permanent within fixed limits, seems tome the most rational opinion, although some of our most judicious naturalists think otherwise. Your account of the animal of the U. irroratus Siffonh a strong argument in favour of this belief, for it proves that to be beyond doubt as distinct a species as any in any class of animals. Yet this may always be known with certainty by the shell, which, though so well characterised, is not, however, more different from the rest of the genus, than they are from each other, and frequently still less so. If, therefore this difference is found to be constantly indicative of a species in one instance it must also be in others. I believe that our lakes and rivers contained the same form of shells at the creation and ever since that they do at this day. If they are liermaphrodite per se, as is said of them, it could not be otherwise • and if the contrary were admitted, natural history would not deserve the name of a science " VOL. III. 5 L 408 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES strongly characteristic, but we cannot place much reliance on this character, unless accompanied by and dependent on others. Thus, the angle of the cardinal tooth depends much on the location of the beaks, and we know that in the same species the location is quite different, and yet this difference is not worthy of creating even a variety. If the beaks be placed immediately over the anterior margin*, as in the ellipsis they generally are, then the cardinal tooth will be nearly or quite parallel to the lamellar one ; but if the beaks be more posteriorly placed, then the cardinal tooth becomes more oblique. We must, therefore, when characters are so difficult, look at them in combination, 'and adopt them with due consideration. In the same species the mass or substance of the valves varies much according to localities. Thus we find the com- 2)lanatusf in some of our Atlantic rivers full grown, when only an inch broad, while in other of our Atlantic rivers we have them four inches broad. In some localities we have them possessing but little calcareous matter, while in others they are almost massive. This also occurs in per- haps a greater degree with some of the western shells. And if we examine a massive specimen, we are almost sure to find the cardinal teeth more or less thick, whilst those of the same species which are thin, and they frequently differ very much in this respect, will be found to possess cardinal teeth of quite a crested structure. The cardinal tooth, being single in one and double in the other valve, or double in both valves, cannot be depended on as an unfailing character. The same species will often present double teeth in both valves, although it may be usual to possess them in the right valve only. The lamellar tooth depends much on the substance of the speci- men. If it be massive the teeth will be thick, if thin more bladed ; the teeth, therefore, differ almost as much in varieties as in species. We must, consequently, while examining a specimen to determine its species, give due attention to these counteracting characters. * I reverse Lamarck's anterior and adopt Cuvier's as heretofore. t Purpureas of Say. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 409 Colour. The colour of the Uniones is generally a decep- tive character. This, however, is not always the case, and therefore it deserves the attention of the conchologist. In some species it is permanent in the nacre, in others it is permanent in the epidermis. In the following species I have always found the nacre to be white and pearly, viz. cornutiis, tubercitla- tus, siliquoidais, ventrkosus, ovcitus, triangularis, parvus, plicatus, metanever, eesopus, scalenius, cylindricus*, lacry- niosus, irroi'atus*, eUipsisf, clonacijbrmis, calceohis, hefero- do7i, tnultiradiatus, occidens, securis%, iris, zig-zag, patulus, and planulatus: the last eight herein described. In the '- torsa'' of Rafinesque, and sulcatus (herein described), the purple is permanent and generally dark. In the subten- tus, lanceolatus, and ruhiginosus (herein described), it is a pale salmon colour, and in the ater (herein described) it is a pink bordering on purple. The gibbosus is generally a dark purple or chocolate, but varies from this through all the intermediate shades to perfect white. The verrucosus is either chocolate or white, and does not seem to enjoy the in- termediate tints. The circulus (herein described) is gene- rally of a pure pearly white, but sometimes, though rarely, possesses a blush of pink in the centre of the valve. The mytiloides presents all the shades from the deepest flesh co- lour to the purest white. The eariosus is generally white, but sometimes is found of a deep salmon and the intermedi- ate shades. The nasutus is either pearly white or approach- ing salmon colour under the beaks. The rectus is gene- rally of a beautiful porcelanic white, sometimes tinted about the cardinal teeth and in the cavity of the beaks with purple * The cylindricus and irroratus sometimes, in very perfect specimens, present a slight golden appearance in the nacre at the anterior margin. t Var. a being herein described as a new species. X This is Rafinesque's " U. depressa," but the name being preoccupied by Lamarck, apparently without the knowledge of Mr R„ I am compelled to give it a new name or leave it out of the catalogue. I prefer the former alternative, as it is a distinct and beautiful species, and well known to most of our conchologists under its duplicated name " dcpreisa." In this I act in accordance with^the rules of nomenclature in natural history. See description. 410 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES or salmon, more generally the former: specimens are rarely found with the nacre entirely coloured. The complanatus, of which SO many false species have been created by Euro- pean naturalists, presents us with more colours and shades than any other species except the cuneatus of Barnes, which by many conchologists is considered analogous to it. These two species present us with specimens of the darkest purple, the purest white, the richest salmon, and all their intermediate shades. The fine indistinct striae of the nacre, which are sometimes observed to diverge from the interior of the beak to the margin, are caused by the successive removals of the marginal attachment of the mantle. It should be borne constantly in mind that the colour of the nacre is an extremely doubtful character in the family of Naiades; in exemplification of which I have an Anodonta from the Ohio, the nacre of one valve of which is salmon and the other white. The valves are beyond all doubt of the same animal. The green irregular spots and marks sometimes de- scribed to exist in our Uniones deserve no attention, as they are altogether accidental, perhaps the effect of disease: they are more frequent in the rectus and cylindricus. Elevations on the surface of the disks. These are sometimes tuberculated, sometimes undulated ; and our western waters are the only ones we know of which produce many species thus marked. There they exist in great variety and exceedingly great beauty. The U. tuberculatus and 17. lacrymosus pos- sess more tubercles than any other species. The U. verru- cosus possesses them irregularly scattered over the sides of the valves. The U. metanever and U. cylindricus, besides the irregular elevations over the disk, have remarkable undula- tions along the umbonial slope*, from the beak to the mar- gin. The U. cornutus is furnished with three or four protu- berances or " horns" in a row, passing from the beaks direct to the basal margin ; the varieties of the cornutus have these * I use this term for the elevated ridge which passes from the beaks to the pos- terior margin. OP THE FAiMILY OF NAIADES. 411 "horns" more depressed and more frequent, and thus pass into varieties with a mere furrow without any distinct eleva- tions, and these gradations are almost innumerable. The irroratus has slightly elevated tubercles along both sides of the furrow; these are sometimes continued along the wrin- kles, making them elevated. The sesopus has a "nodu- lous ridge" over the middle of the shell, and the plicatus has folds or waves over the posterior part of the disks, more or less numerous, and which are so large as to produce an irregular effect through the nacre in many instances. The qtidermal colours of this family are exceedingly cir- cumscribed. The ground varies from deep fuscous or black to pale yellow, frequently passing through obscure green, rarely bright green. This ground is intersected frequently with rays or spots of a darker hue. In fine and perfect spe- cimens these are generally perceptible, sometimes eminently beautiful. In imperfect or old specimens these marks are almost always obliterated. The following species, when the specimens are perfect and fresh, occur beautifully painted with rays more or less broad : viz. complanatus^ cuneafiis, ra- diatus, siliquoideus, ventricosus, ovatus*, cariosus, nasutus, lacrymosus (very slightly), cakeolus, rectus, ochraceus, hetero- don, sulcatus, multiradiatus, occidens, iris, and zig-zag. The securis is rayed in a manner peculiar to itself. (See description.) The cornutus has beautiful hairlike lines, some- times minutely waved, which diverge to its entire margin. Some of the varieties have no rays, while others have compa- ratively broad and beautiful ones. The sulcatus is indistinctly rayed over the umbonesf, but the furrow passing from the beaks to the posterior basal margin has many hair like lines, * Mr Say says this shell is " not radiated." This is generally the case : but eome specimens are beautifully rayed ; and Lamarck says of his var. J, " testa ra- diis longitudinalibus picta." t I use this term as Linnaeus did : it is the '■^ventre" of the French writers. Draparnaud says, " la portion la plus renflc'e des valves." It is improperly used by English writers denoting the beaks or summits. VOL. III. 5 M 412 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES which are minutely waved ; these lines are continued over the umbonial slope. The irroratus is covered over the whole disk with dark green spotted lines, running in a sweep from the beak to the margin and lying close to each other. The following species have broad interrupted rays, which in some instances make row^s of square spots : viz. planulatus, scalenius, verrucosus (when young), and patulus. The cionaciformis and zig-zag have diverging rays formed more or less distinctly by zig-zag lines. The cylindricus, metanever, and triangularis are singularly and most beauti- fully marked with dark green spots in the form of an arrow head, the point directed to the margin. The first and last possess the most; in the others it can only be distinguished in very fine or young specimens. The marks sometimes ex- ist in a confluent state, and rays are consequently produced. They are most prevalent in the cylindricus, and vary from the length of a quarter of an inch to a mere point ; in the tri- angularis they are more generally confluent. Some speci- mens of cylindricus are so much charged with these arrow- headed marks as almost to obliterate the yellow ground of the epidermis, and cause the valves to appear at first sight of an uniform dark green. The remainder of the American species described are w^ith- out epidermal markings, and I shall divide them, as it is ex- tremely difficult to designate their shades, into blackish, brownish, and yellowish. The ater, tuberculatus, circulus, and gibbosus^ are blackish. The circulus is peculiar in hav- ing the posterior slope yellowish. The parvus, torsus, plica- tus, tnytiloides, aesojms, siihtentus, verrucosus, ellipsis, rubi- ginosus, are brownish. Some of these, however, vary much. The torsus is found sometimes yellowish, and M^hen young almost black; the posterior slope is, however, universally yellowish. Large and old specimens of the plicatus are quite black; the young ai'e light brown. In the mytiloides * The young gibbosus is sometimes very obscurely rayed. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 413 the young specimens are sometimes rayed over the umbones. The young sesopm is bright yellow and highly polished. The young verrucosus has sometimes one or two broad interrupted green lines over the middle of the umbones. In young or very perfect specimens of the ellipsis may be seen numerous small rays passing over the umbones towards the posterior margin. In the younger specimens of the rubiginosus indis- tinct rays are sometimes seen. The lanceohtus is yellowish passing into olive. It should ever be borne in mind, notvdthstanding what has been said above, that colour is exceedingly deceptive, and may often lead to error. It is impossible to find permanent characteristics in it, on which we can universally depend, as locality, exposure, youth, and age so materially affect its ap- pearance. We must therefore consider it in most cases as only auxiliary, though in a few cases it is permanent. Beaks. Lamarck, in his generic description of the Unio, says, " natibus decorticatis, suberosis." This character is not permanent by any means in our species, some of which are almost universally found free from decortication, while others are partially so ; and others again rarely free from it. The objection to receiving it as a permanent character even in spe- cies is, that more or less exposure to the action of the stream, &c. will cause the beaks to be more or- less eroded in the spe- cies where erosion takes place. Some species, however, seem to resist this erosion with great success, owing, as I appre- hend, to the peculiar firmness of the texture of their epidermis, which certainly differs in different species. I have never seen either of the following species eroded, viz. U. parvus, U. calceohis, U. lacrymosus, U. rubiginosus, or the Symphynota Isevissima (the two last herein described). It is rarely we see a ponderous shell free from this erosion, and the U. cylindri- cus seems to be peculiarly subject to it, for the form of the beaks can rarely be even traced, yet the largest specimen in my cabinet, nearly five inches broad, possesses the epidermis untouched on this part. The beaks of many of the species, when found in a perfect state, are crowned with concentric 414 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES undulations or slight elevations, which should always be no- ticed, as they are highly characteristic. The situation of the beaks, when peculiar, should have the student's attention. They are sometimes almost medial, as in the U. irroratus, U. circulus, U. lacrymosus, Sfc; while in the U. ellipsis, U. sca- lenius, U. cylindricus, Symphynota tenuissima*', 8^c. they are almost terminal: this character, however, varies. (See ob- servations on the teeth.) The margins or circumference should have our attention in examining a specimen. The general form of the Naiades is ovate, modified into rhomboidal, triangular, circular, and ellip- tical ; but these forms in the same species will frequently vary, and therefore must notbe entirely relied on. The U. siliquoi- deus is generally subangular posteriorly, but it is sometimes truncate, and the U. cariosus is found in the same way. We find very few species that are constant in this character ; this accounts for the many species created from the U. pictorum in Europe. Muscular impressions. These are important, and should always have our attention in examining a specimen. But even this character is not infallible. It should be understood that the animals of this family always possess two pairs of muscles, used for locomotion, and placed near or in contact with the two adductor muscles, used solely for closing the valvesf. In the anterior margin these are generally sepa- rate, in the posterior more generally confluent ; but in the same species we sometimes find individuals presenting two, sometimes three, and sometimes four cicatrices, besides those of the cavity of the beaks; and this depends in a great measure on the thickness of the shell. If the spe- cimen be ponderous, we often find the posterior mus- cle of the foot attached to the side of the lamellar tooth near to its termination ; if it be thin, although of the same species, it will be found generally confluent or near to the great posterior muscle. The cicatrices, made by the attach- * Herein described. t See my description of new Uniones in this volume. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 415 ment of the superior part of the mantle in ponderous shells, generally will be found on the under part of the cardinal tooth. Sometimes six or eight may he found ; and their di- rection is towards the lamellar tooth. In thin shells these cicatrices will be found in the cavity of the beaks, generally traversing it in an oblique direction*. Ligament. This part of the shell must be viewed with thp same doubt as the above character. In the same species the ligament may be long and narrow if the specimen be elongated and thin ; and it may be short and thick if it be pon- derous and obtuse. Thus we may find in an elongated sili- quoideus the ligament an inch and a quarter long, and only one-tenth of an inch broad, while in an obtuse and ponder- ous specimen it may be found to be only three quarters of an inch long and yet one-eighth of an inch broad, as is the case in some specimens of my cabinet. It has been a desideratum with the American concholo- gists to fix the nomenclature of this interesting genus, parti- cularly so far as relates to our own species. In the hope of contributing in some measure to so desirable an object, I have carefully examined all that has been published on the subject so far as I could procure the descriptions, and with diffidence give the results, hoping my views may not be found to be incorrect. The first column contains the species, the nomenclature of which is now likely to be permanent and fixed. The se- cond the species described by other writers, which are either the same or varieties, and consequently synonymes. ( '• radiata, Lam. 1. U. radiatusf, Gmelin, <( 2. virginiana, Lam. 3. radiatus, Barnes. * See my description of new Uniones in this volume. t Lister (t. 152, f. 7.) gives a correct representation of the species known to American conchologists as U. radiatus, and which he says came from Vir.'inia Chemnitz (vol. yi. t. 2, f. 7.) gives a representation of a shell very siinilar'to it! the locality of which is Malabar. The first name we find for it is in Gmelin Mya radiata, and this author refers to both figures in his description. Dillwvn re- VOL. HI. 5 N 416 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES 2. U. complanatusf , Soland. MSS.<; 'purpureus, Say. rarisulcata, Lam. coarctata, Lam. purpurascens, Lam. rhombula, Lam. var. 6 carinifera, Lam. georgina*, Lam. sulcidens, Lam. caroliniana, Bosc. fluviatilis, Green. fers to each of the above authorities, but thinks Lister's figure is too doubtful to be retained, as Solander had referred to it for a variety of Mytilus modiolus, in which, however, he errs, for Lister's figure is a good representation of a small specimen of the radiatus of our waters. Lamarck, in his description of "Z7. radiata,'^ re- fers to Lister and Gmehn, and also to the figure of Mr Say's ochraceus. The last is a distinct species. Several of these writers refer also to the figure in the Ency. Meth. t. 248, f. 5, which is evidently copied from Chemnitz. Mr Barnes, in his description, refers to Say's U. ochraceus, Dillwyn's Mya radiata, and Lamarck's U. radiata. Considerable difficulty presents itself in establishing the name of this species, so welt known among us by that of U. radiatus, in consequence of the old writers using the same name for those from Virginia and Malabar, which, I believe, when examined together, will be found specifically to differ. Should this prove to be the fact, we must give to our shell the name which Lamarck has described it under a second time, viz. " U. virginiana," giving it a mascuUne ter- mination. * It should be mentioned here that I was not aware that Mr Barnes had pro- nounced the first six to be varieties of Say's -purpureus until after I had selected the seven. t The celebrated Lister published his great work on conchology in 1685, and at that early period he was in possession of several species of our fluviatile shells procured from Virginia. The first he thus describes, " musculus brevior, admo- dum crassus, ex interna parte subroseus, cardine incisuris minutis exasperate," t. 150, f. 5. Dillwyn describes this shell under the name of Mya complanaia, and refers to this figure. Beside the locality above, Solander gives Maryland and New Jersey, and Humphreys Mississippi. The latter is most likely an error. Dr Green supposed this shell, so well known to all our conchologists under Mr Say's name purpureus, to be the Mytilus jluviatilis described by Dillwyn from Gmelin, and referred to Lister, t. 157, f. 12. I difler, however, in this opinion, I. Be- cause it is not described as being toothed. 2. Gmelin says, "habitat in Europae aquis dulcibus." 3. The complanata answering, in description, better to our shell, and being the first figured and described. It appears somewhat singular to me, that the observant and able zoologist, Mr Say, had not been struck with the similitude of our shell to Lister's figure and description. There is no species more common in all our fresh waters, east of the Alleghany mountains, than this, and nothing could be more likely than that it should be among the first to be taken to Europe by the early voyagers to North America. In accordance. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 417 3. U. ovatus, Say*, ( ovata, I ovata, f luteola, Lam. Valenciennes Lam. 4. U. cariosus, cariosa, Sayf, <; crassus (old){, carinatus (rayed), ellipticus (young). Lam. Say. Bar. Bar. 5. U. nasutus, Say, rostrata. Valen. 6. U. cylindricus, Say, ■ naviformis, ^ naviformis, Lam. Valen. 7. U. subtentus, Say. 'crassidens? Lam. 8. U. plicatus, Le Sueur§, peruvianus, rariplicata, undulatus, crassus, undulata, dombeyana. Lam. Lam. Bar. Bar. Valen. Valen. therefore, with the rules of nomenclature, I have inserted the name of complana- tus to the shell described by Mr Say under the name of purpureas. * Dr Hildreth, in describing this species of Say, says, " I think it a near rela- tion of the gracilis ;" and, when describing the gracilis, he says, " The contour of the shell, independent of the wing, is much like that of the alatus." In the lat- ter he is right, but in the former remark altogether wrong. Donovan, Dillwyn, Maton and Racket, and some other British writers have made use of this name for a Unio resembling the pictorum. I have thought it bet- ter, however, to retain Mr Say's name for "his species, which is totally different, being satisfied that the British shell is only a variety of pictorum. t This is probably the only species yet known to be common both to the Wes- tern and Atlantic waters. X Crassus is omitted in this catalogue, believing that several other species, and those only because they were ponderous, have been described under this name. Mr Say's crassus (See Am. Conch, plate 1, fig. 8,) is evidently an old and ponde- rous cariosM, and he considered the '■'plicatus" as a variety. Mr Barnes's cra«- sus is an old and thick peruvianus, as is most likely Lamarck's crassidens. The giganteus of Dr Mitchill's collection is also a peruvianus, which occurs in some of our western waters of a larger size and more ponderous than any species we know of. § This species was first described by Say in the American Conchology as a va- 418 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES 9. U. rectus, Lam.* 10. U. torsusf, Rafinesque. 11. U. mytiloides, Rafin. 12. U. metanever, Rafin. 13. U. scalenius, Rafin. 14. U. cornutus, Bar.| fprselongus, J nasuta, ) purpurata 9 (^ recta, undatus, ( nodosus, \ rugosus (flat), Bar. Lam. Lam. Valen. Bar. Bar. Bar. I'iety of crassus. At the same time he mentioned that its discoverer, that excellent naturalist Mr Le Sueur, suspected it to be a new species, and proposed, should this prove to be the case, to call it '■'■ plicata." We are, therefore, bound to adopt his name on the claim of priority ; and a more descriptive one could not be given to it. * When Dr Hildreth described the " prcslongus," it is evident he believed it to be pralongus of Barnes, for he uses Barnes's name without stating it to differ from his, although the descriptions are not exactly the same. Barnes says, "Naker, purple of different shades," and " deep and splendid purple." (See Barnes's Re- clamation.) Hildreth says, "Naker, white, and tinged with spots of green." The specimen of '■'■recta,'' described by Lamarck, was " white," according to his description. I have seen very many specimens of this species, some of which are tinted with light purple or salmon about the cavity of the beaks and cardinal tooth ; they are generally, however, of a pure white. The explanation of these contradictory characters is this : The specimen in the collection of the New York Lyceum, and the same is said of one in DrMitchill's collection, both brought from the upper lakes, is unusually full of colour, having almost the whole of the nacre of a rose or delicate purple. It has more colour than any specimen I have seen. t M. Rafinesque is entitled to a preference in this beautiful and extraordinary species, possessing the most elevated recurved beaks of the whole genus. It was generally known among us by the name of U. orbicularis, but not described. The variety, not emarginate, can not be made a species, as the two pass into each other. Dr Hildreth has recently described a shell, which I believe to be the tarsus, in Sil- liman's Journal under the name of U. orbiculatus. He says, " This shell is a va- riety o{ the crassus." Whose crassus ? Mr Say's, as mentioned before, is a pon- derous cariosus ; Mr Barnes's, a peruvianus ; and, if a variety of crassus, why call it orbiculatus ? I This species is among the most interesting of the genus. It presents a much greater variety than any other, and might be called a real proteus. The true OF THE FAMILY OF KAIADES. 419 , , TT T> < verrucosa, Valen. lo. U. verrucosus, Bar. <, . u i it i i tuberculosa, Valen. 16. U. tuberculatus, Bar. 17. U. gibbosus, Bar. mucronatus, Bar. 18. U. cuneatus*, Bar. 19. U. ventricosusf, Bar. 20. U. siliquoideus. Bar. inflatua, Bar. 21. U. triangularis, Bar. comutus has three or four distinct " horns," and the varieties gradually increase in the number, and vary in the forms of those elevations until they are lost in two ridges passing from the beaks to the posterior basal margin. It is exceedingly interesting to trace these gradual changes of form ; and to illustrate the fact of the anomalous varieties being of the same species, I have arranged for^y- three specimens in my cabinet, no two of which are ahke. Dr Hildreth has made a species of one of these varieties, and calls it foliatus. It appears that Mr Barnes and himself had seen only this specimen. I have had three or four in my posses- sion for three years, and at first my impression was in favour of their being new, but examining them with that excellent conchologist, Mr Stewart, we found the line of impression, made by the mantle, did not run parallel with the deep arcuation of the margin, and therefore concluded, at once, that the animal could not conform to the shape of the shell, and consequently that the elongations of the basal and posterior margins were unnatural. Dr H. says he is " unable to deter- mine whether it is a new variety, or only a " lusus naturae ;" and yet he makes a new species of it ! ! Some of my varieties have the prolongation much more ex- tended than the specimen described by Dr H. In one specimen the unnatural prolongation is more than equal in extent to the natural size of the shell, designa- ted by the impression of the mantle. * We have been much in the habit of confounding this with the complanatus, and considering it as the analogue inhabiting the western waters. It deserves, how- ever, to be retained by Barnes's name, for it possesses characters which the other does not. It is posteriorly more angular, and the shell is subtriangular ; the com- planaius is sub-rhomboidal and more carinate. One inhabits the western ; the other the Atlantic rivers. The cuneatus is always ponderous ; the complanatus, I believe, never. Mr B. says his species is never rayed ; in this he is mistaken, young and fine specimens have dark broad rays. t This is undoubtedly the species which we have known under the name ofglo- bosus (undescribed). Mr B. says " it is more capacious than any of the genus hitherto described." It resembles the ovatus, but is always more globose. VOL. III. — 5 o 420 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES 22. U. parvus*, Bar. 23. U. aesopus, Green. 24. U. calceolusf , Lea. 25. U. lanceolatus, Lea. 26. U. donaciformis, Lea. 27. U. ellipsis, Lea. 23. U. irroratus. Lea. 29. U. lacrymosus, Lea. 30. U. ater, Lea. 31. U. rubiginosus, Lea. 32. U..heterodon, Lea. 33. U. sulcatus, Lea. 34. U. planulatus, Lea. 35. U. circulus, Lea. 36. U. multiradiatus, Lea. 37. U. occidens, Lea. 38. U. securis, Lea. * This is rather the smallest species with which I am acquainted. Barnes says it is " the smallest and most beautiful of all the genus yet discovered in America." In this he alludes to the nacre only, which is more pearly and more brilliant than any species I have seen. The exterior presents nothing peculiar but its concentric waves on the beaks, and a slightly elevated rib passing from the beaks to the pos- terior margin. t. Although I had three specimens of this shell in my possession when I descri- bed it, I felt apprehensive it was too closely allied to the Alasmodonta of Say to be considered as an Unio ; but as a lamellar plate really existed with an incipient tooth, though small, on each valve, besides the large cardinal tooth, I determined it to be the safest plan to class it with the Uniones. I have recently received larger specimens in which this plate almost entirely disappears, while in younger speci- mens it is more evident. • OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 421 39. U. iris, Lea. 40. U. zig-zag, Lea. 41. U. patulus, Lea. Conchologists have with great reason complained of the extreme difficulty of identifying Lamarck's species of the ge- nus Unio. Mr Barnes says, '-In most cases wherever M. Lamarck can find a difference, though by his own account '-nothing remarkable,' he makes a different species;" and Mr Swainson declares that "one half the species which he has enumerated" cannot be determined on account of the short descriptions and want of figures. The truth of these remarks I have felt severely whenever I have had occasion to consult this author for the genus ; and, with the hope of clearing the path in a measure of those who may follow me, I propose to give here the results of examinations of his species made at different times with much care, U. sinuata. This is the Mya margaritifera of Linnaeus and other authors, and to which Barnes's Masmodonta urcu- ata is the analogue. Mr B. was not aware, when he descri- bed it, that it was similar. He has recently, in the reclama- tion of his Uniones, resigned this species of Alasmodonta. If Mr Say's genus be admitted, we must of course call this type of Lamarck's Unio, Masmodonta margaritifera. U. elongata. There can scarcely be a doubt but that this is a young shell of the above species. U. crassidens. It is evident on examination of our author's description of this species and its varieties, and the crdssiis of Say and of Barnes, that all the ponderous varieties of our Uniones were brought into these species, neither of which can possibly stand. (See note, page 417.) U. peruviana. This species embraces the plicata of Le Sueur, the crassus and undulatus of Barnes, the giganteus of Dr Mitchill's collection, the rariplicata and crassidens of La- marck, and the imdulata and domberjana of Valenciennes. 422 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES As it was described previously by Le Sueur's name "^/i- cata" this must take precedence. Its habitat, Peru, I think very doubtful ; it most probably came from the United States. U. rariplicata. This is, no doubt, a variety of the above. U. purpurata. The recta answers to this description in every respect but the habitat. The author "believes" it came from Africa. The shell most probably came from the United States, in which case there could not be a doubt. The description of these is so imper- rr T X • feet that I cannot identify either of them, U. hs;amenttna, ..^ , ., n <• ^i,- j. TT ij: J although they are all from this country, ^^' , ^ ' i and the same species most probably in our cabinets. I doubt if either of them L should be retained. j-r A I f These are mere varieties of the com- U. coarctata, > 7 , U. purpurascens. ) ^ U. radiata. Our author gives the Mya radiata of Gmelin and U. ochraceus of Say as synonymes to this species. It cannot be both ; for the ochraceus is a perfectly distinct spe- cies from the M. radiata, which, Chemnitz says, comes from the rivers of Malabar. The radiatus described by Barnes after Lamarck, and Say's ochraceus are distinct spe- cies, and I have no doubt the Mya radiata of Gmelin is distinct from both. Mr Say's figure, referred to by Mr Barnes (pi. 2, fig. 8, Am. Conch.) as U. radiata, is undoubt- edly an ochraceus. (See note on U. radiatus.') U. brevialis. This shell is pictured by Crouch ; it is thick, and resembles the circulus of the Ohio, but is larger, less round and radiated. It comes from the Isle of France, and is, no doubt, a distinct species. U. rhomhula. ) . ■,-, . ,. ^ xi rr • •/. f Are all mere varieties 01 the com- U. canmfera, > , . rr ■ \ planatus. U. georgina, ) ^ U. clava. I cannot identify this species. The descrip- tion is too short. Its habitat is Lake Erie and Nova Sco- OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 423 tia. from which circumstance it is most probably in our cabi- nets under another name. U. recta. This is the same with Barnes's prselongm. The recta being described first should be retained. U. nav^ormis. This name cannot be retained, as Say had previously described the shell under the name of cylindricus. U. glabrata. The habitat of this species is the Ohio river. The description is too imperfect to identify it, and as the au- thor acknowledges it has " nothing remarkable," we may fairly conclude it to be a variety of some one of the numerous spe- cies described, a cariosus most probably. U. nasuta. The author thinks this may be the 7iasutus of Say, but the description answers much better to his own recta or Barnes's gibbosus, and is no doubt one of those. I do not believe the nasutus has ever been found in our western wa- ters*. U. ovata is the ovafus of Say, and inhabits the western wa- ters, not the Susquehanna and Mohawk, as mentioned by La- marck. Maton and Rackett described a British shell under this name, which I believe to be only a variety oi pictorum. Those sent me from England by this name were certainly mere varieties of the pictorum. U. rotundata. In most of our cabinets may be found a beautiful shell, which we have thought to be of this species, and have adopted the name. It does not, however, answer to the description in some essential characters, and I have therefore thought proper to describe the American shell, and give it a new name. (See description of circiilus.) Lamarck gives no habitat. Ours is from the Ohio. U. littoralis is from the Seine, and is described by Drapar- naud, who says it resembles the -'U. margaritifera,'' but is much smaller. U. semirugata. Description too short to identify it. Has no habitat. * Swainson says, " The Unio nasuta, however, of Lamarck, I apprehend, will be found different" from JJnio nasutus of Say. — Zool. Tllus. Vol. I. pi. 37. VOL. III. 5 P 424 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES U. nana. This species is said to inhabit Franche Comte. I do not know if there be a specimen in this country. U. alata is the well known alatus of Say, and is herein made the type of a new genus, Symphynota. U. delodonta. Description too short to identify it. Has no habitat. U. sulcidens. A variety of complanatus; and is from the Schuylkill, Pennsylvania. U. rostrata. The specimens which I received from Eu- rope with this name are only elongated varieties o{ pictorum. U. pictormn. This is a well known species, and described by Linnaeus and others as Mya pictorum. U. batava. The specimens sent me of this species from Europe appear to be only a variety of the pictorum. It is more obtuse*. U. corrugata. This species can not be identified with any of ours. It comes from the coast of Coromandel, and is, doubtless, a distinct and well characterised species. U. nodulosa. The habitat of this species is Lake Cham- plain, and although pictured in the Ency. Meth. I cannot identify it, the drawing being evidently incorrect. Although represented with a lamellar tooth, I should not be surprized if it proved to be a young Alasmodonta undulata of Say, as it has the strong character on the beaks. U. varicosa. I can only assimilate this with the Masmo- donta undulata of Say. Its habitat is the Schuylkill and Lake Champlain. U. granosa. This is a beautiful and distinct species. Ha- bitat Guyana. U. depressa. Habitat New Holland. The description is very imperfect, but the species nevertheless distinct. It is a very different shell from that called depressa by Rafinesque, who does not seem to have known that the name was preoc- cupied by Lamarck. * The U. anas I believe to be a variety of ■pictorum very similar to this. My specimen is certainly such. The U. tumida, from the north of Europe, appears to me to be only a large and thick pictorum. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 425 U. virginiana. This, doubtless, is the radiatus described by Barnes. Habitat Virginia. U. luteola is a variety of Say's carioms. Habitat Susque- hanna and Mohawk. U. marginalis. I have specimens of this species from Bengal. It is well characterised, although it does not always possess the marginal character as described by Lamarck and represented in the Ency. Meth. pi. 247. U. angusta. This I believe to be a variety of pictorum. The figure referred to in Lister is certainly o. pictorum, and is generally quoted as such. Habitat unknown. U. mama. This may be a distinct species, but I strongly suspect it to be only a variety of pictorum. Habitat Bour- gogne. U. cariosa is the carioms of Say. U. spuria. I cannot identify this species with any of ours. Habitat U. australis. This, like the above, is not identified. Ha- bitat New Holland. U. anodontina. Habitat Virginia. We have no Unio of this description in our waters. It is probably Anodonta un- dulata of Say, which has sometimes small elevations some- what similar to teeth*. U. suborbiculata. I cannot identify this species. In passing criticisms upon the species of the genus Unio of this great naturalist, I do not in the least wish to detract from his great and merited fame. My object is expressly to en- deavour to facilitate the study of this interesting genus, and to remove, as far as I have it in my power, the confusion which has crept into it. My observations I wish to pass only for what they may prove to be worth. * Since writing the above, I observe that Soweiby on the Lamarckian Naiades (Zoolog. Journ. Vol. I. p. 5-J.) gives the ^^ .inodon rugosua" of Swainson as the synonyme of V. anodontina. It is well known to our concholo^ists that bwainson s rvgosus is the old shell of Say's Anodonta vndulata, which was de- scribed from a young specimen, and has priority to the rvgosus. 426 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES 1. Unio Ater. Plate VII. fig. 9. Testa ovata, infEquilaterali, transversa, ventricosissimd ; umhonibus ehvatis ; natibus prominulis ; epidermide rugosd nigrdque ; umhonibus- elevatis; dentibus cardinaUbus erectis, cristatis, lateralibus granulatis, rectisque; margaritd rosed. Shell inequilateral, ovate, transverse, much inflated; umbones elevated; beaks slightly prominent ; epidermis black and wrinkled ; cardinal teeth erect and crestlike, lateral granulated and straight; nacre rose colour. Hab. Mississippi below Natchez. T. W. Robeson. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Diam. 2-6, Length 3, Breadth 4-5 inches. Shell very ventricose; margin ovate, wider behind, slightly emarginate at base, and sometimes slightly truncate at poste- rior margin ; substance of the shell thick ; beaks slightly pro- jecting and decorticated ; ligament large ; epidermis black or blackish, and wrinkled transversely; cardinal teeth erect, crestlike, and double in both valves ; lateral tooth curved, long, deeply divided and slightly serrate, the interior division emerging from the cavity of the beak ; posterior cicatrices confluent, anterior cicatrices very distinct ; dorsal cicatrices pass across the cavity of the beaks in a row* ; cavity of the shell great; nacre pink and iridescent in the posterior margin. Remarks. — This shell is remarkable for the colour of its epidermis and nacre. The perpendicular distance from the cardinal tooth to the basal margin is very small, while that from the posterior end of the lamellar tooth to the same mar- gin is unusually great. It slightly approaches in form to some varieties of the cariosus. * In a former paper of this volume, (page 262} I described the attaching mus- cles of the back of the animal, the impressions of which in the shell I propose to call dorsal cicatrices. Tl.VR,vffl.3. 2?raint. ilSn^f fy JJiruyts OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 427 2. Unio Rubiginosus. Plate VIII. fig. 10. Testa incBquilaterali, transversa, postice sub-biangiilari, anticerotun- data; valvulis sub-crassis ; natibus prominentibus, recurvis, postice sub- angulatis ; dente cardinali magna, laterali crasso ; margaritd salmoms colore. Shell inequilateral, transverse, sub-biangular behind and rounded be- fore; valves somewhat thick; beaks prominent, recurved, sub-angulated behind; cardinal tooth large; lateral tooth thick; nacre salmon co- loured. Hab. Ohio. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Diam. 1-2, Length 2-1, Breadth 2-6 inches. Shell somewhat ventricose ; substance of the shell some- what thick ; umbones slightly elevated ; beaks recurved, sel- dom decorticated, almost touching, whitish, possessing several concentric undulations, which are lost along the umbonial slope, which is carinate ; a small curved elevated line passes from the point of the beaks to the margin above the posterior margin ; ligament rather large passing from the points of the beaks ; dorsal margin oblique ; posterior dorsal margin cari- nate and slightly emarginate ; posterior margin angular; pos- terior basal margin very slightly curved ; basal, anterior and anterior dorsal and basal margins rounded ; epidermis colour of rust, sometimes salmon yellow, slightly wrinkled and show- ing the marks of growth ; rays in young specimens percepti- ble; cardinal tooth sulcate, broad and not elevated, often single in both valves ; the tooth in the left valve closing in a cavity which sinks almost into the cavity of the beaks of the right valve ; lateral teeth rather thick, elevated, straight, ge- nerally double in both valves ; in the left valve the upper division is less elevated and shorter; anterior and posterior cicatrices both distinct ; the smaller posterior cicatrix is situ- VOL. III. — 5 Q 428 NEW GENUS AND S03IE NEW SPECIES ated against the side of the lamellar tooth, near its termination ; the anterior adductor muscle makes a cicatrix also against the end of the cardinal tooth ; dorsal cicatrices under the cardinal tooth perceptible ; cavity of the beaks deep and rounded ; na- cre always more or less salmon colour; slightly iridescent at posterior margin ; whitish on the margin near the adductor^ muscles. Remarks: — This is a very distinct species. In its general form it approaches nearest to the securis, which, however, is always white in the nacre, and peculiarly rayed. It is pecu- liar in its reddish brown epidermis, which colour is caused by the salmon nacre showing through it. The character of the cardinal tooth is very peculiar, having a tendency to be single in both valves, while the lamellar tooth is quite equally disposed to be double. All the specimens which I have seen are salmon colour in the nacre. If this should prove univer- sally so, it is the only species which we know to be con- stantly of that colour. 3. Unio Heterodon. Plate VIII. fig. 11. Testa rhomboido-ovatd, ineequilaterali, ventricosd ; valvulis tenuihus ; dentibus cardinalibus compressis, latis ; dentibus lateralibus sub-curva- tis, dente laterali valvules dextrtB, duplici ; natibus prominentibus ; liga- mento sub-brevi ; margarild alba. Shell rhomboidal-ovate, inequilateral, ventricose; valves thin; cardi- nal teeth compressed, wide; lateral teeth slightly curved, the double tooth in the right valve; beaks prominent; ligament rather short; nacre white. . Hab. Schuylkill and Derby Creek, Pa. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Mason. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of Dr Griffith. PL "Vin vol 3. Unio rubigiTwsus C/nio tuttrodon i'nio sulcacus- Dramz iCEn^ .*' by J.Dri. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 429 Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Cabinet of Mr Phillips. Cabinet of Mr Conrad. Diam. -5, Length -9, Breadth 1-5 inches. Shell rhomboidal-ovate, inequilateral, ventricose ; substance of the shell thin ; beaks prominent, subcarinate posteriorly, eroded, undulated ; ligament rather short ; epidermis green- ish brown, with oblique obscure rays, wrinkled ; dorsal mar- gin rectilinear; posterior dorsal margin obtusely angular; posterior margin acutely angular ; basal margin slightly curv- ed; anterior, anterior basal and dorsal margins rounded; cardinal tooth in left valve compressed, wide, reaching be- yond the cavity of the beaks, double cleft ; in right valve one elevated recurved tooth, which clasps the side of the opposing one ; lateral tooth curved, short in left valve, and long in the right, m ichich it is double; anterior cicatrices confluent, as are also the posterior ; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under part of the cardinal tooth, scarcely perceptible ; cavity of the beaks large ; nacre white. Eemarks. — This remarkable species was first observed by Mr Mason and Mr Hyde. To the kindness of the for- mer I am indebted for the use of the fine large specimen figured. It is very curious in the whole apparatus of the hinge, the teeth of which resemble in some measure the Symphynota compressa. herein described. From the ante- rior end of the cardinal tooth to the posterior end of the late- ral, the distance is the same in both valves, but in the left valve the cardinal tooth is longest, while in the right valve the lateral tooth is longest. The peculiar character of this shell is in the double lateral tooth being in the right valve, in which it differs from all the species yet described. It most resembles in general form the Masmodonta"^ marginata of * Mr Say published his description of the genus Alasmodonta in the Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 1818, without knowing, it is to 430 >fEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES Say ; and some of the younger and more ventricose specimens assume the appearance of the U. triangularis. 4. Unio Sulcatus. Plate VIII. fig. 12. Testa sub-ellipticd, incBquilaterali, ventricosd, suh-emarginald ; valvu- lis crassis ; natibus fere terminalibus ; dentibus car dinalibus later alibus- que magnis, et duplicibus in valvulis ambabus ; margarita purpurea. Shell sub-elliptical, inequilateral, ventricose, slightly emarginate; valves thick; beaks nearly terminal ; cardinal and lateral teeth large, and double in both valves ; nacre purple. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Diam. 1-3, Length 1-7. Breadth 2-3 inches. Shell very thick, ventricose, inequilateral, obliquely longi- tudinal ; margin sub-elliptical, with an emargination of poste- rior basal margin, caused by a broad furrow running from the beaks to this part of the margin ; substance of the shell thick and ponderous ; beaks thick and projecting beyond the mar- gin, nearly terminal, decorticated ; ligament partly concealed by the beaks ; epidermis olive-brown, wrinkled, with nume- rous fine hair like lines, which are slightly undulated, passing from the beaks to the margin ; these lines are obsolete in the anterior part of the shell, and crowded in the furrow, over the umbonial slope they are proximate ; cardinal tooth eleva- ted, conico-triangular, that in left valve deeply divided ; late- ral tooth long, thick, and slightly curved, direction nearly be presumed, that the Mya margaritifera of Linriceus was in 1817 erected into a new genus by Schumacher, under the name of Margaritana. If the absence of the lateral tooth be sufficient to establish the genus, we must necessarily call it by the Danish naturalist's name. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 431 same as cardinal tooth ; posterior cicatrices distinct, the smaller one being placed immediately over the large one, and against the lateral tooth; anterior cicatrices distinct; dorsal cica- trices situated on the under part of the cardinal tooth, very perceptible ; cavity of the beaks small ; nacre flesh-red, vary- ing from this to nearly white ; iridescent in the posterior mar- gin. Remarks. — This is variety a of U. ellipsis, described in a former paper, and approaches it closely. Having seen seve- ral specimens since that description v^^as made, my doubts have been satisfied, and I now consider it a new species. It differs from the ellipsis in having the furrow, in being gene- rally covered with fine hair-like rays, and in being always more or less flesh-red inside. I have two specimens of this species which present a singular formation of the posterior basal margin, which is dentate, the points interlocking and almost hooked. The elevation anterior to the furrow com- mences to swell one-third of the distance from the margin to the beaks, increases as it approaches the margin, and as- sumes this dentation, which being successive as the shell increases displays laminae of these dentations in the epider- mis. In the interior this part of the shell has the appearance of having been gouged out. It is exceedingly curious, being the only specimen of fluviatile shells I have seen with a mar- gin approaching to a dentate appearance. 5. Unio Planulatus. Plate IX. fig. 13. Testa iruBquilaterali, ovato-elUpticu, transversa; complanatd per um- bones a natibus usque ad marginem inferiorem, maculis quadratis radi- atim pictd ; natibus prominulis ; dente cardinali parvo, laterali magna, crasso, curvato; margaritd sub-caruleo-albd. Shell inequilateral, ovate-elliptical, transverse, flattened across the umbones from the beaks to the basal margin, marked with square spots in form of rays; valves thick ; beaks slightly prominent; cardinal tooth small; lateral tooth large, thick and curved; nacre bluish white. VOL. III. 5 R 432 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Diam. -8, Length 1-3, Breadth 2-2 inches. Shell ovate-elliptical, remarkably flattened over the ura- bones from the beak to the basal margin, which frequently causes the greatest diameter to be near to the anterior margin ; substance of the shell thick ; beaks slightly prominent and de- corticated ; ligament deeply seated, scarcely appearing above the margin of the shell ; epidermis wrinkled, yellowish brown, with transversely interrupted rays passing from the beaks in a slight curve to the margin along the umbonial slope ; these rays are hair like, undulated, and interrupted; cardinal teeth very small and lobed ; lateral tooth remarkably thick and situated on a large massive plate ; curve very slight and directed much over the cardinal tooth, somewhat rough, up- per division smaller than the lower; anterior and posterior cicatrices both distinct ; the smaller posterior cicatrix is situ- ated against the end of the plate at the point of the divi- sion of the tooth ; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under part of the cardinal tooth, perceptible ; cavity of the shell very small and irregularly waved; an indistinct depressed line may always be seen to pass from the great posterior cicatrix along the base of the lateral tooth into the cavity of the beaks ; nacre white. Remarks. — This shell is peculiar in the massive plate on which is situated its short and thick lateral tooth, as well as in the very small size of its cardinal tooth. It has scarcely any cavity under the beaks, the shell being very thick. Its epidermal rays, in perfect specimens, are very unusual to this genus ; in old specimens they are almost or quite obsolete. It is remarkable also in its flat umbones. It resembles most in form the gibbosus of Barnes, but is less rostrated and more PL. K Vol.3. [fnw p^mila'tus (/ttio circiilus. Tfniv muUirndiaiui- Drawn icE-ng 'd ly XOrayUn OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 433 thick. The gibbosus is seldom if ever perfectly white ; all the specimens I have seen of this are perfectly so. 6. Unio Circulus. Plate IX. fig. 14. Testa circulari, ventricosd, sub-tequilaterali ; valvulis crassis ; natibus prominulis; dentibus cardinalibus later alibusque magnis; ligament o brevi crassoque ; margarild alba et iridescente. Shell circular, ventricose, nearly equilateral; valves thick; beaks slightly elevated ; cardinal and lateral teeth large ; ligament, short and thick ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. r Ohio at Cincinnati. T. G. Lea. Hab. ^ Monongahela at Pittsburg. T. Bakewell. (^Tennessee at Nashville. Prof. Vanuxem. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of Dr Griffith. Cabinet of W. Hyde. Cabinet of W. Mason. Cabinet of J. Pliillips. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Cabinet of Peale's Museum. &c. Unio rotundata ? Lamarck. Diam. 1, Length 1-5, Breadth 1-5 inches. Shell round ; posterior basal margin sometimes very slightly emarginate, very ventricose, transversely vrrinkled, nearly equilateral ; substance of the shell thick ; beaks elevated, me- dial, and somewhat recurved; epidermis finely wrinkled, shining, satin-like, anterior to the umbonial slope dark brown, posterior light yellow brown ; cardinal teeth oblique, thick, and disposed to be treble in both valves ; lateral teeth short and thick, disposed to be double in right valve as well as left ; 434 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES Anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices also distinct ; the smaller one being placed against the termination of the lateral tooth ; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under part of the cardinal tooth, very perceptible ; cavity of the beaks deep and sub-angular ; nacre w^hite, pearly, and iridescent, rarely tinted vv^ith rose in the centre. Remarks. — This beautiful little shell is generally an inch long, rarely two. It is common in our cabinets, and has been considered the " rotundata" of Lamarck. I am induced, how^ever, to think it different from our shell, as the circulus never possesses the fold mentioned in that eminent concholo- gist's very short description. The two colours disposed in so peculiar a manner in the epidermis are not mentioned by him. It differs also greatly in size. I have seen some hun- dreds, the largest of which was two inches in breadth. The ^^ rotundata" is 78 millimetres; audits habitat is unknown. The margin of the circulus is more perfectly round than any other species ; it is sometimes disposed to be subangular posteriorly. The division of the colour on the umbonial slope is very peculiar. When the posterior slope is looked on, this view of the shell is heart shaped, and the dark brown colour is seen entirely to surround the light yellow brown. The epidermis is more satin-like than any other species, and the teeth are peculiarly disposed to be double. In form it approaches the " torso" more closely than any other species. 7. Unio Multi-radiatus. Plate IX. fig. 15. Testa elliptica, inmquilaterali, ventricosd, muUi-radiatd ; valvulis te- nuibus ; natibus prominulis ; dentibus cardinalibus erectis, et in valvu- lis ambabus duplicibus ; lateralibus lamelliformibus et abruptis ; mar- garitd cceruleo-albd. Shell elliptical, inequilateral, ventricose, much rayed; valves thin; beaks rather prominent ; cardinal teeth erect and double in both valves ; lateral teeth lamelliform and abrupt ; nacre bluish white. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 435 Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. * My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vannxem. Diam. -8, Length 1.3, Breadth 2 inches. Shell elliptical, inequilateral, ventricose ; substance of the shell thin, the rays being very visible through the nacre ; beaks prominent and slightly undulated ; epidermis bright olive yellow, with numerous green rays passing from the beaks to every part of the margin ; slightly wrinkled, smooth and glossy ; cardinal tooth double in both valves and deeply cleft; lateral tooth lamelliform, nearly straight, higher near the termination, termination abrupt ; anterior cicatrices dis- tinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under part of the cardinal tooth, and within the margin of the cavity of the beaks ; cavity of the beaks large and round- ed ; nacre pearly w^hite and iridescent, thin, showing the rays very distinctly through it, and presenting a wide margin. Remarks. — This beautiful shell resembles most the young cariosus of the Ohio and other western waters. It differs, however, in being much less ponderous, possessing more mi- nute rays, being rather more ventricose, having more elevated teeth and more prominent beaks. 8. Unio Occidens. Plate X. fig. 16. Testa sub-ellipticd, inmquilaterali, transversa, ventricosd ; valvulis crassis ; natibus sub-undulatis, raro decorticatis ; ligamento sub-brevi crassoque; dentibus elevatis ; margaritd alba. Shell inequilateral, sub-elliptical, transverse, ventricose; valves thick; beaks slightly undulated, rarely decorticated ; ligament rather short and thick; teeth elevated ; nacre white. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. VOL. III. — 5 s 436 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES • Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Cabinet of Peale's Museum. Diam. 1-6, Length 2-3, Breadth 3*4 inches. Shell ovate, inequilateral, sub-elliptical, transverse, very ventricose ; substance of the shell somewhat thick ; beaks large, prominent, rounded, approaching, slightly undulated, rarely decorticated; ligament short and thick; epidermis slightly wrinkled, shining, olive yellow, with green rays pas- sing obliquely from the beaks to the margin, most numerous on the posterior slope ; cardinal teeth double and very promi- nent in both valves ; in the left valve the cleft is deep and both prongs rake much, the outer most elevated ; in the right valve the cleft is also deep, and the inner prong is broad, flat, curved, and most elevated ; lateral teeth short and very lamel- liform, the termination declining rather suddenly ; anterior cicatrices generally distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cicatrices very perceptible, the line commencing with quite a large one on the under side of the callus between the lateral and cardinal teeth, and terminating at the outer part of the base of the cardinal tooth ; marginal cicatrix very perceptible ; cavity of the beaks deep, large and rounded ; nacre milk white, rarely iridescent. Remarks. — The specimen figured is the finest I have ever seen of this species, and, taking it altogether, perhaps of any other of the genus. The rays are very remarkably fine, and the nacre is purer and whiter than the finest porcelain. It is very frequently, however, found with few or no rays, and the na- cre, though milk-white and pure generally, is not always so. The double, deeply cleft, cardinal tooth of both valves, and the raking position of that of the left valve are peculiar to the species possessing this general form, which includes the ova- tus and ventricosus. It seems to form the link between these two. It differs from the ovatus in not possessing the flat PLJC Vol.3. Unio occMens. Urai-ftX^nfi hyJJJrayf. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES, 437 posterior slope, and from the ventricosus in not being globose over the umbones ; ^nd of course is much less in diameter. The quite large impression of the mantle under the callus, between the lateral and cardinal teeth, is very remarkable in these three species. 9, Unio Securis, Plate XI, fig, 17. Testa subtriangulari, inaquilaterali, per umbones valde complanatd ; valvulis crassis ; natibus elevatis, recurvatis, compressissimisque ; dente cardinali magno, laterali crasso; ligamento breviusculo, crassoque ; margaritd alba et iridescente. Shell sub-triangular, inequilateral, flattened over the umbones; valves thick; beaks elevated, recurved, much compressed; cardinal tooth large; lateral tooth thick ; ligament rather short and thick ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea, My Cabinet. Cabinet of T, G, Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Unio depressa of Rafinesque. Diam. -9, Length 1-5, Breadth 1-9 inches. Shell sub-triangular, transversely wrinkled, inequilateral, much flattened over the umbones; substance of the shell thick, often ponderous; beaks elevated, much compressed, recurved ; dorsal margin angular ; posterior dorsal margin ob- lique; posterior margin angular; basal and posterior basal margin curved : anterior and anterior basal and dorsal mar- gins round ; posterior slope flattened, this view presents the shell as a long ellipsis ; epidermis olive-yellow passing into olive-brown, shining and transversely wrinkled ; rays formed by small spots, alternately darker and lighter than the gene- ral colour of the epidermis, which cause the rays to look like a mintite chain, these rays are from one to two eighths of an inch apart, and extend over the whole disk, the spaces be- 438 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES tween are supplied with numerous hair-like lines, the whole passing in a curve from the heak to the margin ; cardinal tooth large, irregularly cleft and sulcated ; lateral tooth rather short and thick, in the right valve disposed to he double ; an- terior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices also distinct, the small one being placed against the termination of the lateral tooth ; dorsal cicatrices situated on the under side of the car- dinal tooth ; cavity of the beaks shallow and rounded ; cavity of the disk small ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks. — Mr Rafinesque first observed this singular and interesting species. He found a single specimen near Evam- ville, Indiana, and described it under the name of U. de- pressa, which name being preoccupied by Lamarck, I have considered it incumbent on me to give it a new name. Many specimens have come under my inspection, and the shell be- ing a very remarkable one, I am induced, in consequence of Mr Rafinesque's short description and imperfect figure, to give a more full description and a correct figure. It is alto- gether peculiar in its rays and its very compressed beaks ; no species is so flat over the umbones, and no other species pre- sents, when the posterior slope is held towards the observer, a long ellipsis, the widest part of which is about the centre. In consequence of the beaks being so very much compressed, the junior, when not more than an inch long, is exceed- ingly flat, and the cavity proportionally small. When the shell increases beyond this it seems to become suddenly thick, and its form becomes more rounded towards the margins, consequently the adult is very different in form from the junior, which might easily be mistaken for another species. It is more generally gaping at the anterior margin than the other species. It assimilates closely to the planulatus (de- scribed in this paper), but differs in the rays, the much compressed beaks, and being more hatchet shape. In the last character it resembles somewhat the rubiginosus descri- bed in this paper. It sometimes occurs twice the size of the one represented here. ^\. Ihtorn X£^i^'d *)■ J.lh-ftyun OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 439 10. Unio Iris. Plate XI. fig. 18. Testa angusto-ellipticd, incEquilaterali, sub-ventricosa ; valvulis tenui- bus ; natibits prominulis ; dente cardinali in valvuld sinislra, duplici, in dextrd sub-bifido, parvo, erecto ; dentibus lateralibus longis tenuibusque ; margarita sub-cceruleo-albd. Shell narrow-elliptical, inequilateral, slightly ventricose ; valves thin, beaks slightly prominent; cardinal teeth double in the left valve, sub- bifid in the right, small, erect ; lateral teeth long and thin ; nacre bluish white. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Diam. -5, Length -8, Breadth 1-6 inches. Shell long-elliptical, inequilateral, slightly ventricose ; sub- stance of the shell thin, showing the rays through it, rather more dense before than behind ; beaks slightly prominent, approaching, crowned with double concentric undulations when they are not decorticated; ligament rather long and thin; epidermis yellowish green, transversely wrinkled, mark- ed with many oblique diverging rays passing from the beaks to the margin ; cardinal teeth double in both valves, small, erect, and sharp ; lateral teeth long, bladed, slightly curved and situ- ated on the edge of the margin in contact with the ligament ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent and scarcely perceptible ; dorsal cicatrices within the cavity of the beaks, the largest on the under part of the callus ; nacre very thin, milk white anteriorly, bluish white and iridescent pos- teriorly. Remarks. — ^This species most resembles the calceolus. It differs, however, entirely in the teeth, which are distinct and well defined. The calceolus approaches closely to the genus Alasmoilonta of Say. This is less ventricose and possesses more rays, VOL. III. — 5 T 440 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES 11. Unio Zig-zag. Plate XII. fig. 19. Testa ovata, incBquilaterali, ventricosd; valvulis sub-crassis; dentibus cardinalibus magnis, erectis ; lateralibus curvatis ; natibus prominulis ; radiis ex lineis angulatis compositis ; ligamento brevi crassoque ; marga- ritd alba. Shell ovate, inequilateral, ventricose ; valves rather thick; cardinal teeth large, erect ; lateral teeth curved; beaks rather prominent; rays composed of zig-zag lines ; ligament short and thick ; nacre pearly white. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Cabinet of Peale's Museum. Diam. -6, Length '9, Breadth 1-5 inches. Shell ovate, inequilateral, ventricose ; substance of the shell thick; beaks rather prominent, subcarinate posteriorly, gene- rally eroded ; ligament short and thick ; epidermis yellow in ground, but traversed by oblique green rays, which give it sometimes a dark hue ; these rays pass from the beaks to the margin over the whole disk, and are formed by zig-zag lines, which in some specimens are joined so closely as to become confluent ; on the posterior slope are irregular lines converging below the ligament; cardinal teeth large, deeply divided in the left valve; lateral teeth slightly curved; anterior cica- trices distinct, as are also the posterior, the smaller of which is placed against the side of the lateral tooth at its termina- tion ; dorsal cicatrices situated along the base of the cardinal tooth within the cavity of the beaks ; cavity of the beaks shallow ; nacre pearly white and iridescent. Remarks. — This beautiful little shell is about the size of Barnes's parvus. It is however entirely distinct from it. It is much heavier, more ovate, and radiated; has no concentric undulations at the beaks like the parvus, which character Mr FL.XU vol3. SynipliytLOta L'ompTiS.'a. Unio zUf-za^ . C^nia pacuiuj: DramidiSnffijJDrt. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 441 Barnes does not mention, and is yellowish, not brownish. This and the donaciformis are all I know which possess the zig-zag markings, and they most resemble each other. 12. Unio Patulus. Plate XII. fig. 20. Testa ovatd, compressd, cuneiformi, incBquilaterali, ohliqua, trans- versa ; umhonibus compressis ; valvulis sub-crassis ; natibus sxib-termi- nalibus ; dente cardinaliparvo ; laterali longo et sub-curvato ; tnargarita alba. Shell ovate, compressed, wedge-shaped, inequilateral, oblique, trans- verse, compressed on the umbones; valves rather thick; beaks nearly terminal ; cardinal tooth small ; lateral tooth long and slightly curved ; nacre pearly white. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Diam. -8, Length 1-4, Breadth 2-3 inches. Shell compressed, wedge-shaped, ovate, broad and flat ; sub- stance of the shell thick anteriorly and thin posteriorly, show- ing the rays through it ; beaks nearly terminal, slightly pro- minent, approaching, and when perfect possessing slight concentric undulations, generally decorticated ; ligament not large, passing from the point of the beaks ; epidermis yellow- ish brown, transversely wrinkled, marked with more or less broad interrupted rays, apparently formed of fasciculi of hair- like lines ; cardinal tooth short, and but slightly elevated, in the left valve double and deeply cleft, in the right valve emerging from a pit ; lateral tooth long and slightly curved ; posterior cicatrices as well as anterior cicatrices distinct ; the smaller posterior cicatrix situated against the lateral tooth at its termination ; dorsal cicatrices on the under part of the car- dinal tooth ; cavity of the beaks not deep but rounded ; nacre thick and milk white anteriorly, thin and iridescent poste- riorly. 442 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES Bemarks. — This species approaches closely to the scalenia of Rafinesque ; its rays are of the same description, and the general form is the same. It is, however, more flattened, has much less elevated beaks, and its diameter is alvs^ays much less. Its beaks are generally but little decorticated, and not recurv- ed ; the scalenia is generally much recurved and decorticated. GENUS SYMPHYNOTA. Testa fluviatili, bivalvi ; valvulis superne connatis. Shell flaviatile, bivalve ; valves connate at the dorsal margin. Animal same as that of Unio. Hemarks. — Objections will most likely be made to the in- troduction of a new genus into a family acknowledged already to be in great confusion, and presenting many and various difficulties. The formation of the genus Symphynota, it is hoped, will rather be conducive to a diminution of that diffi- culty, by a division which all must acknowledge to be as na- tural as any of those of the family. The distinctive charac- teristic of this genus is the testaceous connection of the two valves of the shell above the hinge. I therefore remove from the existing genera all the connate shells without regard to the forms of their teeth, believing, that should this family be hereafter remodelled, it will present only two natural genera ; one having a testaceous connection of the valves, the other dispossessed of it. The difficulties attending the adopted ge- nera of the Naiades^ viz. Unio of Bruguiere, Hyria, Ana- donta, Iridina, Castalia* of Lamarck, Dipsas of Leach, and * This genus was placed by Lamarck in the family Trigoncea, certainly with no propriety. It has been placed by Sowerby and Latreille among the Naiadet, OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 443 Jllasmodonta of Say, have been mentioned by two eminent English conchologists, W. Swainson and G. B. Sowerby, as well as in America by P. H. Nicklin. Mr Sowerby (Zool. Jom'n. Vol. I. p. 55.) has reunited them under the name of Unio, of which he makes two great divisions : 1 . Without teeth. 2. With teeth ; and these are each subdivided into "winged" and "not winged;" which are again divided into the various forms of teeth, or the "hinge line." The evident objection to this arrangement is the difficulty of deciding upon the passage from the " not ranged" to the " winged." Thus we do not find the Anodonta tnqjezialis and Jlnodonta glauca, w^hich Lamarck describes as " compresso-alatd,'^ men- tioned among the " winged," while we have " Anodon alatus of Swainson and Lamarck," which is .not described in the "Hist. Nat. des Animaux sans Vertebres*." It is evident that the apparatus for depositing the calca- reous and epidermal matter on the elevated and connected wing must be different from that of the inhabitant of free valves, to which it has been denied by nature. Lamarck and Barnes both mention in their description of the U. alatus of Say, that M. Le Sueur thought this shell should constitute a new genus. Since that time so many connate shells have come to my notice, that I feel satisfied the science of conchology will be subserved by the institution of this natural genus, which will embrace, in all probability, several others, viz. Hyria of Lamarck, Dipsas of Leach, and Cristaria, Prisodon, and Paxyodon of Schumacher, all of which, when they shall be found perfect, will most probably turn out to be connate shells. Lamarck suspected his Hyria to be connate, like the U. alatus; for when describing that spe- cies, he says, "Nos Hyries auraient-elles une pareille reunion and here must be considei'ed as a species of Unio, and not a genus. The ob- servant M. De Blainville has placed Castalia and Hyria among the Uniones, and Iridina and Dipsas among the Anadontm. Castalia amhigua is undoubtedly a fluviatile shell, and approaches most closely to the U. triangularis. The teeth are those of the Unio, and it differs only in its longitudinal furrows from the gene- ral characters of the Unio. * Say describes his An. gibhosa as being alated. VOL. III. — 5 u 444 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES a la carene de leiir corselet ?" Indeed the fact can scarcely be doubted. SPECIES. 1. Symphynota Ljevissima. Plate XIII. fig. 23. Testa ovato-triangulari, inmquilaterali, transversim rugosd, sub-ven- tricosd ; valvulis temiissimis, superne bi-alatis, ante et post nates conna- tisque ; dentibus cardinalibus et lateralibus lineam curvatam facienti- bus ; natibus prominulis ; ligamento celato; margaritd purpurea et iridescente. Shell triangular-ovate, inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, sub-ven- tricose ; valves very thin, elevated into two wings, connate anteriorly and posteriorly to the beaks ; cardinal and lateral teeth form a curve line ; beaks scarcely prominent ; ligament concealed ; nacre purple and irides- cent. Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Diam. 1-4 inch. Length from beaks to base, 2-4 inches. Breadth 4-5 inches. Length from the top of the wing to base, 3-1 inches. Shell sub-triangular-ovate, inequilateral, sub-ventricose, transversely and very finely w^rinkled, shining ; substance of the shell thin, but compact ; valves elevated into two wings, neither of them very high, the posterior one larger than the anterior, both connate ; beaks scarcely prominent, termina- tion pointed, and when not decorticated exhibit two or three very minute elevations, almost requiring a microscope to dis- cover them ; the purple nacre shows through the epidermis here, and gives the tips that colour ; ligament concealed in the wing ; sinus subquadrate ; epidermis thin and purple brown ; young specimens sometimes possess obscure brown rays ; car- dinal tooth lamelliform, single in the left valve and disposed to PL_Xm vc.l?. S] inpli urwta hn ■ts-nma Sratm 6:En^i'yfJ)r>v,'tm . OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 445 be double in the right; lateral tooth lamelliform and double in the left valve only, the tvs^o teeth form one continuous curve line, somewhat abrupt at both terminations, more so at the anterior one ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cica- trices confluent; dorsal cicatrices very perceptible. Cavity of the beaks vs^ide and very shallow ; nacre purple and irides- cent. JRemarks. — This beautiful shell most resembles the Sym- phynota alatci in its general form, but its posterior wing is less elevated. The colour of its nacre is the same. It differs entirely, however, in the cardinal tooth, and in possessing the anterior connate wing. A metallic sound is produced by dropping one valve into the other, which is very remarka- ble, and is caused by the density of the calcareous matter of the nacre, which is very thin. The epidermis is exceedingly smooth and glossy. 2. Symphynota Bi-alata. Plate XIV. fig. 24. Testa ovato-triangulari, inaquilaterali, transversim rugosd, sub-ven- tricosd ; margine dorsali bi-alatd ; valvulis tenuibus, ante et post nates connatis ; natibus et alcB posterioris bast apiceque undulatis ; natibus haud prominentibus ; dente laniellifo7"mi unico in valvuld utrdque; liga- mento celato ; margaritd tenui et iridescente. Shell triangular-ovate, inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, sub-ven- tricose; dorsal margin raised into two wings; valves thin, connate before and behind the beaks ; beaks and the base and summit of the posterior wing undulated ; beaks not prominent; one lamelliform curved tooth in each valve ; ligament concealed; nacre thin, pearly, and iridescent. Hab fresh waters of the south of Asia ? Brought from Canton by Captain Barr. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Pierpoint. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Cabinet of Mr Phillips. 446 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES Diam. 1 inch. Length from the beaks to the base, 2 inches. Breadth 3-6 inches. Length from the top of wing to base, 3-4 inches. Shell triangular-ovate, inequilateral, subventricose, trans- versely and finely wrinkled, shining ; substance of the shell thin, showing the rays through it ; valves elevated into a broad high wing posterior, and a small one, anterior to the beaks, and connate in both ; beautifully undulated at the base and top of the posterior wing ; undulations of the base commenc- ing at the point of the beaks, pass on the outside of the tooth to the margin in a slightly curved line, each successive wave increasing in size and cutting the wrinkles of the epidermis obliquely ; those of the top of the wing, when it is perfect, are about the same in number, but less elevated, and closer toge- ther ; they cut the wrinkles at about the same angle ; beaks not prominent, crowned with about six elliptical concentric undulations ; ligament concealed in the wing ; sinus formed by the end of the ligament, sub-quadrate ; epidermis yellow and purple brown, with green oblique rays, finely wrinkled, smooth and shining ; the wrinkles of the anterior wing, as they ascend the wing, are curved anteriorly and continuous over both wings ; each valve furnished with a long, curved, lamel- liform tooth, very small anteriorly to the beaks, larger and longer posteriorly, pointed at both ends ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices situa- ted in the cavity of the beaks, very perceptible ; cavity of the beaks wide and very shallow ; nacre thin, pearly, and irides- cent, with tints of salmon, white and purple ; the undulations very perceptible from the centre of the beaks along the base of the tooth to the posterior dorsal margin. Remarks. — All the specimens which I have seen of this remarkable species were brought from Canton. The first was received by Mr Hyde about two years since, and then excited much interest with our conchologists. Several speci- mens more perfect were brought last summer in the " Cale- donia ;" and from these specimens the description has been Jr'L.XIVVol.S. Svinphyiiota hi-alaUi . Drawn Ml^yif'd frv XBrayt OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 447 made. That of Mr Hyde is a large, old, and valuable speci- men, but has lost some of its important characters. Both wings are destroyed, the beaks much eroded, and the epider- mis black and much wrinkled, and the rays obsolete. The remarkable waves at the base of the posterior wing are almost obsolete, and the beauty of the nacre nearly destroyed by be- ing thick and opake; cicatrices very perceptible. In this specimen, and I believe it will occur in all adult individuals, the only remains of the lamelliform tooth are in the termina- tion of it under the ligament, about an inch long; the rest of it is lost in the callus of the dorsal margin. Its dimen- sions are Diam, 2-1, Length 5-5, Breadth 7*1 inches. In general form and character this species exteriorly resem- bles most the Symphynota alata ; interiorly, except in colour, the Symphynota Isevissima, herein described ; the shape of the lamelliform tooth of which assimilates to it, with the excep- tion of its being double. The teeth in both these species de- scribe nearly the same arc and take the same position. Both species are alated anteriorly and posteriorly to the beaks. The kevissima differs in having no undulations, and possessing obsolete rays, double teeth, and purple nacre. The Dipsas plicatus of Leach bears a strong resemblance to this shell. It differs, however, in the wings of the D. pli- catus not being elevated, almost forming a line with the beaks, in the latter not being connate, and in not being crown- ed with undulations at the beaks. His description, however, is so short and defective, and the drawing evidently so badly executed, that I cannot determine in what other points it may differ. Schumacher's Cristaria tuberculata bears a strong affinity to this species also, as well in his description as his plate. He describes and figures it, however, as being alated posteriorly, and not anteriorly, and does not mention its being connate. The fact of its possessing a divided lateral tooth, '' callus pa- rallelus bifidus," proves that it is not our species. VOL. III. — 5 X 448 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES 3. Symphynota Alata. Testci ovato-triangulari, transversim rugosa, suh-compressa ; valvulis crassiusculis, earum marginibus dorsalibus alatis, et supei' ligamento connatis ; dente cardinali in valvulis ambabus duplici, laterali in sinis- tra tantum duplici, subcurvato ; ligamento sub aid celato; natibus pro- minulis ; margarita purpurea. Shell triangular-ovate, transversely wrinkled, rather compressed ; valves moderately thick, elevated into a high wing, and connate over the ligament ; beaks scarcely prominent ; cardinal tooth double in both valves; lateral tooth double in the left valve only, and slightly curved; ligament concealed ; nacre purple. Hab. our western waters. Unio alatus. Say. Nicholson's Encyclopaedia (Am. Ed.) Art. Am. Conch, pi. 4, fig. 2.* Unio alata. Lamarck. Unio alatus. Barnes. Silliman's Am. Journ. Vol. VI. Unio alata. Swainson. Diam. 2, Length 4-7, Breadth, 6*9 inches.f Remarks. — In young specimens it appears disposed to he connate anteriorly to the beaks also. The dorsal cicatrices form quite a row across the cavity. 4. Symphynota Complanata. Testa ovato-triangulari, iniBquilaterali, transversim rugosd, compres- sd ; valvulis crassis; mar gine posteriori dorsali alata connatdque ; dente unico cardinali in valvuld utrdque ; piano irregulari calloso sub liga- mento ; natibus compressis, sub-prominulis ; ligamento celato ; marga- rita alba, iridescenti. Shell triangular-ovate, J inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, com- * This figure was made from an imperfect specimen, the wing being mutilated, t See Barnes's description. I Mr Barnes says " ovately quadrangular ;" but the shell is evidently more tri- angular, as his figure displays it. See Silliman's Am. Journ. Vol. VI. p. 278. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 449 pressed ; valves thick ; posterior dorsal margin winged and connate ; a large cardinal tooth in each valve ; an irregular callous plane under the ligament ; beaks compressed and scarcely projecting ; ligament conceal- ed ; nacre white and iridescent. TFox River. Mr Schoolcraft. Hab. < Wisconsan. Captain Douglass. ^Ohio. W. Cooper. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Barnes. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of the New York Lyceum. Cabinet of Dr Mitchill. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Alasmodonta complcmata. Barnes. Diam. -9 — 1-4 inches. Length from beaks to base, 3 inches. Breadth 5 inches. Length from the top of the wing, 4-3 — 4-5 inches.* Shell triangular-ovate, inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, compressed, the largest diameter being nearly 2-3 ds of the dis- tance from the beaks to the base ; substance of the shell thick ; valves elevated into a moderately sized wing over the ligament, and connate; this wing is traversed at right angles to the wrinkles, by obscure undulations reaching to the beaks ; beaks much compressed and scarcely projecting, cro^vned by seve- ral double concentric undulations, which terminate in a point ; ligament concealed in the wing ; sinus subquadrate ; epider- mis dark brown and irregularly vrrinkled; cardinal tooth thick, elevated, sulcated, and diverging from the beaks ; a wide, irregular callous plane extends under the ligament ; cicatrices in the anterior margin three, and irregular ; in the posterior margin two, confluent and scarcely perceptible ; dorsal cica- trices very perceptible ; cavity of the beaks and disk small ; nacre white and iridescent. Remarks. — This shell, first described by Barnes, is a rare * See Barnes's description ; my specimen is rather more ventricose. 450 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES and beautiful species. It is peculiar in its very much com- pressed beaks, and in its greatest diameter being but a short distance above the basal margin. 5. Symphynota Compressa. Plate XII. fig. 22. Testa transversim elongata, incequilaterali, valde compressa, ellipticd ; valvulis tenuibus ; natibus sub-prominulis, imdulatis ; dente cardinali prominente ; laterali parvo. Shell transversely elongated, inequilateral, compressed, elliptical ; valves thin ; beaks scarcely prominent, undulated ; cardinal tooth promi- nent; lateral tooth small. jj^^ C Ohio. T. G. Lea. \ Norman's Kill, near Albany. Dr Eights. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of Dr Eights. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Cabinet of the New York Lyceum. Diam. -S, Length 1*7, Breadth 2-8 inches. Shell transverse, much compressed, elliptical; substance of the shell rather thin; beaks slightly elevated, not decortica- ted, beautifully crowned with small double concentric undu- lations, points of the beaks almost white ; ligament concealed within the valves ; dorsal margin rather elevated posteriorly to the beaks ; posterior margin sub-angular ; posterior basal and basal margins curved ; anterior and anterior dorsal and basal margins rounded ; epidermis olive-green, slightly wrin- kled and glabrous ; radiations over the whole disk ; cardinal tooth prominent and curved, in the left valve with three pro- tuberances, the posterior the highest, sloping to the end of the lateral tooth, the anterior the lowest ; in the right valve one rather large, which closes between the first and second of the left; lateral tooth short and nearly straight, passing from OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 451 the very point of the beaks, in the right valve lamellar near the termination, and abrupt : in the left acicular, the channel being only large enough to admit of the edge of a penknife ; in the right valve the cardinal and lateral teeth are entirely separated by a cavity formed by the tooth of the other valve, this cavity is at the very point of the beak, and therefore the valve has little or no cavity ; in the left valve the large recurv- ed tooth forms a beautiful angular cavity ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices situ- ated at the point of the cavity of the beaks ; cavity of the shell very shallow ; nacre delicate salmon colour towards the beaks, bluish towards the margin. Remarks. — This is a singular and beautiful shell. Its cardinal and lateral teeth ai'e very remarkable. The first being high in the left valve over the cavity of the beak, while in the right it is there depressed ; the latter is short and 1am- elliform at termination. The beaks are equally remai'kable, being finely undulated; the epidermis is so thin and delicate as to give them almost a white appearance. The rays are broader and more full than in any shell I have seen ; they diverge in all directions from the point of the beaks to the margin. The specimen belonging to the cabinet of the New York Lyceum, was kindly sent for my inspection by W. Cooper, a member of that valuable institution. It was given by Dr Eights to Mr Barnes, and by the latter labelled '■•U. alasmo- dontina.'' My description was written some years since, but remained unpublished until I should have an opportunity of examining other specimens. VOL. III. — 5 ¥ 452 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES 6. Symphynota Gracilis- Testd suh-triangulari-ovata, incequilaterali, iransversim rugosd, sub- compressd ; valvulis tenuibus fragilibusque ; margine posteriori dorsali sub-alatd, connatdque ; dente cardinali invalvuld dextrd elevate, recurvo; nalibus sub-prominulis ; ligamento celato ; margaritd violaceo-purpured et iridescente. Shell sub-triangular-ovate, inequilateral, transversely vifrinkled, rather compressed ; valves thin and fragile ; posterior dorsal margin connate, wing but little elevated ; cardinal tooth of right valve elevated, recurved; beaks scarcely prominent; ligament concealed; nacre pearly, violet- purple, and iridescent. jj^^ C Ohio. T. G. Lea. I Wisconsan. Mr Schoolcraft. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Barnes. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H, Nicklin. Cabinet of Mr Swainson. Cabinet of the New York Lyceum. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Unio gracilis. Barnes. Silliman's Amer. Journ. Vol. VL p. 174. Unio fragilis. Swainson*. Unio planus. Barnes. Diam. 1 — 1-2, Length 2-2 — 2-5 inches. Breadth 3-1 — 4-1 inchesf. Shell sub-triangular-ovate, inequilateral, transversely wrink- led, rather compressed ; substance of the shell thin ; valves ele- vated into a small wing over the ligament and connate ; beaks slightly prominent, pointed, having two or three minute ele- vations ; ligament concealed in the wing ; epidermis yellow- * I have retained the specific name of Mr Barnes in preference to that of Mr Swainson in the right of priority. Mr B. published in January 1823. Mr S.'s dedication of 3d vol. of his Zool. Illus., in which i\\e fragilis is described, is dated Oct. 1823. t See Barnes's description. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 453 green, finely wrinkled, obscurely radiated and glabrous ; marks of growth very perceptible; cardinal tooth of right valve crest-like, recurved, and clasping the side of the opposite one : lateral teeth lamelliform and curved ; anterior cicatrices dis- tinct ; posterior cicatrices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices form a line across the cavity of the beaks, and are very perceptible ; cavity of the beaks very wide and shallow; nacre pearly, bluish-white, violet-purple and iridescent. Bemarks.— Mr Barnes noticed this as a connate shell. His description of the cardinal tooth does not agree with my spe- cimens, except in the younger ones, in which this tooth is more lamellar. The recurved tooth hooking or clasping the other, when the valves are closed, is very remarkable. In some specimens the lateral and cardinal teeth form an uninterrupted curve line, when the cardinal tooth is quite lamelliform ; in others the latter is small and lobed, age pro- ducing much effect on it in this respect. 7. Symphynota Tenuissima. Plate XI. fig. 21. Testa angusto-ellipticd, inaquilaterali, transversim rugosd, compressd ; valvulis tenuissimis fragillimisque ; margine dorsali connatd ; dent'e cardinali prominentid exigud, laterali unico et aciculari in valvuld utrd- que; natibus depressis ; ligamento celato ; margaritd cceruleo-albd et purpured, iridescente. Shell narrow-elliptical, inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, com- pressed ; valves very thin and very fragile ; dorsal margin connate ; car- dmal tooth a small lobe ; lateral tooth acicular and single in both valves; beaks depressed ; ligament concealed ; nacre bluish-white and purple' iridescent. ' Hab. Ohio. T. G. Lea. My Cabinet. Cabinet of T. G. Lea. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. 454 NEW GENUS AND S03IE NEW SPECIES Diam. -6, Length 2-2, Breadth 2-5 inches. Shell narrow-elliptical, inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, much compressed ; substance of the shell very thin ; valves con- nate over the ligament, and not elevated into a wing ; beaks scarcely prominent, pointed, nearly terminal ; epidermis wrin- kled, yellow, with very oblique green rays, which, when ap- parent, give a greenish hue to the shell ; rays more numerous and perceptible along the umbonial slope ; marks of growth very perceptible ; greatest diameter along the umbonial slope ; cardinal tooth of right valve a small lobe closing into a de- pression of the margin of the left valve ; lateral teeth acicu- lar, single in both valves, and nearly or quite direct ; anterior cicatrices distinct; posterior cicatrices confluent; dorsal cica- trices form a line across the cavity of the beaks, and are very perceptible; cavity of the beaks scarcely apparent; nacre bluish-white, purple about the region of the teeth and the cavity of the beaks. Remarlis. — This interesting species is the most fragile and thin of all the family of the Naiades which I have seen. The epidermis seems in some specimens to prevail over the sub- stance of the shell, which is so extremely brittle as almost to be destroyed in our cabinets by its contraction from the effect of the atmosphere. The beaks are so nearly terminal that it somewhat resembles the moiliola in this respect. It is the near- est approach to the Anodonta, having but the rudiments of teeth ; and I am much disposed to believe that the '• Anodon purpurascens" of Swainson is analogous to this shell. He had seen but one perfect specimen sent him by Mr Rafinesque from the "back settlements." I have seen many specimens of the tenuissima, all of which have the rudiments of the cardinal and lateral teeth. This shell exhibits to us the necessity of resort- ing to a more natural definite division of Naiades than that of the teeth. The tenuissima resembles most the gracilis. They differ, however, in the latter being much larger, more ovate, heavier, more ventricose, and not radiate. The teeth of the gracilis are well defined, which is not the case with this. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES, 455 8. Sy»iphynota Ochracea. Testa sub-ovata, inaquilaterali, transversim rugosd, inflald; valvulis post ligamentum connatis, tenuibus, fi-agilibus, et sine aid ; dentibus cardinalibus et lateralibus curvam lineam facientibus ; natibus promi- nentibtts ; ligamento conspicuo ; margaritd cceruleo-albd et ochraccd. Shell sub-ovate, inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, inflated ; valves thin and fragile, connate behind the ligament, not winged ; cardinal and lateral teeth forming a curve line ; beaks prominent ; ligament visible : nacre bluish-white and ochraceous. Hab. Schuylkill and Delaware. My Cabinet. Cabinet of Mr Say. Cabinet of Prof. Vanuxem. Cabinet of Mr Hyde. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Cabinet of Dr Griffith. Cabinet of P. H. Nicklin. Peale's Museum. Unio ochraceus. Say. Nicholson's Encyclopaedia, Art. Am. Conchol. pi. 2, fig. S. Diam. 1-3, Length 1-9, Breadth 2-9 inches. Shell sub-ovate, inequilateral, transversely wrinkled, infla- ted ; dorsal margin rectilinear ; valves thin and fragile, con- nate behind the ligament, not winged ; beaks full and pro- minent, with several concentric undulations ; ligament not voncealed; epidermis glossy, varying from yellow ochre to brown ochre, marked with oblique rays, most abundant behind; cardinal and lateral teeth lamelliform, forming a cui've line, in the right valve the cardinal tooth is double, in the left single ; anterior cicatrices distinct ; posterior cica- trices confluent ; dorsal cicatrices form a row across the ca- vity of the beaks, very perceptible ; cavity of the beaks large ; nacre bluish- white and ochraceous ; along the anterior basal margin thicker and tinged with red ; posterior margin iri- descent. VOL. in. — 5 z 456 NEW GENUS AND SOME NEW SPECIES Remarks. — This is a beautiful shell. It is remarkable in being connate behind the ligament; this connection, how- ever, is very small, and only perceptible in perfect specimens ; in the old ones it is separated. Fine specimens have been in our cabinets for years w^ithout our observing they were con- nate. The cardinal tooth being double in the right valve seems to have escaped the attention of the observant Mr Say. 9. Symphynota Cygnea, Testa ovatd, antice lata et rotundatd, irregulariter transversim ru- gosd ; natibus retusis ; valvulis tenuibus et post ligamentum connatis. Shell ovate, wide before and round, with irregular transverse wrin- kles; beaks not prominent; valves thin and connate behind the liga- ment. Hab. rivers and lakes of Europe. My Cabinet. Mytilus cygneus. Lin. Gmel. p. 3555. Jlnodonta cygnea. Lam. Remarks. — It is a matter of surprize to me that this shell, so long known and so often described by European concho- logists, should not have been before observed to be connate. It has not to my knowledge been thus described. Among about a dozen specimens received from various parts of Europe, I have two which are decidedly and undoubtedly connate. One was sent to me by Count de Yoldi of Copenhagen, the other by W. Swainson, Esq. of London. These are the only spe- cimens I have seen with the dorsal margin unfractured, and it may be that even in their native beds they rarely exist in a perfect state with regard to this part. Young specimens would be more likely to be found perfect, if taken from pools or lakes where they remain undisturbed by the attrition of sand, &c. carried over them by the action of the water. OF THE FAMILY OF NAIADES. 457 In closing this paper, I take the opportunity of returning my thanks to those friends who have kindly loaned me their specimens for examination and comparison, and by whose ad- vice I have frequently profited. To P. H. Nicklin, Esq. I feel under peculiar obligations for frequent consultations and assistance ; and to W. Cooper, Esq. I am greatly indebted for the opportunity, through his means, of having in my posses- sion for some weeks the identical specimens appertaining to various valuable cabinets in New York, from which Mr Barnes made his descriptions. No. XIV. Remarks on the use of the Maxillse. in Coleopterous Insects, tvith an ticcount of tioo Species of the Family Telepho- riilse, and of three of the Family Mordellidee, which ought to be the Type of two distinct Genera. By N. M. Hentz. THE maxillBe in most coleopterous insects may not have as much influence in the masticating of the food as has been supposed. Latreille long ago has shown that Fahri- cius's characters of his Eleutherata and Synistata were erro- neous, since in all the grinding insects the maxillae are attached to or connected with the tongue. After mature considera- tion, I have even come to the conclusion that the maxillae, in many cases, must be considered only as appendages to the tongue, and that their use, then, is similar to that of this last organ; that is, to assist in the deglutition of food, while they seldom serve to grind or lacerate, excepting in the Melolon- thidse, Butelidae, and a few more, where there seems to be a departure from their primary use. De Geer, quoted by Kir- by and Spence, long ago observed in Leptura quadrifasciata that the maxillae were terminated by soft appendages, fringed with hair. There the chief use of the maxillae could not be mistaken ; they are evidently employed to penetrate into the corolla of flowers, somewhat in the same manner as the antlia of Lepidopterous insects. We are already acquainted with the genus Nemognatha, established by lUiger, where the maxillae can hardly have any power in masticating or lacera- ON THE MAXII.LJE IN COLEOPTEROUS INSECTS. 459 ting the food. I have been fortunate enough to discover a considerable number of insects, in which the configuration of that part of the mouth is such as to corroborate the idea ex- pressed in the sentence heading these remarks. The first to be mentioned seems to be the Ccmfharis mar- ginata of Fabricius, though the marking of the elytra differs in most varieties from the descriptions of that species. In this insect, the maxillae, if examined after desiccation, offer only one lobe, which is cleft or bifid. See Fig. I. h. But before it is dried, if the abdomen be pressed gradually, and then the thorax, there issues from the cleft of the lobe of the maxilla a soft, elastic, subconic body, of more than half its whole length, and extending beyond the palpi. Ano- ther body of the same nature issues nearly at a right an- gle from the base of the first, which is directed forward. This projection is about half the length of the first, and would seem to issue from, or possibly to constitute the lower lobe. Both are covered with short hairs. See Fig. I. e. These bodies, which the insect can protrude at will, can extend into the corollae of umbelliferous and other small flowers, and are used to collect uourishiuent. The next insect is the Canihnn's hiniaculnfa, F. The anomalous characteristics of the preceding exist in this in a more con- spicuous degree. "When the abdomen and thorax, still in a recent state, are pressed, there issues from each maxilla a soft tapering body covered with fine hairs. It is capable of great extension, as it may reach farther than the middle of the an- tennae, being then more than twice as long as the maxilla itself. See Fig. II. 6. e. These two insects are evidently congeneric and even bear great affinity to each other. A su- perficial observer might take one for the other. They would rather belong to Malthinus than to Telephonis, on account of the brevity of the elytra in relation to the abdomen, but I have been induced by several reasons to propose that these should constitute a new genus, which I will thus define : — VOL. III. — 6 A 460 ON THE USE OP THE MAXILIi^ FAMILY LAMPYRIDES. Genus Chauliognathus. Cantharis, Linn. Telephorus, Oliv. Malthinus, Lat. Antennae nearly as 1 )ng as the elytra ; mandibles arcuated, entire, apex acute ; maxillae with the upper lobe, at least, ex- tensible during life ; palpi with their last joint larger, subsecu- riform ; body soft ; elytra shorter than the abdomen ; head ge- nerally attenuated behind. I. Chauliognathus marginatus. Testaceous ; antennae and a bifurcated band on the vertex black ; a longitudinal band on the thorax, and an abbreviated one near the apex of the elytra black. Length (in a dried state) from 2-5ths to nearly half an inch. Inhabits North Carolina from May till the end of July. Description. — Head testaceous ; a line on the vertex which bifurcates towards the eyes black ; mandibles piceous at tip ; palpi piceous ; antennae black, first three joints rufous under- neath; thorax testaceous, subquadrate, not transverse, mar- gined with a longitudinal band black ; elytra testaceous, nar- rowed at tip, with an abbreviated band near the apex black ; a slightly elevated line near the suture diverging beyond the middle towards the humerus, Avhere it is obsolete ; beneath testaceous; postpectus darker; venter testaceous, segments black at base ; thighs pale ferruginous, black at tip ; tibias piceous, slightly ferruginous at base ; tarsi piceous. Var. a. Elytral band nearly reaching the base, where it bifurcates, inner bifurcation longest ; band of the thorax in- terrupted in two places. Var. /?. Elytra black; suture, margin and humerus tes- taceous. This is possibly the Cantharis marginata. Fab. Eleut. L p. 298. Var. y. Elytra testaceous, immaculate. IN COLEOPTEROUS INSECTS. ^ 461 Observations. This insect very muchi resembles the fol- lowing, but may be distinguished by its narrow thorax, the marking of the head and feet, its size, the time when it ap- pears, and, above all, by the difference in the form of its max- iUary appendages. Another great peculiarity, not mentioned in the description, is the existence of two bags, analogous to the caruncles of the prothorax of Malachius. These bags issue from the sides of the second segment of the abdo- men, within the pulmonaria and under the spiracula dor- salia ; and being capable of considerable distention, they seem to be composed of one lobe only. During life the abdo- men is much longer than the elytra, but it contracts much in drying. Neither this nor the next species live upon prey. They are both always found feeding on flowers, live long, and many, when about to die, grasp with their mandibles the petal of a flower, and may be found dried up in that state. II. Chauliognathus bimaculatus. Black ; thorax testaceous, with a spot black ; elytra testa- ceous, with an elongated spot near the apex black. Length (in a dried state) from 9-20ths to ll-20ths of an inch. Inhabits Pennsylvania and North Carolina, where it ap- pears in September and lives throughout October. Cantharis bimaculata. Fab. Eleut. I. 298. Description. — Head black; antennae black; palpi black; mandibles ferruginous, piceous at tip; labium ferruginous; thorax testaceous, margined, subtransverse, slightly broader at base with a central spot black ; elytra testaceous, slightly nar- rower at tip, with a spot or band covering about one half of each elytron, beginning near the apex black, a subobsolete elevated line near the suture, and diverging towards the hu- merus ; beneath piceous, edge of segments of the abdomen testaceous ; feet blackish ; tibiae of the anterior pair of legs ^€ 462 ON THE USE OF THE MAXILli^ piceous, covered with rufous hairs, those of the second and third pair with shorter and thinner hairs of the same colour. Observations. — This insect is one of the last to appear, and that in profusion, ahout the same time with Lytta atrata, till repeated frosts deprive it of food. The black spot on the thorax varies much ; it is usually subquadrate, but is some- times transverse, and sometimes longitudinal, but most com- monly indented at base as represented in Fig. II. I observed this insect about ten years ago in the month of August ; it was found on the blossom of thistles, where I had an oppor- tunity to see it protrude its maxillary appendage as the an- tliae of Lepidopterous insects. In this insect, as well as in the preceding, the abdomen extends at least three segments beyond the elytra, during life. The next insects in which I have observed a peculiar for- mation of the maxillae, all belong to the family Mordellonx, namely RMpiphorus dimidiatus, R. limiatus, and R. tristis. The remarkable elongation of the upper lobe of the maxillae, which is greater than at least in one species of Nemognatha, and other considerations have induced me to propose the es- tablishment of the following genus, taking R. dimidiatus for its type, and adding to it the two other species just men- tioned. FAMILY MORDELLON^. Genus Macro siagon. RMpiphorus, Bosc. Fab. &c. Tarsi with all their joints simple ; palpi subfiliform ; an- tennae pectinated ; maxillae with the upper lobe filiform, lon- ger than the palpi ; scutellum not apparent ; abdomen abruptly truncated ; elytra dehiscent, longer than the abdomen. See Fig. III. a, 6, c, d. PL.SXr. J ^ i szy i V 1£^ J) IN COLEOPTEROUS INSECTS. 463 Observations. — It is strange that a peculiarity belonging to three species, all known to Fabricius, should have escaped his notice. As the genus Rhipiphorus is now large, I think it is well to make a division, which is so natural and easily ob- served. All these insects live on flowers, and are very quick in their motions. Explanation of the Plate. Fig. I. Chauliognathus marginatus (Cantharis margina- ta? F.). a. mandible. b. maxilla in a dried state. c. labium and lingua. d. labrum. e. maxilla in a recent state, with its protruding appendage. /. caruncles, or ventral bags. Fig. II. Chauliognathus bimaculatus (Cantharis bimacula- ta,F.> «. mandible. b. maxilla when dried. c. labium and lingua. d. labrum. e. maxilla in a recent state, with its protruding appendage. Fig. III. Macrosiagon dimidiatum (Rhipiphorus dimidia- tus, F.). a. b. c. d. trophi.* * This paper was read before the Society September 19th, 1828. VOL. III. 6 B No. XV. Description of a New Species of the Genus Astacus. By E. Harlan, M.D. Sfc. Read April 3d, 1829. A. Bland IN Gii. Rostrum mucronate, canaliculate, slightly notched at the extremity : a spine behind each eye ; arms tuberculated ; fin- gers unequal. Inhabits the southern states, where it is common in the marshes and rivulets. Cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences. Presented by Dr W. Blanding, Camden, S. C. Description. — The hands and arms, and sides of the body tuberculated ; conspicuously large on the hands : thorax with a small spine on the side, behind the transverse arcuated band ; first and second joints of the peduncles of the exterior antennae furnished with each a single spine : rostrum elonga- ted, angular, attenuated anteriorly, and obsoletely notched near the extremity, extending nearly to the tip of the third joint of the peduncle of the exterior antenna, carinated on each side of the base, and terminating in a post-ocular spine : anterior feet, third joint very long, with a double longitudi- nal series of spines beneath : carpus four-spined ; spines irre- gularly distributed about the anterior margin : hands long, tuberculated throughout; fingers elongated, slightly curved NEW SPECIES OF THE GENUS ASTACUS. 465 inwards, the innermost the longest, terminating in a small spine opposed to the thumb : caudal lamellae ciliated, lateral segments with an elevated longitudinal spine; the penulti- mate and antipenultimate legs of the male furnished with an obtuse apophysis at the base of the second joint. Dimensions. — Length from the tip of the rostrum to the tip of the tail, three inches eight-tenths ; breadth of the tho- rax one inch ; length of the anterior feet nearly four inches ; length of the hand and finger nearly equal. The present species, in size and markings, is most nearly allied to the Jl. affinis of Say ; but differs in the form of the rostrum, in the proportional length of the arms ; in being fur- nished in the male with an apophysis on the third joint of both the penultimate and antepenultimate legs ; in the dispo- sition of the spines ; and in being tuberculated. The present species will bear no comparison with the ^. Bartonii, with which, nevertheless, Mr Say appears to have confounded it, when he assures us that the last mentioned species are " ex- tremely common in the pine barren marshes of the southern states, and particularly in those of Georgia and Florida." (Vid. Journal of the Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Vol. I. p. 443.) All the crawfish, which I have seen from the southern states, (and I have received specimens from New Orleans and South Carolina) are of the same species with that now de- scribed. No. XVI. Notice of an Anatomical Peculiarity observed in the Struc- ture of the Condor of the Ancles ; ( Vultur gryphus, Linn.) By R. Harlan, M.D. Bead April 3d, 1829. DURING the past year, two fine specimens, male and fe- male, of the Condor from Peru, died in this city, I caused their skins to he prepared, and they now constitute a valuable addition to the cabinet of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. On dissection the stomach presented a peculiarity of orga- nization, which appears to be characteristic of this species. The crop or ingluvies is vexy large, and was in this instance filled with macerated raw meat. The stomach, which was nearly empty (with the exception of some thick pieces of glass, stone coal, gravel, &c.) is oblong in form ; the cardiac portion being marked with longitudinal folds: the. middle portion displays two oval protuberances composed of gastric glands, which is again succeeded by a membranous or saccu- lar portion, on the interior surface of which are numerous and nearly contiguous, longitudinal bands or ridges, of a car- tilaginous structure, serrated or spiny on the surface towards the stomach, covering the pyloric or loM^ermost two-thirds of the stomach. This cartilaginous production, like the inner lining of the gizzard of the fowl, is easily detached. It must have considerable effect in facilitating the process of diges- tion, by tearing and separating the fibres of the meat with which these birds habitually gorge themselves, so as to be dis- abled, for a time, for flight. The liver is very large : the gall bladder was much distended with bile. No. XVII. On the Construction of Eclipses of the Sun. By John Gum- mere. Read March 20, 1829. WE may, without diminishing the accuracy of the re- sults, dispense with the description and division of an ellipse, which are necessary in the usual method of project- ing eclipses of the sun, and which render it so troublesome. This is most conveniently done, by supposing the sun's cen- tre to remain fixed in the centre of the circle of projec- tion, and giving to the moon a parallax in right ascension, equal in magnitude, but opposite in direction, to the distance of the projection of the sun's centre from the universal meri- dian, at the time ; and a parallax, parallel to the universal meridisin, or parallax in declination*, equal in magnitude, but opposite in direction, to the distance of the sun's centre from a plane passing through the centres of the sun and earth, perpendicular to the universal meridian. The figure to which I shall refer, is the construction of an eclipse of the sun, that will occur on the 1 2th of February 1831. It is adapted to the meridian and latitude of Philadelphia. The semicircle ACD represents the northern half of the circle of projection. AC is a parallel to the equator ; SU is the universal meridian ; SL a circle of latitude ; PQ the * These quantities are not, rigorously speaking, the moon's parallax in right as- cension and declination, but it is convenient to call them so. VOL. III. — 6 c 468 ON THE CONSTRUCTION moon's relative orbit; the points 23, 0, 1, 3, and 3, on the line PQ, are the moon's places at the hours denoted by the numbers ; the sun's place being supposed to be at S. All these are obtained as in the usual method. Make the arcs AF and CH, each equal to the reduced latitude of the place, and join FH. With the centre N and radius NF, describe the quadrantal arc FU. Make FI and FK, each equal to the sun's declination, and join KI and FS. Draw ar and \w, parallel to FN and SD re- spectively. On NH, make NT equal to Sr, and complete the rectangle NTXU. On XU, produced if necessary, take UV, equal to Iw, taking it to the right of SU, when the sun's declination is north, but to the left, when the decli- nation is south, and join VN. Take the hour angles from noon, corresponding to the hours marked on the relative orbit ; and on the arc UF, produced if necessary, set off from U, arcs equal to these angles, marking their extremities with the numbers of the hours to which the arcs correspond. From the extremities of the arcs, draw lines parallel to UX or FH, as the lines 1, a;; 2, a;; &c. meeting NU in the points M, and NV in the points v. Then will the distances 1, ?f»; 2, w ; &c. be the moon's parallax in right ascension at the 23d, 1st, 2d, &c. hours; and the corresponding distances vx, will be the parallax in declination. From the hour points on the moon's relative orbit, draw lines as 23, n; 1, w; &c. parallel to FH or AC; drawing them to the left hand, when the time is in the forenoon, but to the right hand, when the time is in the afternoon, and make them respectively equal to the parallax in right ascen- sion at these hours. From the points n, draw the lines n, xxiii ; n, O; &c. parallel to SU, drawing them below the point, n, and make them respectively equal to the moon's pa- rallax in declination at the corresponding hours. Join xxiii, O ; O, 1 ; &c. Then will the broken line thus formed be a near representation of the moon's apparent relative orbit ; and the points xxiii, O, 1, &c. will be the moon's places in the appa- rent orbit at those times. OF ECLIPSES OF THE SUN. 469 With the centre S, and sum of the semidiameters of the sun and moon, as a radius, describe arcs, cutting the apparent orbit in B and E, which will be the moon's apparent places at the times of beginning and end. From S, draw SG per- pendicular to a straight line joining B and E ; then G will be the moon's place at the time of greatest obscuration. And the point in which LS, produced if necessary, cuts the appa- rent orbit, is the moon's place at the time of apparent eclip- tic conjunction. Take the distance between the hour point next preceding the point B, and that next following it ; and applying it to the scale, obtain its measure. Do the same with the distance between B and the hour point next prece- ding. Then, as the 1st distance : 2d distance : : 60 min- utes : the time past the preceding hour at which the eclipse begins. The other times are found in the same manner ; and the quantity of the eclipse is found in the usual manner. Find the moon's parallax in right ascension and declination for the time of beginning, and make Sz equal to the parallax in declination. From z, draw 2Z, parallel to FH, drawing it to the right hand when the time is in the forenoon, but to the left when it is in the afternoon, and make it equal to the parallax in right ascension. Join SZ, which will repre- sent a vertical circle passing through the sun's centre ; and the angle BSZ will be the angular distance from the sun's vertex, of the point at which the eclipse commences. The slight changes necessary in the construction, for places near the equator or in the southern hemisphere, are so obvi- ous as not to require notice. In finding the times of beginning, &c. the moon's motion in the apparent orbit is assumed to be uniform during the hour, which is not strictly true. The greatest error, how- ever, that can arise from the assumption, is only about a mi- nute, when the latitude of the place is 40°. For higher latitudes it will be less ; and for places nearer the equator it will be rather more. The error that may arise from assum- ing the part of the apparent orbit, between two consecutive hour points, to be a straight line, will seldom be as great as 470 ON THE CONSTRUCTION OF ECLIPSES OF THE SUN. that which is sometimes produced by omitting to diminish the sun's semidiameter ; and this is usually omitted in the common method of projection. If the construction is made for each half hour, instead of each hour, which may be done with but little additional trouble, the error arising from the assumptions which have been mentioned will always fall within the unavoidable error of construction. This method of construction is equally applicable to oc- cultations of a star or planet. No. XVIII. Description of a Fragment of the Head of a New Fossil .Animal, discovered in a Marl Pit, near Moorestown, Neiv Jersey. By Isaac Hays, M.D. I am indebted for the opportunity of describing this spe- cimen to my friend Mr Isaac Lea, whose zeal in the cause of science is too well known to require any eulogium from me. It w^as found by Mr Joseph Brick in Inskeep's marl pit, on Pensauken creek, 5 miles south east of Moores- town. New Jersey ; and was presented by J. J. Spencer, M.D. of Moorestown to Mr Lea, in whose valuable cabinet it is at present. The marl in which it was found is of that description called fine green marl : the stratum is about ten feet thick, and commences about two feet from the surface. In this stratum are found marine shells, (principally tere- bratulae) shark's teeth, &c. The only part of this animal yet discovered is the frag- ment in the possession of Mr Lea, consisting of a portion of the head and lower jaw. Some of the bones are in a tolerable state of preservation ; others are covered with marl which has become too hard to be removed, or are so muti- lated that they cannot be satisfactorily made out. About three inches and four-tenths of the anterior portion of the lower jaw are preserved; the two sides are nearly parallel; anteriorly they are slightly mutilated — appear to have been very little rounded, and in contact; interiorly, through the whole extent of the fragment, they are in con- VOL. III. 6 D 472 DESCRIPTION OF A FRAGMENT OP tact, and appear to be united by suture ; posteriorly on each there is a smooth, shallow cavity, represented in PI. XVI. Fig. 3, d. d. Near the posterior extremity there is an appearance of suture, which is most distinct on the left side, and which in all probability marks the union of the dental with the coronoid bone. The angular bones cannot be very distinct- ly made out ; there is, however, on the left side near the base, and along the whole extent of the specimen, an indi- cation of suture, which I have no doubt is the union of the angular and dental bones. The dental bone contains a single row of distinct alveoli, continued in front, for the teeth ; just below the alveolar border there is a series of foramina, one foramen to each alveolus, for the transmission of the inferior maxillary nerve and the blood vessels to the teeth. The teeth of the lower jaw (and in the present specimen part of the dental bone, owing perhaps to its being crushed) close within the upper- Just within the dental bone, on the left side, there pro- jects a rectangular portion of bone. Fig. 2, and 4, s. be- longing to the upper jaw : its character and analogies are not very evident ; it is deficient on the right side. The intermaxillary bones are very distinct, and are seen in Fig. 1, 2, and 4, b.; they are united posteriorly by squamous suture to the upper maxillary, and a bone which appears to be the lachrymal. Anteriorly the intermaxilla- ries are rounded, and separated about one-tenth of an inch ; the anterior inferior portion of each is mutilated, but the alveoli for the teeth are conspicuous, and from their direc- tion we are led to infer that the upper front teeth project beyond the lower; the posterior inferior portions of this bone, each side, contain four or five teeth. Between the intermaxillary and upper maxillary bones on each side, and covered principally by the former, is a bone. Figs. 1, and 2, g", (the lachrymal probably,) in the an- terior portion of which is a deep groove, Fig. 2, f, passing forwards and downwards, and becoming smaller as it de- scends ; on the upper portion of each of these bones there THE HEAD OF A NEW FOSSIL, ANIMAL. 473 is a small, smooth, superficial groove. Fig. 2, A, and on its inner side, a small, smooth, slightly convex, apparently ar- ticulating surface, Fig. 2, i. The general figure of the upper maxillary hone will be better understood by a vievv^ of the drawing, Fig. 1, c. than by any verbal description ; this bone is imperfect posteriorly. Superior and anteriorly, near its junction with the last de- scribed bone, the upper maxillary has a smooth, apparently articulating surface, convex antero-posteriorly, and inclining a little inwards. Fig. 2, g.; like the dental and inter- maxillary bones, this has also distinct alveoli for the teeth ; and near its alveolar margin, on the inner surface, there is a regular series of foramina, similar to those in the dental bone, for the transmission of the superior maxillary nerve and vessels to the teeth. The external surface of this bone and also of the intermaxillary, where not broken, presents a shagreened appearance. The teeth in both jaws are placed close together, in a sin- gle row, in distinct alveoli ; they are also similar, those in the lower jaw, however, being rather more compressed than those of the upper : the anterior teeth of the lower jaw are smaller than the posterior. The crowns of the teeth are enamelled, smooth, laneiform, slightly inclined inwards ; those at the posterior portion of the lower jaw slightly curved forwards. Their roots are hollow, slightly grooved on their external aspect ; on their internal aspect there is a very slight groove. See section magnified three times. Fig. 10. The young teeth grow into the hollow of the old. The mode of dentition is shown in Fig. 5 ; /. is the new tooth, m. the old. There appear to have been nine or ten teeth in each in- termaxillary, and about thirty in each upper maxillary bone ; we are unable to ascertain satisfactorily the number of teeth in the lower jaw. This animal, though its head bears some resemblance to, evidently does not belong to the great Saurian family, (La- 474 DESCRIPTION OF A FRAGMENT OF certa Linn.^, since in all that family, except the crocodile and the Saurian of Luneville discovered by Dr Gaillardeau, the teeth are not lodged in alveoli, or even in a continu- ous furrow ; on the contrary the jaw bone presents only a sort of parapet on the outer side — the teeth are fixed to the jaw by a bony mass, occupying the place of their root, and incor- porated organically both with the tooth and with the jaw bone — and the new teeth make their first appearance in cells from within this osseous mass, and shoot irregularly through its substance, gradually producing a necrosis in it, thus causing both the mass and the old tooth to fall out. This animal differs from the crocodile in the composition of its jaw, in the form and position of its teeth, in the mode in which the nerves and blood vessels are transmitted to the teeth, &c. &c. It differs from the Saurian of the environs of Luneville in the form and character of the teeth, which in the latter are conical, strongly striated, and alternately larger and smaller — also in the mode in which the blood vessels are transmitted to the teeth, &c. It most probably belongs to the order Enalio Sauri of Conybeare ; an order formed for certain animals which ap- proaching more closely to the Saurian or Lizard family, and especially to the genus Crocodile, than to any other recent type, yet recede from it in many important characters, es- pecially in the form of their paddles, which possess an inter- mediate structure between the feet of quadrupeds and the fins of fishes*. It is impossible, however, to place the animal which forms the subject of this communication in any of the hitherto described genera of this order. It is excluded from the genus Ichthyosaurus by the composition of its jaw ; by the teeth in the latter being placed in a sulcus and not in dis- tinct alveoli, and also by the nerves and blood vessels being transmitted to the teeth of the lower jaw by perforations on the outside of the anterior portion of the dental bone, &c. * See Geological Transactions, Vol. I. N.S. p. 561. THE HEAD OF A NEW FOSSIL ANIMAL. 475 It differs from the Plesiosaurus in the form and relative size of the intermaxillary and upper maxillary bones — in the form of the lower jaw — form of the teeth — mode in which they close — and manner in which the lower maxillary nerve is transmitted to the teeth, which, in the Plesiosaurus, is by foramina dispersed irregularly along the outer edge of the lower jaw. It appears most nearly to approach the Saurocq)halus, a genus founded on a single dental bone, discovered in a ca- vern on the river Missouri, near Soldiers' river, by Sergeant Gass, who accompanied Lewis and Clark in their expedi- tion, and presented by the latter gentleman to the Society, and now in their cabinet*. It resembles this animal in the teeth closing like incisors — in the foramina for the transmis- sion of nerves and blood-vessels to the teeth of the lower jaw being in a regular series on the inner side of the dental bone near the alveolar edge — and in the young teeth enter- ing the old directly in the centre and not at the side, as in the other animals of this order, in the Crocodile, &c. It differs however from the Saurocephalus in the teeth being in distinct alveoli, while the teeth in the latter are described as being "fixed in a longitudinal groove" "in close contact throughout," " there being no distinct alveoli." Our animal differs also in the groove on the inside of the dental bone for the accommodation of the inferior maxillary nerve (and which is made a generic character) being ab- sent, in the form of the teeth, and no doubt in many other particulars, which a want of opportunity for comparison and more perfect specimens makes it impossible for us to point out. Under these circumstances we venture to propose for it a new genus, under the name of Saurodon, and will dedi- * We regret much not having an opportunity of examining this specimen : we are compelled to depend upon the account of it by Richard Harlan, M.D. in the Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, Vol. III. Part II. VOL. III. 6 E 476 DESCRIPTION OF A FRAGMENT OF cate the species to our friend Mr Lea, by the designation Lease,. We hesitate attempting to indicate the generic and spe- cific characters with the imperfect knowledge we possess of all the animals of the order to which it belongs ; and at all events will postpone doing so till we can collect more com- plete remains of our animal. Since I had the honour of laying before the society the description of a portion of the head of a new fossil animal from New Jersey, I have had an opportunity of examining the fossil organic remain in the cabinet of the society, pre- sented by Lewis and Clark. I find that this specimen con- sists not only of a portion of a dental bone, but also a small part of a coronoid bone ; and that the teeth, instead of being " in a longitudinal groove" "in close contact throughout," '•there being no distinct, separate alveoli," are in fact placed in distinct alveoli. The most important generic character which was sup- posed to distinguish this animal from the one we described having thus no existence, it appears proper in the present state of our knowledge to place the two species in the same genus ; and, as the genus Saurocephalus is founded on erro- neous characters, and will not admit our species, it becomes necessary to construct a new genus, which we shall accord- ingly do, and shall retain for it the name Saurodon. Genus Saurodon {Hays). Teeth of the lower jaw closing within those of the upper, like incisors ; a regular series of foramina along the inner aspect of the jaws near their alveo- lar margins, for the passage of nerves and blood-vessels to the teeth. Species 1. S. lanciformis. A groove along the inner pl.x\t:. -^^<^^^ ^ I Or^^ iy JiOT-m THE HEAD OF A NEW FOSSIL ANIMAL. 477 surface of the dental bone for the accommodation of the inferior maxillary nerve; teeth very obtusely lanciform. Species 2. S. Leanus. Teeth acutely lanciform, much smaller than in the preceding species, slightly curved. Saurodon Leanus. — Plate XVI. Fig. 1. — Fragment of head, lateral view. a. Dental bone. b. Intermaxillary bone. c. Upper maxillary bone. g. Lachrymal bone. Fig. 2. — Head seen fi'om above, b. h. Intermaxillary bones, e. Teeth of under jaw. f.f. Nasal grooves, g- g- Lachrymal bones, h. Small groove, i. An ar- ticulating surface, q. An articulating surface of upper maxillary bone. Fig. 3. — Posterior view. d. d. Glenoid cavities in coronoid bone. Fig. 4. — Anterior view. o. Foramina in dental bone for transmission of nerves and blood-vessels to the teeth. Fig. 5. — Portion of upper jaw, with the outer lamina of bone removed to show the mode of dentition, magnified three times. /. I. New teeth, m. m. Old teeth, p. Empty alveolus. Fig. 6. — Portion removed from posterior part of upper jaw, right side — mter- nal aspect, magnified three times, o. Foramina for transmission of nerve and blood vessels to teeth, p. Empty alveolus. Fig. 7. — Tooth, removed from alveolus p. Fig. 6, inner aspect. Fig. 8. — Same tooth, external aspect. Fig. 9. Ditto side view. Fig. 10. Ditto section of the root. Fig. 11. — Saurodon lanciformis. Portion of dental bone, external lamina removed so as to show the alveoli and form of the teeth, magnified three times. Read December 4, 1829; and January 1, 1830. No. XIX. Description of a New Genus and New Species of Extinct Mammiferous Quadruped. By John B. Godman, M.D. THE subject of the following description was disinterred a short time since by Mr Archibald Crawford, about twelve miles from Newburg, in Orange county, New York ; a region deservedly celebrated for its inestimable contribu- tion to natural history in the splendid skeleton of the gigantic Mastodon, which was thence obtained in 1801 by the indefatigable founder of the Philadelphia Museum. The bones obtained by Mr Crawford are in a good state of preservation, and comprise the following parts of the skeleton : — The anterior part of the head ; consisting of parts of the frontal, intermaxillary, superior maxillary and two-thirds of the lower jaw bones ; the tusks and sixteen teeth. Of the posterior part of the head there is but a small fragment, being a piece of the occipital bone, distinguished by the presence of nearly one condyle, and showing a sniall part of the circle of the foramen magnum. Of the bones of the trunk and extremities, there are four vertebrae, and one separate spinous process ; two ribs, of which one is whole and the other broken and imperfect ; a humerus, radius, ulna, and two digital phalanges ; a femur, tibia, and five epiphyses or heads of bones, separated from their shafts, which, with other circumstances, show that the animal had not attained its adult age. DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS, &C. 479 The right side of the head is the most perfect, and when the bones are placed in apposition, give a good idea of the general character of this part of the skull, which strongly reminds us of that of an Elephant. [See Plate XVII. Fig. 1 .] A line drawn from the highest part of the frontal to the extremity of the intermaxillary bone measures seventeen in- ches. [Fig. 2.] The fragment of the frontal bone makes up about five inches of this extent, and is united to the superior edge of the maxillary bone by a suture, and forms at its junc- tion therewith the superior anterior border of the orbit of the eye ; the posterior part of the frontal is broken and lost. Of the right upper maxillary bone, the whole is preserved, from the end of its alveolus for the tusk, anteriorly, to as far back as the posterior margin of the second molar or perma- nent tooth. A line drawn perpendicular to this tooth would mark its extent superiorly where it forms the inferior ante- rior part of the orbit, of which about one half remains. All posterior to the line mentioned is lost, the bone being bro- ken through its malar process, which still presents a projec- tion about an inch long. The foramen infra-orbitarium is situated at the anterior extremity of the base of this process, and in a line with the inner angle of the orbit. The supe- rior maxillary bone, measured from its highest part united to the OS frontis, to the edge of the alveole containing the posterior tooth, is eleven inches high. Inferiorly and inter- nally it is quite imperfect, consisting of only as much of the alveolar process as serves to contain three teeth, a small part of the palatine process, and the inferior part of the socket for the tusk ; this part of the socket projects two inches or more beyond the anterior teeth. The intermaxillary bones are of considerable size ; that of the right side being rather more than twelve inches long and three broad, extending from the inferior edge of the frontal bone to the base of the great tusk, the superior part of whose sockets it forms. The entrance to the nasal passage is desig- nated by a semicircular indentation on the internal edge of this bone, which is uninjured at this part: lower down a VOL. III. — 6 F 480 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND NEW SPECIES small piece is fractured from its inner edge. The inter- maxillary of the left side is destroyed, except at its inferior part, forming the superior portion of the alveole for the tusk. The tusks belonging to this jaw are in a tolerable good state of preservation, though not vt^holly uninjured. The entire length of the right tusk is seventeen inches, five of which are within the socket. The tusks, where they emerge from the socket, are four inches and three-eighths apart, and at this point they are seven inches and a half in circumference. They do not perceptibly decrease until within about four inches of the extremity, whence they taper to the point; this is worn in a peculiar manner on its inferior and external surfaces, as may be better understood by the excellent accompanying drawings from the masterly pencil of my estimable friend Mr Titian R. Peale, whose skill and judgment as a naturalist are so admirably displayed by his numerous contributions to the Philadelphia Museum. Of the lower jaw [Plate XVIII. Fig. 1.] about two-thirds, in a good state of preservation, have been obtained ; with the exception of part of the condyloid, the whole of the coronoid, and a small part of the posterior alveolar processes, the right ramus of the jaw is complete, and its inferior and lateral out- line from the angle to the apex is uninjured. Superiorly the coronoid process, as just stated, is destroyed as far as the posterior margin of the second molar tooth ; but thence an- teriorly the jaw is also perfect. Twelve inches of the left ramus are preserved, the condyloid, coronoid, and part of the alveolar processes being broken off, a little posterior to the first permanent tooth. The mental foramen for the exit of the labial branch of the lower maxillary nerve is situated on a line with the root of the second deciduous tooth. Between two and three inches in front of this foramen, which is half an inch in diameter, there are three others of smaller size for the passage of vessels, nerves, &c. to the lip and parts adja- cent to the insertion of the inferior tusks. The great peculiarity of this jaw, and that which separates this animal from every genus hitherto established, is its elon- OF EXTINCT MAMMIFEROUS QUADRUPED. 481 gated or rostrated extremity, containing the alveolar proces- ses or sockets for two very remarkable tusks. The superior border of the jaw, from the situation of the anterior teeth, declines immediately, tapering towards the level of these sockets. Inferiorly the outline of the jaw does not so im- mediately change, until opposite the anterior mental foramina, whence it suddenly diminishes to the end. The rostrated portion of the jaw, anterior to the front teeth, is three in- ches and three-fourths long, and superiorly is regularly hol- lowed or grooved as for the reception of the tongue ; this hollow is two inches wide, quite smooth, and bounded on each side by thin raised edges. The alveolar processes for the tusks are contained Mithin the rostrated part of this jaw, and are nearly an inch in di- ameter at their outlet ; the right one being three, and the left two inches in depth, gradually diverging from the centre, and decreasing in width as they penetrate the bone. The tusks belonging to these sockets are of a very striking appear- ance, and that of the right side, which is entire and well pre- served, is four inches in length, three inches of which are within the socket. The projecting external part is covered by a shining, hard, black enamel, and is smooth and round at its point ; the other part appears to be a dark, grayish, bony matter, dry on the surface, yielding to the pressure of the nail. The part of this tusk within the socket is exactly ac- commodated thereto, tapering to a small point. The exter- nal projecting part has a peculiar spiral twist for about an inch and a half from its anterior extremity, as will be readily understood by referring to the plate. [Plate XVIII. Fig. 2.] In relation to the dentition of the animal, we find it pos- sessed of sixteen teeth, eight of which (the two anterior teeth on each side of both jaws) are deciduous or milk teeth ; on the right side one of these has fallen out, while all the remaining deciduous teeth are considerably worn, so as to show that the enamel merely covers the external surface of their crowns, as in the Mastodon, and does not penetrate their substance as in the Elephant, &c. The permanent 482 DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS AND NEW SPECIES teeth, which are four in number in each jaw, are acutely mamillated, forming three transverse ranges of wedge-shaped tubercles. The first is three inches in length ; the second or last tooth three and a half; the deciduous teeth are much smaller, the first measuring but half an inch, the second two inches. The roots of all the teeth are short, as the greatest depth of the lower jaw is but four inches. Of the other bones the vertebrae are about an inch and a half long, and three inches in diameter ; the separate spinous process is seven and a half inches; the entire rib is twenty inches long, and its curvature four inches ; the greatest diam- eter of the broken rib is an inch and a half. The humerus is seventeen inches long, and three in diameter; radius thirteen inches in length, one and a half in diameter; the ulna fourteen inches long, two and a half in diameter. The digital phalanx is three inches long, and three in diameter ; the tibia is fourteen and a half inches long, and three in di- ameter. While engaged in the examination of the New York spe- cimen, my friend, Mr Franklin Peale, manager of the Phi- ladelphia Museum, informed me that he had seen a jaw bone in the cabinet of the University of Virginia which must have belonged to the same species. In consequence I immediate- ly addressed a note to the Professor of Anatomy in that in- stitution, R. Dunglison, M.D. requesting an accurate de- scription of this bone. This gentleman, who is equally dis- tinguished for zealous devotion to the cause of science and polished urbanity of manners, favoured me with an imme- diate and satisfactory answer, from which the following par- ticulars are derived. In the collection examined by Professor Dunglison there are two parts of lower jaws, most probably belonging to the same species, though to individuals of different ages. These have been clumsily joined, as if they had formed a single jaw. The right side of the jaw is complete from the angle to the apex of the chin, which is perfect, having about three inches of the left side preserved. The lower jaw is OF EXTINCT MAMMIFEROUS QUADRUPEDS. 483 elongated at its anterior part, and hollowed out superiorly, while on each side of the symphisis menti there is a canal extending obliquely upwards through the bone, the right one contains the root of a tusk, which occupies the whole socket, and projects slightly on the inner side, being 1.25 in diameter. This right portion of the lower jaw is two feet four inches long, measured along its base, and weighs forty pounds*. Every view taken of this animal strongly reminds us of its resemblance to the gigantic Mastodon ; and but for the singular difference of organization presented by the lower jaw and its tusks, we could not avoid concluding we had ob- tained a young animal of that species. We have made dili- gent examination of the different perfect lower jaws of the Mastodon preserved in the cabinets of the Philadelphia and Baltimore Museums, the cabinet of the New York Lyceum, &c. to discover whether any trace of this structure could be found, or had possibly been overlooked by previous observers. These researches ended in a conviction that nothing like this consti'uction pertained to the Mastodon, whose lower jaw ends in a distinctly decurved extremity, simply suited to give attachment to the muscles of a lip ; as is evident on re- ferring to a specimen or to any authentic engraving. We are therefore under the necessity of regarding it as a new, but closely allied ge7ius to the Mastodon ; and propose for it the following name and characters : — * The lower jaw bone of the Mastodon is two feet ten inches long, and weighs sixty pounds; hence our animal, in the adult state, was of about the same size. YOIi. III. 6 G 484 description of a new genus and new species Order BELLU^ L. (Pachydermata, C.) Family Proboscidia. Genus Tetracaulodon.* (Godman.) Dental Formula: Incisive |, Canine %%, Molar H, = 12. Character: having four tusks; of which two, large and strong, similar to those of the Mastodon, helong to the upper jaw, and two, small, short and spiral, project from sockets on each side of the chin. The lower jaw produced or elongated at the symphisis; having on its superior surface a smooth hollow groove for the tongue, and terminating in a narrow apex containing sockets for the inferior tusks. Species 1. T. Mastodontoideum. Godm. In addition to the preceding details, the species will he suf- ficiently characterized by observing, that in the lower jaw of the adult its outlines are peculiarly straight or rectangular, exhibiting none of those bold curvatures and projections so conspicuous in the allied genus Mastodon, about the angles and base of the jaw. The condyloid process is throAvn far- ther backward, and the coronoid process is not separated from it by a deep semilunar notch, as in the other genus, the bone gently ascending from the tip of the coronoid until it terminates ^ in the condyle. These peculiarities clearly indicate a very marked difference in the arrangement and power of the mus- cular apparatus, as well as suggest thoughts of differences in mode of life and regimen, between the two genera during their existence. Of this highly interesting species, we are now aware of the preservation of fragments of three well authenticated indivi- duals. Two adult jaw bones (one of which is nearly two- thirds entire) in the Museum of the University of Virginia; the young specimen, the immediate subject of this descrip- * From TiTja, four; and ;t«i'M'o'fovTa, tusks. PL.XX'IL PL . X\Ttt . Zateral viav of lower jane '^h&s- OF EXTINCT MAMMIFEROUS qUADRUPEDS. 485 tion, belonging to the beautiful Museum of R. Peale of New York ; of a fourth we have heard, as being in possession of a distinguished scientific gentleman of that city, though of this we can affirm nothing positively. It is highly probable that other specimens have been raised by those engaged in canalling, &c. that have been laid aside as Mastodon bones, which they so closely resemble.* In regard to the relative position of the animal in the class Mammalia, we are led by the form of the lower jaw and tusks to believe that it should stand between the genera Mastodon and Hippopotamus ; being allied to the former by the general character of the teeth and skeleton, and to the latter espe- cially, by the inferior tusks, as well as the form of the molar teeth. The same circumstances would cause us to conclude that the regimen of our animal might have been of a mixed character, or that like the Hippopotamus this genus was some- what aquatic and fed upon the productions found in rivers, lakes, or marshes. However this may be decided, the proofs of the former existence of the genus are unequivocal, and will no doubt be multiplied if proper attention be paid to the ex- plorations making throughout our own country. In concluding this paper the writer would feel culpable of neglect did he not return his warmest thanks to the intelli- gent discoverer of these bones for the opportunity afforded of examining and describing them, as well as to his friends Dr Boyd of New York, and Messrs Rubens and Titian R. Peale for their much valued assistance. piEAD, Friday, January 1st, 1830.] * Since this paper was in type we have learned with much pleasure that a second exploration made by Mr Crawford has been very productive, and there is reason to hope that Mr Rubens Peale will be enabled thereby to mount an entire skeleton of the Tetracaulodon Mastodontoideum. DONATIONS Received hy the >9.merican Philosophical Society, since the Publication of Vol. II. — New Series. FOR THE LIBRARY. FROM SOVEREIGN PRINCES, GOVERNMENTS, AND STATES. From His Majesty the King of Demiakk, by his Minister P. Pedeesen. Beskrivelse over Danske Mynter og Medailler i den Kongelige Samling, 3 vols, fol. Kiobenh. 1791—4. Catalogus nunimorum Vet. GrffiC. et Lat. Musei Regis Danioe ; auct. C. Ramusio, 3 vols, 4to, Hafn. 1816. Samling af fbrstejellige offentlige og private Bygninger, by C. F. Hansen, archit. of the K. of D. : Kiobenh. 1G25, 4 parts; to be continued. From His Majesty the Kisg of the Netherlands. Flora Batava. Fig. par J. Le Sepp et fils — description par J. Kops et Van Hall, Nos. 58 &, 63 to 78. 4to, Amsterdam. From His Excellency Bahon Schuchman, Minister of the Home Department of His Majesty the Kevg of Prussia. Miscell. Berolin. ex scriptis Soc. Reg. Sci. — Berlin, 1723 a 1743, 7 vols, 4to. Hist, de L'Acad. Roy. des Sci. et des Belles Lettres de Berlin, 1746 a 1769. 25 vols, 4to. Our collection of these valuable Memoirs is now complete. From the State of Virginia. A Map of that State, compiled from State and other Surveys. By Herman Boye ; H. S. Tanner, engraver. Phil. 1827. FROM AMERICAN AND FOREIGN SOCIETIES. Albany, Mem. of the Board of Agriculture. Vol. 3, 1826, 8vo. Institute— Vol. 1st, No. 1 to 3, 1828—9, 8vo. VOL. III. 6 H 488 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Baltimore, Catalogue, of the Libr. Comp. 8vo, 1809 — 1823. ■Batavia, Trans, of the Bat. S«c. Arts, «fec. Vol. 9, 10, 8vo, 1823 — 6. Berlin, Abhandlungen der Konigi. Akad. der Wissenschaften fiir 1820 — 5, 4 vols. 4to, 1822 — 8. Preisschrift ijber genaue Messing der Wikel an Krystallen. Von A. T. Kupffer, 4to, Berlin, 1825. Bericht iiber die Natur. historischen Reisen der Herren Ehrenberg und Hemprich durch J^gypten, &c. 1 820 — 1 825. Gelesen in der Konigi. Akad. von Alex. Humboldt, Berlin, 1826, 4to. Nouv. Mem. de I'Acad. Roy. des Sci. de Berlin, 1776 a 1785; 1802 a 1804; 1804a 11. 14 vols, 4to, 1779 to 1815. By the intervention of Mr Niederstetter, Charge d'Affaires of H. M. the King of Prussia. Boston, Collections of the Mass. Hist. Soc. Vol. 1, 3d Series, 1825. Catal. of the Library of the Boston Athenjeum, 1827, 8vo. Calcutta, Asiatic Researches. Vol. 15, 4to, Seramp. 1825. Cambeidge, (Mass.) Annual Report of Harvard Univ. for 1827 — 8, 8vo. Camrkidge, (G. B.) Trans, of the C. Philos. Soc. Vol. 2, 4to, Charleston, (S. C.) Library Company's Catal. 1826, 8vo. Concord, (N. H.) Collections of New Hamp. Hist. Soc. 1824, 8vo. Copenhagen, (through H. E. P. Pedersen, Minister, &.c.) Det Kongel. Danske Vidensk. Selskabs. Philos. og Hist. Afhandlingar, 4to, Vol. I a 3, 1823—7. Naturvidensk. og Math. Vol. 1, 2, 4to, 1824—6. Edinburgh, Trans, of the Roy. Soc. of Ed. Vol. 10th, part 2d, Vol. llth, part 1st, 4to, 1826—8. Institution and Progress of the Soc. of Antiq. of Scotl. by W. Smellie, 4to, parts 1, 2, 1822 — 4. Trans, of the Soc. vols 1, 2, vol. 3, part 1, 1792—1828, 4to. London, Trans, of the Royal Society, 4to, 1826 — 1829, part 1. of the Horticultural Soc. vols 6 & 7, parts 1 & 3, 1829. of the Soc. of Arts, Manuf. and Com. vols 42 — 46, 1824 — 8. of the Geolog. Soc. N. S. vol. 1, part 2, vol. 2, 1806 — 9, 4to. of the Linnean Soc. vols 14 & 16, part 1, 1829, 4to. of the Astronom. Soc. vols 2 & 3, 1826 — 9. Astron. Obs. at Greenwich for Jan. Feb. March, 1828, fol. By J. Pond, Ast. Roy. of the Soc. of Antiq. vol. 20, part 2 — 21, 22, 1825 — 9, 4to. of the Roy. Asiat. Soc. of G. Brit, and Ireland, their Regula- tions and List of Members, 1823 — 6. New Testament in Arabic, Turkish, Indo-Portuguese, Hindostanee — Psalms in Arabic and Coptic — Proverbs and Isaiah in Hindostanee — Gospels in Ethiopic. (Gift of the Brit, and For/ Bible Soc.) Lisbon, through J. M. Dantas Pereira, Sec. of the Royal Acad. Hist. «fc Mem. da Acad. Real das Sc. vols 3—8, fol. 1812 — 23. CoUec. de libros ineditos de Hist. Portug. Vol. 4th, fol. 1816. Mem. Economicas da Acad. Vols 4th & 5th, 4to, 1812 — 5. de la Literatura Portug. Vol. 8th, 4to, 1812. Noticias para a Hist, e Geog. das Na^oens Ultra-Marinas, nos dominios Portug. Vols 1, 2, 4to, 1812. Collec^ao das Leyes e Estat. da Acad. R. 4to, 1822. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 489 Lisbon, Taboadas Perpet. Aslron. para uso da Navig. Portug. 4to, 1815. Also the following Works, printed at the Expense of the Academy : Ribeiro (J. P.) Diss. Chronol. escrit. sobre a Hist, e Jurisp. de Port. 3 vols, 4to. 1807—1820. Indice Chronol. remissivo da Legislacjao Port, posterior a o Co- digo Philipino. Vols 3 — 6, 4to, 1807 — 1820. Pascalis Josephi Mellii Freirii Inst. Juris. Crimin. Lusitani, 3d ed. 4to, Olisip. 1810. Luiz (Fr. de S.) Ensaio sobre Alguns fynon. da Lingoa Port. 2d ed. 4to, 1824. Barbosa (J. Soares) Gram. Philos. da Lingoa Port. 4to, 1822. Soares (P. de) Trat. de Policia Medica, 4to, 1812. Soares (J. M.) Mem. para a Hist, da Medicina Lusitana, 4to, 1821. Gomes (B. A.) Ensaio dormosographico o descrip. das doeneas cutaneas, 4to, 1820. Silva (J. Xavier da) Trat. de Hygiene Militare e Naval, 4to, 1819. Andrada (J. B. de) Mem. sobre as utilid. do plantio de novos BoSques em Portugal, 4to, 1815. Da Costa (R. F.) Princ. de Musica o doct. de Composicao, e execueao, Vol. 1, 2, 4lo, 1820. Barbosa (F. V.) Elera. de Geom. 2d ed. 2 vols, 8vo, 1819. The above complete our collection of works published hy the Academy. Madeid, Mem. de la Acad. Real de la Hist, vols 5, 6, 1817—21, 4to. Through Don F. de Paulo Quadrado. Liciniano Saez Demostrac. Hist, del valor de las Monedas de Castilla — tiempo de Hen. IV. comparadas con las de Carlos V. 4to, 1805. Manchester, (G. B.) Mem. of the Lit. and Philos. Soc. Vol. 4, N. S. 1824, 8vo. Moscow, Entomographie de la Russie par Gotthelf Fischer. Publ. by the Imp. Soc. of Naturalists. Vols 1 & 3, 1820—8, 4to. Programme pour la Seance publ. de la Soc. 1828. Par le m6me. Notice sur les Vc'gcit. Fossiles du Gouv. de Moscow. 1826. New Yokk, Trans, of the Hist. Soc. Vol. 4, 8vo, 1826. List of Members, 1827, and Account of Donation of ^5000 from the State. Trans, of the Lit. and Phil. Soc. Vol. 2, part 1, 4to, 1825. Annals of the Lyceum of Nat. Hist. Vols 1, 2 & 3, No. 1 & 2, 1824—8, 8vo. A Mem. prepared by C. Golden, giving an Account of the Grand Celebration at New York of the Completion of the Canals. 1 825—6, 4to. Gift of the City Corporation. Catal. of the N. Y. Society Library, with Charter, &.c. 1813—1828. Pabis, M(im. de I'Acad. Roy. des Sci. de I'lnst. Vol. 5 — 8, 4to, 1824 — 7. de I'Acad. des Inscriptions &. Belles Leltres, Vols 7 &. 8, 4to, 1824—7. Present^s par divers Savans a I'Acad. Roy. des So. de I'lnst. Sci. Math, et Phys. Vol. 1, 1827. de la Society Roy. des Antiq. de France, Vols 6 &. 7, 8vo, 1824—6. Notices et Extraits des MSS. de la Biblioth. du Roi, Vol. 11, 1827. Mem. dela Soc. D'Horticulture, Vol. 1, No. 1, 1827. 490 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Paris, Recueil des Voy. et M^m. de la Soc. de G^ographie, Vols 1 &, 2, 4to, 1824—7. Philadixphia, Mem. of the Philad. Soc. for promoting Agric. 6 vols, 8vo, 1826. of the Acad. Nat. Sci. Vols 5 & 6, Nos 1 a 9, 1825—9, 8vo. of the Kappa Lambda Med. Association — N. Am. Med. &. Surg. Journal, Vols 1 a 8, 1826—9, 8vo. Contrib. of the M'Clurian Lyceum, vols 1 — 3, 8vo, 1827 — 8. Catal. of the Library of the tfniversity of Penns. 8vo, 1829. of the Medical Library of the Penns. Hospital, 8vo, 1829. Providence, Collections of the Hist. Soc. of Rhode Island, 8vo, 1827. Quebec, Trans, of the Literary & Hist. Soc. 8vo,'1829. Rotterdam, Nieuwe Verhand. van bet Bataafsche Genootschap, &c. Vol. 1, parts 2&, 3, 4to, 1826—7. St Peteesbukg, Mem. de I'Acad. Imp. des Sci. N. S. Vol. 10th, for 1821 — 2, St Pet. 1826. Recueil des Actes de la Seance Solemnelle de I'Acad. le 29 Dec. 1826, a I'occasion desa Fete seculaire. Discours de I'Acadeinicien Stork, &c. — Ad Imag. Alex I. Autoc. omn. Russ. in museo numismatico Imp. Acad, depositum. Also for the Cabinet, a Medal struck on the occasion. Apperju Hist, des Travaux de I'Acad. Imp. depuis 1726 jus- qu'a 1828. Stockholm, Kongl. Vetensk. Acad. Nya Handlingar, 8vo, 1824 — 8, 5 vols. Through the Chev. S. Lorich, Cons. Genl. Aors berattelser om Vetensk. Framsteg, afgivneaf Kongl. Vetensk. Acad. Embetsman, 8vo, 1824 — 8, 5 vols. (C. D'Ohsson) Oefversigt af Chemiens Hist. &c. 1826, 8vo. Turin, Mem.della Real Acad, delle Scienze di Torino, 4to, 28 — 32, 6 vols, with Index to 22—32 vols. Turin, 1822—8. Through Chev. Caravadossy de Thoet, Cons. Genl. Upsal, Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Ups. Vols 1—3, 5, 6, 4to, 1773—1779. Through Chev. S. Lorich, Cons. Gen. FROM INDIVIDUALS. Adamson (John) Memoirs of the Life and Writings of Luis de Camoens, 2 vols, 8vo, Lond. 1820. Amard (L. O. F.) Associations Intellectuelles, ou I'Art d'Operer dans toutes les Sciences, surtout en Medecine, suivi d'une Clinique Gen^rale, 2 vols, 8vo, Paris, 1821. Anderson (Rev. R.) A Missionary Journal round Hawaii, one of the Sandwich Islands, 12mo, Boston, 1825. Adelung (Frederick) Die Korssiinschen ThiJren in der Kathedral Kirche zur Heil. Sophia in Novogorod, von Frederick Adelung, 4;o, Berlin, 1825. A. Freyherr von Meyerberg und Seine Reise nach Russland, with a folio volume of plates. Published and illustrated by Frederick Adelung, St Pet. 1827. The same work in the Russian Language, 4to, St Pet. 1827. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 491 Adelung (Frederick) Sixth, Seventh, and Eighth Reports of the Russian Bible Soc. for 1818, 1819, 1820, (in German) 12mo, St Pet. Litterar Notizen betreffend die Magyarischen und Sachsischen Dialekte in Ungern und Siebenbiirgen, von P. Von Koppen, 8vo, St Pet. 1826. Demetrius der Donische ; Histor. Dramat. Gemahlde, in 3 Akten, von Wlad. Oserow. Uebers. aus der Russ. von Otto Hanson, 8vo, Mosc. 1823. Metrische Uebersetzungen aus der Russischen, von S. Schreiber, 8vo, St. Pet. 1828. Vorlaufiger Bericht, von der Russischen Gradmessung, von W. Struve, Fol. Dorpat. Beitrage zur Muhammedanischen Miinzkunde, von C. M. Frashn, 4to. No imprint, no date. Ibn Foszlans und anderer Araber Berichte iiberdie Russen altern zeit; text und Uebersetz. mit Kritisch-Philologischen Anmerk. By the same, 4to, St Pet. 1823. Ueber die Verwandtschaft der gnostisch-theosophischen Lehren, mit den Religions systemen der Orients, vorziiglich dem Buddhaismus, von J. J. Schmidt, 4to, Leipz. 1828. Bemerkunoen iJber einise gegenst. der Russischen Staatswirthschaft, von F. G. Wurst, 8vo, Berlin, 1806. Geschichte der Ost-Mongolen, und ihren Fiirstenhauses, verfasst, von Ssanang Ssetsen, (Mongohsh & German) the Translation by J. J. Schmidt, 4to, St Pet. 1829. Russische Miszellen zur genauern kenntniss fiir Russlands und seiner -be- wohner, von G. Engelhardt, 2 vols, Svo, St Pet. 1829. Rio de Janeiro und seine umgebungen in 1824, von Ebel Ernst, Svo, StPet. 1826. Nachricht an die Evangelische S. Petri Gemeine in St Pet. 4to, St Pet. 1828. Narodne Srpske, &c. National Songs in the Servian Language, by A. S. Karatchitch, 3 vols, 12mo, Leipz. 1823, 4. Danilza (New Year's Gift) for 1828, an Annual in the Servian Language, published by W. S. Karatschitch, 8vo, Vienna. A Grammar of the pure and rrHxed E. Indian Dialects, with Dialogues an- nexed, by H. Lebedeff, 4to, Lond. 1801. Zusammensteilung, &c. A Collection of 200 Sanscrit and Slavonic Words in affinity with each other, by A. Mihanovich. Grammatica Damulica seu Malabarica, a F. Ziegenbalg, 4to, Hall. Sax 1716. F. Miinteri Epistola ad Sab. Ouvaroff, de Monumentis veteribus, 4to, Hafn 1822. De Chasaris excerpta ex Scriptoribus Arabicis, interprete Frashnio. Parti cula prima, 4to. Petrop. 1820. Antiquitatis Muhammedanae varia Monumenta, auct. C. M. Frashn, 4to Petrop. 1822. De Baschkiris quas Mem. prodita sunt ab Ibn-Foszlano et Jakuto, interp C. M. Fraehn, 4to. No imprint, no date. De Musei Sprewitziani Mosquae numis Kuficis qui Chersonesi humo eruti esse dicuntur Comment, duae, auct. C. M. Frashn, 4to, Petrop. 1825. Numophylacium Orientale Potolianum, a C. M. Frashn, Svo, Riga, 1813. Acad. Cces. Dorpatensis solemnia peracta V. Lustr. Dec. 1827, digne pieque celebranda, fol. Dorp. 1S27. VOL. III. 6 I 492 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Adelung (Frederick) Dissertatio Medico-Pharm. de Principiis Vegetab. quae Ka- linoida dicuntur, auct. A. Hassenmuller, 8vo, Mosc. 1827. De Chorea Sancti Viti, Dissert, auct. M. S. Bulmerincq, 8vo, Dorp. 1829. Novae quaedam in rem numariam antiquae Rossiae observ. a J. Schoen, Bresl. 1829. De graiiiinibus paniceis, a C. B. Trinio, 8vo, Petrop. 1826. De graminibus unifloris et sesquifloiis, ab eod. 8vo. Petrop. 1 824. Abhandlung iiber die bildung des Embryo in den grasern, von Henr. Rapsail, 8vo, St Pet. 1826. Ueber den gegenwartigen Wissinsch. stand, punct. der naturforschung, von der Nehml. 8vo, St Pet. 1828. Grammar of the Armenian Language, by the Archimandrite Michael, 8vo, Mosc. 1828. (Russian.) Observ. de affectibus morbosis virginis Hafniensis, a J. D. Herholdt, 8vo, Hafn. 1822. Opisanie, &c. A Historical and Technical Description of the Manufacture of Arms at Toula, by Dr Hamel, 4to, Mosc 1826. Opisanie., i&c. A Catalogue of the Slavonic & Russian MSS. in the Library of Count Tolstoy, 8vo, Mosc. 1825. {Russian.) Opisanie, &c. Description of Thibet in its present state, translated from the Ciiinese, with a Map, by Fr. Hyacinth, 8vo, St Pet. 1828. {Russian.) The Poetical Works of Count Chwostoff, 3 vols, 8vo, St Pet. 1828—9. {Russian.) -^^— AoKi/uiov TTifi T«? ivrKticriig'a.rii^ o-vyyirua.^ th( 2xetCoyc-Pac-ir/x«c yxa^tryis, srgoc riv Exxjjvi- KHV. luvret^^sv Ctto KavirTAvriva npsirCuripis mtthitovo/xti^ Tdu i^ ouovif^av, A Com- parison of the ancient Greek and Slavonic Languages, by Bishop Constan- tine, 3 vols, 8vo, St Pet. 1828. An Elegy on the Death of the Emperor Alexander, in ancient Greek and Russian, by the same, 4to, St Pet. 1828. Ziriaskaia Grammatika, &c. A Grammar of the Sirianish Language, spoken in the Government of Perm, in Russia, by A. FlerofT, St Pet. 1823. {Russian.) Supplement a I'Histoire g^niSrale des Huns, des Turks, et des Mogols, par J. Senkowsky, 4to, St Pet. 1824. Sur les origines Russes, Extrait de MSS. Orientaux, par J. de Hammer, 4to, St Pet. 1827. Lettre de Tutundju-OglouMoustafa-Aga a Thadee Bulgarin, &c. {An ill- natured Criticism on the above work of Mr Von Hammer.) 8vo, St Pet. 1828. Observations sur la Lettre de Tutundju Oglou, &c. par F. B. Charmoy, [A sharp and severe Answer to the above.) 8vo, St Pet. 1828. Essais Entomologiques, publics par A. D. Hummel, No. 6, 8vo, St Pet. 1827. Den Gamle JEgyptiske Tidsregning af R. Rask, 8vo, Kiobenh. 1827. Me'moire sur I'lntroduction et 1' Usage des Caracteres Chinois au Japon, suivis d'un Vocabulaire Cor^en, par J. Klaproth, 8vo, Paris, 1829. Recueil des Actes de I'Academie Imperiale des Sciences a St Petersbourg, a la Seance Solemnelle a Toccasion de la Fete seculaire de Dec. 1826 et a ses Seances publiques du 29 Dec. 1827—8. St Pet. Brandis (J. D. — M. D.) Ueber Psychische Heil-mittel und magnetismus, Kopenh. 1818. Balbi (A.) Introd. a I'Atlas Ethnogr. du Globe, 8vo, Paris, 1827. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 493 Balbi (A.) Atlas Ethnogr. du Globe ou Classification des Peoples d'apres leurs Langues, fol. Paris, 1827. Bache (A. D.) Catal. des Instrum. de Phys. Math. Opt. «fcc. de I'Ecole Polytechn. par Pixius, Paris, 1828. Three Lect. on Animal Magnetism, by J. Ducommun, N. York, 1829. Catal. of the Library of the University of Penns. 1829. Bache (R.) His Notes on Columbia, taken in 1822, and Itinerary from Caraccas to Bogota, Phil. 8vo, 1827. Bradford (Tho.) A valuable Collection of Pamphlets from 1742—1800, many of them " Revolutionary." Bancroft (Geo.) His Trans], of Heeren's Hist, of the Pol. System of Europe and its Colonies, from the Disc, of America to its Independence, Northampton (Mass.) 1829, 2 vols, 8vo. Bancker (C. N.) (Deposited) Playfair's Geography, 6 vols, 4to, Edinb. 1804 — 14, & Atlas. Anderson's Hist of Commerce, 4 vols, 4to, Lond. 1801. {Given) The Universal Etymological Diet, on a new plan, vol 1, 2, Cambr. (G. B.) 1822, 4to. Banks (T. C.) On the Kingly Office and Inaug. of the K. of England, 8vo, Lond. 1826. Barrozo (J. de P.) Comp. deGeog. Hist. Chron. Anc. et Mod. 4to, Paris, 1826. — Tableau des Possess. Angloises avant et apres 1789 — 1814. — Statistique de risle de Madere, 1815. By J. P. C. Giraldes. United States' Congress Doc. 1st Session, 20th Congress, 1827 — 8, 18 vols, 8vo, Wash. Barton (VV. P. C.) Hist, des peches, &c. des Hollandais dans les mers du Nord, par B. de Reste, transl. from Dutch, 3 vols, 8vo. Paris, An. XI. Botan. Bemerkungen iiber Stratiotes und Saggitoria, von E. F. Nolte, Copenh. 1825. Bell (J.— M.D.) Disc, before Philad. Med. Soc. on the Influence of Medicine, 1828. Breck (Sam.) Address to the Blockley Agr. Soc. on the Death of R. Peters their President, 1828. Brereton (M. D.) Rep. to Phrenol. Soc. of Wash, on the Cranium of A. Tardy, the Pirate, 1828. Berzelius (J. Jacob) His Publications, to wit : Liirbok i Kemier, 5 vols, 8vo, Stockh. 1822 — 8. Af handling om Galvanismen, Stockh. 1802. Forelasningar i Djurkemien, 2 vols, 1806 — 8. De r Analyse des Corps Inorganiques, trad, de L'Alleraand. Paris, 1827. Biddle (C. C.) Speeches in Congr. of Henry Clay, Mem. & Portrait, Phil. .8vo, 1827. Treatise of J. B. Say on Pol. Econ. 3d Am. ed. with Notes by C. C. B. Phil. 1827, 8vo, 2 vols. Bonaparte (Ch. Luc.) Observ. on the Nomencl. of Wilson's Ornithology, 8vo, Phil. 1826. The Genera of N. Am. Birds and Synopsis of Species in U. S. N. York, 1828. Suppl. to the Genera of Am. Birds and to the Synopsis of the Spec, found in U. S. Phil. 8vo, 1827. Specchio Comparat. delle Ornitol. di Roma e di Filad. Pisa, 1827, 8vo. 494 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Bonaparte (Ch. Luc.) Am. Ornithol. or Nat. Hist, of the Birds not given by Wilson. Phil. 1825—8, fol. vols 1, 2, 3. Bicheno's Address to Zool. Club of Lin. Soc. Lond. 1826. Bowditch (N.) His Transl. vpith a Commentary on the " M^canique Celeste of La Place," 4to, vol. 1st. Bost. 1829. Brown (Saml. — M.D.) De la Lithotritie ou broiement de la Pierre dans la Vessie, par Civiale, (M.D.) 8vo, Paris, 1827. Hist, of a Voy. in the China Seas, by J. White. Bost, 8vo, 1826. Brown (J. late Minister from U. States to France) CEuvres de Racine, 3 vols, 4to, Paris, 1760. The Works of Tacitus, transl. by A. Murphy, Lond. 4 vols, 4to, 1793. Erasmi Joco-seria, id est Stultitise Laudatio — T. Mori Utopia Insula, 12mo, Lond. 1777. Voy. aiit. du Monde 1790 — 2, par E. Marchand, priScf^dfS d'une Introd. par Fleurieu, 4 vols, 4to, Paris, 1798 — 1800. Observ. made in 'I'ravels through France, Italy, &c. by E. Wright, 1720 — 2, Lend. 1730. Moeurs et Usages des Turcs, avec un Abrege de I'Hist. Ottomane, par M. Guer, 2 vols, 4to, Paris, 1746. Hist. Gen. des Voy. ou Nouv. Coll. des Voy. par A. F. Prevost, 20 vols, 4to, Paris, 1746—1789. Nouv. Voy. dans I'Amer. Sept. 1771, par M. Bossu, 8vo, Amst. 1777. Philos. Botan. ab. C. Linnrei, 2d ed. Vienna, 1763, 8vo. A Hist, of Invent, and Discov. B. I. Peckman, transl. from German by W. Johnston, Lond. 1797. Catal. de Bibliot. du Due de la Valiere, par G. De Bure, 3 vols, 8vo, Paris, 1738. Catullus, Propertius, Tibullus, cum MSS. cod. var. lect. raarg. appositis, 4to, 1723, Lutet. Paris. Danubius Panonico Mysicus. Observ. Geog. Astron. Phys. &c. perlus- tratus ab. A. Marsili, Amst. 1726, fol. 6 vols. Les Restes de 1' Anc. Rome, dessinez sur les lieux, par B. d'Overbeke. Amst. 3 vols folio in one, 1709. The English Works of Roger Ascham, ed. by J. Bennet, with a Biog. 4to, Lond. CTluvres de E. Falconet sur les Beaux-Arts, 6 vols, 8vo, Laus. 1781. II Goffiedo ovvero la Gierusalemme Liberata, fol. Parigi, 1644. P. Virgilii Bucolica Georgica et ^neis, fol. Strasb. 1789. By water (J.) His Essay on the Theo. Hist, and Pract. of Electricity, Lond. 1810, 8vo. Chapman (N.— M.D.) An Amer. Diet, of the Engl. Lang, by N. Webster. N. York, 1828, 2 vols, 4to. The Principles of Mor. and Polit. Science, by A. Ferguson, Ediab. 1792, 2 vols, 4to. Analyse des Travaux de I'Acad. R. des Sci. Paris, 1828. Partie Phys. par le Bar. Cuvier. — Partie Math, par le Bar. Fourier. Eloge Hist, de La Place — Rec. des Lect. a la Stance des Quatre Acad, de rinst. 1829. Carey & Lea, The Phil. Journ. of Med. and Phys. Sci. edited by N. Chapman, &.C. &c. Old Ser. 7, 8, 9. N. S. 1 a 5, 1824—1829. The Am. Journ. of Med. Sci. vol. 1—5. Phil. 1827—1830. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 495 Carey & Lea, Elem. of the Human Mind, by D. Stewart, vol. 3. Ph. ed. 8vo, 1827. Operat. Mechan. or Brit. Mechanist, by J. Nicholson. Ph. ed. with addit. Bvo, 1826. Carre (J. T.) M. T. Varronis Opera Omnia, cum Not. Scaligeri, &.c. Dordrect. 1629, 4to. Cresson (E.) A Collect, of interesting Pamphlets. Clinton (De Witt) Laws of the State of N. York and Offic. Docum. rel. to the Erie and Champlain Canals, with a Map. Albany, 1825. 2 vols, 8vo. Coates (B. H.— M.D.) A Welsh Grammar, by W. Owen. Lond. 1803. First Rep. of the Phil. Med. Soc. on Quack Med. 1828, 8vo. His Orat. before the same Soc. on Certainty in Med. 1830, 8vo. Colla (A.) Hortus Ripulensis, (with a Vol. of Plates) 4to. Turin, 1824. illustratio Generis Dysodii, additu Icone Divaricati, 4to. Turin, 1822. Genus Freylinias addita Icone, 4to. Contin. del Saggio di Orittog. del Prof S. Borson, 4to, Piemont, 1825. Observ. sur le Limodorum Purp. de Lamarck, iSic. Paris, 1824. Cole (Edw.) Report of the Canal Comp. of Illinois, with a Plan to unite Lake Michigan with Ilhn. River. Collins (Z.) Excerpta e Corpore Statut. Univ. Oxon. 1808. Ludwig (D. C.) Definit. Gen. Plant. Ed. G. R. Boehmer. Leips. 1760, 8vo. Indian Treaties, Laws, and Regul. relative to Indian Affairs, (Official) Wash. 1C26, 8vo. Collin (Rev. Dr) Precis de I'Hist. Nat. de I'Abbe Sauri, part 2d of 5 vol. Harab. 1779, 12rao. O'Conway (J.) Origo Legum, by Geo. Dawson. Lond. 1794, fol. A New Test, in the Irish Language, 4to. Lond. 1681. Cooper (Tho.) Lect. on Polit. Economy. Columbia, (S. C.) 1826, 8vo. Cortez (General) Derrotero de las Islas Antillas, las Costas de Tierra-Firme y dfel Seno Mexicano, par mando del Gobierno, with a Folio Atlas; 100 Maps. Mex. 1825. Cubi y Soler. The English Translator. Nuev. Syst. para los Espanoles. Cambr. (Mass.) 1828. Observations on the Mode of learning Languages. Prospect, de una Hist, de las Leng. habladas en Espana. Drake (B. &, H. D. Mansfield) Cincinnati in 1826. Cincin. 1827. Drake (Dan.) Disc, on Intemp. before the Agr. Soc. Cincin. 1828. Dalton (John) New Syst. of Chem. Philos. vol. 2, part 1, 8vo. Mar. 1827. Dalman (J. W.) Ephem. Entomological, 8vo. Holm. 1824. Analecta Entomologica, 4to. Holm. 1823. Nagra petrificaterfunne i ostergotlandsofver giings-kalk. 4to. Stock. 1825. Prodr. Monograf. Castnias, Gen. Lepidopt. 1825. Paris, 1824, 8vo. Om Nigra Svenska arter af Coccus samt deinuti dem forekommande Parasit- Insekler, 4to. Stock. 1826. Dacosta e Sa. — Mem. sobre os limites do Brazil pelo lado das Guianas, Rio Branco, &c. fol. Lisb. 1027. Dantas (J. M. Pereira) Systema de Signaes. Rio Jan. 1817. Discursos na R. Acad, das Sciencias. Lisboa, 1824 — 5, fol. Escritos Maritimos e Academicos. Lisboa, 1828. VOIi. III. 6 K 496 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBBARY. Dantas (J. M. Pereira) Observ. sobre a Geograpb. Polit. de Portug. de M. Bory de S. Vincent. Lisb. fol. 1827. Da Ponte (L.) Review of his Memoirs, from the Antologia Flor. N. York, 1829. Darby (Wm) Hist. Geog. &. Stat. View of U. S. Phil. 12mo, 1828. Darlington (W. — M.D.) Florula Cetrica, Cat. Phaenag. Plants near W. Chester, Penn. 1826. Davis (Jno.) New Engl. Mem. by N. Morton, with Notes by J. D. Bost. 1826. De Kay CJ. — M.D.) Anniv. Address, on the Prog, of Nat. Sci. in U. S. Lyceum. N~. York, 1826. Desilver (Rob.) Addresses & Messages, &c. of the Presid. of U. S. to Congress. Phil. 1825. Mem. on Apuncturation, by Morand & Cloquet, transl. by F. Bache, M.D. Phil. 1825. Dewees (W. P. — M.D.) A Treatise on the Phys. & Med. Treatment of Children. Phil. 1825. Dewit (Simeon) His Map of State N. York. 1805. Dunbar (J. R. W.) Essay on the Structure, &c. of the Nervous System (Inaug.) Phil. 1828. Duncan (Stephen) Reportof Canal Commis. of Penn. Jan. 1828. Harrisb. vol. 1. Message of the Gov. of Penn. with Report of Canal Commiss. Dec. 1828. Report of Commiss. on Penal Code, with Documents. 1828. Du Ponceau (P. S.) Remarks on Changes proposed in Harvard Univ. Camb. 1825. Remarks on Greek Gram, by J. Pickering. Bost. 1826. Constitution of the William Penn Soc. Phil. 1824. Analyse d'un Entretien sur la Conservation des Loix et des Usages, &c. du Bas Canada. Montreal 1826. Essay on the Jurid. Hist, of France as far as relates to Lower Canada, by Ch. Just. J. Sewell. Quebec 1824. — — Expose de la Classif. des Sci. Synthetiquement, par H- Torombert. Paris, 1821. Sur Le Naufrage de la Freg. Meduse, par Savigny et Concard. Paris, 1816. Rech. Statist, sur la Ville de Paris, &c. faites par ordre du Prefet, 4to» Paris, 1826. Elem. de la Gram. Japonaise, par Rodriguez ; trad, par Landresse ; Introd. par Abel Remusat. Paris, 1825. Diet. Fran?. — WolofF, et Frang. Bambara, par J. M. Dard. Paris, 1825. Instit. de Gains trouves a Verone, tr. en Frang, par J. R. E. Bould, 1827. Mem. Courone en faveur de la Liberie des Cultes, par A. Vinet. Paris, 1826. The Christ. Doctr. in Italian, Arabic, and Ethiopic. Publ. by the Con- greg. De Propag. Fide. Rome, 1826. Voyage dans les Etat Unis, 1795, 7, par R. de Liancourt, 7 vols. Paris, an. 7. Compte des Trav. de la Soc. Roy. des Antiq. pour 1826, 7, par F. Drojat. Paris. Idem de la Soc. Asiatique pend. 1827. — Journ. de Mai, 1828. Lect. faites dans la Seance Publ. Ann. de I'lnst. R. de France. 1829. Alman. du Commerce, par la Tynna. Paris, 1811. — Alm.Irap. 1809,1311. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 497 Du Ponceau (P. S.) Collect, of Lord's Protests, G. B. from Henry III. to 1767, 2 vols 8vo. London. Scobell's Acts of Pari. 1640 — 1656, contin. from Pulton's Ed. London, 1785. Debates in the H. of Lds. G. B. 1660—1743, to follow Chandler's Hist. of the Comm. 8 vols. 1742, 3. London. Sketches of Algiers, Pol. Hist. &c. by W. Shaler. Boston, 1826. Comment, on Common Law, by J. Kent, vol. 1. New York, 1826. Complete Authent. Collect, of the Laws of Maryland, by Wm. Parks. An. 1827. Life and Writings of Wm. Pinckney of Bait, by H.Wheaton. Phil. 1826. A Table of the Ind. Nations, E. of the Stony Mount, arranged by Lan- guages and Dialects, by A. Gallatin. 1826. Circular of Jas. Barbour, Sec. at War, U. S. to the Milit. Ind. Stations, to obtain Ind. Vocabul. on an uniform plan. 1826. A Choctaw Vocabulary. (MS.) A Collect, of Pamphlets relat. to Elias Hicks, and the division in the Soc. of Friends. Humours of Eutopia, 18mo, 2 vols. Phil. Also, the following Literary Journals. N. York Month. Mag. and Am. Rev. 3 vols. 1789—91. Amer. Rev. and Lit. Journ. 2 vols. 1801,2. Atlant. Mag. 2 vols, 1824, 6.— Academician, 1819. — Mediateur, 1814. Phil. Am. Month. Mag. 1824—5. Abeille Americ. 6 vols 1815—18. Cambr. (Mass.) Gen. Repos. and Review. 1812, 1813. Lit. Mag. and Am. Regist. 8 vols. 1823 — 8. Eberle (J.— M.D.) Notes on the Theo. and Pract. of Medicine, 12mo. Phil. 1827. Elliot, Southern Review, No. 1 to 9. Chariest. 1828, 9, 8vo. Ely (E. S.) Min. of Assemb. of Presbyt. Church in U. S. 1828, 9, Phil. 8vo. Emerson (G.— M.D.) Medical Statistics.— Tables of the Mortality of Phil, and its Causes. 1827. Erwing (G.W.) Alphab. of the Prim. Lang, of Spain, with Examin. of the Basque Lang. Boston, 1829. Everett (Alex.) America, or Survey of the Pol. Situ, of the Powers of the Wes- tern Continent. Phil. 1827". Everett (Edw.) Speeches in H. R. on Amend, to the Constit. of U. S. and on the subject of Retrenchment. 1828. Remarks on the Bill for Relief of Revol. Officers. — Claims of Am. Citiz. on France, Holland, and Naples. — Address at Chariest. (Mass.) commem. of Jefferson and Adams. — Oration at Concord, 19th April 1825. — 60th Anniver. 1826. French (B. F.) Remains of Japhet. On the Affinity and Origin of Europ. Lan. by J. Parsons. Lond. 1767. Finley (A.) A Diet, of Quotat. in Anc. and Mod. Lan. 5th ed. Phil. 1828. Fischer (G. W.) Prog, de la SdancePubl. de La Soc. Imp. de Nat. a Moscow, 4to, Dec. 1828. Idem — Pour 1825, avec Notice de la Choristite Coq. Foss. du Gouv. de Moscow, 4to. Idem— 1826, Not. Sur les Veget. Foss. Fisher (J. D.) Descript. of the Nat. and In. Small Pox, Varioloid, Cow &. Chicken Pox, with Plates, 4to. Bost. 1829. 498 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Folsom (C.) Scelta di Prose Italiane. Camb. (Mass.) 1828. Catal. of the Fratern. of the Phi Beta Kappa of Mass. Camb. 1826. Frost (J.) A General. Reg. of the first Settlers of N. Eng. Alphab. Arranged by John Farmer. Lane. Mass. 1829. Furness (Rev. W. H.) Various Books of Script. Tr. into Chinese, by Morrison and Milne, 21 vols 12mo. — Comment on Lord's Prayer, by Milne. On the One God, by Morrison, in Chinese. Graberg de Hemso. Precis de la Lit. Hist, du Moghrib-el-aksa. Lyon, 1820. Theorie de la Statist. Gener. 1821. — Sur la Peste de Tanger, 4to. 1826. Also an Ital. Tr. of same Works. Gallaudet. (T. H.) Reports, &,c. of Connecticut Assyl. for Deaf and Dumb, 1817 to 1829. Gamard. See Quoy. Green (J.— M.D.) Electro-Magnetism. Phil. 1827. Astronomical Recreations. Phil. 4to, 1824. Gilpin (BLD.) Ann. Disc, before Acad. Fine Arts. Phil. 29th Nov. 1826. A Sketch of the Life of Thos. Jefferson. Phil. 1826. Giraldes (J. P. C.) Trat. Comp. de Cosmog. Geog. Hist. &c. Ant. e Mod. 4 vols 4to. 1825— 8, Paris. Comp. de Geog. Hist. Ant. e Mod. 4to. Paris, 1826. Statist. Map Madeira, 1450— 1806.— Tabl. des Colonies Angl. 1808. Stat, of Portugal, 1826. — Mapa. Geo. Hydrog. Hist, e Mercantil do Mundo. Godman (J. D.) American Nat. History, vol. .3. Phil. 1826. Addresses on various Pub. Occas. Phil. 1829, 8vo. Gordon (Thos.) Authentic State Map of Jersey, H. S. Tanner, Engr. 1828. Gordon (T. F.) Hist. Digest of the Laws of U. S. with Decisions on Const. Questions and Notes. Phil. 1827, 8vo. His History of Penn. from its Discov. to the Indep. of U. S. in 1776. Phil. 1824, 8vo. Hall (Jno.) Familiar Letters of Milton, transl. from Latin. Phil. 1829, 8vo. Hammer (J. Von) Jarbucher der Litteratur. 1827, Wien. De Rebus Iturasor. ad Luc. HL auct. F. Munter. Hafn. 4to, 1824. Narratio de Lucio Prim. Episc. Roman. 1823. Idee Elem. intorno ai fenomeni della Vita Anim. da P. Molossi. Milan, 1 825. Of the following the Donor is the Author. Geschichte des Osmanischen Reiches, by the Donor, 1300 a 1656, 5 vols. Pest, 1827—1829. Lettere su i Manosc Orient, nelle diverse Bibli. d'ltalia. Milan, 1826. Notizia di diciotto codici Persiani della Biblio. della Reg. Univ. Torino. 1825. Sur les Orig. Russes— Extrait des MSS. Orient. (Ed. by M. Frffihn). St Petersb. 1827. Reponse a la Lettre de Tutundju-Oglou. 1828. Comment, de Byzant. Hist, ultimis Scriptoribus. Eclairciss. sur des faits contestes de 1' Hist, des Arabes. Wien's erste aufgehobene Tiirkische Belagerung. Hare (Rob. — M.D.) Engrav. & Descr. of Appar. used in his Chera. Course in the Med. Depart, of Univ. Penn. part 1, 2. Phil. 8vo, 1826. Compend. of his Course. Phil. 1828, 8vo. Harlan (R.— M.D.) Descr. of an Hermoph. Ourang-Outang lately alive in Phil. Nov. 1826. DONATIONS FOn THE LIBRARY. 499 Hammer (J. von) Joseph und Suleicha aus dem Persischen von M. A. Dschami, ubersetzt, von V. E. V. Rosenzweig Wien, 1829, fol. Harlan (R.— M. D.) Am. Herpetology or Genera of the N. Am. Reptilia, with a Synopsis of the Species. Phil. 1827. Harris (A.) The Alphabet of Thought.— Elem. of Metaph. Harrisb. 1825. Hassler (F. R.) Elements of Analytic Trigonometry, Plane & Spher. N. York. 1826, 8vo. = ji f , A Popular Expos, of the Syst. of the Universe, 8vo ; with plates & tables, 4to. N. York, 1828. Elements of the Geom. of Planes and Solids. Richmond, (Virg.) 1828, 8vo. Hawkes (P.) Am. Companion, or Brief Sketch of Geog. Climate, &;c. and Dis- tance from Washington City. Phil. 1827, 8vo. Hayward (J.) Rep. of Direct, of Internal Improvements of Massach. on the Practicab. of Rail Roads from Boston to the Hudson, by L. Baldwin— from Boston to Provid. by J. Heyward. 1829, 8vo. Hazard (Sam.) Register of Pennsylv. 1828, 9, 4 vols, 8vo. Holgate (Jacob) Rep. of Maryl. Com. on a proposed Canal— Bait, to Conewago. Hopkinson (Jos.) Lett, al Prof. G. Gazzeri intorno alta direzione def^li Aerostate. 1828, 8vo. Home (T. H.) Cat. of the Lib. of Queen's Coll. Univ. Camb. (G. B.) 1801, 2 vols, 8vo. Hosack (D.— M.D.) Inaug. Dis. on opening Rutgers Med. College. N. York. Mem. of De W. Clinton, with Documents, 4to. N. York, 1829. Hudson (Edw.) Henry Pelham's Map of Boston and Environs, taken by permis- sion of Brit. Command. 1775,6. Deposited. Hughes (Rev. J.) Sermon on the Emancip. of the Cath. in G. B. &, I. Phil 1829. Hughs (Mary) The Life of William Penn. Phil. 1828. Humboldt (Guil. Baron) Lett, a Abel Remusat sur lea Formes Gramm. & sur le Genie de la L. Chinoise, 8vo. Paris, 1827. Tableau de la Nat. ou Descr. Phys. et Mechan. 2d ed. Blois, 1829. Janeway (Rev. Dr) Digest of Records of the Gen. Assemb. of Presb. Church in U. S. from 1788 to 1820. Phil. Jomard (M.) Rem. sur les Decouv. Geogr. dans I'Afrique Centrale, &,c. Lu aux 4 Acad, de I'lnst. 4to. Paris, 1827. Extrait d'un Mem. " Si la Lithog. peut remplacer la Grav. sur cuivre dans les Cartes Geogr." Lettre a M. A. Remusat sur une nouv. mesure de Coudee trouvee en Egypte par Drovetti. 1827. Rem. Geogr. sur le Cours du Senegal & de la Gambia. Descr. de la Ville et Envir. du Kaire— avec rEsplic. des Plans de la Ville. Paris, fol. 1829. Obs. sur le Cours du Dhioliba ou Niger. Paris, 1829. Jones (T. P.) Regulations and List of Post Offices in U. S. Wash. 1828. JuUien (M. A.) La France en 1825, en vers. Paris, 2d ed. Obs. sur la Revol. Commerciale qui se prepare en France. Paris, 1829. Johnston (W. R.) Introd. Address to a Course of Lect. on Mech. in Frankhn Instit. Phil. 1829. VOL. Ill, 6 L 500 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Johnston (W. R.) Introd. to the Greek Lang, with a Key. Boston, 1829. First Les. of Pract. Geora. transl. from Gautier. Phil. 1829. Kay (Jas. Jun.) Turner's Elem. of Chain. 2d Am. ed. Phil. 1829. Klaproth (J.) Vocab. et Gram, de la Lang. Georgienne, Ire Part. Paris, 1825. Lett, sur la Decouv. des Hierogl. Acrolog. Paris, 1827. Tabl. Hist. Geog. et Pol. du Caucase, &c. entre la Russie et la Perse. Paris, 1827. Mem. sur I'lntrod. &c. des Caract. Chinois au Japon, suivi d'un Vocab. Coreen. Paris, 1829. Keating (W. H.) Reales Ordenanzas pura la direccion dela Mineria deN. Espan. Madr. fol. 1783. Kirchhoff (J. R. L.) Mem. sur les Colonies de Brienfais. de Frederiks — Ord, &,c. dans les Pays Bas. Brux. 1827. Lambert (W.) Suppl. Rep. to Cong, of Astr. Obs. to fix Long, of Wash. City. 1826, 8vo. Lanjuinais (le Cte.) Disc, contre le retabl. des privil. d'ainesse, &c. Paris, 1826. Les Jesuites en Miniat. Obs. sur I'ouvr. de M. de Pradt. Paris, 1826. Lascaris (Marq. de) Lett, al B. Vernazza, suUi Cappelli di Paglia di Tosc. Turin, 1819. Baggionamento intorn. alia Litografia ed ai Vantag. che puo recare all Agric. &c. Tor. 1820. Calend. Georg. della R. Soc. Agr. di Torino. 1824. Laurence (Wm.) Treat, on Ruptures, 4lh ed. London, 1824. Dislocat. of the Verteb. 1827. — Intr. Lect. to a Course of Surg. 1826. Corrected Rep. of his Speeches to R. Coll. Surgeons. 1826. La Roche (R. — M.D.) Diet, de la Langue Fran§. anc. et mod. par P. Richelet, ed. d'Aubert. Lyon, 1759, 3 vols fol. Orat. before Phil. Med. Soc. 1827. Vorstellungen Allerley Thiere mit ihren Gerippen, &c. Von J. D. Meyers. Nuromb. 1752, fol. 2 vol. Hortus Cystetensis. Auct. Basilio Besler. Nijremb. 1613, fol. Voy. Mineral, et Geolog. en Hongrie, 1818, par F. S. Beudant, 3 vols 4to. avec Atlas. Paris, 1822. Lea (L) Synopsis Method. Quadrup. Oviparum. (Table framed). A Collection of Legal and Pol. Pamphlets, 1818 to 1820. Lee (R. H.) MSS. of B. Franklin — account of a Conversat. between him as Mass. Agent, and Lord Hillsborough. 1771. Leonard (Jas.) The Picture of Quakerism, by Fr. Bugg. Lond. 1697. Lesore (M.) La Relieure, Poeme Didactique. Paris, 1827. Leiber (F.) Wigglesworth (E.) Encycl. Amer. from the Germ. Convers. Lex. with a Copious Am. Biog. vol. 1, 2. Phil. 1829 — 1830. Levasseur (M.) La Revflc Amer. July 1826 to June 1827, 3 vols. Paris. Lewis (Enoch) African Observer, vol. 1. Phil. 1827, 8. Lillers (le Comte) Calliope ou Traitc sur la Prononc. de la Lang. Grecque, par C. L. Mynas. Paris, 1825. Orthophonie Grecque ou Traite de Taccent, &c. avec les diff. entre le Grec. Anc. et Vulg. par le Meme. Paris, 8vo, 1824. Lisboa (L da S.) Constit. Moral e deveres de cidadao conforme o Espirito da Const, do Imperio. Rio. de Jan. 1824 — 5. Livingston (Edward) Code of Reform and Prison Discip. being 3d part of Syst. for Louisiana. N. Orl. 1826, fol. — with Introduct. Rep. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 501 Livingston (Edward) Code of Proced. for giving effect to the Penal Code of Louis. N. O. 1825,— with Introd. Report. Long (S. H.) Improvem. on the Loco-Mot. Eng. for transf. Carriages from one level to another. Phi). 1826. His Report on Survey of proposed route of a Nat. Road from Washington to Buffalo. Wash. 1827. Lorich (Severin) N'otas ad dissert. H. Grotii de Orig. Gentium Americanarum. Auct. J. de Laet. Amst. 1643. 12mo. Rudberg (F.) Forslag till en forbattrad Reflex-Goniometer. 1827. Rudberg sur la Dispersion de la Lumiere. Lovell (Jos.— M.D.) Meteor. Reg. for 1822—5, by Surgeons in Army U. S. at the Milit. Stations, prepared by J. L. Wash. 1826, 4to. Macneven (W. J. — M.D.) Introd. Disc, to Lect. on the application of Chem. to Agric. N. York, 1825. Madison (Jas.) Report of a Commit, appointed by the Legislature of Virginia in 1776 and a revised Code of Laws for that State. Richra. 1784, fol. Marbois (Marquis de) Obs. sur la Deportation des Formats liberes. Paris, 1828, 4to. Hist, de la Louisiane, et de la cession par la France aux Etats Unis. Paris, 1829. Marcoz (J. B. P.) Critique sur I'Astron. Solaire d'Hipparque. Paris, 1828. Marsden (Wm) His Hist, of Sumatra, 3d ed. London, 1811, 4to. His Diet. &, Gram, of the Malay Lang. Lond. 1812, 4to. His Ed. (with Notes) of the Travels of Marco Polo. Lond. 1713, 4to. Numismata Orientalia illustrat. from his Coll. of Coins, 4to, 1823 — 5. Cat. of MSS. and Books collected by him for the study of Orient. Literat. Lond. 1827, 4to. Martinus (L.) Elem. Physiol, ad usum prfclect. Acad. vol. 1. Turini, 1827. Mease (Jas. — M.D.) True and Impart. State of the Prov. of Pennsylv. being a Reply to " A Brief State and a Brief View." Lond. 1759. Declar. of Indep. of U. S. printed on Parchm. Attested by the autogr. Sign, of Chas. Thompson. Phil. 1776. Meigs (C. D. — M.D.) Boetius de Consolatione Philos. etc. cum comme. Lugdun, 1490, 4to. Several U. S. Doc. for 1826. Dr Wood's Oration before Med. Soc. 1824. Dr Mitchel's Orat. for 1025.— His own for 1829. Da Tori wi Massa en Hclfinian Jesus Christus. — The Evangelists in the Lang, of the Negroes of the Danish W. I. Isl. Eusebii Hieronymi Cassiodori Cronicon, ab Initio Mundi ad an. 1512. Basil, 1529, fol. Mercer (C. F.) Proceedings of Conven. in Wash. City, on Chesapeake & Ohio Canals, Nov. 1823, Dec. 1826. Wash. 1827. Report of Sec. at War and Board of Engineers. Wash. 1826. Meredith (W. M) 1st and 2d Report of Canal Commiss. of Penn. with Docu- ments. Harrisb. 1827. Michaux (F. A.) Not. Biog. sur A. Thouin, par A. F. Sylvestre. Paris, 1825. Mills (Rob.) Atlas of the State of S. Carolina, or Maps of all the Counties. Sur- veyed 1820—5. AGeo.Stat. &- Hist. Map of the State, by Auth. of the Atlas. 1820— 6, fol. 502 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Miller (C. S.) His Digest of the Ordin. 6f the City of Philad. with Acts of Assem- bly, &c. By authority of the Councils. Phil. 1828, 8vo. Mitchell (S. A.) American Entomology, vol. 2, 3, by Tho. Say, 1825-8. Mitchell, (S. L. — M.D.) A Collect, of his Dis. and Addresses, with an Ace. of some of the Remark. Events of his Life. 1828. Morton (S. G.— M.D.) Tentaraen Inaug. da Corporis dolore. Edinb. 1823. Rep. of the Trans, of the Acad, of Nat. Sci. 1825—8. Phil. 1827—9. Essays on the Geol. and Org. Remains of a part of the Atlantic Front, of U. S. Phil. 1829. Descr. of two new Foss. Shells. — Scaphites and Crepidula. Phil. 1828. Obs. on the Geol. and Org. Remains of the Second. Tertiary and AUuv. Formations of U. S. by S. G. M. from notes of L. Vanuxem. Phil. 1828. Motley (T. M.) Report to Leg. Mass. from Board of Int. Imp. of Surveys for Rail Road from Boston to Hudson river, by L. Baldwin &, J. Hayward. 1829. Moulton (J. VV.) View of the City of New Orange (now N. York) as in 1673, with Notes. 1825—8. Hist, of the State of N. York, vol. 1, part 2, Nov. Belg. 1826. Monroe (Jas.) Mem. relative to his Unsettled Claims on the U. S. 1828. Nichols (F.) Rev. S. Vince's Principles of Fluxions. Camb. (G. B.) 1 805, 3d ed. Phil, and Math. Repos. No. 1 to 4, by J. W. Marrat. Lond. 1825. Principles of Mor. Philos. Investigated by T. Gisborne. Lond. 1798. Elements of Gen. Hist. Anc. and Mod. by A. F. Tytler. Phil. ed. 1813. Niles (H. & Son) Weekly Register, vol. 27 to 36. Bait. 1825—1829. Oliveira (A. R. V. de) Mem. sobre o Melhoramento da Provinc. de S. Paulo, &c. Riode Jan. 1822. Ord (Geo.) Suppl. to Am. Ornitholoffv, with a Biog. of the Author, A. Wilson, and Hist, of Birds, intended for 9th vol. Phil. fol. 1825. Wilson's Ornithol. vol. 7, 8, revised by him. Latin Diet, of R. Ainsworth, fol. 2 vols, 4th ed. Lond. 1752. Deposited. Oersted (J. C.) Exper. circa effectual conflictus electrici in acum Magnetic. Hafn. 4 to. Patterson (R. M.) Ann. des Math, pures et appliqu^es (par Gergonne), vol. 15, Nos. 10 to 12. Paris, 1825. W. Strickland's Reports on Canals, Railways, &.C. made to the Penns. Soc. for Intern. Improvements, with Plates. Phil. fol. 1826. Pedersen (P.) Bishop Miinter's Primordia Ecclesise Africans. Hafn. 1829. Relig. der Karthager, 1821. — Relig. der Babylonier, 1827. By Bishop Miinter. Kopen. 4to. Der Tempel der Himmlischen Gottin zu Paphos. By the same. Kopen. 1824, 4to. Der Stern der Weisen. Untersuchungen iiber das Geburtsjahr Christi. By the same, 1827. Die Christin im Heidnischen Hause. By the same. 1828. Eph. of the Dist. of Venus, Mars, Jup. and Saturn, from the Moon's cen- tre, from 1827 to 1831, with Table for finding Lat. by the Pole Star. By H. C. Schumacher. Kopenhagen. Rapports au Roi des progres de I'enseignment mutuelen Danemarck. Par M. d'Abrahamson. Paradisar Missir. — Translation of Milton's Paradise Lost into Icelandic. By J. Thorlomson. Cop. 1828. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 503 Pierpont (J.) The National Reader, for the use of Schools. Boston, 1828. i-ickering (J.) Vocab. of the Massachusetts Indian Lang, by J. Cotton. Camb. (Mass.) 1829. Poinsett (JR.) Gram, del Idioma Tarahuraar, par F. M. Tellechea. Mexico, 1826, 8vo. "^.F?"®^''"" °^ Documents and Pamphlets relative to Guatimala, Mexico, t^hih, Columbia, Panama, and Cuba. Memoirs of Augustin de Iturbide, written by himself Lond. 1824. Constit. Polit. de la Monarquia Espanola. Hav. 1820. Descr. de las dos Piedras-Calendarios de Mexico, par A. de Leon y Gama. Mex. 1792. ' Guias de Forasteros para Buenos Ayres, 1803, para Cuba, 1822. Collecc. de las Antiq. Mexic. Lithog. Nos. 1, 2, nor F. Waldeck, fol. Mex. 1827. Pinheiro (J. F F.) Annates da Capitania de S. Pedro, vol. 1, Rio Jan. 1819: vol. 2, Lisb. 1822, received from the Baron de Cayra Pomeroy (B. W.) Biog. of the Signers of the Declar. of Independ. vol. 6, 7, 8, 9. Phil. 1825—1827. ' » ' Porter (Jacob) Tr. of Labarraque, Instr. and Obs. on the Use of the Chlorides of soda and Lime. New Haven, 1829. Powers (G.) Superintend. Account of N. York St. Prison at Auburn. 1826. Quadrado (R de P.) Mem. Hist, sobre la Marina, Comm. y Artes de Barcelona. Por Don Ant. de Campomanes y Monpalau, 4 vols. 4to. Madrid, 1779 Quoi et Gamard. Rem. sur les Oiseaux de Rio Janeiro, Oiseaux Pela-riens, at autres objets d'Hist. Nat. Paris, 1825. " Rafinesque. Anc. Hist, or Annals of Kentucky, with Tab. View of Ind. Lane. Frankfort, 1824. ^ Rafn (C. C.) His Ed. of " Krakumal sive Epicedium Regnaris Lodbroci Reg. Danias— Dan. Lat. French. Copenh. 1826. Hoveberetning fra det Kong. Nordiske Oldskrift-Selskab. for Yarene 1825, 6, 7. Scripta Hist. Icelandorum vet. boreal. Lat. reddita, 2 vols. Hafn. 1828. Jomsvikinga Saga (Icelandic and Dan.) from old MSS. parchments in Roy Lib. Stockholm, with a Fac Simile. Copenh. 1824. Hermod det Nordeske Oldskrift-Selskabs Tidende. 1825, 1 a 4. Sampyktir bins norrajna fornfraeda felags. Kioben. 1825.' Ora den Indbyrdes underviisnings Voesen og Va;rd, 3 vols, by J. Abraham- son and P. H. Munster. Kob. 1822. Reports to the King on the Progress of Mutual Instruction in Denmark, (Danish; 1824, 5, G ; Abstracts 1827, 8, 9, by J. Abrahamson, Haandbog for under Officer Skolerne, with a vol. of plates, by the same Kiob. 1821. Rask (R ) Vejledning til akra Sproget paa Kysten ginea med. og TAlms om Akvambuisk. Kiob. 1828. Ralston (R.) 25th Report of the Brit, and For. Bible Soc. Lond. 1829. Reed (J.) Geschiedenis van Engelandt, Schotlandt en lerlandt, transl. from the French of De Larrey, by Schuer, 4 vols, fol. Amst. 1728 1730. Remusat (Abel) Melanges Asiatiques, 2 vols. Paris, 1825 6 Rzevusky (Count) through J. Von Hammer, (which completes our set) Mines d'Orient, vols I, 2, 3, fol. Wien. 1809— 1813. VOL. III. 6 M 504 DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. Renshaw (R.) Rabdologise seu numerationis per virgulas, auct. J. Nepero, 24mo. Edinb. 1617. Geog. rectified, or Descript. of the World, by Robert Morden, 4to, 3d ed. Lend. 1693. Remonst. against Ship Money Tax 1636, 2d ed. with Rem. on Power of Parliam. by W. Prinne. Lend. 1643. Rifaud (M.) Rap. fails par les Acad, et Savans de France sur les Ouvrages et Collect. Rapportees de I'Egypte et de la Nubie — Lettre a la Soc. Asiatique. Paris, 1829. Rivinus (E. F.) Atlantis. Journal concern. N. and S. Am. in German ; No. 1 to 6. Leipzig, 1826. Robertson (G.) Clerical Guide, Regist. of Dign. and Benef. of Church of Engl. with List of Patrons, &c. by^R. Gilbert, 3d ed. Lond. 1829. Liber Scolasticus. Fellows, and Scholars, of Univ. of Oxford, Camb. and Schools and Colleges in Connection. Lond. 1829. Rush (R.) His Letter, with Inform, on Growth of Silk, &c. to H. of Rep. U. S. J. Mease's Transl. of De Hazzi's Treatise on same subject. Wash. 1828. Sparks (J.) Sum. View of Am. on a Tour through U. S. by an Englishman. Lond. 1B24. His Life of John Ledyard, the Am. Traveller. Camb. (Mass.) 1828. Staples (Sami.) Gram. Compl. dela Ling. Ingl. para usodelos Espan. Phil. 1826. Say (Tho.) Collection of his Tracts, from Journ. of Acad, of Nat. Sci. Santarem (Vise.) Mem. para a Hist, e Theor. das Cortes geraes em Portugal. Lisb. 1827, 4to. Noticia dos MSS. na Bibl. Real de Paris pertecientes ao direito Pub. Diplo. de Portug. Lisb. 1827. Anal. Hist, numism. de liuma Medalha de Giro do Imp. Honorio, 1818, 12mo. Mem. Chron. dos Alcaldes mores da Villa de Santarem. Lisb. 1825. Saxe Weimar (B. Duke of) Reise durch Nord-Amerika in den Jahren 1825, 6, 2 vols. Weimar, 1828. Sagra (Don R. de la) Ann. de Cienc. Agr. Com. y Artes. Hab. 1827, 8, 2 vols. Sergeant (J.) Hazzi, Treat, on the Culture of Silk in Germany, transl. by Jas. Mease. Wash. 1828. His Disc, before Trustees of Rutgers Coll. N. Bruns. (N. J.) 1829. Sewell (J.) Ch. Just, of Low. Canada, Ess. on the Jurid. Hist, of France as far as relates to the Law in L. Canada. Queb. 1824. Smith (J. W.) Facts and Argum. for Railways instead of Canals in Penn. 3d ed. 1825. Smith (Rob.) Engl. Polit. Pamph. relat. to Am. 1764 to 1776. Smith (S. H.) Mem. on the Life, Char, and Writ, of T. Jefferson. Wash. 1827. Smith (Chas.) Tabulae Motuum Solis et Lunas, &c. auct. Tob. Mayer, with MS. Notes, by Rev. W. Smith, 4to. Lond. 1770. Schroeder (J. F.) Anniv. Disc. bef. Hortic. Soc. N. Y. 1828. Address on opening the N. Edif. of the N. York Dispensary. 1830. Scrope (G. P.) Consid. on Volcanoes, leading to a New Theo. of the Earth. Lond. 1825, 8vo. Stockier (F. de B.) Seus Obras, 2 vols. Lisb. 1826. Method. Inverso dos limites, &c. 4to. 1824. Short (Wm) Tresor des Origines et Diet. Gram, raisonne de la Lang. Fran?, par C. Pougens. Specimen, 4to. Paris, 1819. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 505 Short (C. W.— M.D.) The Transylv. Journ. of Med. and Assoc. Sciences. Lex. (Kent.) Vol. 1, 2, & 3 Nos. 1828— ] 830. A. Wood's Inaug. Diss, as Pres. Transyl. Univ. 1828. Thatcher (J.— M.D.) Am. Biog. Hist, of JMed. Sci. in U. S. 2 vols. Bost. 1828, 8vo. Tanner (H. S.) His Map of U. S. of Mexico. 1825. View of Florida, Geog. Topog. and with a Plan of Pensacola, by J. Lee Williams. Phil. 1827. Mellish (J.) State Map. of Pennsylv. compiled from County Surveys. 1825. The Stranger's Guide for Philad. and Environs, with Map. Phil. 1828. His Map of U. S. with a Memoir on the recent Surveys ; and Obs. on Intern. Improvem. of U. S. 1829. Plan of Philad. compiled by W. Allen, eng. by H. & S. T. 1830. Tappan (Eng.) Fac Sim. of Declar. of Indep. in Hand Writing of T. Jeiferson, with the Alterations of Adams and Franklin. Phil. 1830. Texier (de la Pomeraye) Lecteur Franj. pour les Etudians. Phil. 1826. Tiarks (D.) New Applic. of the Method of determ. the Time by Obs. of 2 Stars, when in the same Vertical, tfec. Lond. 1827. On Mr Dolby's Method of finding differ, of Long. Lond. 1828. Tidyman (P. — M.D.) Pope's Transl. of Homer's Iliad, 6 vols. Lond. 179i. Dryden's Poet. Transl. of Virgil, 4 vols, 12mo. 1782. Hist, of Exped. of Napol. Buonaparte to Russia, by P. C. K. deSegur, 1812- transl. Phil. 1825. Pamphlets relative to Black Popul. in Carolina. 1822 — 4. Gordon's Transl. of Tacitus, with Polit. Disc, on that Author, 5 vols. 1753. Las Casas' Journal of the Life of Buonaparte in St Helena, 8 vols. Phil. 1823. Comment. Inaug. de Oryza Sativa, 4to. Gottenb. 1800. Mag. of Mod. Nat. Hist. vol. 3d, in Germ, by J. H. Voight. 1826. Mem. of the Life of T. B. Sheridan, by Thos. Moore. Phil. ed. 1825. Sketch of the pres. State of Com. Agric. and Manuf. Phil. 1827. Observations on Reversion of the Eyelids, by S. W. Adams. Lond. 1814. Essays Med. and Experim. by Thos. Percival. Lond. 1770. Nature and Treatm. of Gravel, Calculus, &c. by W. Rout. Lond. 1821. Med. Facts and Obs. Sequel to Lond. Med. Journal, 4 vols. 1791 — 3. Med. Recorder, 13 vols. Phil. 1818—1826. (J. Webster, Publisher.) Treatise on Indigestion, by A. P. W. Philips, 3d ed. Phil. 1827, 8vo. Memoirs of Mrs Siddons, by J. Boaden. Phil. ed. 1827, 8vo. Narrat. and Trav. in North and Cent. Africa, by D. Denham, H. Clapper- ton, and Dr Oudney. Bost. 1826. Life of Napoleon, by W. Scott, 3 vols. Phil. 1827. JLettres Provinciales de Pascal, 2 vols, 12mo. Paris, 1819. Klopstock's Messiah, 2 vols, transl. from German. Lond. 1811. M'Pherson's Ossian, 2 vols. Glasg. 1824. J. M. Gregory's Works, 4 vols. Edinb. Robertson's Hist. Scotland. 1791. Analectic Mag. 16 vols. Phil. 1813—1820. Brunoniad, Poem. Lond. 4to, 1789. Letters of Junius. Lond. 1788. Remarkson the The. of Malthus and Godwin, by A. H.Everett. Bost. 1823. Principles of Polit. Econ. by the same. Camb. 1826. Bacon's (Lord Verulam) Works, 10 vols. Lond. 1824. Tillinghast (J. L.) His Eulogy on Adams and Jefferson. Prov. (R. I.) 1826. 506 DONATIONS FOR THE lilBRARY. Thompson (W.) Appeal of Women against Men, in reply to Mills. Lond. 1 826, 8vo. Inquiry into the Principles of the Distrib. of Wealth. Lond. 1824. Thon (T. — M.D.) Entomologisches Archiv. — Icones Insect, exotic. Coleoptera. Jense, 1826. Troost (G.) Natuur Taferelen; met wetenschap. ophelderin. &c. Hag. 1808. Geol. Survey of the Environs of Philad. made for the Agr. Soc. 1826. Thornley (T.) British Almanac, 1828. Lond. Also, Companion to the Alman. Togno (J. — M.D.) Tr. of last Course of Pathol. Anat. of Bichat and his Biog. Phila. 1827. His Expts. on Endosmose and Exosmose. Phila. 1829. Torombert (H.) Principes du droit Social, oppose a J. J. Rousseau et M. Lan- juinais. 8vo. Paris, 1825. Turpin (P. F. J.) Organographie Vegetale, Observ. sur la Truffe et sur quelques Vtiget. Microscop. 4to. Paris, 1826, 7. Observ. sur quelq. Product. Marines. 1827. Thunberg (C P.) Horti Upsaliensis, plantas cultEB ab initio sasculi, 9 Inaug. Botan. Dissert. 1826. Turner (G.) Symmes's Theory of Concentric Spheres, and that the earth is hollow. Cincin. 1826. Tyson (J. R.) Essay on Penal Law of Pennsylvania. Phila. 1827. Vance (D. H.) His Map of U. States. A. Finley, Publisher. 1825. Van Rensselaer (J. V.) Lect. on Geol. delivered in N. York Athen. 1825. Vaughan (John) Mem. of Am. Rev. as relates to S Carol. N. C. and Georgia. By John Drayton. 2 Vols. Charl. 1821. Statute Laws of Connect. Book 2d. 1808 to 1820. Hartf. 1826. Disc, to Commem. Landing of Wm. Penn, by J. N. Barker. Phil. 1828. Tabul. Stat. Views of U. S. of America. By Watterton and Vanzant. Wash. 4to. 1829. Vermont State Papers and Laws from 1779 to 1786. By W. S. Slade. Middl. 1823. 8vo. Am. Almanac or Repos. of Useful Knowl. Boston, 1830. — T^— Direct, of Penn. Soc. for raising Silk Worms. 1628. L'art d'elever des Vers Si Soie, tr. by Fontaneilles from Italian of Dandelot. Lyon, 1825. Also same work in the original. Milano, 1817. Lect. on the PhiloS. of the Human Mind. By T. Brown. Boston ed. 1826. 2 vols. 8vo. Descr. of the Minerals of the Leskean Museum by Karsten, tr. by Mit- chell. 2 vols. Dublin, 1798. Attempt at a System of Mineralogy by the Electr. Chem. Theory. By J. J. Berzelius. Tr. By Jn. Black. Lond. 1814. Relazione del Terremoto en Calabra e Sicilia. By Wm. Hamilton. Firenze, 1783. Antiq. Linguas Britan. Cambro Brit. By J. Davies. • New Magna Charta. Debates in both Houses of Pari, of G. B. on the Catholic Emancip. 1829. Atlas Press. Single sheet. 4 1 sq. feet of printing. — — Engelsche Spraakunst met Werkdadige oefeningen, door J. B. Hasendonk. Journal of all thd*Parl. Lds. and Com. during the reign of Elizabeth, 1768 to 1601. By Sir Simon Dewes. Lond. fol. 1682. -: La Sacro-Santa Biblia in Lingua Italiana da Math. D'Erberg. Nuremb. 1712. fol. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 507 Vaugban (John) Principles of Fluxions. 1800. — Elem. of Astron. 1804. — Elem. of Conic Sect. 1805.— Plain and Sph. Trigonom. 1810. AU by Rev. S. Vince. Camb. (G. B.) Pamphlets, collected by Franklin, 1768 to 1783, 4 vols, 4to. Authors: — Rennel, Hartley, Chalmers, Chesterfield, Watson, Condorcet, La Place, Cadet de V'au.x, Beccaria, Necker, Lamanon, Legendre, Chaulnes, Le Monnier, &,c. &,c. Voy. en Arable et autres Pays de I'Orient, by M. Niebuhr, 2 vols. En Suisse, 1780. Poems of J. Rolph. Lond. 1727— 9. Hist, of the French Revol. 1789—1814, by A. F. Mignet (tr. from French). Lond. 1826. Hist, of the Origin and Fir.'st Ten Years of the Brit, and For. Bible Soc. by John Owen. N. York ed. 1817. Europe and Am. in 1821, by Abbe de Pradt; tr. by D. D. Williams, 2 vols. 1822. Biblioth. Hist, de Portugal, por C. P. de Sousa. Lisb. 1801, 4to. Hist, de Portug. Restaurado, por L. de Menezes, vol. 1, 2, 4, 4to. Lisb. 1751. Voy- et Decouv. en Afrique, par Clapperton, Denham, Oudney, (trad, par MM. Eyries &. Delarenaudiere) avec Atlas. Paris, 1826. Greek Gram. tr. from French of MM. de Port Royal by T. Nugent. Lond. 1817. Le Guide D' Amsterdam. 1802. Geschiedenissen von Amsterdam door Jan Van Wagenaar, 13 vols, 8vo. 1760—1768. Vaderlandsche Historic van 800 tot 1745, 2 vols, 8vo, by same author. Amst. 1749—1759. Le Commerce de la Hollande, 1st and 3d vol. Amst. 1768. Bescliriving van den Nederlandschen Watersnood in Louwaand van 1820. Geschiedenis der Landing van het Engelsch-Russich leger in Noord-HoUand, &.C. in den jaare 1799, 2 vols. Haarlem, 1801. Corpus omnium Vet. Poet. Latin, cum eorumdem Italica Versione, 36 vols. 4to. Mediolani, 1731—6. Vaughan (Wm) A Gram, of (he Tahitian Dialect of the Polynesian Lang. Lond. Miss. Pres. 1823. Bechuana Spelling Book, by R. Maffet, a Missionary. Lond. 1826. Gram, and Vocab. of the Bullom Lang, by Rev. G. R. Nylander. Lond. 1814. African Lessons, in 3 Parts, Wolof and English. Lond. 1823. Notes in Defence of the Colonies, and on the Slave Popul. of British West Indies. Jamaica, 1826. Proceedings of the Geol. Astron. and Roy. Soc. of London. 1826 — 9. Report of the Soc. of Arts on Mr Tulley's Telescope. 1826. Vaux (Geo.) Acts Legis. Pennsylv. relative to Union Canal, 1825. — Reports of Managers, 1817—1826. — Docum. of Dispute with J. Baldwin, 1822. Vaux (Rob.) Reports of Direct, of Public Schools; also his correspond, with Roscoe, &c. on Prison Discipline, &c. Vidua (Count Chas.) Inscript. Antiq. in Turcico itinere Collectae. Paris, 1826. Wilson (H. II. — Sec. to As. Soc.) Select Specimens of the Hindoo Theatre, 3 vols, from the Sanscrit. Calcut. 1827. White (R. R.— Bp.) Memoirs of the Protest. Episc. Church in U. S. Phil. 1820. VOL. III. 6 N 508 DONATIONS FOK THE LIBRARY. ' Wirt (Wm) Report of the Com. of the H. of R. of the U. S. on the Pres. Mes- sage, Feb. March, 1827, 8vo. Worcester (J. E.) Remarks on American Longevity compared with Foreign Coun- tries. Boston, 4to. 1826. Wharton (T. J.) Disc, before the Penn Soc. Oct. 1826, 8vo. Report of Judges Shaler and King, Comraiss. appointed by the State of Pennsylv. on Punishm. and Prison Discipline. Phil. 2d ed. 8vo. Walker (E.) Mathematical Diary, publ. by J. Ryan, (N. Y.) vol. 1 and No 1, 2. of vol. 2. 1827— G. Walsh (Rob. Jun.) The following Official Documents, fol. Balanza ftlercantil de Habana. 1825. Mem. de Sec. delist. {Ai-rispe.,) sobre los Kegoc, Eccles. Mex. 1826. Notices Biograph. Agricultur. Medic. &c. ^■;^ Diet, sobre les Instr. que deben darse al Emb. a Roma., Mexico, 1826. Mem. que el Sec. de Est. de Columb. (Restrepo) presento al Congr. 1823. Report of Commit, of H. of C. of G. Brit, on Publ. Expend. 1809, 10. Reports of the same on the Slave Trade. — One by John Dougan. 1826. — Two by Mnjor Moody. 1825, 6. Also a number of Political and Literary Pamphlets. Warren (J. C— M.D.) Letter to Chief Justice Parker (Mass.) on the Disloc. of the Hip Joint, with Remarks on a Trial published in Maine, 1824. Camb. 1826. Warden (D. B.) Ses Recherches sur les Antiq. de I'Amer. Sept. Paris, 4to, ] 827. Chronol. Hist, de l'Am<5r. 3 vols. From 1770—1827. Par D. B. War- den.—Suite de I'Art de verifier les Dates. Paris, 1826—1828. Mem. sur la Diffraction de la Lumiere, (Couron. par I'lnst.) par A. Fresnel, 4to. Paris, 1819. Mem. sur la Double Refraction. 1822. — Consid. sur Polaris, de la Lumiere. Both by the same. 1824. Obs. sur la Methode de Civiale, par M. J. Broussard. 1825.. Sur la Population de Paris, par M. Villerme. 1821. Not. de la Trad. Fran^aise de I'Astron. Grec. de Ptolomide, par I'Abbe Halma. Paris, 1816. Notices Biographiques. Notices qui regardent I'Agriculture, la Medecine, &c. Beauregard sur la Fievre Jaune. Paris, 1826. Bulletin de la Soc. Geograph. 60 a 62, 75. Du nombre des Debts Crim. compare a I'etat de I'lnstruction. Ecole Centrale des Arts. Analys. des Trad, de I'lnstitut, par les Barons — Fourier — Cuvier. 1828. Eloge de La Place. Par Baron Fourier. Rap. a la Soc. R. des Antiq. sur la Collection des Antiq. Mex. de Icasse et Baradere. 1829. Atlas Hist, and Chron. des Let. et Sciences, &.c. d'apres la Methode de Le Sage, par A. J. de Mancy, fol. Paria, 1826. Voy. a rOasis de Thebes, «Sic. fait 1815—1818, par F. Caillaud ; publie par M. Jomard: fol. Ire livr. texte et planches. Paris, 1821. Webster (Jas.) Medical Recorder, vol. 7th to 14th. Phil. 1824 — 8. Discontinued. Wetherill (J. P.) Geol. Remarks on the Perkioming Lead Mine. Phil. 1826. Welsh (H.) G. Laporte and W. G. Franklin's Pennsylv. State Documents, to com- plete our Collection, 15 vols. DONATIONS FOR THE LIBRARY. 509 Zollikoffer (W. — M.D.) Mater. Med. of U. S. systematically arranged, 2d ed. Bait. 1827. The following Donations were too late to be included in their proper places. Bath and West of England Soc. Trans, vol. 15. Bath, 1829. Black (J.— M.D.) Enq. into the Capillary Circul. of the Blood. Lond. 1825. Barry (Rev. Mr.) Meraoire sur les Cherains de far, et les Canau.x, trad, de I'Allemand de F. A. Gerstner, par P. S. Girard. Paris, 1827. Plan and Ace. of a Rail Road of 38i M. joining the Moldau and Danube — the Black Sea with the North. Ocean. Exec. 1820 under F. A. Gerstner. Plan of Imper. Rail Road — from Budweis to Leopoldschlaf in Bohemia. Bonaparte (Chas. Luc.) Linceografo ossia le 12 Tavole delle prescrizioni dell' Acad, dei Lincei, fol. Roma, 1813. Scritto del Duca Frederico Cesi letto a delta Acad. 1826. fol. Carey (M.) Hist, des ouvrages des Sgavans, 15 vols, 12mo. Paris, 1688 — 1703. N. Test. — Psalms.^Catechism, in Low Dutch. Hague, 1637. Avant. de Telemacho trad, na lengoa Portug. 3 vols. Lisb. 1785. Colleccao de Historias, &c. trad, dos Melh. aut. Francezes, 3 vols. 1798. Du Ponceau (Peter S.) Essays on American Silk, by J. D'Homergue and Peter S. Du Ponceau. Phil. 1830. Report of the Com. on Agricult. to the H. of R. of the U. S. on Amer. Silk. The same translated into French. Rask (R.) Italiffinsk Formlasre. Koben, 1827. Den Gamle ^Egyptiske Tidsregning. Koben, 1827. Den jEklste Hebraiske Tidsregning. Koben, 1828. ^-^ Historien cm de ti Vezirer overs af Arabick. Koben, 1829, The above works all by the Donor. Franck (Maxim.) Diction. Gcogr. par Vorgien. Ed. de Goigoux. Paris, 1826. Kane (J. K.) Pantographia — all the known Alphabets, or Digest of Phonology, by E. Fry. Lond. 1799. Lieber F. & VVigglesworth E. Encycloped. Americana, vol. 3d. Phil. 1830. Long (G.) Herodotus, Summary and Index. Lond. Univ. 1829. Long (S. H.) Narrat. of the Proceedings of the Bd. of Engin. of the Bait, and Ohio Rail Road Co. Bait. 1830. 3d An. Report of said Co. 1829. Randolph (Thos. Jefferson) Memoir, Corresp. and Miscell. from the Papers of Thomas Jefferson. Ed. by T. J. R. ; 4 vols. Charlottesville, 1829. Shaler (VVm) Cuadro Estadistico de la Isla de Cuba, para 1827. Hav. 1829. DONATIONS FOR THE CABINET. Baker (J. L.) A Bust of Priestley. (A Cast.) Camac (Wm. M.) Specimens of the Basaltic Blocks of the Giant's Causeway. Chapman (N.— M.D.) Bust of La Fayette. {A Cast.) 510 DONATIONS FOR THE CABINET. Cooper (Tho. — M.D.) A Collection of Specimens of the Iron Ores of N. Jersey, made by S. G. Wright.. Dexter (A. A. — Assistant Engineer) A full Collection of Specimens of the differ- ent Fossils, Earths and Minerals developed in executing the Deep Cut of the Chesapeake and Delaware Canal, accompanied by a Memoir and a Profile of the Geological Formation of the Strata through which the Work passed to the depth of 82 Feet. Received through J. K. Kane, one of the Directors, and Sec. of the Soc. Franklin Institute, A Silver Model of their Prize Medal. Fletcher (Thomas) Bust of Washington. {A Cast.) Finlay (A.) D. H. Vance's large Map of the U. States of Am. publ. by him. 1825. Hudson (Edw.) Map of Boston and Environs, taken 1775, by H. Pelham, by permission of the Brit. Command. {Deposited.) Jackson (Sam. — M.D.) Bust of Dr Chapman. {A Cast.) Lee (Isaac) Specimens of some of the Unio Shells described by him in this Vol. Lee (Hugh — Assistant Engineer) Fossils from Deep Cut of Ches. and Del. Canal. Lee (R. H.) MS. of Franklin, when Agent in London, giving an Ace. of a Convers. with Lord Hillsborough. Lewis (William) Indian Stone Hatchet found on the Banks of Schuylkill. Lukens (Isaiah) Bell of a Clock curiously blistered by Lightning. Lyceum Nat. Hist. N. York, Cast of Part of the Jaw of " a Megatherium Cuvieri," found in N. Carol. 1824. Mease (James) Fossil Shells from Ches. and Del. Deep Cut. He has also deposited, Plans of the Line between Pennsylv. and Delaw. — Of the Line between Maryland and Delaware State. — Of the Measurement of a Degree by Mason and Dixon in Maryland. Mitchell (J. K.— M.D.) A Bust of John Quincy Adams. {A Cast.) Considerable additions have been made to our Minerals by the Liberality of C. Atwater— W. Boyd— Z. Collins— J. Fell— Mrs Griffiths— J. K. Kane— F. Learning — J. Mease — M. Rivinus — J. P. Wetherill. New York (City) Corporation, Canal Medal. Pedersen (P. — Danish Min.) Russian Coin of Platina — Specim. of Siliceous Deposit of the Grand Geyser, and of Quartz Hyalite — from Iceland. Peale (Remb.) His Lithogr. Print of Washington from his Portrait of Washington. Short ( Wm) A Marble Bust of Condorcet. MEXICAN ANTIQUITIES. Poinsett f J.) Collected by him during a residence of five years as Minister to Mexico from the U. States of Am. 200 specimens of Minerals from Mexico, embracing many very rare and rich specimens of Gold, Silver, Copper, Lead, Iron, Antimony, Mercury, Titanium and Tin Ores ; some splendid specimens of the Mexican Fire Opal — very interesting Crystallizations of Hyahne Quartz, Amethyst, Car- bonate of Lime and Selenite. 9 Figures of Stone resembling the Human Form, in various attitudes, cut in Porphyry, Verd-Antique, Lava and other rocks. ■ MEXICAN ANTIQUITIES. 511 Poinsett (J. II.) 7 iMasks of the Human Face, very beautifully worked in Alabaster, Porphyry, Verd-Antique, &c. 1 8 Masks of Pottery, representing the Human Face, of natural size, but very grotesque figures. 3 Alabaster Vases of tasteful forms and neat workmanship ; and several specimens of Jade, Porphyry, Obsidian and other rocks, carved into the forms of Toads, Lizards and other animals. A great variety of specimens of Ancient Pottery, including several hundred Heads of the Human Figure, nearly one hundred Figures entire, many Vases, Pitchers, Jars, Jugs, Plates, Cups and other domestic utensils ; Musical Instruments, representations of Ancient Mexican Temples, and other objects, the nature of which is still uncertain. A number of Beads, Rings and other toys, made of Obsidian, Copper,